JP6168638B1 - Amusement stand - Google Patents

Abstract

The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a bullet ball gaming machine (pachinko machine), an enclosed gaming machine, and a spinning machine (slot machine), and provides a gaming machine characterized by display means. A display means 208L may change a plurality of hold icons [for example, a first hold icon f1 to a fourth hold icon f4] for notifying a hold number as a display number and a mode of a hold icon. And a second effect that may change the mode of the hold icon, and the hold icon can be displayed in a plurality of modes (dot pattern, diagonal pattern, rhombus pattern, lattice pattern, vertical line pattern, (The horizontal line pattern) can be displayed, and either one of the first effect and the second effect (holding change first effect in which the ninja character NJ is displayed) is the other effect ( The display may be started during the display of the treasure chest TB and the change candidate icon HKI. [Selection] Figure 38

Description

  The present invention relates to a game table represented by a ball game machine (pachinko machine), an enclosed game machine, and a spinning machine (slot machine).

  Game consoles such as pachinko machines are equipped with obstacles that change the direction of the fall of the game ball in the game area of the game board, a winning area where the game ball can enter, a starting area, a variable winning opening, etc. Is common. When a game ball enters these, a privilege is given to the player such as paying out a prize ball (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

  Some of these game tables have display means.

JP 2008-200302 A

  However, the conventional game stand has room for improvement in display means.

  An object of the present invention is to provide a game machine having a feature in display means.

The game stand of the present invention that solves the above-described object is as follows.
A gaming machine equipped with a display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of hold icons,
It is configured to notify the number of holds by the number of hold icons displayed
The hold icon is an icon that can be displayed in multiple ways,
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of effects,
One of the plurality of effects is a first effect,
One of the plurality of effects is a second effect,
The first effect is an effect that may change the mode of the hold icon,
The second effect is an effect that may change the mode of the hold icon,
Wherein one of the effect of the first effect and the second effect is Ri effect der that may other one of the display start during the display of presentation,
Depending on the one effect that is started during the display of the other effect, the other effect that changes the status of the hold icon may change even if the mode of the hold icon does not change,
The other effect is an effect that makes it easier to change the mode of the hold icon to a mode with a high expectation of jackpot after the change than before the change.
It is characterized by that.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to realize a game machine having a feature in display means.

It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention from the front side (player side). It is the external view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention from the back side. 1 is a schematic front view of a game board 200 of a pachinko machine 100 according to an embodiment of the present invention as viewed from the front. It is a circuit block diagram of the control part of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of the present invention. It is an example of the display symbol in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention, Comprising: (a) shows an example of the stop display symbol of special figure 1, (b) shows an example of the stop display symbol of special figure 2 (C) shows an example of a decorative design, and (d) shows an example of a normal stop display design. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main control part main process of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main control part timer interruption process of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. (A) is a flowchart which shows an example of the flow of the special figure prefetch process in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of the present invention. (B)-(e) is a figure which shows an example of the prefetch result memory | storage part for special figures 1 and the special figure 2 with which the main control part 300 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention was equipped. It is a figure which shows the determination table for common use in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention, and the example of symbol distribution and the operation at the time of winning. It is a figure which shows the example of the determination table for the special figure in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the symbol distribution table for the special figure 1 in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention, and operation | movement at the time of big hit. It is a figure which shows the example of the symbol distribution table for the special figure 2 in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention, and operation | movement at the time of big hit. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the process in the 1st sub control part 400 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention, (a) shows the flow of the 1st sub control part main process, (b) is the 1st. 1 shows a flow of 1 sub-control unit command reception interrupt processing, (c) shows a flow of first sub-control unit timer interrupt processing, and (d) shows a flow of image control processing. It is a figure explaining the electric long opening effect performed by the effect control process of the main process in the 1st sub control part 400 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. (A) shows the flow of the electric long opening effect, and (b) shows an example of the electric long opening effect on the decorative symbol display device 208. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process in the 2nd sub control part 500 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention, (a) shows the flow of the 2nd sub control part main process, (b) is the 2nd. 2 shows the flow of the second sub-control unit command reception interrupt process, and (c) shows the flow of the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in Example 1 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in Example 2 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in Example 3 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in Example 4 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of production in Examples 5-7 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in Examples 7 and 8 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in Example 9 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in Example 10 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in Example 11 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in Example 12 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention in time series. It is FIG. (The 1) which shows the example of an effect in Example 13 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention in time series. It is FIG. (The 2) which shows the example of an effect in Example 13 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention in time series. It is FIG. (The 1) which shows the example of an effect in Example 14 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention in time series. It is FIG. (The 2) which shows the example of an effect in Example 14 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of production in Examples 15-17 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in Example 18 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect in the modification of Example 19 and Example 19 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in the modification of Example 19 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect in Example 20 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention, and its modification in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in Examples 21 and 22 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of production in Example 22 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows an example of a pending | holding change effect. It is a figure which shows the example in which a hold change 2nd effect is performed with a hold change 1st effect. The left half shows an example in which the hold change first effect and the hold change second effect are combined, and the right half shows an example of the hold change third effect. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in which the character BC of the head length of a reserve change 3rd effect appears. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of the right half of FIG. 40, and a figure which shows a pending | holding change 4th effect. It is a figure which shows an example of a pending | holding change 5th effect. It is a figure which shows the example in which a hold change 1st effect is performed with a hold change 5th effect. It is a figure which shows the other example in which a hold change 1st effect is performed with a hold change 5th effect. It is a figure which shows the other example of the pending | holding change 4th effect shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the example in which a hold change 5th effect is performed with a hold change 4th effect, and the example of a hold change 6th effect. It is a figure which shows the other example of a pending | holding change 6th effect. It is a figure which shows the example in which the hold change 1st effect is performed in the state in which the curtain effect is performed. It is a figure which shows the other example which combined the curtain effect and the hold change 1st effect. It is a figure which shows the example of the combination of a curtain effect and a pending | holding change effect. It is a figure which shows the other example of curtain production. It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side). It is the external view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the back side. FIG. 3 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 of the pachinko machine 100 as viewed from the front. The circuit block diagram of a control part is shown. (A) An example of the stop symbol form of the special figure is shown. (B) An example of a decorative design is shown. (C) An example of a usual stop display symbol is shown. (A) is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main control part main process, (b) is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main control part timer interruption process. (A) It is a flowchart of the main process which CPU404 of the 1st sub control part 400 performs. (B) It is a flowchart of the command reception interruption process of the 1st sub control part 400. FIG. (C) It is a flowchart of the timer interruption process of the 1st sub control part 400. FIG. (D) It is a flowchart of the image control process of the 1st sub control part 400. FIG. (A) It is a flowchart of the main process which CPU504 of the 2nd sub control part 500 performs. (B) It is a flowchart of the command reception interruption process of the 2nd sub control part 500. FIG. (C) It is a flowchart of the timer interruption process of the 2nd sub control part 500. FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of button production in steps. It is a figure for demonstrating in detail the operation means provided in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the production in which the operation means in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. It is a flowchart showing the execution timing regarding the production | presentation in which the operation means A was entangled, and the production | presentation in which the operation means B was entangled. It is a flowchart showing the execution timing regarding the production in which the operation means is involved. It is a figure which shows an example of meter production in steps. FIG. 66 is a diagram showing a continuation of an example of the meter effect shown in FIG. 65 in stages. It is a figure which shows the example which performs a meter production | presentation and makes a big hit in steps. FIG. 68 is a diagram showing the continuation of an example of the meter effect shown in FIG. 67 in a stepwise manner. FIG. 68 is a diagram showing step-by-step modified examples of effects using the change ball icon cI described with reference to FIG. 67. It is a figure for explaining in detail various kinds of meter displays. It is a figure which shows an example of the rank improvement effect which tells whether a meter display changes stepwise. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the rank improvement effect shown in FIG. 71 in steps. FIG. 73 is a diagram showing a continuation of an example of the rank-up effect shown in FIG. 72 in stages. It is a figure which shows an example of the re-lottery which may continue from FIG. 73 (41) in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the mini game which tells whether the meter display appears step by step. It is a figure which shows in steps the example in which a big hit is decided by the said fluctuation | variation when a meter display will be in a full tank state. It is a figure which shows the example in which a meter display is displayed in a holding frame in steps. It is a figure which shows in steps the example which acquires and stocks a mini item when the meter of a meter display becomes full. It is a figure which shows the example in which several items are stocked in one full tank of a meter display in steps. It is a figure which shows the example in which the meter display of a full tank state may be carried over to the next symbol fluctuation display. It is a figure which shows the example which is digested without being stocked even if an item appears when the meter display becomes full. It is a figure which shows the example in which two meter displays are displayed and both of them disappear. It is a figure which shows in steps the example in which two meter displays are displayed and only one side disappears. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 83 in steps. It is a figure which shows in steps the example which a display is started in the state which accumulated the meter display of the increase type to the middle. It is a figure which shows an example of the meter production | presentation by the meter display which shows a numerical value in steps. FIG. 87 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner an example in which the numerical meter display shown in FIG. 86 changes according to the operation of the operating means. It is a figure which shows an example of an effect different from the meter effect demonstrated so far in steps. It is a figure which shows an example in case an error generate | occur | produces during the display of a meter display in steps. FIG. 90 is a diagram showing a continuation of an example of the error display ER1 shown in FIG. 89 in a stepwise manner. It is the figure which showed the example in which an operation means display is displayed ranging over the continuous symbol fluctuation | variation display. It is the figure which showed the example in which the operation means display following FIG. 91 is displayed in steps. It is the figure which showed the example in which the operation means display following FIG. 92 is displayed in steps. It is a figure which shows in steps the example in which the 1st operation means display Od1 changes to the 2nd operation means display Od2 in the pachinko machine provided with the game board of a structure different from the structure of the game board shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the modification of the example shown in FIG. 94 in steps. It is a figure which shows in steps the example which changes from 1st operation means display Od1 to 3rd operation means display Od3, and also changes from 3rd operation means display Od3 to 2nd operation means display Od2. It is a figure which shows in steps the example which has a period when two types of operation means displays are displayed simultaneously. FIG. 97 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner an example of a modification of the example shown in FIG. 96, in which there is a period in which displays simulating operating means are simultaneously displayed. It is a figure which shows the example in which the operation means display is displayed on each of the 2nd decoration symbol display apparatus 208M and the 3rd decoration symbol display apparatus 208N in steps. It is a figure which shows an example in case an effect differs before and after the change of an operation means display in steps. It is a figure which shows an example in case an effect is the same before and after the change of an operation means display in steps. It is a figure which shows the example which operated the chance button 136 stepwise during execution of the fluctuation | variation display of the 3rd symbol pd3 performed at the timing when the holding | maintenance increased. FIG. 103 is a diagram showing an example of a case where the operation of a chance button is delayed in the example shown in FIG. 102. It is a figure which shows the example which the operation means display after the chance button 136 is operated once disappears in steps. It is a figure which shows the modification of the display method of an operation means display. 1 is a front view of a sealed pachinko machine to which the present invention is applicable. FIG. 4 is an external perspective view of a slot machine to which the present invention can be applied as viewed from the front side (player side).

  Hereinafter, a gaming machine (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine or a spinning game machine such as a slot machine) according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the figure is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side). As an external structure, the pachinko machine 100 includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a launching device 110, and a game board 200 on the front surface.

  The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation location (island facilities or the like) provided in a gaming machine installation sales shop. The main body 104 is referred to as an inner frame, and is a member that is provided inside the outer frame 102 and serves as a longitudinal rectangular gaming machine base body that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112. The main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space 114 inside. In addition, when the main body 104 is opened, an inner frame opening sensor (not shown) that detects the opening of the main body 104 is provided.

  The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104 on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 so as to be openable and closable with a lock function, and is configured in a frame shape so as to be inside thereof. Is a door member having an opening 116. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin at the opening 116, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. A game area 124 is defined by the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200. Further, a front frame door opening sensor (not shown) that detects opening of the front frame door 106 when the front frame door 106 is opened is provided.

  In addition, the front frame door 106 can store a plurality of game balls (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as “balls”) below the opening 116 and guide the game balls to the launching device 110. An upper plate 126 provided with a passage, a lower plate 128 that stores game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, and a game ball stored in the upper plate 126 by a player's operation is discharged to the lower plate 128. A ball removal button 130 to be discharged, a ball discharge lever 132 for discharging a game ball stored in the lower plate 128 by a player's operation to a game ball collecting container (common name, dollar box), and a launching device 110 by a player's operation. A ball launching handle 134 for launching the game ball guided to the game area 124 of the game board 200, and a channel for changing the effect mode of various effect devices 206 (not shown in FIG. 1) by the player's operation. A button 136, a chance button lamp 138 that causes the chance button 136 to emit light, a setting operation unit 137 that allows various settings and the like by operation of a setting person (for example, a player or a game shop clerk), and a card unit (CR unit) A ball lending operation button 140 for instructing ball lending, a return operation button 142 for instructing the card unit to return the player's balance, and a ball lending display section for displaying the player's balance and card unit status ( (Not shown). In addition, a lower plate full tank sensor (not shown) that detects that the lower plate 128 is full is provided.

  The launching device 110 is attached to the lower side of the main body 104, and a launching rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching rod 148 that strikes the game ball at the tip of the launching rod 146. .

  The setting operation unit 137 is a push button type switch that can be pressed by the setter, and a confirm (OK) button, an upper button positioned above the confirm button, a lower button positioned below the confirm button, and confirm A right button positioned to the right of the button, a left button positioned to the left of the confirm button, and a cancel (C) button positioned further to the right of the right button. The setting operation unit 137 includes an operation unit sensor that detects the pressing of each button. The setting operation unit 137 of this example has a unit structure in which buttons and operation unit sensors are integrated. At least one of the buttons of the setting operation unit 137 functions as a chance button that changes the effect mode of the various effect devices 206 (see FIG. 3) by the player's operation when a predetermined condition is satisfied. It may be.

  The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening 116 after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104.

  FIG. 2 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. The upper part of the back surface of the pachinko machine 100 has an opening that opens upward, a ball tank 150 for temporarily storing game balls, and a lower part of the ball tank 150 that is formed at the bottom of the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 for guiding a ball that has passed through the communicating hole and dropped to the dispensing device 152 located on the right side of the back surface is provided.

  The payout device 152 is formed of a cylindrical member, and includes a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown) inside. The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor. The sprocket that temporarily passes through the tank rail 154 and flows down into the payout device 152 is temporarily retained, and the payout motor is driven to rotate by a predetermined angle. Thus, the temporarily accumulated game balls are sent one by one downward to the payout device 152.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket. When the game ball is passing, either a high signal or a low signal is displayed. Either the high signal or the low signal is output to the payout controller 600 (see FIG. 4). The game ball that has passed through the payout sensor passes through a ball rail (not shown) and reaches the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100. The pachinko machine 100 has this configuration. To pay out the ball to the player.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the drawing, the main board case 158 that houses the main board 156 that constitutes the main control unit 300 that performs control processing for the entire game, and the production based on the processing information generated by the main control unit 300. The first sub-control unit 400 that performs the control process and the first sub-board 160 that houses the first sub-board 160 that includes the rotary volume control switch 161 that adjusts the volume output from the pachinko machine 100 by the operation of the game shop clerk. A second sub-board case 166 that houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the second sub-control unit 500 that performs a control process related to the production based on the processing information generated by the first sub-control unit 400; An error release switch that constitutes a payout control unit 600 that performs control processing related to payout of game balls and that releases an error by the operation of a game store clerk 68, a payout board case 172 for storing a payout board 170, a launch board case 176 for housing a launch board 174 that constitutes a launch control unit 630 for performing control processing relating to the launch of a game ball, and a power source for various electric gaming machines. And a power switch 178 that turns the power on and off by the operation of a game clerk and an RWM clear switch 180 that outputs an RWM clear signal to the main control unit 300 when the power is turned on. A power board case 184 that houses the power board 182, a CR interface unit 186 that transmits and receives signals between the dispensing control unit 600 and the card unit, and a main board for outputting information of the pachinko machine 100 to an external hall computer or the like 156, the first sub-board 160, etc. and the hall computer, etc. It is provided with a relay substrate 188, the to relay.

  The main board 156, the first sub board 160, the second sub board 164 and the like are provided on the back surface of the game board 200 because they need to be changed for each model, and the payout board 170, the launch board 174, the power board 182 and the like are provided. Since it is used in common by a plurality of models, the outer frame 102 is provided.

  FIG. 3 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front.

  The game board 200 shown in FIG. 3 is a so-called right-handed machine game board. In the game board 200, an outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are provided, and a game area 124 in which a game ball can roll is defined. In a generally known right-handed game board, by changing the strength of launching a game ball by a player's operation, a general-purpose starting port 228 and a second special-purpose starting port 232, which will be described later, 1 special drawing start port 230. Specifically, the game ball that rolls in the first area (the left side in the game area) provided with the first special figure starting port 230 is disposed on the game area 124 by arranging the game nail 238 and the like. A game ball that rolls in the second area (the right side in the game area) where the second special figure start port 232 is provided is configured such that it is difficult or impossible to enter the special view start port 232. 1 It is difficult or impossible to enter the special drawing starting port 230. The present invention is not limited to the pachinko machine 100 provided with a right-handed game board, and can be applied to a wide range of pachinko machines equipped with a general game board.

  An effect device 206 is disposed in the approximate center of the game area 124. In the effect device 206, three decorative symbol display devices are arranged side by side. That is, the first decorative symbol display device 208L disposed at the center of the three decorative symbol display devices, the second decorative symbol display device 208M disposed on the left side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the first decoration. The display is performed by the third decorative symbol display device 208N arranged on the right side of the symbol display device 208L. The first decorative symbol display device 208L may be referred to as a main display device, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be referred to as sub-display devices. The length in the width direction of 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is shorter than the half of the length of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the height is also short. However, the display screens of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are only required to be smaller than the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the length and height in the width direction are shown in FIG. It is not limited to the embodiment. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M shown in FIG. 3 has its right end side portion overlapped with the front side of the left end side portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the third decorative symbol display device shown in FIG. The left end portion of 208N overlaps the front side of the right end portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The position of the second decorative symbol display device 208M shown in FIG. 3 may be the initial position of the second decorative symbol display device 208M. Further, the position of the third decorative symbol display 208N shown in FIG. 3 may be the initial position of the third decorative symbol display device 208N. However, the initial position of the second decorative symbol display device 208M does not partially overlap with the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and is a position deviated from the first decorative symbol display device 208L (first decorative symbol display device 208L). It may be a position separated from the left side toward the left). Also, the initial position of the third decorative symbol display device 208M does not overlap with the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and is a position away from the first decorative symbol display device 208L (on the right side from the first decorative symbol display device 208L). It may be a position distant from each other. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are configured to be slidable in the direction of contacting and separating from each other along the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N can rotate integrally along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L when they are closest to each other. It is configured to be able to. The names of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are not necessarily displayed in a variable manner for each display device. However, it is added here just in case that the interpretation of the display device is not narrowed. Further, a combination of these decorative symbol display devices (first decorative symbol display device 208L, second decorative symbol display device 208M, and third decorative symbol display device 208N) is used as an effect display means, and the effect display means is a decoration symbol. It is also possible to display various fluctuations or to display a plurality of types of effects. Furthermore, there is no limitation on the number of decorative symbol display devices, and the decorative symbol display device may be a pachinko machine having only one, or may be a pachinko machine having only two. It may be a pachinko machine provided with two or more. Further, the positional relationship between the plurality of decorative symbol display devices is not limited to the positional relationship shown in FIG.

  In addition, a transparent light guide plate is arranged on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the player can visually recognize the display state of the first decorative symbol display device 208L through the light guide plate. . The light guide plate has a predetermined lens cut in the transmission region. A light emitter such as an LED is provided at an appropriate position near the side edge of the light guide plate, and light from the light emitter is reflected forward by the lens cut portion, so that the transmission region emits light in a predetermined pattern. It is configured so that it can appear to be. For example, a lens cut having a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image is applied to the light guide plate. Note that the light guide plate is configured such that the thickness of the portion of the region where light is refracted toward the player side is thinner than the thickness of light irradiation. Therefore, the display states of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be easily visible. Further, the light guide plate may be movable. Further, the light guide plate may be provided on the near side of at least one of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

  Below the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208M, a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a normal symbol hold lamp 216, and a first special symbol. A holding lamp 218, a second special symbol holding lamp 220, and a high-probability medium lamp 222 are provided. Hereinafter, the normal symbol may be referred to as “general symbol” and the special symbol may be referred to as “special symbol”. The effect device 206 will be described later.

  The three decorative symbol display devices 208 </ b> L to 208 </ b> M are display devices for performing various displays used for decorative symbols and effects, and here are configured by liquid crystal display devices (Liquid Crystal Display). The display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L can be divided into four display areas: a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, and an effect display area 208d. The area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c display different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect. Further, the positions and sizes of the display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, and 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In addition, although the liquid crystal display device is employ | adopted as the 1st decoration symbol display apparatus 208L, even if it is not a liquid crystal display device, it should just be comprised so that a various effect and various game information can be displayed, for example, a dot matrix Other display devices including a display device, a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

  The general map display device 210 is a display device for displaying a general map, and here, it is constituted by a 7-segment LED. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying a special figure, and here are configured by 7-segment LEDs. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are symbol display means. The decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is a symbol that represents the symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device 212 or the second special symbol display device 214 in an enhanced form. The first decorative symbol display device 208L is also a kind of symbol display means.

  The general figure hold lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of general figure variable games (details will be described later) that are on hold. Here, the general figure variable game is held to a predetermined number (for example, two). Is possible. The first special figure holding lamp 218 and the second special figure holding lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of special figure variable games (details will be described later) that are being held. Here, a predetermined number of special figure variable games are displayed. It is possible to hold up to (for example, four). The high-probability medium lamp 222 is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur or a high probability state, and the gaming state is changed from a low probability state in which a big hit is unlikely to occur. Turns on when switching to the probability state, and turns off when switching from the high probability state to the low probability state.

  In addition, there are predetermined ball entrances, for example, a general prize opening 226, a general start port 228, a first special view start port 230, a second special view start port 232, around the effect device 206. A central variable winning opening 234 and a right variable winning opening 235 are provided.

  A plurality of general winning ports 226 are arranged on the game board 200, and when a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning port 226 (when winning the general winning port 226). Then, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The player can freely take out the balls discharged to the upper plate 126. With these configurations, the player can pay out the winning balls to the player based on winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. In the following, a ball paid out to a player as a consideration for winning a prize may be referred to as a “prize ball”, and a ball lent out to a player may be referred to as a “lending ball”, and the “principal ball” and “lending ball” are collectively referred to as “ Sometimes called a “ball (game ball)”.

  The normal start port 228 is configured by a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed through a predetermined area of the game area 124. One is arranged. For this reason, the game start ball 228 is expected to enter a game ball by hitting it to the right. Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the usual starting port 228 is not discharged to the amusement island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that a ball has passed through the general map starting port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts a general map variable game by the general map display device 210.

  Only one first special figure starting port 230 is arranged at the center of the game board 200. The first special figure starting port 230 is a first starting region where the size of the entrance through which the game ball enters does not change. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the first special figure starting port 230, the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 2 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls is used as a prize ball. At the same time, the special figure changing game is started by the first special figure display device 212. The ball that has entered the first special figure starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. The first special figure starting port 230 is one of the starting regions, and corresponds to an example of a fixed starting region in which the size of the first special diagram starting port 230 does not change.

  Only one second special figure start port 232 is disposed below the general view start port 228. That is, the second special figure starting port 232 is provided on the right side of the game board 200, and entering the ball is expected by hitting to the right. In the vicinity of the second special figure starting port 232, a pair of blade members 2321 that can be opened and closed by a solenoid are provided. A combination of the pair of blade members 2321 and the second special figure starting port 232 is provided. It corresponds to a variable starting means and is generally called an electric tulip (electric chew). The pair of blade members 2321 are members that change the difficulty level of winning a prize to the second special figure starting port 232. That is, when the pair of blade members 2321 is closed, it is impossible to enter the second special figure starting port 232, and the mode in which the pair of blade members 2321 is closed is an open / close mode in which winning is difficult. On the other hand, when the universal figure change game is won and the universal figure display device 210 stops and displays the symbol, the pair of blade members 2321 are opened and closed at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times, and the second special figure starting port 232 is opened. The ball can be entered (easy winning state), and the open state in which the pair of blade members 2321 are open is an easy winning state. In other words, the second special figure starting port 232 has either a small size (corresponding to the first size) or a large size (corresponding to the second size) of the entrance (game ball entrance). A variable starting area in which the ease of entering a game ball, which changes from one size to the other, is equivalent to an example of a second starting area. The size of the large size is larger than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230. In the state where the pair of blade members 2321 are opened, out of the game balls that have entered the game area 124, the second special feature that is the variable start area is more than the game ball that has entered the first special figure start opening 230 that is the fixed start area. There are more game balls entering the starting port 232 in the figure. On the other hand, the size of the small size is smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230 or smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special diagram starting port 230. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special figure starting port 232, the payout device 152 is driven and a predetermined number (for example, four) of balls is discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball that has entered the second special figure starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  The pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 is provided with two variable winning openings. A central variable winning opening 234 (corresponding to the first variable winning opening) provided in the center of the game board 200 is disposed below the first special figure starting opening 230. Further, a right variable winning opening 235 (corresponding to a second variable winning opening) provided on the right side of the game board 200 is disposed below the second special figure starting opening 232, and can be entered by hitting right. There is expected. Each of the variable winning openings 234 and 235 includes a winning opening and door members 2341 and 2351 that can open and close the winning opening by a solenoid. The winning opening may be referred to as a big winning opening, and the variable winning openings 234 and 235 may be referred to as attackers. The central variable winning opening 234 is kept closed until the big hit game is started when the big hit is made in the non-electric support state, and when the big hit game is started, the state is changed between the open state and the closed state. repeat. The right variable winning opening 235 is kept closed until the big hit game when the big hit is made in the electric support state, and when the big hit game is started, the state is changed between the open state and the closed state. repeat. In other words, each of the variable winning openings 234 and 235 has a predetermined first opening / closing state (here, the closed state) and a second opening / closing state (here, the opening / closing state) where the winning of the game ball is easier than the first opening / closing state. Is a variable winning means that can change the open / closed state from one to the other, and when the special figure change game is won in the non-electric support state and the first special figure display device 212 stops and displays the jackpot symbol The door member 2341 of the central variable prize opening 234 opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. On the other hand, when the special figure variation game is won in the electric support state and the second special figure display device 214 stops and displays the big hit symbol, the door member 2351 of the right variable prize winning opening 235 is set at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. Open and close with. In any of the variable winning openings 234, 235, the closed state does not necessarily need to be completely closed, and may be in a state where it is impossible or difficult to enter a game ball even if it is slightly opened. . When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the central variable winning port 234 or the right variable winning port 235, the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls is used as a winning ball. It discharges to 126. It should be noted that both the ball that has entered the central variable winning opening 234 and the ball that has entered the right variable winning opening 235 are guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  According to the arrangement of the general figure starting port 228, the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232, the central variable winning port 234, and the right variable winning port 235 described above, Strike is an advantage for the player, and in the non-electric support state, a left strike is an advantage for the player.

  Further, a plurality of disc-shaped hitting direction changing members 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails 238 are arranged in the vicinity of these winning openings and start openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, An out port 240 is provided for guiding a ball that has not won a prize or starting port to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging it to the game island side.

  This pachinko machine 100 supplies the ball stored in the upper plate 126 by the player to the launch position of the launch rail, drives the launch motor with strength according to the operation amount of the player's operation handle, and launches 146 Further, the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are passed by the launcher 148 and driven into the game area 124. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the advancing direction by the hitting direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and the winning hole (general winning hole 226, central variable winning hole 234, right variable The winning opening 235) or the starting opening (the first special figure starting opening 230, the second special drawing starting opening 232), or without winning any of the winning opening or starting opening, or the ordinary drawing starting opening 228 Just passing through will reach the outlet 240.

<Directing device 206>
Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. On the front side of the effect device 206, a warp device 242 and a stage 244 are arranged in an area where the game ball can roll. In addition, the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N described above are disposed on the back side of the effect device 206. That is, in the effect device 206, the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N are located behind the warp device 242 and the stage 244.

  The warp device 242 discharges the game balls that have entered the warp inlet 242a provided at the upper left of the effect device 206 to the stage 244 below the front surface of the effect device 206 from the warp outlet 242b.

  The stage 244 can roll a ball discharged from the warp outlet 242b, a ball carried on by a nail of the game board 200, or the like, and the passed ball is a first special figure starting port 230 at the center of the stage 244. A special route 244a is provided to facilitate entry into the golf course.

  In a state where the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are fully opened (fully open state), the player can visually recognize part or all of the display on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N can be stopped at arbitrary positions, for example, which decorative symbol is the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It is possible to shield only a part of the decorative design to the extent that the player can identify the game. In addition, when the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are completely closed (fully closed state), the decorative symbols displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Shield everything. Therefore, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, which are the effect display means, are both the shielding means and the effect moving means of the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

  In addition, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an Yatsushiro character 224Fa and a general character 224Fb, which are one of the effect movable bodies, are arranged, and each moves in the vertical direction according to the effect contents. It is configured to be able to. In addition, the Yatsushiro character 224Fa and the shogun character 224Fb each have a built-in light emitting means such as a full color LED, and can emit light in various light emission modes according to the contents of the production.

  Further, as the effect moving means, a family crest member 224E (see FIG. 14 and the like) (not shown) is prepared here. The family crest member 224E is disposed at an initial position below the first decorative symbol display device 208L. When the operation starts, the family crest member 224E rises from the initial position to the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and overlaps the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L from the front side (player side). In the state in which the family crest character 224E is in the initial position, it is more difficult for the player to visually recognize than the state in which it overlaps the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L from the front side. Further, the family crest member 224E includes a light emitting means such as a full color LED, and can emit light in various light emission modes depending on the contents of the production.

  The 4th symbol may be displayed on any of the 1st decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N, or a dedicated 4th symbol lamp or the like may be displayed separately. Means may be provided.

<Control unit>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. This figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

  The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 can be roughly classified into a main control unit 300 that controls the central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. A first sub-control unit 400 that controls the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on a command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and a command transmitted by the main control unit 300 The payout control unit 600 that mainly controls the game ball payout, the launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of the game ball, and the power supply control unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100 are configured. Yes.

  Here, the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400, and the second sub-control unit 500 are made of different circuit boards, but these three control units (300, 400, 500) are common. The first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 may be composed of a common circuit board different from the circuit board of the main control unit 300. There may be. Therefore, the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the second sub control unit 500 are each controlled by control means (for example, main control means (300), first sub control means (400), second sub control means (500). )), Or a combination of these three control units (300, 400, 500) can be considered as control means, or the main control part 300 can be regarded as the first control means. A combination of the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 may be regarded as a second control unit.

<Main control unit>
First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, and temporary data. RAM 308 for storing data, I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, counter timer 312 for measuring time and frequency, and WDT 314 for monitoring abnormalities in program processing are mounted. . Note that another storage device may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock.

  The basic circuit 302 includes a random value generation circuit 318 for deriving a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 every time a clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received (this circuit includes two random value generation circuits). And a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor that detects a game ball passing through each start port, a winning port, a variable winning port, a door opening of a front frame door opening sensor, an inner frame opening sensor, etc. A sensor circuit 322 for receiving signals output from various sensors 320 including a sensor and a full plate sensor, and outputting a comparison result with an amplification result and a reference voltage to the random value generation circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302; A drive circuit 324 for performing display control of a symbol display device such as the first special symbol display device 212 or the second special symbol display device 214, and a predetermined symbol display device such as the universal symbol display device 21. Drive circuit 326 for performing display control and various status display units 328 (for example, general map hold lamp 216, first special figure hold lamp 218, second special figure hold lamp 220, high accuracy medium lamp 222, etc.) A drive circuit 330 for performing display control, a predetermined movable member, for example, a blade member 2321 of the second special figure starting port 232, a door member 2341 of the central variable winning port 234, a door member 2351 of the right variable winning port 235, and the like. A drive circuit 334 for controlling various solenoids 332 that are opened and closed is connected.

  The random value generation circuit 318 generates a random value used in the basic circuit 302. Random number generation in the random value generation circuit 318 can be broadly divided into two types of methods: counter mode and random number mode. In the counter mode, a numerical value that is counted up (down) at a predetermined time interval is acquired, and the numerical value is derived as a random number. There are two more methods in the random number mode. The first method in the random number mode performs an operation using a predetermined function (for example, a modulus function) using a seed of random numbers, and derives the operation result as a random number. In the second method, a numerical value is read from a random number table in which numerical values in the range of 0 to 65535 are randomly arranged, and the read numerical value is derived as a random number.

  The random value generation circuit 318 acquires an irregular value using white noise superimposed on a signal input from the various sensors 320 to the sensor circuit 322. The random value generation circuit 318 uses the acquired value as an initial value of a counter that counts up (down) in the counter mode, uses it as a seed of random numbers, or determines a read start position of the random number table. .

  When the ball detection sensor 320 detects that a ball has won the first special figure starting port 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the ball has been detected to the random value generation circuit 318. The random value generation circuit 318 that has received this signal latches the value at that timing of the random value generation circuit corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230, and the latched value is incorporated in the random value generation circuit 318. It is stored in a random value storage register corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230. Similarly, when the random value generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that a ball has won the second special figure starting port 232, the timing of the random value generation circuit corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232 is also the same. Is latched, and the latched value is stored in a random value storage register corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232 incorporated in the random value generation circuit 318.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 is connected to an information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via this information output circuit 336. The game information (for example, game state) of the machine 100 is output.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power source control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 338 is a voltage value of the power source. Is less than a predetermined value (for example, 9v), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has decreased is output to the basic circuit 302.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When the activation signal is input, game control is started (main control unit main processing described later is started).

  The main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. With this configuration, the first control unit 300 Communication with the sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is enabled. The main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 transmit / receive a communication confirmation command when the power is turned on, the main control unit 300 always transmits the number of payouts, and the payout control unit 600 transmits error information. Both can communicate bidirectionally. On the other hand, the information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 is configured to transmit a signal such as a command to the first sub control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 is configured not to transmit a signal such as a command to the main control unit 300.

<Sub control unit>
Next, the first sub control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 mainly based on commands transmitted from the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404 and A RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, the number of times, and the like are mounted. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock, and controls programs and data for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 400, various effect data, etc. Is connected to the ROM 406.

  The basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and amplifier), a drive circuit 420 for controlling various lamps 418 (for example, the chance button lamp 138), and a second decorative design. A drive circuit 432 for controlling the drive of the display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a position detection sensor 430 for detecting the current positions of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and The detection signal from the detection unit 710 for detecting that the chance button 136 is pressed, and the setting operation unit sensor 425 for detecting the operation of the position detection sensor 430, the detection unit 710 of the chance button 136, and the setting operation unit 137. Is output to the basic circuit 402 based on the signal from the CPU 404 and the signal from the CPU 404. VDP 434 (video display processor) that reads out image data and the like stored in ROM 406, generates a display image using the work area of VRAM 436, and displays the image on each of the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N And connected.

  Next, the second sub control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer for measuring time and frequency 512 is installed. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock, and controls a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, and an image display A ROM 506 storing data and the like is provided.

  Further, the basic circuit 502 includes a drive circuit 516 for controlling the driving of various movable means (eight-story character 224Fa, general character 224Fb, family crest character 224E), and various movable means 224Fa, 224Fb, 224E. Various movable means sensors 424 for detecting the current position and a sensor circuit 518 for outputting detection signals from the various movable means sensors 424 to the basic circuit 502 are connected. Further, the basic circuit 502 includes a game board lamp drive circuit 530 for controlling the game board lamp 532, a game table frame lamp drive circuit 540 for controlling the game table frame lamp 542, and A serial communication control circuit 520 that performs lighting control by serial communication between the game board lamp drive circuit 530 and the game stand frame lamp drive circuit 540 is connected.

  In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, the first sub-control unit 400 performs image display control of each of the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N, and the second sub-control unit 500 performs various movable units 224Fa, 224Fb, The second sub-control unit 500 performs image display control for each of the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N, and the first sub-control unit 400 controls various movable units 224Fa, 224Fb, and 224E. Control may be performed, or one of the sub-control units may perform both controls.

<Discharge control unit, launch control unit, power supply control unit>
Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  The payout control unit 600 controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 mainly based on a command signal or the like transmitted from the main control unit 300, and a prize ball or a rental ball based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604 It is detected whether or not the payout has been completed, and communication with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 is performed via the interface unit 606.

  Further, a detection signal of the door opening sensor 609 is input to the dispensing control unit 600, and a door opening command is transmitted from the dispensing control unit 600 to the main control unit 300. Also, when there is a payout error, an error command is transmitted from the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300.

  As for the door opening command, the detection signal of the door opening sensor 609 may be directly input to the main control unit 300 without using the dispensing control unit 600, or the dispensing control unit 600 is used as a relay base. Then, a door opening command may be transmitted from the door opening sensor 609 to the main control unit 300.

  The launch control unit 630 outputs a control signal output from the payout control unit 600 to permit or stop the launch, or a launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134 to operate the ball launch handle 134 by the player. Control of the launch motor 632 that drives the launcher 146 and launcher 148, and control of the ball feeder 634 that supplies the launcher 110 with a ball from the upper plate 126 based on a control signal that indicates the launch intensity according to the amount. I do.

  The power control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into a DC voltage, converts it to a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400, the payout device 152, etc. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 supplies a power storage circuit (for example, a power supply circuit) for supplying power to a predetermined part (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the external power supply is cut off. , Capacitor). Here, a predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the payout control unit 600 and the first sub control unit 400, and from the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300, the second sub control unit 500, and the launch control unit 630. Although the predetermined voltage is supplied, the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit and each device through another power supply path. For example, the main control unit 300 may be directly supplied with a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660. The second sub control unit 500 may be configured to supply a voltage after a predetermined voltage is supplied to the payout control unit 600, the main control unit 300, and the first sub control unit 400. The second sub control unit 500 may be supplied with a predetermined voltage from the first sub control unit 400. The firing control unit 630 may be directly supplied with a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660. The payout control unit 600 may be supplied with a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 via other control units (such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400) and each device. The first sub-control unit 400 may be supplied with a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 via other control units (main control unit 300, payout control unit 600, etc.) and devices. The payout control unit 600, the main control unit 300, and the first sub control unit 400 may be supplied with a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 almost simultaneously. The payout control unit 600 may be supplied with the predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 earlier than both of the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 or at least one of them. The main control unit 300 may be configured to supply the predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 earlier than at least one of the payout control unit 600 and the first sub control unit 400. The first sub control unit 400 may be supplied with the predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 earlier than at least one of the payout control unit 600 and the main control unit 300.

  The second sub control unit 500 may be supplied with a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 almost simultaneously with the payout control unit 600, the main control unit 300, and the first sub control unit 400. The second sub control unit 500 is configured so that the predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 earlier than all of the payout control unit 600, the main control unit 300, and the first sub control unit 400, or one or more control units. May be. The second sub control unit 500 may be directly supplied with a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660.

  In an island facility provided in a game machine installation store, a 100V AC power supply is stepped down to a voltage of 24V, and a 24V AC current is supplied to the pachinko machine 100. The 24V AC current is converted into a 12V DC voltage by the power supply control unit 660 of the main control unit 300. Although not shown in FIG. 4, the main control unit 300 is also provided with a voltage conversion circuit. The 12 V DC current is further stepped down to a predetermined voltage (here, 5 V) by the voltage conversion circuit, and the predetermined voltage (5 V ) Is supplied to the CPU 304 provided in the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300. Further, the direct current converted to a voltage of 12 V by the power supply control unit 660 is also supplied to the voltage monitoring circuit 338 and the start signal output circuit 340 of the main control unit 300. When the voltage value of the 12V supply current drops below a predetermined value (9V in this example), the voltage monitoring circuit 338 outputs a low voltage signal to the I / O port 310 of the basic circuit 302. Therefore, the voltage monitoring circuit 338 monitors the voltage value of the power line connecting the power control unit 660 and the voltage monitoring circuit 338 and through which a DC current of 12 V flows. This power line is an example of a predetermined power line. It corresponds to. Note that a low voltage signal may be directly input to the CPU 304. The power management unit 660 also outputs the input 24V AC current as it is, or converts it into a 36V DC current and outputs it. Furthermore, the current of the operating voltage (here, 5V) may be supplied to the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 via a circuit different from the voltage conversion circuit.

  The activation signal output circuit 340 outputs an activation signal when the voltage value of the direct current supplied from the power supply control unit 660 by turning on the power reaches a voltage value at which the CPU 304 can operate. Further, when the WDT 314 times out, a reset signal is output from the WDT 314 to the CPU 304. When the WDT 3141 times out, there is a case where the CPU 304 cannot perform the originally designed operation due to a runaway state due to a program mistake or a voltage drop caused by a lightning strike or an illegal act. In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in the WDT 3141 as an initial value. The activation signal from the activation signal output circuit 340 and the reset signal from the WDT 3141 are input to the CPU 304 through a common signal line, but may be input through dedicated lines. The activation signal output from the activation signal output circuit 340 and the reset signal output from the WDT 314 described here correspond to an example of a predetermined activation signal.

  In the case of a momentary power loss when the power supply is cut off and immediately restored, that is, when the power supply switch 178 is automatically restored without being turned on, a stop voltage signal is output and the WDT 3141 times out, and the main control unit 300 performs reset processing. Is executed. In this reset process, it is first determined whether or not the reset operation to be executed is a system reset operation. There are two reset operations executed by the basic circuit 302: a system reset operation and a user reset operation. Here, when the system reset operation is executed, the values of the core of the CPU 304 and the built-in register are initialized. Subsequently, a security check process is executed. In the security check process, recalculation is performed to determine whether the authentication code calculated based on the user program is correct. If the authentication code is correct, the extension process is executed. The extension time in the extension process may be a fixed time, or may be a time obtained by adding a randomly selected random time to the fixed time. When the extension process ends, a main process of the main control unit 300 described later is executed, and game control is started. On the other hand, when executing the user reset operation, the values of the core of the CPU 304 and the built-in register are initialized. However, the value of the register that controls the random number generation circuit 318 is maintained in the state before the reset. Thereafter, main processing of the main control unit 300 described later is executed, and game control is started.

  Next, using FIG. 5A to FIG. 5D, the special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure 2 display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the universal figure display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed. The types of figures and ordinary drawings will be described. FIG. 5 (a) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of FIG. 1, and FIG. 5 (b) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of FIG. The special figure 1 variable game is started on the condition that the first start port sensor detects that the ball has entered the special figure 1 start opening 230, and the special figure 2 start opening 232 indicates that the ball has entered 2 The special figure 2 variable game is started on condition that the start sensor is detected. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the special figure 1 display device 212 performs “variable display of special figure 1” which repeats lighting of all seven segments and lighting of one central segment. When the special figure 2 variable game is started, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs “variable display of special figure 2” by repeating all lighting of the seven segments and lighting of the central one segment. . These “variation display of special figure 1” and “variation display of special figure 2” correspond to an example of the symbol fluctuation display in the present embodiment. When the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation in FIG. 1 elapses, the special figure 1 display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special figure 1 and the fluctuation time determined before the fluctuation starts in the special figure 2. After the elapse, the special figure 2 display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special figure 2. Therefore, from the start of “figure display of special figure 1” until the stop symbol form of special figure 1 is stopped, or after the start of “fluctuation display of special figure 2”, the stop symbol form of special figure 2 is displayed. Until stop display corresponds to an example of the symbol fluctuation stop display referred to in the present embodiment, the stop symbol mode of special figure 1 or 2 is stopped and displayed after the "fluctuation display of special figure 1 or 2" is started. A series of displays until this is done is referred to as symbol variation stop display. The symbol variation stop display may be continuously performed a plurality of times.

  FIG. 5 (a) shows seven types of special charts, "Special Figure A" to "Special Figure G", as the stop symbol forms in the symbol fluctuation stop display of Special Figure 1. In FIG. 5A, the white portions in the figure indicate the segment locations where the light is turned off, and the black portions indicate the location where the segments are turned on. "Special Figure A" is a 15 round (15R) special jackpot symbol, "Special Figure B" is a 7R special jackpot symbol, and "Special Figure C" is a 7R jackpot symbol. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, whether or not a big hit in the special figure variable game is determined by lottery of hardware random numbers, and whether or not a special big hit is determined and the number of rounds are determined by lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the jackpot and the special jackpot is a special figure variation game after the jackpot game ends, and the difference in probability of winning the jackpot is high (special jackpot) or low (jackpot). Hereinafter, a state with a high probability of winning the jackpot is referred to as a special figure high probability state (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “special figure certain change” or simply “probable change”), and a state with a low probability is specially designated. This is called a low probability state. In addition, after the 15R special jackpot game ends, after the 7R special jackpot game ends and after the 7R jackpot game ends, the state shifts to the time-saving state (electric support state). Although the short time will be described in detail later, the short time state is referred to as a normal high probability state (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “general probability change”), and the non-short time state is referred to as a general low probability state. “Special Figure A”, which is a 15R special jackpot symbol, and “Special Figure B”, which is a 7R special jackpot symbol, are symbols that become a special figure high probability common figure high probability state after the jackpot game ends, and are 7R jackpot symbols. “Special figure C” is a symbol that becomes a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state after the end of the big hit game. These “special drawing A”, “special drawing B”, and “special drawing C” are symbols that have a relatively large advantage over the player.

  "Special figure D" is a 2R jackpot symbol called sudden probability change, and is a symbol that becomes a special figure high probability ordinary figure high probability state after the jackpot game ends. That is, “Special Figure D” is 2R compared to “Special Figure A” which is 15R and “Special Figure B” which is 7R.

  “Special figure E” is a 2R jackpot symbol called latent probability variation or hidden probability variation. As will be described later, when “Special Figure E” is stopped and displayed in the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state, the special figure high probability normal figure low probability state (so-called “open” time 100 ms × 2R) ends. If the special figure E is stopped and displayed in a state other than the low probability state, the special figure high probability will be displayed after the big hit game (opening time 29000 ms × 2R). Transition to the high probability state shown in FIG. 11 (see FIGS. 11A and 11B). In other words, the “special figure E” indicates that the action during the big hit game and the game state to be shifted thereafter are determined according to the game state when the stop display is made (in this example, whether or not the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state). It is a different design.

  “Special figure F” is a small hit symbol, and is a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. Further, the “special chart G” is an off-line symbol, and is a symbol that is relatively less advantageous to the player.

  FIG. 5 (b) shows four types of special figures “Special figure a” to “Special figure d” as stop symbol forms in the symbol fluctuation stop display of Special figure 2. “Special figure a” is a 15R special jackpot symbol, “Special figure b” is a 7R special jackpot symbol, “Special figure c” is a 7R jackpot symbol, and “Special figure d” is a missed symbol. In the present embodiment, seven types of special maps (of which five types are big hits) are used as the special symbol 2 as the special symbols 1 to 7 as shown in FIG. As the stop symbol pattern, four types of special maps (three of which are big hits) are used. By configuring in this way, there is a case where it is possible to provide a difference between the advantages of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 without changing the probability of being a big hit and the probability of being probable among the big wins. In this example, the big hit of Special Figure 1 includes sudden probability changes and latent probability changes that hardly give out balls, whereas the big hit of Special Figure 2 does not include sudden probability changes and latent probability changes. The advantage of special figure 2 is higher than that of special figure 1.

  FIG. 5 (c) shows an example of a decorative design. There are 10 types of decoration patterns of the present embodiment: “Decoration 1” to “Decoration 10”. “Decoration 1” to “Decoration 9” and “Decoration 10” represent the numbers “1” to “9” and “0”, respectively. The first start port sensor detects that a ball has won the special figure 1 starting port 230 or the special figure 2 starting port 232, that is, the ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230, or the special figure 2 Each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided on the condition that the second start port sensor detects that a ball has entered the start port 232. In the symbol display area, “decoration 1” → “decoration 2” → “decoration 3” →... → “decoration 9” → “decoration 10” → “decoration 1” →. “Change design of symbols”.

  And then, "Special Figure A" 15R special jackpot, "Special Figure B" 7R special jackpot, "Special Figure C" 7R big jackpot, "Special Figure a" 15R special jackpot, "Special Figure b" 7R special jackpot When the 7R jackpot of “special drawing c” is notified, a combination of symbols in which three same decorative symbols are arranged in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c (for example, “decoration 1—decoration 1—decoration 1” or “decoration 2— Display “decoration 2—decoration 2”). When the 15R special jackpot of “Special Figure A” and the 15R special jackpot of “Special Figure a” are explicitly notified, a combination of three symbols with the same odd number of decorative symbols (for example, “Decoration 3-Decoration 3- “Decoration 3”, “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”, etc.) are stopped and displayed.

  In addition, when notifying 2R big hit called “special drawing E” latent probability change (hidden probability change) or “special drawing F” small hit, “decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 3” is stopped and displayed. To do. When a 2R jackpot called “sudden change” of “special drawing D” is notified, “decoration 1-decoration 3—decoration 5” is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, when notifying of the difference between “special drawing G” and “special drawing d”, symbol combinations other than the symbol combinations shown in FIG. 5C are stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c.

  FIG.5 (d) shows an example of the usual stop display symbol. In this embodiment, there are three types of stop-display modes for normal maps: “general map A” and “general map B” which are hit symbols, and “general map C” which is a misplaced symbol. Based on the fact that the above-mentioned gate sensor has detected that the sphere has passed through the general start port 228, the general map display device 210 repeats the lighting of all seven segments and the lighting of one central segment. Perform a “normal change display”. Then, when notifying the winning of the common figure variable game, the “normal figure A” or “special figure B” is stopped and displayed, and when notifying the deviation of the common figure variable game, the “normal figure C” is stopped and displayed. To do. Also in FIG. 5D, the white portions in the figure indicate the segment locations where the light is extinguished, and the black portions indicate the location of the segments where the light is illuminated.

  Next, main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing of the main control unit. As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with the start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which this activation signal is input executes a main control unit main process according to a control program stored in advance in the ROM 306 after resetting by a reset interrupt.

  First, in step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In the initial setting 1, the stack initial value is set in the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304 (temporary setting), the interrupt mask is set, the I / O 310 is initialized, the various variables stored in the RAM 308 are initialized, and the WDT 314 is set. Enable operation, set initial values, etc. In this embodiment, a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in WDT 314 as an initial value.

  In step S103 following step S101, the value of the counter of WDT 314 is cleared, and the time measurement by WDT 314 is restarted. In step S105 subsequent to step S103, whether or not the low voltage signal is ON, that is, the voltage value of the power supply that the voltage monitoring circuit 338 supplies from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 is a predetermined value. When it is less than (9 V in this example), it is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects that the power supply is cut off), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect that the power supply is cut off), The process proceeds to S107. Even when the predetermined value (9 V) is not yet reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

  In step S107, initial setting 2 is performed. In the initial setting 2, a process for setting a numerical value for determining a cycle for executing a main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, in the counter timer 312, a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, a second output port, etc.) 1) a process of outputting a clear signal from the output port 1), a setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like.

  In step S109 subsequent to step S107, it is determined whether or not the state before power interruption (before power interruption) is restored. If the state before power interruption is not restored (the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is changed). In the case of initializing), the process proceeds to initialization processing (step S113). Specifically, first, a RAM clear signal transmitted when an RWM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board 182 is operated by a store clerk or the like is on (indicating that there has been an operation). That is, it is determined whether or not RAM clear is necessary. If the RAM clear signal is on (RAM clear is necessary), the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to the initial state. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is OFF (when the RAM clear is not necessary), the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and the power status information is information indicating suspend. It is determined whether or not. If the power status information is not information indicating suspend, the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to the initial state. If the power status information is information indicating suspend, all 1-byte data stored in a predetermined area (for example, all areas) of the RAM 308 is added to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0. Thus, the checksum is calculated, and it is determined whether or not the calculated checksum result is a specific value (for example, 0) (whether or not the checksum result is normal). When the checksum result is a specific value (eg, 0) (when the checksum result is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to return to the state before the power interruption, and the checksum result is a specific value. If the value is other than 0 (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 to set the pachinko machine 100 to the initial state.

  In step S111, power recovery processing is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read and reset to the stack pointer (this setting). In addition, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read out and reset in each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and registers, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state when the power is turned off. That is, the processing is resumed from the instruction next to the instruction (predetermined in step S115) performed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later) immediately before the power interruption. The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a transmission information storage area. In step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the power has been restored to the state at the time of power-off. In the command setting transmission process (step S233) in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, which will be described later, the first sub control unit 400. Sent to.

  In step S113, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization process, interrupt prohibition setting, stack initial value setting to the stack pointer (this setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, here, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and, like the power recovery command, the command setting transmission process (in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300) ( In step S233), the data is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

  In step S115 subsequent to step S113, the basic random number initial value updating process is performed after setting the interrupt prohibition. In this basic random number initial value update process, the initial values of the four random number counters for generating the normal winning random number, the normal random number, the special figure 1 random value, and the special figure 2 random value are generated. The four initial value generation random number counters and the two random number counters for generating each of the normal figure variation time determination random value and the special figure variation time determination random value are updated. For example, if the numerical value range that can be taken as the random number value for determining the normal time variation is 0 to 100, the value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the random value for determining the normal time variation time provided in the RAM 308 and acquired. Then, 1 is added to the obtained value and stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. Other initial value generation random number counters and random number counters are similarly updated. The initial value generation random number counter is also updated in a basic random number initial value update process (step S207) described later. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115 except during a timer interrupt process that starts every predetermined period.

  Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit timer interrupt process. The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (in this example, about once every 2 ms), and the main control unit timer interrupt processing is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. At a predetermined cycle.

  First, in step S201, a timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving each register value of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed. In step S203 following step S201, the WDT 314 is periodically updated so that the WDT 314 count value exceeds the initial setting value (32.8 ms in this example) and no WDT interruption occurs (so as not to detect a processing abnormality). Therefore (in this example, the restart is performed once in about 2 ms, which is the period of the main control unit timer interrupt).

  In step S205 subsequent to step S203, input port state update processing is performed. In this input port state update process, the detection signals of various sensors 320 including the above-mentioned front frame door open sensor, inner frame open sensor, lower pan full sensor, and various ball detection sensors are input via the input port of the I / O 310. The input is monitored for the presence or absence of a detection signal, and stored in a signal state storage area provided for each of the various sensors 320 in the RAM 308. If the detection signal of the sphere detection sensor is described as an example, information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in the timer interruption process (about 4 ms before) is stored in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area partitioned and stored in the RAM 308 in the previous detection signal storage area partitioned for each sphere detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before) ) Is read from the current detection signal storage area provided for each sphere detection sensor in the RAM 308, and this information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area described above. To remember. Further, the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-described current detection signal storage area.

  Further, in step S205, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the above-mentioned detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern information. This main control unit timer interrupt process that is repeatedly started at a very short interval of about 2 ms while one game ball passes one ball detection sensor is started several times. For this reason, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed in step S205. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before, a previous detection signal, and a current detection signal. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection and noise of the sphere detection sensor, it is determined that there is a prize when the detection signal is stored twice continuously after no detection signal.

  In the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300, winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is no previous detection signal, that there is a previous detection signal, and that there is a current detection signal) is stored. In step S205, information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each sphere detection sensor is pre-determined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, no previous detection signal, previous detection signal present, current detection signal present). In the case of the general winning opening 226, the variable winning openings 234, 235, the special figure 1 starting opening 230, and the special figure 2 starting opening 232, or the ordinary drawing starting opening 228. It is determined that there was a passage at. In other words, it is determined that there has been a winning at these winning ports 226, 234, 235 and these starting ports 230, 232, 228. For example, when the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three matches with the above-described winning determination pattern information in the general winning opening sensor for detecting the winning at the general winning opening 226, there is a winning at the general winning opening 226. If the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winnings are performed. The process branches to the subsequent process without performing the process associated with winning the prize to the mouth 226.

  The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal before, no previous detection signal, no current detection signal). After it is determined that there has been a single win, it is not determined that there has been a win until the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times matches the winning determination clear pattern information in each ball detection sensor, and the winning determination is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is next determined whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information.

  In step S207 subsequent to step S205, a basic random number initial value update process is performed, and in the next step S209, a basic random number update process is performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the initial value generation random number counter updated in step S115 is updated, and then used in the main control unit 300. Four random number counters for generating the random value, the special figure 1 random value, and the special figure 2 random value are updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as a random number value for a normal winning number is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from a random number counter storage area for generating a normal winning random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. If it is determined that the random number counter has made a round as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, the value of the initial value generating random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired, and the random number counter storage area Set to.

  For example, a value is acquired from a random number counter for generating a regular winning random number that fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 100, and a result obtained by adding 1 to the acquired value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is acquired as an initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the random number counter for generating the random number for winning the normal number, The initial value set this time is stored in the above-mentioned initial value storage area in order to determine that the random number counter for generating a normal winning random value has made one round next, in addition to setting the random number counter for generating a winning random value Keep it. In addition to the above initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating the random number for winning the normal signal has made one round next, the random number counter for generating the random number value for the normal value, generating the random number value for the special figure 1 The RAM 308 is provided with an initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for use and the random number counter for generating the special figure 2 random number value have made one round each. In the present embodiment, the counter for acquiring the special figure 1 random value and the counter for acquiring the special figure 2 random value are provided separately, but the same counter may be used.

  In step S211 following step S209, effect random number update processing is performed. In this effect random number update process, a random number counter for generating an effect random number used by the main control unit 300 is updated.

  In step S213 following step S211, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update process, the time for displaying and changing the symbol on the special symbol display device 212 and the time for displaying and changing the symbol on the special symbol display device 212 are counted. Special figure 1 display symbol update timer, Special figure 2 display symbol update timer for measuring the time for the symbol to be changed / stopped on the special figure 2 display device 214, a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined opening time, a predetermined time Various timers including a timer for counting the closing time, a predetermined end effect period, and the like are updated.

  In step S215 subsequent to step S213, a winning opening counter updating process is performed. In this winning opening counter updating process, when the winning openings 226, 234, 235 and the starting openings 230, 232, 228 have been won, the number of winning balls stored in the RAM 308 for each winning opening or for each starting opening is stored. The value of the area is read and 1 is added to set the original prize ball number storage area.

  In step S217 following step S215, a winning acceptance process is performed. In the winning acceptance process, it is determined whether or not there has been a winning at the special figure 1 starting port 230, the special figure 2 starting port 232, the ordinary drawing starting port 228, and the variable winning ports 234 and 235. Here, the determination is made using the determination result of whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information in step S205.

  When the special figure 1 starting port 230 is won and the corresponding special figure 1 holding number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the special figure 1 starting port 230 of the random number generation circuit (hard random number circuit) 318 A special figure 1 winning random number value generated by performing predetermined processing on a value stored in a corresponding built-in counter value storage register is acquired, and a special figure is generated from a special figure 1 random number generation random number counter provided in the RAM 308. One random value is acquired and stored in the special figure 1 random value storage area in the order of acquisition. The special figure 1 winning random number values and the special figure 1 random number values in the special figure 1 random value storage area are stored in the same number as the special figure 1 reservation number stored in the special figure 1 reservation number storage area. In the special figure 1 random value storage area, each time the special figure 1 holding number decreases, the data of the combination of the special figure 1 winning random number and the special figure 1 random value having the highest holding order (first) is deleted. At the same time, processing is performed so that the data holding order of the remaining special figure 1 winning random number value and special figure 1 random value group is incremented by one. Also, each time the special figure 1 holding number increases, a new special figure 1 is added to the next holding order of the data of the combination of the special figure 1 winning random number value and the special figure 1 random value having the lowest (last) holding order. The data of a set of winning random numbers and special figure 1 random values is written.

  When the special figure 2 starting port 232 is won and the corresponding special figure 2 reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, a built-in counter corresponding to the special figure 2 starting port 232 of the random number generation circuit 318 The special figure 2 winning random number value generated by performing predetermined processing on the value stored in the value storage register is acquired, and the special figure 2 random number value is acquired from the special figure 2 random value generation random number counter provided in the RAM 308. Then, they are stored in the special figure 2 random value storage area in the order of acquisition. The special figure 2 winning random number values and the special figure 2 random number values in the special figure 2 random number storage area are stored in the same number as the special figure 2 reservation number stored in the special figure 2 reservation number storage area. In the special figure 2 random value storage area, each time the special figure 2 hold number decreases, the data of the combination of the special figure 2 winning random value and the special figure 2 random value with the highest holding order is deleted, and the remainder The special ranking 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random value set data are processed so that the holding order is incremented by one. Each time the special figure 2 hold number increases by one, a special special figure 2 winning random number value is added to the next holding rank of the data of the special figure 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random value group having the lowest holding order. And special figure 2 random value set data is written.

  Also, special figure 1 starting information (a combination of special figure 1 winning random value and special figure 1 random value) or special figure 2 starting information (a pair of special figure 2 winning random value and special figure 2 random value) has been newly acquired. In this case, the special figure prefetching process is executed using the start information. Details of the special figure prefetching process will be described later.

  When a winning is made at the general figure start opening 228 and the corresponding general figure holding number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, a value is obtained from the random number counter for generating the normal figure winning random number value as a normal figure winning random number value. The common random number value is acquired from the random number counter for generating the normal random number value provided in the RAM 308 and stored in the general random number storage area in the order of acquisition. The number of combinations of the random numbers and the common random numbers in the random number value storage area is stored in the same number as the number of reserved general numbers stored in the general number hold number storage area. In the standard random number storage area, each time the number of pending charts decreases by one, the data of the combination of the random number value and the random number value with the highest ranking (first) in the ranking is deleted and the remaining Is processed so that the holding order of the data of the pair of the common figure winning random number and the common figure random number is incremented by one. In addition, each time the number of pending orders increases by one, a new winning figure random number value and a new standing figure winning random number value in the next holding rank of the data of the combination of the random number value and the random number value with the lowest ranking (last) Data of a set of regular random numbers is written. When there is a winning at the variable winning opening 234, information indicating that a ball has entered the variable winning opening 234 is stored in the winning storage area for the variable winning opening 234. When a winning is made at the variable winning opening 235, information indicating that a ball has entered the variable winning opening 235 is stored in the winning storage area for the variable winning opening 235.

  In step S219 following step S217, a payout request number transmission process is performed. Note that the output schedule information and the payout request information output to the payout control unit 600 are composed of, for example, 1 byte, strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bit 6 Power-on information (if turned on, indicates that this is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4-5 indicate the current processing type for encryption (0-3), and bits 0-3 indicate encryption The number of payout requests after processing is shown.

  In step S221 following step S219, a normal state update process is performed. This normal state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the normal state. For example, in the general diagram state update process in the middle of the normal map change display (the value of the above-mentioned general map display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7 segment LED constituting the general map display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off. Turns off drive control. By performing this control, the general map display device 210 performs normal variable display (normal map variable game).

  Also, in the general state update process at the timing when the normal map change display time has elapsed (the timing at which the value of the general map display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), When the 7-segment LED constituting the general-purpose display device 210 is turned on / off to control the display mode, and the normal-map hit flag is off, the general-purpose display is displayed so that the display mode of the off symbol is displayed. The 7 segment LED constituting the device 210 is controlled to be turned on / off. Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the normal state update process. Here, the above-described lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and the setting area is set to indicate that the normal stop display is being performed. By performing this control, the general-purpose display device 210 is either one of the winning symbols (the common diagram A or B shown in FIG. 5D) and the off symbol (the common diagram C shown in FIG. 5D). The final symbol is displayed. Thereafter, information indicating the stop period is set in a storage area of a normal stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms). With this setting, the symbol that has been confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the normal game.

  Further, if the result of the usual figure variable game is a hit, the usual figure hit flag is turned on. When the usual figure hit flag is on, in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (when the usual figure stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), A normal operation is set in the setting area, and a predetermined open period (for example, 2 seconds), a solenoid for driving to open / close the blade member 232a of the special opening 2 232 (a part of various solenoids 332), A signal for holding 232a in the open state is output, and information indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the usual state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 500 ms), A signal for holding the blade member in the closed state is output to the solenoid 332 for opening and closing driving, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the normal state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (when the value of the blade closing time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the non-operating state is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. To do. Furthermore, if the result of the usual figure fluctuation game is out of place, the usual figure flag is turned off. In the case where the usual figure hit flag is off, even in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (when the value of the usual figure stop time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, normal operation inactive is set. In the general state update process in the case where the general map is not operating, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S223.

  In step S223, a general drawing related lottery process is performed. In this general map-related lottery process, the open / close control of the general map variable game and the special map 2 start port 232 is not performed (the state of the normal map is not in operation), and the number of the general map variable games that are on hold Is set to 1 or more as a start condition, and is executed using a pair of the first common winning random number value and the common random number value in the common random number value storage area.

  The main control unit 300 obtains the normal start information (a combination of the normal winning random number and the normal random number) from the earliest (most recently stored) holding position in the normal random number storage area. On the basis of the obtained normal figure winning random number value in the obtained ordinary figure starting information, the value of the ordinary figure probability variation flag in the RAM 308, etc., the determination table for the success / failure stored in the ROM 306 (FIGS. 9A and 9B described later). (Ref.) Is used to determine whether or not to win or not (determination of success / failure). Next, the main control unit 300, based on the general random number value in the acquired general map start information and the determined success / failure determination result, etc., the general map determination table stored in the ROM 306 (the hit shown in FIG. 9C). The symbol (stop symbol) to be stopped and displayed after the normal variation display is determined using the hour action table). Next, the main control unit 300, for example, selects various tables (for example, timer number selection (not shown)) stored in the ROM 306 based on the determined success / failure determination result, the stop symbol, the acquired random number for determining the normal time change time, and the like. The normal fluctuation display time (timer number) is determined using a table, and the fluctuation display time is stored in the normal figure fluctuation time storage area provided in the RAM 308 as the normal figure fluctuation display time.

  The main control unit 300 extracts the earliest general chart start information from the normal random number value storage area, erases the earliest general chart start information from the normal random number value storage area, and Decrease the number of reserved maps in the area by 1. At this time, the general chart start information taken out from the standard random number storage area is stored in a temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the above-mentioned determination is made based on the general chart start information stored in the temporary area. Also good.

  The main control unit 300 sets the common figure flag provided in the RAM 308 to ON when the determination result is successful (winning), and sets the common figure flag to OFF when not successful.

  Next, the special figure state update process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed. First, the special figure state update process (the special figure 2 state update process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S225). In the special figure 2 state update process, one of the following processes is performed according to the state of the special figure 2.

  For example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer described above is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the special figure 2 display device 214 is turned on and off. Repeatedly turn on / off drive control. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs the special figure 2 variable display (special figure 2 variable game). In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the process ends.

  Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with flags such as a 15R big hit flag, a 7R big hit flag, a 2R big hit flag, a small hit flag, a loss flag, a special figure probability fluctuation flag, and a normal figure probability fluctuation flag. . These flags are set to ON or OFF based on the stop symbol determined in the special figure 2 related lottery process described later. In the special figure 2 state update process starting at the timing when the special figure 2 variable display time has elapsed (the timing when the special figure 2 display symbol update timer value has changed from 1 to 0), for example, when the 15R big hit flag is on 5 (b) shows that the special figure a, the 7R big hit flag is on, and the special figure probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure b, the 7R big hit flag is on, and the special figure probability fluctuation flag is off. When the special flag c and the off flag are turned on, the 7-segment LED constituting the special figure 2 display device 214 is controlled to be turned on / off so that the special figure d is displayed. 2 is set to indicate that the stop display is being performed. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs fixed display of any one of the special figures a to d.

  Thereafter, in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308. With this setting, the specially displayed special figure 2 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 2 variable game is notified to the player. In addition, if the time reduction number stored in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the time reduction number, and if the subtraction result becomes 1 to 0, the special figure probability is changing. If not, turn off the time flag. Further, the hourly flag is also turned off during the big hit game (in the special game state). Also, if the probability variation number stored in the probability variation number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the probability variation number, and if the subtraction result is 1 to 0, the special figure probability variation flag. Turn off.

  Further, the special transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the design for stopping the variable display is shown in FIG. The special figure 2 identification information indicating the presence is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data, which will be described later, and the processing is terminated.

  Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on. When the big hit flag is on, in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the setting of the RAM 308 is set. In order to set a special figure 2 in operation in the area and wait for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period during which an image for notifying the player that a big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is started is displayed. In addition, information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a predetermined release period (for example, 29 seconds) Or, until a winning of a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected in the variable winning holes 234, 235) solenoids for opening / closing the door members of the variable winning holes 234, 235 (part of various solenoids 332) In addition, a signal for holding the door member in the opened state is output, and information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the door opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening release setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the door opening time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member in a closed state is output to a solenoid for opening / closing the door member of the variable prize opening 234, 235 (a part of various solenoids 332), and a door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308 is used. Information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In addition, the door member opening / closing control is repeated a predetermined number of times (in this embodiment, 15 rounds or 7 rounds in the case of Special Figure 2, 15 rounds, 7 rounds or 2 rounds in the case of Special Figure 1), and the control is finished. In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing, a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period in which an image for notifying the player that the jackpot by the decorative symbol display device 208 is ended is displayed. Therefore, information indicating the effect standby period is set in the storage area of the effect standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Also, if the normal probability change flag is set to ON, at the same time as the end of the big hit game, the hour / hour number (for example, 100 times) is set in the hour / hour number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 and provided in the RAM 308. Turn on the short time flag. Note that if the usual time probability variation flag is set to OFF, the number of time reductions is not set in the time reduction number storage unit, and the time reduction flag is not turned on.

  The short time here means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player in order to shorten the time from the end of the big hit game to the start of the next big hit game. When the time reduction flag is set to ON, the normal figure high probability state (normal figure certain change) is established. There is a higher probability of hitting in the general-game variable game in the high-probability state than in the normal-game low-probability state. In addition, in the normal figure high probability state, the fluctuation time of the general figure variable game is shorter than the normal figure low probability state (normal figure variable short). Furthermore, in the normal high probability state, compared to the normal low probability state, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 232a of the special drawing 2 starting port 232 is likely to be longer (electrical chew extension). In addition, the pair of blade members 232a are more likely to open in the normal high probability state than in the normal low probability state. The state in which any one of these ordinary figure change, universal figure change, and electric Chu extension is set is referred to as an electric support (starting prize winning support by electric tulip) state.

  In addition, as described above, the hourly flag is set to off during the big hit game (in the special game state). Therefore, the normal low probability state is maintained during the big hit game. This is because, if the game is in a high probability state during a big hit game, a predetermined number of variable winning holes 234 and 235 will be placed in the special figure 2 start opening 232 during the big hit game until a game ball enters. There is a problem that game balls enter and the number of game balls that can be acquired during a big hit increases, resulting in an increase in euphoria. This is to solve this problem.

  If the special figure probability variation flag is set to ON, the probability variation number (for example, 10,000 times) is set in the probability variation number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 simultaneously with the end of the big hit game.

  Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (when the production standby time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 is not activated in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set medium.

  Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is out of order, the out-of-game flag is turned on. In the case where the miss flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, special figure 2 inactive is set. In the special figure 2 state update process when the special figure 2 is not in operation, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S227.

  Subsequently, special figure state update processing (special figure 1 state update process) for special figure 1 is performed (step S227). In the special figure 1 state update process, each process described in the special figure 2 state update process is performed according to the state of the special figure 1. Each process performed in the special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” in the contents described in the special figure 2 state update process is replaced with “special figure 1”. Omitted. However, in this example, since the stop symbol form of special figure 1 is different from the stop symbol aspect of special figure 2, the timing at which the special figure 1 variable display time has elapsed (the value of the special figure 1 display symbol update timer becomes 1 to 0) The special figure 1 state update process starting at the same time) is different from the special figure 2 state update process. In the special figure 1 state update process started at the above timing, for example, when the 15R big hit flag is on and the special figure probability variation flag is on, the special figure A shown in FIG. When the figure probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure B, the 7R big hit flag is on, when the special figure probability fluctuation flag is off, the special figure C, the 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is on, When the figure probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure D, 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is on, and when the common figure probability fluctuation flag is off, the special figure E, the small hit flag is on The special segment F is controlled to turn on / off the 7-segment LED constituting the special diagram 1 display device 212 so that the special flag F is turned on and the special flag G is turned on. Special figure 1 stop table To set indicating that it is in. By performing this control in the special figure 1 state update process started at the above timing, the special figure 1 display device 212 performs a fixed display of any one of the special figures A to G. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

  When the special figure state update process in step S225 and step S227 is completed, a special figure related lottery process for each of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed. Also here, first, a special drawing related lottery process for special figure 2 (a special drawing 2 related lottery process) is performed (step S229), and then a special drawing related lottery process for special figure 1 (a special drawing 1 related lottery process). ) Is performed (step S231). In the special drawing 2 related lottery process, the floating game of the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2 is not performed, and the state of the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2 are both inactive and is held. The game is executed using the first special figure 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random number value in the special figure 2 random value storage area, starting from the fact that the number of variable games is 1 or more. The special figure 1 related lottery process does not perform the floating game of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, the state of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are both inactive, and is suspended. The game is executed using the first special figure 1 winning random number value and the special figure 1 random number value in the special figure 1 random value storage area as a starting condition that the number of variable games is 1 or more.

  Also for these special drawing related lottery processes, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery processing before the special figure 1 related lottery processing, so that the special figure 2 variable game start condition and the special figure 1 fluctuation Even if the game start conditions are satisfied at the same time, since the special figure 2 variable game is changing first, the special figure 1 variable game does not start changing. In addition, when the number of reserved special figure 2 variable games is 1 or more, the lottery process and the variable game related to the special figure 1 variable game hold are not performed. In addition, the notification of the result of the special symbol variable game success / failure determination by the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed by the first sub-control unit 400, and the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning at the special symbol 2 starting port 232 is notified. Priority is given to the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning in the special figure 1 starting port 230. In the present embodiment, a special figure variable game with a high advantage (in this example, special figure 2 variable game) is given priority over a low special figure variable game (in this example, special figure 1 variable game). . For this reason, it may be easy to give a difference in the advantage of the gaming state.

  In the case of the special figure 2 related lottery process in step S229, the main control unit 300 starts the special figure 2 start information (special) from the earliest (most previously stored) holding position in the special figure 2 random value storage area. 2), and based on the special figure 2 winning random number value in the obtained special figure 2 start information, the value of the special figure probability variation flag in the RAM 308, and the like. Is used as a big hit or a small hit (in this example, the small hit can be selected only in FIG. 1) using the determination table (see FIGS. 10 (a) to 10 (d) described later). Or whether it is determined to be out of place (judgment determination). Next, the main control unit 300, based on the special figure 2 random value in the acquired special figure 2 start information and the determined success / failure determination result, etc., the special figure determination table (FIG. 11 (a), Using the symbol distribution table shown in FIG. 12A, the symbol (stop symbol) to be stopped and displayed after the variation display of the special diagram 2 is determined. Next, the main control unit 300 is stored in the ROM 306 based on, for example, the determined success / failure determination result, the stop symbol, the special figure 2 holding number at the time of the determination, the acquired special figure variation time determination random number value, and the like. The variable display time (timer number) in FIG. 2 is determined using various tables (for example, a timer number selection table not shown).

  The main control unit 300 extracts the first special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, erases the first special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, 2 is subtracted from the special figure 2 hold number in the hold number storage area. At this time, the special figure 2 start information extracted from the special figure 2 random value storage area is stored in the temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the above-described determination is performed based on the special figure 2 start information stored in the temporary area. You may do it.

  After the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) as described above, the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) is performed in the same manner.

  In the above description, the special figure 2 variable game having a high advantage is started in preference to the special figure 1 variable game having a low advantage, and the special figure 2 hold is prioritized over the special figure 1 hold. Special figure 2 priority fluctuation is given as an example, but special figure 1 variable game with low advantage is started over special figure 2 variable game with high advantage, and special figure 1 suspension is The special figure 1 priority fluctuation | variation digested preferentially over hold may be sufficient. In addition, priority is not given to special figure 2 variable game and special figure 1 variable game, and the start opening prize is started in the order in which the special figure variable games related to the holding of each of special figure 1 and special figure 2 are held at the start opening. It may be a forward variation. In the starting order winning order variation, the upper limit number of holds is 8 regardless of the special figures 1 and 2, and compared with the priority fluctuation in which the upper limit number of holds is 4 in each of the special figures 1 and 2 In some cases, the substantial upper limit of the number of holds can be increased.

  In the above description, it is assumed that the lottery process and the variable game relating to the holding of the other special figure are not performed according to the state of the special figure, but the invention is not limited to this, and the special figure state update described above is not performed. The process and the special figure related lottery process may be performed independently in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, respectively, so that a plurality of special figures may be changed simultaneously. In addition, when a plurality of special figures are changed at the same time, a plurality of areas for displaying the lottery results of each special figure are provided on the decorative symbol display device 208 or the lottery results of each special figure are displayed. A plurality of decorative symbol display devices may be provided, and the lottery results may be displayed separately, or the lottery results of a plurality of special drawings may be displayed in one area. In addition, when fluctuations related to a plurality of special figures are performed simultaneously, the lottery result of the special figure that stopped the fluctuation may affect the lottery result of the special figure that stops the fluctuation later.

  In step S233 following step S231, command setting transmission processing is performed. In this command setting transmission process, various commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of 16 bits, for example, bit 15 is strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bits 11 to 14 are Command type (in this embodiment, basic command, symbol variation start command, symbol variation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot round number designation command, power recovery command, RAM clear command, prefetch result information command Information that can specify the type of command, etc.), bits 0 to 10 are constituted by command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type). Further, in the present embodiment, a symbol variation start command and a symbol variation stop command related to a common symbol are also included as command types.

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on or off by the command transmission process described above. In addition, if the command type is a special symbol design change start (rotation start) command, the command data includes various big hit flags, small hit flags, outlier flags, special figure probability fluctuation flags, and special drawing related lottery processing. In the case of the symbol variation stop (rotation stop) command, including information indicating the timer number selected in, including the values of various big hit flags, small hit flags, outlier flags, special figure probability variation flags, etc. In the case of a start command and an end production start command, information including the value of a special figure probability variation flag, etc., and in the case of a jackpot round number designation command, information indicating the value of a special figure probability variation flag, the number of big hit rounds, etc. Is included. When the command type indicates a basic command, device information in the command data, presence / absence of winning in the special figure 1 starting port 230, presence / absence of winning in the special figure 2 starting port 232, winning in the variable winning ports 234 and 235 Contains information indicating presence or absence. In the case of a prefetch result information command, information indicating the types of special figure 1 and special figure 2, the prefetch number stored in the prefetch number storage area described later, the stop symbol stored in the prefetch result storage unit, etc. Included.

  In addition, if the command type is a normal symbol variation start (rotation start) command, the command data includes values such as a universal symbol per unit flag, a general symbol deviation flag, a general symbol probability variation flag, etc. Information that includes information about the determined stop symbol and variation time, and in the case of a regular symbol variation stop (rotation stop) command, information indicating the value of the universal symbol per unit flag, the usual symbol deviation flag, the common symbol probability variation flag, etc. Is included.

  In the rotation start setting transmission process described above, the command data includes values such as various big hit flags, small hit flags, off-set flags, and special figure probability variation flags stored in the RAM 308, special figure 1 related lottery processes, and special figures. Information indicating the timer number selected in the FIG. 2 related lottery process, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game being held, etc. is set. In the rotation stop setting transmission process described above, information indicating values of various big hit flags, small hit flags, loss flags, special figure probability variation flags, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data.

  In the winning effect setting transmission process described above, the command control data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period, the special figure probability variation flag Information indicating the value, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game being held, etc. is set. In the above-described end effect setting transmission process, the command control data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period, the special figure probability variation flag Information indicating the value, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game being held, etc. is set. In the above-described special winning opening release setting transmission process, the command data includes the number of big hits stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game held. Set the information that indicates. In the above-mentioned special winning opening closing setting transmission process, the command data includes the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game held. Set the information that indicates.

  In step S233, general command special figure hold increase processing is also performed. In this general command special figure pending increase process, special figure identification information (information showing special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308, command notice information (preliminary notice information, false) Set either advance notice information or no advance notice information).

  In the first sub-control unit 400, it is possible to determine the production control according to the change of the game control in the main control unit 300 by the command type included in the received output schedule information, and it is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, the contents of effect control can be determined.

  In step S235 following step S233, external output signal setting processing is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

  In step S237 following step S235, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of the various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read, and the presence or absence of a predetermined error, for example, the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or the presence or absence of a bottom pan full error is monitored. . When a front frame door open error or a lower pan full error is detected, the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 includes device information indicating whether there is a front frame door open error or a lower pan full error. Set. Further, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening and closing of the special figure 2 starting port 232 and the variable prize winning ports 234 and 235, and the general diagram display device 210 and the special figure 1 display via the drive circuits 324, 326 and 330. Display data to be output to the device 212, the special figure 2 display device 214, various status display units 328, and the like is set in the output port of the I / O 310. Further, the output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the payout control unit 600 via the output port of the I / O 310.

  In step S239 following step S237, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is ON. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when power supply cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and when the low voltage signal is off (when power supply cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241. In step S241, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is set in each original register, interrupt permission is set, etc., and then the main control unit main process shown in FIG. Return to. On the other hand, in step S243, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the power-off state at the time of power recovery is saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 as return data, and power-off processing such as initialization of input / output ports is performed. After that, the process returns to the main process of the main control unit shown in FIG.

  FIG. 8A is a flowchart showing an example of the flow of the special figure prefetching process executed in the winning acceptance process (step S217). In the special figure prefetching process, the main control unit 300 prefetches the increased start information (newly acquired start information) in each of special figure 1 and special figure 2, and pre-stops the stop symbol before the success / failure determination process. The predetermination result (special drawing prefetching result) is stored in the prefetching result storage unit (see FIGS. 8B to 8E) in the RAM 308.

  Here, in the RAM 308, the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit for storing the special figure 1 prefetch result and the number of special figure 1 prefetch results stored in the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit are specially displayed. A special figure 1 pre-reading number storage area for storing as one pre-reading number is provided. The prefetch result storage unit for special figure 1 can store up to four prefetch results in this example. In the special figure 1 prefetching result storage unit, every time the number of special figure 1 prefetching decreases by one, the data of the special figure 1 prefetching result with the highest rank (first) is erased and the remaining special figure 1 prefetching result Are processed so that the rank of the data is incremented by one. Each time the special figure 1 prefetch number increases by one, new special figure 1 prefetch result data is written in the next rank of the special figure 1 prefetch result data of the lowest rank (last).

  Also, in the RAM 308, the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit for storing the special figure 2 prefetch result and the number of special figure 2 prefetch results stored in the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit are stored in the special figure 2 prefetch. A special figure 2 pre-reading number storage area for storing numbers is provided. The prefetch result storage unit for special figure 2 can store up to four prefetch results in this example. In the special figure 2 prefetching result storage unit, every time the number of special figure 2 prefetching decreases by one, the data of the special figure 2 prefetching result having the highest rank is deleted and the order of the remaining special figure 2 prefetching result data Are processed so that they are incremented by one. Each time the special figure 2 prefetch number increases by one, new special figure 2 prefetch result data is written in the next rank of the special figure 2 prefetch data having the lowest rank.

  In the special figure prefetching process, first, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the start information of the special figure 2 has increased (step S301). The determination as to whether or not the start information of the special figure 2 has increased is made, for example, by referring to the special figure 2 hold number stored in the special figure 2 hold number storage area and the special figure 2 prefetch number storage area. The comparison is made with the number of pre-reads in FIG. The main control unit 300 determines that the start information of the special figure 2 has increased when the special figure 2 hold number is larger than the special figure 2 prefetch number, and the special figure 2 hold number is equal to the special figure 2 prefetch number. It is determined that the starting information in Fig. 2 has not increased. When it is determined that the start information of FIG. 2 has increased, the process proceeds to step S303, and when it is determined that the start information of FIG. 2 has not increased, the process proceeds to step S307.

  In step S303, the increased special figure 2 starting information (a special figure 2 winning random value and a set of special figure 2 random values) is processed before the success / failure determination process in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229). FIG. 2 Read ahead from the random value storage area. Then, using the pre-read special figure 2 start information and the determination table for special determination 2 and the special figure determination table used at the time of determination, for example, the special figure 2 variable game stop symbol related to the start information is selected. Prior determination is made before the success / failure determination process in the process (step S229). Note that this pre-determination process may be performed using a special table for pre-determination instead of the table used at the time of determination.

  In step S 305 subsequent to step S 303, the stop symbol information as the special figure 2 prefetch result obtained in the pre-determination is stored in the earliest free area of the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S307.

  In step S307, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the start information of FIG. 1 has increased. The determination as to whether or not the start information of FIG. 1 has increased is made, for example, in the same way as in FIG. 2, the special figure 1 hold number stored in the special figure 1 hold number storage area and the special figure 1 prefetch number storage area This is done by comparing the special figure 1 pre-reading number stored in. If it is determined that the start information of FIG. 1 has increased, the process proceeds to step S309. If it is determined that the start information of FIG. Return to the winning acceptance process (step S217).

  In step S309, it is determined based on various flags in the RAM 308 whether or not non-electric support is in progress. If it is determined that the non-electric support is being performed, the process proceeds to step S311. If it is determined that the non-electric support is not being performed (the electric support is being performed), the process proceeds to step S315. In this example, it is determined whether or not non-electric support is being performed, but it may be determined in step S309 whether or not the execution condition of the special figure 1 prefetch notice is satisfied. For example, the execution conditions of the special figure 1 pre-reading notice include conditions such as not being in a big hit game other than being in non-electric support.

  In step S311, the increased special figure 1 start information (a special figure 1 winning random value and a pair of special figure 1 random value) is processed before the success determination process in the special figure 1 lottery process (step S231). FIG. 1 Read ahead from the random value storage area. Then, using the pre-read special figure 1 start information and the determination table for special determination and the special figure determination table used at the time of determination, for example, the special figure 1 variable game stop symbol related to the start information is selected as the special figure 1 related lottery. Prior determination is made before the success / failure determination process in the process (step S231). Note that this pre-determination process may be performed using a special table for pre-determination instead of the table used at the time of determination.

  In step S313 following step S311, the stop symbol information as the special figure 1 prefetching result obtained in the prior determination is stored in the earliest free area of the special figure 1 prefetching result storage unit in the RAM 308. Thereafter, the special figure prefetching process is terminated, and the process returns to the winning acceptance process (step S217) of the main control unit timer interruption process.

  In step S315, the pre-read result for pre-Fig. 1 is stored in the RAM 308 in place of the stop symbol information, instead of pre-reading the start-up information without pre-reading the increased special Fig. 1 start information. Stored in the earliest free area of the copy. Thereafter, the special figure prefetching process is terminated, and the process returns to the winning acceptance process (step S217) of the main control unit timer interruption process.

  In the present embodiment, only the increased start information is pre-read and pre-determined. However, all start information may be pre-read and pre-determined. Further, in the above-described command setting transmission process (step S233), only the pre-read result of the starting information for the increase may be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, or the pre-read result storage for special figure 1 and special figure 2 All the prefetching results in the section may be transmitted to the first sub-control section 400.

  In the present embodiment, pre-reading is always executed for the increased starting information of Special Figure 2, and pre-reading is always executed for the increased starting information of Special Figure 1 except during the electric support. Further, it may be determined by lottery whether to pre-read the starting information of the increased special figure 1 and special figure 2. Alternatively, in the first sub-control unit 400 that has received the prefetch result from the main control unit 300, for example, it may be determined by lottery whether to perform prefetch notification for each hold. Regardless of the gaming state (for example, whether or not non-electric support is in progress), when the start information increases, prefetching is always executed and the prefetching result is stored in the prefetching result storage unit. The result may be configured to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 may determine whether or not to execute the lottery and effect using the pre-read result.

  FIGS. 8B to 8E illustrate a state in which the prefetch result information and the like are stored in the prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308. FIG. 8B shows an example of a state in which the special figure 1 prefetch result information is stored in the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 8B, the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit has, for example, the same number (four in the present embodiment) of storage areas as the special figure 1 variable game holdable number. . Each storage area is associated with the hold order (hold 1 to hold 4) of the special figure 1 random value storage area. In each of the storage areas, the stop symbol information of Special Figure 1 is stored. In the example shown in FIG. 8B, the storage area “hold 1” stores “special chart G” (out of line) as stop symbol information, and the storage area “hold 2” stores “special chart G” as stop symbol information. "(Out of line)" is stored, "Special Figure F" (small hit) is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area "Hold 3", and "Special Figure A" is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area "Hold 4". (15R special jackpot) is stored.

  FIG. 8C shows an example of a state in which the special figure 2 prefetch result information is stored in the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 8C, the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit has, for example, the same number (four in the present embodiment) of storage areas as the special figure 2 variable game holdable number. . Each storage area is associated with the hold order (hold 1 to hold 4) of the special figure 2 random value storage area. In each of the storage areas, the stop symbol information of the special figure 2 is stored. In the example shown in FIG. 8C, the storage area “hold 1” stores “special drawing d” (out of line) as stop symbol information, and the storage areas “hold 2” to “hold 4” have stop symbols. Information is not stored. In FIG. 8C, the state where the stop symbol information is not stored in the storage area is described as “none”.

  FIG. 8 (d) shows an example of the prefetch result storage unit for special figure 1 during the electric support. As shown in FIG. 8D, “undecided” information is stored in the storage area “hold 1” instead of the stopped symbol information. In the storage areas “hold 2” to “hold 4”, neither stop symbol information nor “undecided” information is stored.

  As shown in FIG. 8E, in each storage area of the special chart 1 prefetch result storage section, “timer number” indicating the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 variable game is not the stop symbol information but the prefetch result. May be stored. In the example shown in FIG. 8E, the storage area “pending 1” stores “timer 3” as timer number information, the storage area “pending 2” stores “timer 5” as timer number information, No timer number information is stored in the storage areas “hold 3” and “hold 4”. In FIG. 8E, a state in which the timer number information is not stored is expressed as “none”. In addition, when timer number information is stored in each storage area of the special chart 1 prefetch result storage unit, the timer number may be set so as to correspond to the success / failure result.

  In the above description, an example is given in which stop symbols and timer numbers are pre-determined, and stop symbol information and timer number information are stored in the prefetch result storage unit. While being stored in the result storage unit, it may be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 as prefetching result information.

  Next, various tables used in the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described. Various tables shown in FIGS. 9 to 12 are stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300, for example.

  FIGS. 9A and 9B show an example of the success / failure determination table used when the success / failure determination is performed in the common drawing related lottery process (step S223). The success / failure determination table shown in FIGS. 9A and 9B includes items of “normal probability”, “random number range”, and “correction result”. The item “normal figure probability” indicates the normal figure probability (ordinary figure low probability or common figure high probability) at the time of determination of success or failure. The item “Random number range” indicates a numerical range to be compared with the acquired normal winning random number value. Here, the possible range of the normal winning random number in this example is 0 to 99 (the range of the numerical range is 100).

  The success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 9A is a normal / failure determination table used when the probability of normalization at the time of determination of success / failure is low. As shown in FIG. 9A, when this success / failure determination table is used, the winning probability is 1/100 (that is, 1%), and the probability of losing is 99/100.

  The success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 9B is a normal / failure determination table used in the case where the normal probability at the time of determination is high. As shown in FIG. 9B, when this success / failure determination table is used, the probability of winning is about 100/100 (that is, 100%), and the probability of loss is 0%. When this success / failure determination table is compared with the success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 9A, the winning probability is 100 times. In this way, it is possible to design so that only the hit is selected in the usual high probability state (during short-time operation). Further, the probability of deviation may be higher than 0% at the time of short-time operation, but the probability of hit selection being higher at the time of short-time operation than at the time of short-time operation (ordinary low probability state).

  FIG. 9C shows a table for symbol allocation and hit operation for ordinary use. The numerical value in the “distribution” column in the table is the random number range distribution rate for each symbol (that is, the symbol of each symbol, which is compared with the general random number value when the stop symbol is determined in the general symbol related lottery process (step S223)). Equal to selection probability). As shown in FIG. 9 (c), in the case where the result of determining whether or not the normal-game variable game is successful, the allocation ratio of each winning symbol is 50% for the normal-game A and 50% for the normal-game B. Normal maps A and B are symbols in which the electric chew release operation is executed after the normal variable game. It should be noted that when the determination result is out of order, only one out of the ordinary figure C is selected as the out of order symbol, so in the case of out of place, the ordinary figure C is selected with a probability of 100%. When the general figure C is selected, the electric chew release operation is not executed after the general figure variable game.

  As shown in FIG. 9C, after the general map A is stopped and displayed, the opening operation of the special figure 2 starting port (electrical chew) 232 is executed. When the game state at the time of the stop display of FIG. A is not operating for a short time, the blade member 232a of the electric Chu 232 is first opened for 100 ms, then closed for 5000 to 10000 ms, and then opened for 5400 ms. To do. When the game state at the time of the stop display in FIG. A is short-time operation, the blade member 232a of the electric Chu 232 is first opened for 1800 ms, then closed for about 2000 ms, then opened again for 1800 ms, It closes for about 2000 ms and opens again for 1800 ms.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 9C, after the general map B is stopped and displayed, the opening operation of the special figure 2 starting port (electrical chew) 232 is executed. When the game state at the time of the stop display in FIG. B is not operating for a short time, the blade member 232a of the electric Chu 232 is opened only once for 100 ms. When the game state at the time of the stop display in FIG. B is short-time operation, the blade member 232a of the electric Chu 232 is first opened for 2400 ms, then closed for about 2000 ms, then opened for about 1450 ms, and again It closes for about 2000 ms and opens again for 1450 ms.

  FIGS. 10A to 10D show an example of the determination table used when determining whether or not the lottery process is related to the special figure 2 lottery process (step S229) or the special figure 1 lottery process (step S231). Yes. The success / failure determination table shown in FIGS. 10A to 10D includes items of “special figure probability”, “random number range”, and “correction determination result”. The item “special figure probability” indicates a special figure probability (special figure low probability or special figure high probability) at the time of determination of success or failure. The item “random number range” indicates a numerical range to be compared with the acquired special figure 2 winning random value or the special figure 1 winning random value. Here, the possible range of the special figure 2 winning random value and the special figure 1 winning random value of this example is 0 to 65535 (the range of the numerical value range is 65536).

  The success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 10 (a) is a success / failure determination table for special figure 1 used when the special figure probability at the time of success / failure determination is low. As shown in FIG. 10A, when this success / failure determination table is used, the big hit probability is about 1/299 (= 219/65536), and the small hit probability is about 1/399 (= 165 / 65536).

  The success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 10 (b) is a success / failure determination table for special figure 1 used when the special figure probability at the time of the validity determination is high. As shown in FIG. 10B, when this success / failure determination table is used, the big hit probability is about 1/30 (= 2185/65536), and the small hit probability is about 1/399. When this success / failure determination table is compared with the success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 10 (a), the big hit probability is about 10 times and the small hit probability is the same.

  The success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 10 (c) is the success / failure determination table for special figure 2 used when the special figure probability at the time of success / failure determination is low. As shown in FIG. 10C, when this success / failure determination table is used, the big hit probability is about 1/299 and the small hit probability is zero.

  The success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 10 (d) is a success / failure determination table for special figure 2 that is used when the special figure probability at the time of success / failure determination is high. As shown in FIG. 10D, when this success / failure determination table is used, the big hit probability is about 1/30 and the small hit probability is zero. When this success / failure determination table is compared with the success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 10 (c), the probability of jackpot is about 10 times.

  Fig.11 (a) has shown the symbol distribution table for the special figure 1. FIG. The numerical value in the “distribution” column in the table is a distribution ratio of random numbers for each symbol (that is, each symbol) compared with the special symbol 1 random value when determining the stop symbol in the special symbol 1 related lottery process (step S231). It is equal to the symbol selection probability). As shown in FIG. 11 (a), when the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is the big hit, the special symbol A (15R special big hit) is 30%, and the special figure B (7R special big hit) is 25%, special figure C (7R big hit) is 25%, special figure D (sudden probability big hit) is 10%, special figure E (latent probability big hit) is 10% is there. Special drawings A, B, D, and E, excluding special drawing C, are symbols for which the probability change is activated after the big hit game ends. The ratio of probability variation jackpots (special drawings A, B, D, E) in the jackpot of the special figure 1 variable game, that is, the probability variation probability is 75%.

  Special illustrations A, B, and D are the gaming state (special figure high probability, special figure low probability, normal figure high probability (during short-time operation), normal figure low probability (due to short-time inactive) at the time of determination of success / failure (during symbol stop display) Regardless of the time)), the time is shortened (no time reduction is set) after the big hit game ends. The special figure C is a symbol in which the time is shortened (the number of time reductions is 100 times) after the big hit game is finished, regardless of the game state at the time of the determination of success or failure. The special figure E is a symbol in which the short time is activated after the big hit game is completed only when the gaming state at the time of the determination is a special figure high probability state or a normal figure high probability state. That is, when special figure E is stopped and displayed in the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state, the time reduction does not operate after the big hit game ends. For example, when special figure E is stopped and displayed as a big hit symbol continuously several times from a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state, the time reduction does not operate after the first stop display (special figure high probability normal figure) However, after the second and subsequent stops, the short time is activated (the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state is entered). In the special figure 1 variable game jackpot, the probability of time reduction is 90% in the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state and 100% in the other game states.

  In this example, there is only one kind of small hits symbol and off symbol in the special figure 1 variable game. Therefore, when the result of the special figure 1 variable game is determined to be a small hit, the special figure F is selected with a probability of 100% regardless of the special figure 1 random value, and the result of the special figure 1 variable game is determined. If it is out of place, the special figure G is selected with a probability of 100% regardless of the special figure 1 random value. However, a plurality of types of small hit symbols and outlier symbols may be provided in the same manner as the big hit symbols, and may be determined by lottery using special figure 1 random numbers.

  FIG.11 (b) has shown the example of the operation | movement at the time of the big hit in each symbol of the special figure 1. FIG. As shown in FIG. 11B, in the jackpot game after the special figure A is stopped and displayed, the attacker is released for 15R at 29000 ms per 1R. Similarly, in the jackpot game after special figure B or special figure C is stopped and displayed, the attacker is released for 7R at 29000 ms per 1R, and in the jackpot game after special figure D is stopped and displayed, the attacker is released. Is performed 2R at 29000 ms per 1R.

  As for special figure E, the operation of the big hit game differs depending on the game state at the time of the symbol stop display. In the big hit game after the special figure E is stopped and displayed in the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state, the attacker is released 2R at 100 ms per 1R. In this big hit game, it is difficult to enter a game ball because the opening time is short. On the other hand, in the big hit game after the special figure E is stopped and displayed in a game state other than the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state, 2R is played at 29000 ms per 1R. In this big hit game, it is easy to enter a game ball because the opening time is relatively long.

  In the small hit game after the special figure F is stopped and displayed, the 100 ms attacker release is performed twice in one release opportunity. That is, the attacker operates in the same manner in the big hit game after the special figure E is stopped and displayed in the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state and the small hit game after the special figure F is stopped and displayed.

  Fig.12 (a) has shown the symbol distribution table for the special figure 2. FIG. The numerical value in the “distribution” column in the table is the distribution ratio of the random number range for each symbol (that is, each symbol) that is compared with the special symbol 2 random value when determining the stop symbol in the special symbol 2 related lottery process (step S229). It is equal to the symbol selection probability). As shown in FIG. 12 (a), in the case where the determination result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, the distribution ratio of each big hit symbol is 70% for the special figure a (15R special big hit), and the special figure b (7R special big hit) is 5%, special figure c (7R big hit) is 25%. Special figures a and b are symbols for which the probability change is activated after the big hit game ends. The ratio of probability variation jackpots (special figures a and b) in the special figure 2 variable game jackpot, that is, the probability variation probability is 75%, which is the same as the probability variation probability of the special figure 1 variable game.

  Special illustrations a and b indicate the game state at the time of the success / failure determination (design stop display) (special figure high probability, special figure low probability, normal figure high probability (during short-time operation), normal figure low probability (during short-time inactive) Regardless of the), the time is shortened (no time reduction setting is set) after the big hit game ends. The special figure c is a symbol in which the time is shortened (the number of time reductions is 100 times) after the big hit game is finished, regardless of the game state at the time of determination of success / failure. The probability that the time is given in the big hit of the special figure 2 variable game is 100% regardless of the game state.

  In this example, there is only one type of outlier symbol in the special figure 2 variable game. Accordingly, when the result of determining whether or not the special figure 2 variable game is correct is out of order, the special figure d is selected with a probability of 100% regardless of the special figure 2 random value. However, a plurality of types of missing symbols may be provided in the same manner as the jackpot symbol, and may be determined by lottery using special figure 2 random values.

  FIG.12 (b) has shown the example of the operation | movement at the time of the big hit in each symbol of the special figure 2. FIG. As shown in FIG. 12B, in the jackpot game after the special figure a is stopped and displayed, the attacker is released for 15R at 29000 ms per 1R, and after the special figure b or the special figure c is stopped and displayed. In the big hit game, the attacker is released 7R at 29000ms per 1R.

  As shown in FIG. 11 and FIG. 12, the special figure 2 has a higher probability of being given a shorter time than the special figure 1 and has a longer open time of the attacker (or a larger R number). Therefore, it can be considered that the special figure 2 is more advantageous than the special figure 1.

  Next, processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 and 14. FIG. 13A is a flowchart showing a flow of main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. First, in step S401 in FIG. 13A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S401. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

  In step S403 following step S401, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S405. . In step S405, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

  In step S407 following step S405, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

  In step S409 following step S407, an effect control process is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S407, processing such as reading the effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and when it is necessary to update the effect data, the effect data is updated. Among the various processes executed in the effect control process, the electric long open effect will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S411 following step S409, a chance button control process is performed. In the chance button control process, when the pressing of the chance button 136 is detected, the effect data updated in step S409 is changed to the effect data corresponding to the pressing of the chance button 136.

  In step S413 subsequent to step S411, image control processing is performed. In the image control process, when there is a command to the VDP 434 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the VDP 434 (details will be described later).

  In step S415 following step S413, sound control processing is performed. In the sound control process, if there is a command to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the sound source IC 416.

  In step S417 following step S415, lamp control processing is performed. In the lamp control process, if there is a command to various lamps 418 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the drive circuit 420.

  In step S419 following step S417, shutter control processing is performed. In the shutter control process, if there is a command to the shielding device 246 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the drive circuit 432.

  In step S421 following step S419, information transmission processing is performed. In the information transmission process, when there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read in step S409, a setting is made to output this control command. Thereafter, the process returns to step S403.

  FIG. 13B is a flowchart showing the flow of the first sub control unit command reception interrupt process (strobe interrupt process) executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal from the main control unit 300. In step S501 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the main control unit 300 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408 as an unprocessed command.

  FIG. 13C is a flowchart showing the flow of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this example, once every 2 ms). The timer interrupt process is triggered by this timer interrupt. Run in cycles. In step S601 of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S403 of the first sub control unit main process, and the result is stored in the original timer variable storage area. To do. Therefore, in step S403, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

  In step S603 following step S601, a control command is transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 set in the information transmission process (step S421) of the first sub-control unit main process, and other random number values for effects are updated. Etc.

  FIG. 13D is a flowchart showing the flow of the image control process (step S413) of the first sub-control unit main process. In step S701, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 404 first swaps the designation of the display areas A and B in the VRAM 436. As a result, an image of one frame stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative design display device 208. Next, the CPU 404 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 406), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 436) and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 434 based on the position information table and the like, and then the image from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 434 transfers the image data from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436 based on the command set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 434 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 404.

  In step S703 following step S701, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 is input. If a transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S705. Wait for the input signal to be input.

  In step S705, parameters are set based on the production scenario configuration table and attribute data. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 436 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 436 in step S701, the CPU 404 has information on the image data constituting the display image (coordinate axis and image size of the VRAM 436). , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates, etc.) are instructed to the VDP 434. The VDP 434 performs parameter setting according to the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register.

  In step S707 following step S705, a drawing instruction is performed. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 404 instructs the VDP 434 to start drawing an image. The VDP 434 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer in accordance with an instruction from the CPU 404.

  In step S709 following step S707, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 based on the end of image drawing is input. If a generation end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S711. Waits for the generation end interrupt signal to be input.

  In step S711, a scene display counter which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 and counts how many scene images have been generated is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

  FIG. 14A shows the flow of the electric long opening effect process executed in the effect control process of the main process in the first sub-control unit 400. FIG. 14 (b) shows an example of an electric long open effect on the decorative symbol display device 208. The electric-chu-long opening effect is an effect that can be executed during a normal-game variable game, and the special-image 2 start opening (electric-chu) 232 is opened for a long time and / or multiple times (hereinafter referred to as a multi-game variable game). This may be referred to as long open). It should be noted that, even after the normal fluctuation stop, the electric-chu-long opening effect (for example, a notification effect such as “electric-chu-opening!”) May be continued based on the normal signal stop symbol.

  The electric long-long opening effect process shown in FIG. 14 (a) is a normal symbol change start from the main control unit 300 in the command process (step S407) of the main process of the first sub-control unit 400 in FIG. 13 (a). This is executed when a (start rotation) command is received.

  First, sub-control unit 400 first determines whether or not the electric long opening effect execution restriction flag for restricting the execution of electric long opening effect is off (step S801). The first sub-control unit 400 refers to the value of the electric long open effect execution restriction flag stored in a predetermined area in the RAM 408 and determines whether or not the execution of the electric long open effect is restricted. For example, even when the electric tulong release effect is executed during display darkness in which the entire image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is black, the player cannot visually recognize the effect and the effect of the electric chew long release effect cannot be obtained. . Therefore, in such a case, the electric long-long opening effect execution restriction flag is turned on based on the effect based on the determination result of the special figure fluctuation game during display darkening. In addition, when the entire image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is not dark-displayed and the fluctuation time of the normal figure fluctuation game is long enough to execute the electric-chu-long opening effect, It is possible to perform an electric Chulong opening effect that can entertain the user. Therefore, in such a case, the electric long-long opening effect execution restriction flag is turned off based on the effect or demonstration effect based on the determination result of the special figure fluctuation game.

  If the electric-chu-long opening effect execution restriction flag is on in step S801, the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the electric-chu-long opening effect is restricted, and controls the electric-chu-long opening effect. Other control processes are executed, this process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process effect control process (step S409).

  If the electric-chu-long opening effect execution restriction flag is off in step S801, the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the electric-chu long opening effect can be executed, and proceeds to step S803 to start the usual symbol variation (start rotation). It is determined whether or not the result of determining whether or not the normal-game variable game is successful by referring to information about the normal-game hit flag and the normal-use flag from the command data of the command.

  If the first sub-control unit 400 determines in step S803 that the result of determining whether or not the normal figure variation game is successful, the process proceeds to step S805, where the first sub-control unit 400 determines the normal figure from the command data of the normal symbol change start (rotation start) command. With reference to the information regarding the stop symbol, it is determined whether or not the stop symbol of the normal figure variable game is the normal symbol A.

  If the first sub-control unit 400 determines in step S805 that the stop symbol of the usual figure variable game is the usual figure A, the first sub-control unit 400 proceeds to step S807, selects the effect whose effect type is “success pattern”, and opens the electric tulong. Set as production. Next, the first sub-control unit 400 proceeds to step S809, executes other control processing for the electric long open effect based on the “success pattern”, ends this processing, and effects control of the main processing The process returns to the process (step S409).

  If the first sub-control unit 400 determines in step S805 that the usual variable game is not the usual figure A, the first sub-control unit 400 proceeds to step S811, selects an effect whose effect type is “failure pattern A”, and releases the electric tulong. Set as production. Next, the first sub-control unit 400 proceeds to step S809, executes other control processing for the electric-chu-long opening effect based on “failure pattern A”, ends this processing, and produces the main processing effect. The process returns to the control process (step S409).

  If the first sub-control unit 400 determines in step S803 that the result of determining whether or not the normal game is a winning game is not successful, the first sub-control unit 400 proceeds to step S815 and executes an electric tulong opening false (gasse) effect execution lottery process. In the electric long open false effect execution lottery process, a random value is extracted from the random counter for electric long open false effect execution lottery provided in the RAM 408, and the electric long open false effect execution lottery table stored in the ROM 406 is stored. Is used to determine whether or not the random number value is a hit.

  The first sub-control unit 400 determines whether or not to execute the electric long open false effect based on the result of the determination in step S815 (step S817).

  If the first sub-control unit 400 determines in step S817 to execute the electric-chu-long opening false effect, the first sub-control unit 400 proceeds to step S821, selects an effect whose effect type is “failed pattern B”, and sets it as an electric-chu-long opening effect. Next, the first sub-control unit 400 proceeds to step S809, executes other control processing for the electric-chu-long opening effect based on “failure pattern B”, ends this processing, and produces the main processing effect. The process returns to the control process (step S409).

  If the first sub-control unit 400 determines in step S817 that the electric-chu-long opening false effect is not executed, the first sub-control unit 400 executes another control process for not executing the electric-chu-long opening effect, ends this processing, and performs the main processing. The process returns to the effect control process (step S409).

  In the process of the electric-chu-long opening effect shown in FIG. 14, when the electric-chu-long opening effect execution restriction flag is off, the electric-chu-long opening effect is always performed if it is a win. The lottery may be performed in the same manner as when the game is off, and the presentation may be performed only when the lottery is won. Also, in this example, when the electric chew is open for a short time (short open) (general figure B), the production of “failure pattern A” is set, and when the electric chew is not released (general figure C), “failure pattern A” is set. The effect “B” is set, but the same effect may be performed with a deviation (common figure B) from the hit (normal figure B).

  FIG. 14B shows an example of the electric tulong opening effect. FIG. 14B shows a display effect being executed in the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The entire surface of the image display area becomes the effect display area 208d, and for example, a background effect named “Land Stage” is executed. In the front of the background effect, the decoration display of the decoration pattern in which “decoration 1” to “decoration 10” sequentially move from top to bottom in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c (indicated by a downward arrow in the figure). Is running. A change icon display area a is arranged on the lower left side in the effect display area 208d, and a change icon of a pattern imitating a car is displayed. On the right side of the fluctuation icon display area a, a special figure hold display area c for displaying special figure hold is arranged, and a hold icon b having a pattern imitating an automobile is displayed. On the lower right side in the effect display area 208d, an electric long open effect area d is arranged. An ordinary figure display device 210 (not shown) starts the ordinary figure variation game, the execution of the electric-chu-long opening effect is not restricted, and the electric-chu-long opening effect area d is executed. As an electric Chu-long opening effect, an image of a samurai character operating the lottery machine is displayed along with a display of “help chance drawing”, and the special figure 2 start opening 232 is won by winning the ordinary figure variable game. There is a roaring effect that makes the player expect that it may be released long. As shown in FIG. 14 (b), a part of the right symbol display area 208c is hidden by the electric tulong opening effect. In addition, a part of the right side area of the special figure hold display area c is also hidden. As described above, when the electric-chu-long opening effect may make it difficult to confirm at least part of the decorative symbol variation display, or when the decorative symbol variation display makes it difficult to confirm at least part of the electric-chu long opening effect. There may be.

  Next, the processing of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. First, in step S901 in FIG. 15A, various initial settings are performed. When power is turned on, initialization processing is first executed in step S901. In this initialization processing, initial setting of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 508, and the like are performed.

  In step S903 following step S901, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more. This process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S905. . In step S905, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

  In step S907 following step S905, command processing is performed. The CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 determines whether a command is received from the first sub control unit 400.

  In step S909 following step S907, an effect control process is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S907, processing such as reading the effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 506 is performed, and when the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated.

  In step S911 following step S909, lamp control processing is performed. For example, if there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the game board lamp 532 or the game table frame lamp 542, this command is output to the serial communication control circuit 520.

  In step S913 following step S911, a movable body control process is performed. For example, when there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the effect movable body (224Fa, 224Fb, 224E), this command is output to the drive circuit 516. Thereafter, the process returns to step S903.

  FIG. 15B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub control unit 500 detects a strobe signal from the first sub control unit 400. In step S1001 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the first sub control unit 400 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508 as an unprocessed command.

  FIG. 15C is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this example, once every 2 ms). Run in cycles. In step S1101 of the timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S903 of the second sub-control unit main process, and the original timer variable storage area is stored. Therefore, in step S903, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S1103 following step S1101, an effect random number update process or the like is performed.

  Next, specific examples of effects executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. First, the configuration of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIGS. 16 to 36 will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment uses the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 3 as display means. Have. In the following, there will be a description overlapping with the description so far.

  Similarly to the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are arranged in the effect device 206 of the game board 200 shown in FIG. The second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are display regions smaller than the display region of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and have a vertically long rectangular display region. If the first decorative symbol display device 208L is a main display device, it can be said that the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N correspond to sub display devices. In this embodiment, a liquid crystal display device is employed as the second decorative symbol display device 208M or the third decorative symbol display device 208N. However, various effects and various game information can be displayed without using the liquid crystal display device. Others including, for example, a dot matrix display device, a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (Electro-Luminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector The display device may be adopted.

  Here, the positional relationship between the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N will be described. Thereafter, when the pachinko machine 100 is installed in, for example, an island facility, the player side facing the pachinko machine 100 is referred to as “front” (front, front side, etc.), and the opposite is “back” (rear, rear side). And In addition, when the pachinko machine 100 is installed in, for example, an island facility, the vertical upper direction is “up” (upper, upper, upper, upper end, etc.) when viewed from the player, and the opposite is “lower” (lower, lower, Lower, lower end, etc.). In addition, when the pachinko machine 100 is installed in, for example, an island facility, the horizontal left when viewed from the player is “left” (left, left, left end, etc.), and the opposite is “right” (right, right, Right end).

  The first decorative symbol display device 208L is disposed substantially at the center of the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 3, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M is disposed on the left side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The symbol display device 208N is arranged on the right side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are arranged in front of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The position in the front-rear direction of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is the same position. The second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are driven by, for example, a stepping motor or the like, and are in front of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L and in a plane parallel to the display screen. It can move left and right. In the state shown in FIG. 16A, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are located at the initial position, and when viewed in the front-rear direction, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. A part of the decorative symbol display device 208N overlaps a part of the left and right ends of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

  Display control of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is executed by the first sub-control unit 400 shown in FIG. In addition, you may provide the control part (for example, liquid crystal control part) which performs display control of the 1st decoration symbol display apparatus 208L, the 2nd decoration symbol display apparatus 208M, and the 3rd decoration symbol display apparatus 208N.

  In the example shown in FIG. 16A, “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 1” is stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the first ornamental symbol display device 208L. 16 to 36, the decorative pattern is displayed surrounded by a rectangular frame display. The display color in the frame display surrounding the odd decorative pattern (“decoration 1”, “decoration 3”, “decoration 5”, “decoration 7”, “decoration 9”) is red. 2 ”,“ decoration 4 ”,“ decoration 6 ”,“ decoration 8 ”,“ decoration 10 ”), the display color in the frame display is blue. The pachinko machine 100 displays the inside of the frame surrounding the three decorative symbols displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c in red or blue, thereby determining whether or not the special figure variation game is successful with a predetermined big hit reliability (expected degree). It is possible to execute a pre-reading notice. In the example shown in FIG. 16A, the frame display surrounding “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 1” is displayed in red (indicated by lattice hatching in FIGS. 16 to 36). The display of the pre-reading notice displayed in red in the frame display surrounding the three decorative symbols is the display of the pre-reading notice of the red chance. The jackpot reliability in the pre-reading notice of the chance is set higher in red than in blue. Note that the pachinko machine 100 may display the decorative symbol itself in red or blue to execute a pre-reading notice for the chance.

  A variation icon display area e is provided in the lower center of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The variation icon is displayed so as to be placed on the upper surface of the columnar stage (pedestal image) displayed in the variation icon display area e. The variation icon is an icon displayed in the variation icon display area e when the hold is consumed and the special figure variation game is started. By changing the mode (display mode) of the variation icon, it is possible to execute the advance notice of the variation with a predetermined jackpot reliability regarding whether or not the special figure variation game is successful. In the example shown in FIG. 16A, the variation icon e1 is displayed in a white (indicated by dot hatching in FIGS. 16 to 36) circular shape. The white circular mode is a default mode and is the mode with the lowest jackpot reliability among a plurality of modes.

  A special figure 1 hold icon display area f is provided on the left side of the fluctuation icon display area e. In the special figure 1 holding icon display area f, the number of holding icons of the special figure 1 corresponding to the number of holdings of the special figure 1 can be displayed. The pachinko machine 100 can notify the special figure 1 on-hold icon display area f of the number of special icons 1 on-line game according to the number of the special icons on the special figure 1 and also put on hold according to the mode of each on-hold icon. It is possible to execute a pre-reading notice with a predetermined jackpot reliability regarding whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful. The special figure 1 hold icon display area f is roughly divided into four areas of a first area, a second area, a third area, and a fourth area from right to left. An elliptical stage (pedestal image) indicating the display position of the hold icon in FIG. 1 is displayed at the lower part of each of the first to fourth areas. The first to fourth areas correspond to the first to fourth holding ranks, respectively. In the first area, the hold icon of FIG. 1 corresponding to the earliest (most recently stored) hold is displayed. Similarly, in the second to fourth areas, the hold icons corresponding to the second to fourth hold are displayed. The hold icons in FIG. 1 are displayed respectively. In the example shown in FIG. 16 (a), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 2, and the hold icons f1 and f2 are respectively displayed in the first area and the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f. . The hold icons f1 and f2 are displayed overlapping the upper end portion of the pedestal image. The hold icons f1 and f2 are displayed in a white circular manner. The white circular mode is a default mode and is the mode with the lowest jackpot reliability among the multiple modes. Note that the special figure 1 hold icon corresponding to the hold whose special figure 1 prefetch result is “undecided” may be displayed in a default mode. In this case, the reliability of the default mode is not set.

  As shown in FIG. 16A, the hold icon is displayed in a smaller display size than the variation icon. This may facilitate the identification of the hold icon and the fluctuation icon.

  As shown in FIG. 16A, a special figure 2 hold icon display area g is provided on the right side of the fluctuation icon display area e. In the special figure 2 holding icon display area g, the number of holding icons of the special figure 2 corresponding to the number of holdings of the special figure 2 can be displayed. In the special figure 2 holding icon display area g, it is possible to notify the number of holdings of the special figure 2 variable game by the number of the holding icons of the special figure 2, and the special figure 2 related to the holding by the mode of each holding icon. It is possible to make a pre-reading notice with a predetermined jackpot reliability as to whether or not a variable game is successful. In the example shown in FIG. 16 (a), the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 0, so that the hold icon in FIG. 2 is not displayed in the special figure 2 hold icon display area g. When the number of holdings in the special figure 2 is 0, as shown in FIG. 16A, a horizontally long rectangular display area h is provided so as to overlap a part of the special figure 2 holding icon display area g. It is done. In the display area h, it is possible to display a tutorial display and a notice display such as a description of the way of playing, description of effects, description of characters, etc. as a character image.

  A fifth symbol is displayed in the upper part of the display area of the second decorative symbol display device 208M. The fifth symbol is displayed by combining the three symbols of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol. During execution of special figure 1 or special figure 2 variable game, the symbols in the middle left and right of the fifth symbol are “1” → “2” → “3” → ... → “9” → “0” → “ Fluctuation display of the fifth symbol which is switched in the order of “1” →... Is executed. In each figure, the variable display of the fifth symbol is represented by a downward arrow. In the fifth symbol, three symbols of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are stopped and displayed, and it is possible to notify the determination result of the special figure variation game.

  A horizontally-long rectangular frame image is displayed at the bottom of the display area of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and information about the current stage is displayed in the frame image. In the example shown in FIG. 16A, the effect stage is the castle town stage, and therefore a character string image of “castle town” is displayed in the frame image.

  In the upper left part of the display area of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a number indicating the number of reserved special figures is displayed. The numbers displayed on the left side indicate the number of holds in FIG. 1, and the numbers displayed on the right side indicate the number of holds in FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 16A, the number of reserved figures in special figure 1 is 2 and the number of reserved figures in special figure 2 is 0. Therefore, “2” is displayed in the upper left of the display area of the third decorative symbol display device 208N. "And" 0 "are displayed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 16A, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment includes an eight generations 224Fa and a general combination 224Fb. The Yatsushiro character 224Fa and the shogun character 224Fb are arranged in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. The Yatsushiro character 224Fa is arranged at the upper left of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the general character 224Fb is arranged at the upper right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the right end of the Yatsushiro character 224Fa is It is arranged adjacent to the left end of the general character 224Fb. The positions in the front-rear direction of the Yatsushiro character 224Fa and the shogun character 224Fb are the same, and are the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The Yatsushiro character 224Fa has a horizontally long rectangular plate on which a part of the model name of the pachinko machine 100 (in this example, “Yatsushiro”) is written, and the general character 224Fb It has a horizontally long rectangular flat plate on which a part of the model name or the like (in this example, “general”) is written. Further, the Yatsushiro character 224Fa and the general character 224Fb have full-color LEDs and can emit light in a plurality of colors. In the state shown in FIG. 16 (a), the eight generations 224Fa and the general 224Fb emit light in white (indicated by dot hatching in FIGS. 16 to 36).

  The Yatsushiro character 224Fa and the shogun character 224Fb are driven by, for example, a stepping motor or the like, and can be moved in the vertical direction in a plane in front of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L and parallel to the display screen. is there. In the state shown in FIG. 16A, the eight generations 224Fa and the general combination 224Fb are located at the initial positions.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 16A, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment has a family crest member 224E. The family crest member 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The family crest character 224E is arranged in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. The position in the front-rear direction of the family crest member 224E is the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The family crest character 224E has a circular flat plate on which a family crest pattern is written. The family crest member 224E has a full color LED and can emit light in a plurality of colors. In the state shown in FIG. 16A, the family crest character 224E emits light in blue (indicated by the right-upward hatching in FIGS.

  The family crest character 224E is driven by, for example, a stepping motor or the like, and can move in the vertical direction in a plane in front of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L and parallel to the display screen. In the state shown in FIG. 16A, the family crest member 224E is located at the initial position.

  The drive control (movement control) of the Yatsushiro character 224Fa, the general character 224Fb, and the family crest character 224E is executed by the second sub-control unit 500 shown in FIG. The light emission control of the LEDs provided in the Yatsushiro character 224Fa, the general character 224Fb, and the family crest character 224E is executed by the second sub-control unit 500 shown in FIG.

Further, in FIG. 16A and the subsequent drawings, the configuration necessary for the description of the embodiment is extracted from the configuration of the pachinko machine 100 in the region on the paper surface separated by the one-dot chain line. As shown in FIG. 16A and the subsequent figures, the speaker 120 is schematically shown in the upper left part of the figure, the chance button 136 in the lower left part of the figure, and an operation button 710 such as a second chance button, Is schematically illustrated, and the fourth symbol lamps i1 and i2 are schematically illustrated in the upper right part of the drawing. A predetermined BGM (background music) is output from the speaker 120 during the game. The operation button 710 is an operation means that can be operated by a player disposed on the front side of the front frame door 106. The fourth symbol lamps i1 and i2 are lamps for informing the fourth symbol. The fourth symbol is a symbol indicating whether or not a special figure variable game is being executed. The fourth symbol lamp i1 has a square external shape, and notifies the fourth symbol for the special symbol 1. The fourth symbol lamp i2 has a circular appearance, and notifies the fourth symbol for the special symbol 2. The fourth symbol lamp i1 blinks white when the special figure 1 variable game is executed, and turns off when the special figure 1 variable game is not executed. Similarly, the fourth symbol lamp i2 blinks during lighting of the special figure 2 variable game and turns off when the special figure 2 variable game is not executed. The fourth symbol may be displayed on a display device such as the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, or the third decorative symbol display device 208N.
Example 1
Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 16A to 16R are diagrams showing the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. FIG. 16A shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the symbol display areas 208 a to 208 c of the first decorative symbol display device 208 </ b> L, the symbol combination “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 1” in the case of detachment is shown, which indicates that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct. "Is stopped (confirmed display, final stop display). Further, the fifth symbol of the “7-7-1” combination is stopped and displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. The frame display surrounding each decoration symbol of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 1” is displayed in red, and a pre-reading notice for the red chance is executed. In the present embodiment, during the execution of the pre-reading advance notice of the chance, the character string image “Stop the same color ...” is displayed in the display area h, and the pre-reading advance notice of the chance is being executed. Has been suggested. In this example, the target of the pre-reading notice for the chance is the hold 2 in FIG.

  At the time shown in FIG. 16 (a), since the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 2 and the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 0, the hold icons f1 and f2 are displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area f. In the special figure 2 hold icon display area g, the hold icon is not displayed, and the number of holds is displayed by the numbers “2” and “0” on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The mode of the hold icons f1 and f2 is a white circle. In addition, a variation icon e1 is displayed in the variation icon display area e. The aspect of the fluctuation icon e1 is a white circle.

  In the present embodiment, a castle town stage is set as the production stage. The first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N display a background image of the castle town corresponding to the castle town stage. A character string image of “Castle Town” is displayed at the lower part of the display area of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the current stage name is informed.

  FIG. 16B shows a state where the fluctuation icon e1 is deleted. In this embodiment, the variation icon is erased during the stop display of the decorative symbol, the fourth symbol, and the fifth symbol. The variation icon e1 may be deleted simultaneously with the end of the variation display of the decorative symbol, may be deleted simultaneously with the stop of the variation of the fourth symbol and the fifth symbol, or the variation display of the next decorative symbol may be performed. It may be erased simultaneously with the start.

  In FIG. 16 (c), in accordance with the start of the special figure 1 variable game by the special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown), the decorative display of the variable display, the fourth graphic, and the fifth graphic of the variable display are started. Shows the state. In FIG. 16C, the downward white arrows shown in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the first decorative symbol display devices 208La to 208c display a variable display at a speed that allows the player to recognize the decorative symbols. It represents the state being done. Also, with the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the hold icon reduction animation is executed, and the hold icon f1 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f becomes the change icon e2 and the change icon. Moving to the display area e, the hold icon f2 displayed in the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f moves to the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f. Each arrow in the figure represents the locus of the fluctuation icon e2 and the locus of the hold icon f2. At the time shown in FIG. 16C, the hold icon reduction animation is finished, and the movement of the fluctuation icon e2 and the hold icon f2 is completed.

  In addition, with the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the tutorial display is started in the display area h. In this example, a character string image of “chance by hold change” is displayed in the display area h.

  FIG. 16D shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. In FIG. 16 (d), the downward white arrows shown in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the first decorative symbol display device 208L display a variable display at a speed at which the player cannot recognize the decorative symbols. Represents the state. The decorative symbol variation display is initially displayed as a low-speed variation display, and is displayed as a high-speed variation display after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation.

  FIG. 16E shows a state in which the change notice display has started to be displayed. The change notice display j in this embodiment is a picture of a treasure box, and the display is started in such a manner that it gradually moves to the lower right from the left end of the display area of the second decorative symbol display device 208M. The change notice display j in this example is a notice for notifying that the mode of the hold icon changes. In this case, the change notice display j may be a prefetch notice display. Note that the change notice display j may be a notice for notifying that the mode of the variation icon changes. The change notice display j in this case may be a notice of change notice.

  FIG. 16F shows a state in which the movement of the change notice display j is stopped and the display start of the change notice display j is completed. A change notice display j is displayed at the center of the display area of the second decorative symbol display device 208M. In the drawing, a downward-pointing arrow shown at the upper left of the change notice display j represents the locus of the change notice display j.

  FIG. 16G shows a state in which a treasure box change notice display j is opened and an animation in which a blue circular change candidate display (change candidate icon) k appears from the treasure box is displayed. In the figure, the upward arrow shown below the change notice icon k represents the locus of the change notice icon k. The change notice icon k in this example is a display for notifying that the mode of the hold icon changes. In this case, the change notice icon k may be a prefetch notice display. Note that the change notice icon k may be a display for notifying that the mode of the change icon changes. The change notice display jj in this case may be a notice of change notice.

  FIG. 16 (h) shows a state in which a moving animation in which the change notice icon k moves is started. In this example, an animation is displayed in which the change notice icon k moves toward the hold icon corresponding to the hold that is the target of the prefetch notice. The target of the pre-reading notice is the hold 1 in FIG. 1, and the change notice icon k moves toward the hold icon f2 corresponding to the hold 1 in FIG. In the figure, the arrow pointing downward to the right on the left side of the change notice icon k represents the locus of the change notice icon k. In the state at the time shown in FIG. 16 (h), the change notice icon k is displayed across the two display devices of the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the second decorative symbol display device 208M. When the change notice icon k is a display of the change notice, an animation in which the change notice icon k moves toward the change icon is displayed.

  FIG. 16 (i) shows a state in which the change notice icon k has moved to a position where it overlaps with a part of the hold icon f2. In the figure, the arrow pointing downward to the right on the left side of the change notice icon k represents the locus of the change notice icon k.

  FIG. 16J shows a state in which the change notice icon k is deleted and the effect image m is displayed so as to overlap the entire hold icon f2. When the change notice icon k is overlapped with a part of the hold icon f2, the change notice icon k is deleted and the effect image m is displayed instead. With the display of the effect image m, a hold change display in which the mode of the hold icon f2 changes is displayed. When the change notice icon k overlaps the entire hold icon f2, the change notice icon k may be deleted and the effect image m may be displayed instead. Further, when the change notice icon k overlaps at least a part of the hold icon f2, the effect image m may be displayed so as to overlap at least a part of the change notice icon k and the hold icon f2. Further, the effect image m may be displayed so as to overlap a part of the hold icon f2.

  FIG. 16 (k) shows a state where the effect image m has been deleted. The deletion of the effect image m is the end of the hold change display, and the hold change display is performed, whereby the mode of the hold icon f2 changes from a white circle to a blue circle. In this example, the hold icon f2 corresponding to the hold of the target of the prefetch notice changes to the same blue as the change notice icon k. There are a plurality of types of change candidate displays, and the mode of the hold icon may change to a mode corresponding to one change candidate display among the plurality of types of change candidate displays. When the hold change display is performed by the blue change candidate display, the hold icon may be changed to a green circle or a red circle instead of the blue circle. In addition, when the hold change display is performed by the green change candidate display, the mode of the hold icon may be changed to any one of a green circle, a red circle, and a gold circle. In addition, when the hold change display is performed by the blue change candidate display, the hold icon may not change to a golden circle. Further, when a red hold icon is displayed, a green change candidate display or a blue change candidate display may be displayed. In this case, in addition to the red hold icon, a white circular hold icon may be displayed, or a white circular hold icon may not be displayed. In addition, when a green change candidate display or a blue change candidate display is displayed, a mode (for example, a red circle) having a higher hit reliability than the mode of the hold icon corresponding to the change candidate complementary display is displayed. The hold icon does not change. In addition, when a green change candidate display or a blue change candidate display is displayed, if a hold change display in which a hold icon having a high hit reliability such as a red circle or a gold circle is changed is displayed, the hold change display is performed. The icon may change to a premier aspect (for example, a rainbow circle).

  FIG. 16 (l) shows a state where the change notice display j is deleted. When the change notice display j is deleted, the hold change display by the change candidate display for the hold icon f2 is not performed any more.

  FIG. 16 (m) shows a state immediately before the “decoration 7” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a when the speed of the variable display in the left symbol display area 208a becomes slow. A downward arrow shown below “decoration 7” in the figure indicates that a low-speed fluctuation display that allows the player to recognize the decoration symbol is displayed.

  FIG. 16 (n) shows a state in which “decoration 7” is temporarily stopped (swing fluctuation display) in a manner in which “decoration 7” slightly swings up and down in the left symbol display area 208a. In the figure, the two wavy lines shown in the upper left and lower right of “Decoration 7” indicate that “Decoration 7” slightly fluctuates up and down. In addition, the decorative symbol variation display in the right symbol display area 208c is changed to a low-speed variation display.

  FIG. 16 (o) shows a state immediately before the variable display speed in the right symbol display area 208c is further reduced and “decoration 6” is temporarily displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. A downward arrow shown below “decoration 6” in the figure indicates that a low-speed fluctuation display that allows the player to recognize the decoration symbol is displayed. In addition, the decorative symbol variation display in the middle symbol display area 208b is changed to a low-speed variation display.

  FIG. 16 (p) shows a state where “decoration 6” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c so as to slightly swing up and down. In the figure, two wavy lines illustrated in the upper left and lower right of “decoration 6” indicate that “decoration 6” slightly fluctuates up and down. Further, in the middle symbol display area 208b, the speed of the variable display is further slowed, and the state immediately before the “decoration 6” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. A downward arrow shown below “decoration 6” in the figure indicates that a low-speed fluctuation display that allows the player to recognize the decoration symbol is displayed.

  FIG. 16 (q) shows a state in which “decoration 6” is temporarily stopped (swaying fluctuation display) in a manner in which “decoration 6” slightly swings up and down in the middle symbol display area 208b. In the figure, two wavy lines illustrated in the upper left and lower right of “decoration 6” indicate that “decoration 6” slightly fluctuates up and down. As a result, “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 6” which is a shifted symbol form is temporarily stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c.

  FIG. 16 (r) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is out of date ("special figure G"). In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 6”, which is an off symbol mode, indicating that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct is out of display. Further, the fifth symbol of the combination “7-6-6” is stopped and displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can change the mode of the hold icon to a mode corresponding to the change candidate display. According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, it may be possible to suggest the mode after the change of the hold icon depending on the mode of the change candidate display.
(Example 2)
Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 2 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 17A to 17P are diagrams showing the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. FIG. 17A shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner, the fourth symbol lamp i1 is in the fourth symbol, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M is in the fifth symbol. Has been done. At the time shown in FIG. 17 (a), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1 and the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 0. Therefore, the hold icon f1 is displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area f. The special icon 2 hold icon display area g does not display the hold icon, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N displays the number of holds by the numbers “1” and “0”. The mode of the hold icon f1 is a white circle. In addition, a variation icon e1 is displayed in the variation icon display area e. The aspect of the fluctuation icon e1 is a white circle.

  In the present embodiment, a castle town stage is set as the production stage. The first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N display a background image of the castle town corresponding to the castle town stage. A character string image of “Castle Town” is displayed at the lower part of the display area of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the current stage name is informed. In addition, you may alert | report that the possibility of the aspect of a holding | maintenance icon changing is high in the display area which displays an effect stage name.

  FIG. 17B shows a state in which the change notice display j has been displayed. The change notice display j in this embodiment is a picture of a treasure box, and the display is started in such a manner that it gradually moves to the lower right from the left end of the display area of the second decorative symbol display device 208M. The change notice display j in this example is a notice for notifying that the mode of the hold icon changes.

  FIG. 17C shows a state in which the movement of the change notice display j has stopped and the display start of the change notice display j has been completed. A change notice display j is displayed at the lower center of the display area of the second decorative symbol display device 208M. In the drawing, a downward-pointing arrow shown at the upper left of the change notice display j represents the locus of the change notice display j.

  FIG. 17D shows a state in which a treasure box change notice display j is opened and an animation in which a blue circular change notice icon k appears from the treasure box is displayed. In the figure, the upward arrow shown below the change notice icon k represents the locus of the change notice icon k. The change notice icon k in this example is a display for notifying that the mode of the hold icon changes. The change notice display j is a display for causing the change notice icon k to appear, and may be deleted after the change notice icon k appears. While the change notice display j is not displayed, a new change candidate display is not displayed.

  FIG. 17E shows a state in which the character display n of Yoshimune (hereinafter referred to as “Yoshimune n”) is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Yoshimune n is a display that suggests changing the type of change candidate display.

  FIG. 17 (f) shows a state in which a display with a change item display (hereinafter referred to as “change item”) o is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208 </ b> N. The change item o is a display that suggests changing the type of change candidate display.

  FIG. 17G shows a state in which an animation in which Yoshimune n throws the change item o toward the change notice icon k is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The change item o flies toward the change notice icon k, and is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L in FIG. In the drawing, an upward-pointing arrow illustrated on the right side of the change item o represents the locus of the change item o.

  FIG. 17 (h) shows a state in which a display in which the change item o collides with the change notice icon k is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. The change item o is displayed so as to overlap a part of the change notice icon k.

  FIG. 17I shows a state in which the change item o is deleted and the effect image m is displayed so as to overlap the entire change notice icon k. When the change item o is overlapped with a part of the change notice icon k, the change item o is deleted and the effect image m is displayed instead. By displaying the effect image m, a change display in which the type of the change notice icon k changes is displayed.

  FIG. 17J shows a state where the effect image m has been deleted. Erasing the effect image m is the end of the change display. As a result of the change display, the type of the change notice icon k changes from a blue circle to a green circle (indicated by cross-hatching in FIGS. 16 to 36). Yes. A plurality of types of change candidate displays are provided, one of the plurality of types of change candidate displays is a blue circular change candidate display, and one of the plurality of types of change candidate displays is green. This is a circular change candidate display. When the green circle change candidate display is displayed rather than when the blue circle change candidate display is displayed, the hold icon is set to be more easily changed to a mode with a high hit reliability. In this way, there is a case in which the blue circle change candidate display changes to the green circle change candidate display.

  FIG. 17 (k) shows a state where Yoshimune n is erased. When Yoshimune n is deleted, the change display for the change notice icon k is no longer performed. If Yoshimune n is continuously displayed, the change display for the change notice icon k may be displayed again.

  FIG. 17 (l) shows a state in which a moving animation in which the change notice icon k moves is started. In this example, an animation is displayed in which the change notice icon k moves toward the hold icon corresponding to the hold that is the target of the prefetch notice. Since the target of the prefetch notice is the hold 1 in FIG. 1, the change notice icon k moves toward the hold icon f1 corresponding to the hold 1 in FIG. In the figure, the arrow pointing downward to the right on the left side of the change notice icon k represents the locus of the change notice icon k. In the state at the time shown in FIG. 17L, the change notice icon k is displayed across two display devices, the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

  FIG. 17 (m) shows a state where the change notice icon k has moved to a position where it overlaps with a part of the hold icon f1. In the figure, the arrow pointing downward to the right on the left side of the change notice icon k represents the locus of the change notice icon k.

  FIG. 17 (n) shows a state in which the change notice icon k is deleted and the effect image m is displayed so as to overlap the entire hold icon f2. When the change notice icon k is overlapped with a part of the hold icon f1, the change notice icon k is deleted and the effect image m is displayed instead. With the display of the effect image m, a hold change display in which the mode of the hold icon f1 changes is displayed.

  FIG. 17 (o) shows a state in which the effect image m has been deleted. The deletion of the effect image m is the end of the hold change display, and the hold change display is performed, whereby the mode of the hold icon f1 changes from a white circle to a green circle. In this example, the mode of the hold icon f1 corresponding to the hold of the target of the prefetch notice changes to the same green circle as the change notice icon k. There are a plurality of types of change candidate displays, and the mode of the hold icon may change to a mode corresponding to one change candidate display among the plurality of types of change candidate displays.

  FIG. 17 (p) shows a state in which the change notice display j is deleted. When the change notice display j is deleted, the hold change display by the change candidate display for the hold icon f1 is not performed any more.

  The display means of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can display a plurality of types of change candidate displays, and is blue. The circular change candidate display may change to a green circular change candidate display. According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the change candidate display may change, so that the change candidate display may be enjoyed until the change candidate display is deleted.

  As for the status of the hold icon, the big hit reliability is set in the order of white circle, blue circle, green circle, red circle, gold circle, and rainbow circle. Note that the jackpot reliability of the change candidate display may be set similarly. In addition, when the mode changes, the hold icon always changes to a mode with higher jackpot reliability than the mode before the change.

  As the types of change candidate displays, the expectation is set higher in the order of white circle, blue circle, green circle, red circle, gold circle, and rainbow circle. The higher the degree of expectation here, the easier it is to set the status of the hold icon or the change icon that is the change display target. In addition, in the case of the mode of the hold icon or the variation icon, it may be set to change to the mode corresponding to the change candidate display without fail, and may change to a mode different from the mode corresponding to the change candidate display. Also good. When the change candidate display changes, the change candidate display mode always changes to a higher expectation than before the change.

In addition, when the green circle change candidate display is displayed, the hold icon in the white circle mode is configured to be more easily changed to the green circle mode than in the blue circle mode. The big hit reliability of the hold icon is set so as to increase in the order of a white circle, a blue circle, and a green circle. For this reason, the hold corresponding to the hold icon displayed in the blue circular form is digested rather than the variation display of the decorative symbol that starts after the hold corresponding to the hold icon displayed in the white circular form is digested. The decorative symbol display that is started is configured so that the jackpot symbol pattern is finally easier to be confirmed and displayed, and the hold corresponding to the hold icon displayed in the blue circle is digested and started. The decorative display of the decorative symbol that starts after the hold corresponding to the hold icon displayed in the green circular form is digested is easier to be finalized and displayed than the decorative display of the decorative pattern. It is configured as follows.
(Example 3)
Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 3 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 18A to 18M are diagrams showing the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. FIG. 18A shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner, the fourth symbol lamp i1 is in the fourth symbol, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M is in the fifth symbol. Has been done. Further, at the time shown in FIG. 18 (a), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1, and the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 0. Therefore, the hold icon f1 is displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area f. The special icon 2 hold icon display area g does not display the hold icon, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N displays the number of holds by the numbers “1” and “0”. The mode of the hold icon f1 is a white circle. In addition, a variation icon e1 is displayed in the variation icon display area e. The aspect of the fluctuation icon e1 is a white circle. In FIG. 18A, a change notice display j is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. The change notice display j in this example is a notice for notifying that the mode of the hold icon changes.

  In the present embodiment, a castle town stage is set as the production stage. The first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N display a background image of the castle town corresponding to the castle town stage. A character string image of “Castle Town” is displayed at the lower part of the display area of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the current stage name is informed.

  FIG. 18B shows a state in which a treasure box change notice display j is opened and an animation in which a blue circular change notice icon k1 appears from the treasure box is displayed. In the figure, the upward arrow shown below the change notice icon k1 represents the locus of the change notice icon k. The change notice icon k1 in this example is a display for notifying that the mode of the hold icon changes.

  FIG. 18C shows a state in which an animation in which a green circular change notice icon k2 appears from the change notice display j is displayed. In the figure, an arrow pointing to the upper right shown below the change notice icon k represents the locus of the change notice icon k. The change notice icon k2 in this example is a display for notifying that the status of the hold icon changes. As in this example, the change notice icon k1 may be displayed and then the change notice icon k2 may be displayed, or the change notice icons k1 and k2 may be displayed simultaneously. When a plurality of change candidate displays are started to be displayed, the display may always be started in order from a change candidate display with a low expectation.

  FIG. 18D shows a state in which the change notice icons k1 and k2 are displayed side by side on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. The blue circular change notice icon k1 and the green circular change notice icon k2 are different types of change candidate displays. In this way, a plurality of different types of change candidate displays may be displayed. A plurality of blue circular change candidate displays may be displayed, or a plurality of green circular change candidate displays may be displayed. A plurality of change candidate displays of the same type may be displayed.

  FIG. 18E shows a state in which a moving animation in which the change notice icon k1 moves is started. In this example, the change notice icon k1 starts moving toward the hold icon f1. In the figure, a downward-pointing arrow shown on the left side of the change notice icon k1 represents the locus of the change notice icon k1. In the state shown in FIG. 18E, the change notice icon k1 is displayed across the two display devices of the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the second decorative symbol display device 208M. A part of k1 is displayed overlapping with a part of the change notice icon k2.

  FIG. 18F shows a state where the change notice icon k1 approaches the hold icon f1. The change notice icon k1 in this example passes the left side of the hold icon f1 without colliding with the hold icon f1.

  FIG. 18G shows a state in which the change notice icon k1 disappears from the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The change notice icon k1 of this example passes through the left side of the hold icon f1 and does not collide with the hold icon f1, and is erased. As described above, the change notice icon k1 of this example is not displayed before the start of the hold change display but is displayed as a display effect display of the hold change display.

  FIG. 18H shows a state in which the change notice icon k1 is deleted. The change notice icon k1 is completely erased so as to disappear from the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

  FIG. 18 (i) shows a state in which a moving animation in which the change notice icon k2 moves is started. In this example, an animation is displayed in which the change notice icon k2 moves toward the hold icon corresponding to the hold that is the target of the prefetch notice. Since the target of the prefetch notice is the hold 1 in FIG. 1, the change notice icon k2 moves toward the hold icon f1 corresponding to the hold 1 in FIG. In the figure, a right-pointing arrow shown on the left side of the change notice icon k2 represents the locus of the change notice icon k2. In the state at the time shown in FIG. 18 (i), the change notice icon k2 is displayed across the two display devices of the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

  FIG. 18J shows a state in which the change notice icon k2 has moved to a position where it overlaps with a part of the hold icon f1. In the figure, the arrow pointing downward to the right on the left side of the change notice icon k2 represents the locus of the change notice icon k2.

  FIG. 18K shows a state in which the change notice icon k2 is deleted and the effect image m is displayed so as to overlap the entire hold icon f1. When the change notice icon k2 is overlapped with a part of the hold icon f1, the change notice icon k2 is deleted and the effect image m is displayed instead. With the display of the effect image m, a hold change display in which the mode of the hold icon f1 changes is displayed.

  FIG. 18 (l) shows a state where the effect image m has been deleted. The deletion of the effect image m is the end of the hold change display, and the hold change display is performed, whereby the mode of the hold icon f1 changes from a white circle to a green circle. In this example, the hold icon f1 corresponding to the hold of the target of the prefetch notice changes to the same green as the change notice icon k2. There are a plurality of types of change candidate displays, and the mode of the hold icon may change to a mode corresponding to one change candidate display among the plurality of types of change candidate displays.

  FIG. 18 (m) shows a state where the change notice display j is deleted. When the change notice display j is deleted, the hold change display by the change candidate display for the hold icon f1 is not performed any more.

The display means of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can display a plurality of change candidate displays. In the present embodiment, the change notice icon k1 is not displayed before the start of the hold change display, but is displayed as a gaze effect display of the hold change display, and the change notice icon k2 is displayed before the start of the hold change display. The icon f1 changes to a mode corresponding to the change notice icon k2. Thus, when a plurality of change candidate displays are displayed, the hold icon may change to a mode corresponding to one change candidate display among the plurality of change candidate displays. The state in which only one change notification icon k1 is displayed as the change candidate display shown in FIG. 18B is the first display, and the change candidate display shown in FIG. 18D is the change notification icon k1. , K2 may be displayed as the second display. Further, the change notice icon k1 may be the first change candidate display, and the change notice icon k2 may be the second change candidate display.
Example 4
Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 4 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. Each figure of Fig.19 (a)-(m) is a figure which shows the pachinko machine 100 by a present Example in time series. FIG. 19A shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner, the fourth symbol lamp i1 is in the fourth symbol, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M is in the fifth symbol. Has been done. Further, at the time shown in FIG. 19 (a), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1, and the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 0. The special icon 2 hold icon display area g does not display the hold icon, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N displays the number of holds by the numbers “1” and “0”. The mode of the hold icon f1 is a white circle. In addition, a variation icon e1 is displayed in the variation icon display area e. The aspect of the fluctuation icon e1 is a white circle. Further, a blue circular change notice icon k1 and a green circular change notice icon k2 are displayed side by side on the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

  In the present embodiment, a castle town stage is set as the production stage. The first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N display a background image of the castle town corresponding to the castle town stage. A character string image of “Castle Town” is displayed at the lower part of the display area of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the current stage name is informed.

  FIG. 19B shows a state in which Yoshimune n is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Yoshimune n is a display that suggests changing the type of change candidate display.

  FIG. 19C shows a state in which a display with Yoshimune n having a change item o is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The change item o is a display that suggests changing the type of change candidate display.

  FIG. 19D shows a state in which an animation in which Yoshimune n throws the change item o toward the change notice icons k1 and k2 is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The change item o flies toward the change notice icons k1 and k2, and is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L in FIG. 19D. In the drawing, an upward-pointing arrow illustrated on the right side of the change item o represents the locus of the change item o.

  FIG. 19 (e) shows a state in which the change item o is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. In the state shown in FIG. 19 (e), a part of the change item o is displayed overlapping with a part of the change notice icon k2. In this example, the change item o is an effect display that changes the type of the change notice icon k1, and is not an effect display that changes the type of the change notice icon k2, so the change item o passes through the change notice icon k2. To do. When the change item o is an effect display that changes the type of the change notice icon k2, the change display of the change notice icon k2 may be started immediately after the time shown in FIG. The change item o passes through the change notice icon k2. By displaying an animation in which the change item o passes through the change notice icon k2, it may be possible to determine which of the change notice icons k1 and k2 changes until the change display is started.

  FIG. 19F shows a state in which a display in which the change item o collides with the change notice icon k1 is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. The change item o is displayed overlapping with a part of the change notice icon k1. As in this example, when the change item o passes the change notice icon k2 on the right side, the change notice icon k1 on the left side is likely to change. Even when the change item o is displayed, neither the change notice icon k1 nor k2 may change.

  FIG. 19G shows a state in which the change item o is deleted and the effect image m is displayed so as to overlap the entire change notice icon k1. When the change item o is overlapped with a part of the change notice icon k1, the change item o is deleted and the effect image m is displayed instead. By displaying the effect image m, a change display in which the type of the change notice icon k1 changes is displayed.

  FIG. 19 (h) shows a state where the effect image m has been deleted. Erasing the effect image m is the end of the change display, and since the change display is performed, the type of the change notice icon k1 is changed from the blue circle to the red circle. One of the multiple types of change candidate displays is a red circle change candidate display.

  FIG. 19 (i) shows a state in which Yoshimune n is erased. When the Yoshimune n is deleted, the change display for the change notice icon k1 is not performed any more. If Yoshimune n is continuously displayed, the change display for the change notice icon k1 is displayed again.

  FIG. 19J shows a state in which a moving animation in which the change notice icon k2 moves is started. In this example, an animation is displayed in which the change notice icon k2 moves toward the hold icon corresponding to the hold that is the target of the prefetch notice. Since the target of the prefetch notice is the hold 1 in FIG. 1, the change notice icon k2 moves toward the hold icon f1 corresponding to the hold 1 in FIG. In the figure, the arrow pointing downward to the right on the left side of the change notice icon k2 represents the locus of the change notice icon k. In the state at the time point shown in FIG. 19 (j), the change notice icon k2 is displayed across the two display devices of the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

  FIG. 19 (k) shows a state where the change notice icon k2 has moved to a position where it overlaps with a part of the hold icon f1. In the figure, the arrow pointing downward to the right on the left side of the change notice icon k2 represents the locus of the change notice icon k2.

  FIG. 19 (l) shows a state in which the change notice icon k2 is deleted and the effect image m is displayed overlapping the entire hold icon f2. When the change notice icon k2 is overlapped with a part of the hold icon f1, the change notice icon k2 is deleted and the effect image m is displayed instead. With the display of the effect image m, a hold change display in which the mode of the hold icon f1 changes is displayed.

  FIG. 19 (m) shows a state where the effect image m has been deleted. The deletion of the effect image m is the end of the hold change display, and the hold change display is performed, whereby the mode of the hold icon f1 changes from a white circle to a green circle. In this example, the hold icon f1 corresponding to the hold of the target of the prefetch notice changes to the same green as the change notice icon k2. There are a plurality of types of change candidate displays, and the mode of the hold icon may change to a mode corresponding to one change candidate display among the plurality of types of change candidate displays.

FIG. 19 (n) shows a state where the change notice icon k1 and the change notice display j are deleted. When the change notice icon k1 is deleted, the hold change display of the hold icon using the change notice icon k1 and the change display of the change icon are not displayed. Further, when the change notice display j is deleted, the change display by the change candidate display for the hold icon f1 or the change icon e1 is not performed any more. In addition, when the change notice icon k1 and the change notice display j are continuously displayed, there is a possibility that a change display for the hold icon or the change icon using the change notice icon k1 may be performed. Further, when a plurality of change candidate displays are displayed, the change candidate display changes from the change candidate display corresponding to the mode of the hold icon having a low jackpot expectation degree (big hit reliability) among the plurality of change candidate displays. Here, the jackpot expectation is the jackpot expectation of the held icon after the change. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 19F and 19G, when the blue change candidate display and the green change candidate display are displayed, the display changes from the blue change candidate display. The green change display may also change after the blue change candidate display changes.
(Example 5)
Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 5 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 20A to 20E are diagrams showing the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. In each drawing of FIG. 20, the crest character 224E and the operation buttons 710 are not shown.

  FIG. 20A shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner, the fourth symbol lamp i1 is in the fourth symbol, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M is in the fifth symbol. Has been done. At the time shown in FIG. 20 (a), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1, and the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 0. Therefore, the hold icon f1 is displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area f. The special icon 2 hold icon display area g does not display the hold icon, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N displays the number of holds by the numbers “1” and “0”. The mode of the hold icon f1 is a white circle. In addition, a variation icon e1 is displayed in the variation icon display area e. The aspect of the fluctuation icon e1 is a white circle. Further, a blue circular change notice icon k1 and a green circular change notice icon k2 are displayed side by side on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. Also, Yoshimune n with the change item o is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The production stage is the castle town stage.

  FIG. 20B shows a state in which an animation in which Yoshimune n throws the change item o toward the change notice icons k1 and k2 is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The change item o flies toward the change notice icons k1 and k2, and is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L in FIG. 20B. In the drawing, an upward-pointing arrow illustrated on the right side of the change item o represents the locus of the change item o.

  FIG. 20D shows a state in which the change item o is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. In this example, even when the change item o is displayed, the change display for changing the change notice icons k1 and k2 is not performed, and the change item o is directed downward in the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M. The change notice icons k1 and k2 do not overlap.

  FIG. 20D shows a state where the change item o has been deleted. The change item o is deleted in such a manner as to move downward in the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M. Disappointed Yoshimune n is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N, suggesting that a failure effect was performed in which the effect of changing the change notice icons k1 and k2 was not executed.

  FIG. 20 (e) shows a state in which Yoshimune n has been erased. When the Yoshimune n is deleted, the effect display for changing the change notice icons k1 and k2 by the change item o is not performed any more.

In this embodiment, a failure effect is performed in which the change notice icons k1 and k2 do not change even when the change item o is displayed. The failure effect of this example may be executed when only one change candidate display is displayed, or may be executed when three or more different types of change candidate displays are displayed. However, it may be executed when two or more change candidate displays of the same type are displayed.
(Example 6)
Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 6 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. Each figure of Drawing 20 (f)-(i) is a figure showing pachinko machine 100 by a present example in time series. In each drawing of FIG. 20, the crest character 224E and the operation buttons 710 are not shown.

  FIG. 20F shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner, the fourth symbol lamp i1 is in the fourth symbol, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M is in the fifth symbol. Has been done. In the state at the time shown in FIG. 20 (f), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1, and the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 0. Therefore, the hold icon f1 is displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area f. The hold icon is not displayed in the special figure 2 hold icon display area g, and the number of holds is displayed by the numbers “1” and “0” on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The mode of the hold icon f1 is a white circle. In addition, a variation icon e1 is displayed in the variation icon display area e. The aspect of the fluctuation icon e1 is a white circle. The production stage is the castle town stage.

  Further, a blue circular change notice icon k1 and a green circular change notice icon k2 are displayed side by side on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. Before the state shown in FIG. 20 (f) is reached, an animation in which Yoshimune n throws a change icon o is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and the change icon o is a change of a part of the change item o. A part of the notice icon k2 is displayed overlapping. In the drawing, a left-pointing arrow illustrated on the right side of the change icon o represents the locus of the change item o.

  FIG. 20 (g) shows a state in which a display in which the change item o stops between the change notice icons k1 and k2 is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. Targets of change display by the change item o in this example are change notice icons k1 and k2.

  FIG. 20H shows a state in which the change item o is deleted and the effect image M is displayed so as to overlap the entire change notice icons k1 and k2. When the change item o stops between the change notice icons k1 and k2, the change item o is deleted and the effect image M is displayed instead. With the display of the effect image M, a change display in which the type of the change notice icon k1 changes is displayed. The effect image M may be displayed so as to overlap a part of the change notice icons k1 and k2.

  FIG. 20 (i) shows a state where the effect image M has been deleted. When the effect image M is erased, the change display ends, and the change display is performed, whereby the type of the change notice icon k1 changes from the blue circle to the red circle, and the type of the change notice icon k1 changes from the green circle to the gold color ( It changes into a circle (shown by vertical hatching in FIGS. 16 to 36).

In the present embodiment, two change notice icons k1 and k2 are changed in one change display. Even if the effect image M is displayed overlapping both the change notice icons k1 and k2 as in this example, only one change candidate display of the change notice icons k1 and k2 is changed. May be.
(Example 7)
Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the seventh embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIGS. 20J to 21C are diagrams showing the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. 20 and FIG. 21, illustration of the family crest character 224E and the operation button 710 is omitted.

  FIG. 20J shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner, the fourth symbol lamp i1 is in the fourth symbol, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M is in the fifth symbol. Has been done. In the state at the time shown in FIG. 20 (f), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1, and the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 0. Therefore, the hold icon f1 is displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area f. The hold icon is not displayed in the special figure 2 hold icon display area g, and the number of holds is displayed by the numbers “1” and “0” on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The mode of the hold icon f1 is a white circle. In addition, a variation icon e1 is displayed in the variation icon display area e. The aspect of the fluctuation icon e1 is a white circle. The production stage is the castle town stage.

  Before the state shown in FIG. 20 (j) is reached, the display of the blue circular change notice icon k1 and the green circular change notice icon k2 is started to be displayed side by side on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. In the state shown in (j), a moving animation in which the change notice icon k1 moves is started. In this example, since the pre-reading notice target is the hold 1 in FIG. 1, the change notice icon k1 starts moving toward the hold icon f1 corresponding to the hold 1 in FIG. In the figure, a right-pointing arrow illustrated on the left side of the change notice icon k1 represents the locus of the change notice icon k1. The change notice icon k1 is displayed across two display devices, the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and a part of the change notice icon k1 is a part of the change notice icon k2. Are displayed overlapping.

  FIG. 20 (k) shows a state in which the change notice icon k1 has moved to a position where it overlaps with a part of the hold icon f1. In the figure, a downward-pointing arrow shown on the left side of the change notice icon k1 represents the locus of the change notice icon k1.

  FIG. 20 (l) shows a state in which the change notice icon k1 is deleted and the effect image m is displayed so as to overlap the entire hold icon f1. When the change notice icon k1 is overlapped with a part of the hold icon f1, the change notice icon k1 is deleted and the effect image m is displayed instead. With the display of the effect image m, a hold change display in which the mode of the hold icon f1 changes is displayed.

  FIG. 20 (m) shows a state where the effect image m has been deleted. The deletion of the effect image m is the end of the hold change display, and the hold change display is performed, whereby the mode of the hold icon f2 changes from a white circle to a blue circle. In this example, the hold icon f1 corresponding to the hold for the prefetch notice changes to the same blue color as the change notice icon k1. There are a plurality of types of change candidate displays, and the mode of the hold icon may change to a mode corresponding to one change candidate display among the plurality of types of change candidate displays.

  FIG. 20 (n) shows a state in which a moving animation in which the change notice icon k2 moves is started. In this example, an animation is displayed in which the change notice icon k2 moves toward the hold icon f1 corresponding to the hold to be prefetched. In the figure, a right-pointing arrow shown on the left side of the change notice icon k2 represents the locus of the change notice icon k2. The change notice icon k2 is displayed across the two display devices of the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

  FIG. 20 (o) shows a state where the change notice icon k2 has moved to a position where it overlaps with a part of the hold icon f1. In the figure, the arrow pointing downward to the right on the left side of the change notice icon k2 represents the locus of the change notice icon k2.

  FIG. 21A shows a state continued from FIG. In FIG. 21A, the change notice icon k2 is deleted, and the effect image m is displayed so as to overlap the entire hold icon f1. When the change notice icon k2 is overlapped with a part of the hold icon f1, the change notice icon k2 is deleted and the effect image m is displayed instead. With the display of the effect image m, a hold change display in which the mode of the hold icon f1 changes is displayed.

  FIG. 21B shows a state where the effect image m has been deleted. The deletion of the effect image m is the end of the hold change display, and the hold change display is performed, whereby the mode of the hold icon f1 changes from the blue circle to the green circle. In this example, the hold icon f1 corresponding to the hold of the prefetch notice target changes to the same green as the change notice icon k2. There are a plurality of types of change candidate displays, and the mode of the hold icon may change to a mode corresponding to one change candidate display among the plurality of types of change candidate displays.

  FIG. 21C shows a state where the change notice display j is deleted. When the change notice display j is deleted, the hold change display by the change candidate display for the hold icon f1 is not performed any more.

In the present embodiment, the mode of the hold icon f1 changes twice. Thus, the mode of one hold icon may change a plurality of times.
(Example 8)
Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 8 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. Each figure of Drawing 21 (d)-(o) is a figure showing pachinko machine 100 by a present example in time series. In each drawing of FIG. 21, the crest character 224E and the operation buttons 710 are not shown.

  FIG. 21D shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner, the fourth symbol lamp i1 is in the fourth symbol, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M is in the fifth symbol. Has been done. Further, in the state at the time shown in FIG. 21 (d), since the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1, and the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 0, the hold icon f1 is displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area f. The hold icon is not displayed in the special figure 2 hold icon display area g, and the number of holds is displayed by the numbers “1” and “0” on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The mode of the hold icon f1 is a white circle. In addition, a variation icon e1 is displayed in the variation icon display area e. The aspect of the fluctuation icon e1 is a white circle. Further, a blue circular change notice icon k1 and a green circular change notice icon k2 are displayed side by side on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. The production stage is the castle town stage.

  FIG. 21 (e) shows a state in which the display of the character display (hereinafter referred to as “轟”) p of the heel is started at the center of the display area of the second decorative symbol display device 208M.轟 p is displayed so as to overlap almost the entire change notice display j. Even during the display of 難 p, the change notice display j is difficult to visually recognize but continues to be displayed. In this example, an animation in which the change candidate display is crushed using 轟 p is displayed.

  FIG. 21F shows a state in which an animation in which the change candidate display is crushed is started.轟 p takes a pose when crushing the change candidate display.

  FIG. 21G shows a state in which an animation in which the change notice icon k1 is cracked is displayed. In this example, the blue change notice icon k2 having a lower expectation than the green change notice icon k2 is deleted. Thus, when one change candidate display among a plurality of change candidate displays is deleted, the change candidate display with a low expectation is easily deleted. When one change candidate display among a plurality of change candidate displays is deleted, a change candidate display with a low expectation may be necessarily deleted. In addition, when the change candidate display with a low expectation is deleted, the expectation of the success of the pending change display by the remaining high-expected weather change candidate display may be high.

  FIG. 21 (h) shows a state in which an animation in which the change notice icon k1 is crushed apart is displayed. In this example, the change notice icon k1 is erased in a crushed manner.

  FIG. 21 (i) shows a state in which the change notice icon k1 is deleted. The state in which only one change notice icon k1 is displayed as the change candidate display shown in FIG. 21 (i) is the second display, and the change candidate displays shown in FIGS. 21 (d) to (h) are displayed. The case where two change notice icons k1 and k2 are displayed may be the first display.

  FIG. 21 (j) shows a state where 消去 p is erased. When 轟 p is deleted, no animation for deleting the change notice icon k2 is performed. When な お p continues to be displayed without being deleted, an animation in which the change notice icon k2 is deleted may be displayed in the same manner as the change notice icon k1.

  FIG. 21 (k) shows a state in which a moving animation in which the change notice icon k2 moves is started. In this example, since the change notice icon k2 is displayed for the effect display to change the aspect of the change icon, an animation in which the change notice icon k2 moves toward the change icon e1 is displayed. In the figure, a right-pointing arrow shown on the left side of the change notice icon k2 represents the locus of the change notice icon k2. The change notice icon k2 is displayed across the two display devices of the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

  FIG. 21 (l) shows a state where the change notice icon k2 has moved to a position where it overlaps with a part of the change icon e1. In the figure, the arrow pointing downward to the right on the left side of the change notice icon k2 represents the locus of the change notice icon k2.

  FIG. 21 (m) shows a state in which the change notice icon k2 is deleted and the effect image m is displayed so as to overlap the entire variation icon e1. When the change notice icon k2 is overlapped with a part of the change icon e1, the change notice icon k2 is deleted and the effect image m is displayed instead. By displaying the effect image m, a change display in which the mode of the variation icon e1 is changed is displayed.

  FIG. 21 (n) shows a state where the effect image m has been deleted. Erasing the effect image m is the end of the change display, and the change display is performed, whereby the aspect of the variation icon e1 changes from a white circle to a green circle. In this example, the change icon e1 changes to the same green as the change notice icon k2. There are a plurality of types of change candidate displays, and the mode of the variation icon may change to a mode corresponding to one change candidate display among the plurality of types of change candidate displays.

  FIG. 21 (o) shows a state in which the change notice display j is deleted. When the change notice display j is erased, the change display by the change candidate display for the change icon e1 is not performed any more.

In this embodiment, when a plurality of change candidate displays are displayed, one change candidate display among the plurality of change candidate displays is deleted. A plurality of change candidate displays may be deleted. Note that after the effects shown in FIGS. 20A to 20J are performed, the effects shown in FIGS. 21E to 21I may be performed, or FIGS. 21E to 21I are performed. The change display in which the type of the change candidate display changes may be performed after the presentation effect is performed. In this embodiment, the change icon change display is performed in FIGS. 21J to 21N. However, instead of the change icon change display, a hold change display in which the hold icon changes is performed. Good.
Example 9
Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 9 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. Each of FIGS. 22A to 22O is a diagram showing the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. In each figure of FIG. 22, illustration of the family crest member 224E and the operation button 710 is omitted.

  FIG. 22A shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner, the fourth symbol lamp i1 is in the fourth symbol, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M is in the fifth symbol. Has been done. Further, in the state at the time shown in FIG. 22 (a), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1, and the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 0. Therefore, the hold icon f1 is displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area f. The hold icon is not displayed in the special figure 2 hold icon display area g, and the number of holds is displayed by the numbers “1” and “0” on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The mode of the hold icon f1 is a white circle. In addition, a variation icon e1 is displayed in the variation icon display area e. The aspect of the fluctuation icon e1 is a white circle. Further, a blue circular change notice icon k1 and a green circular change notice icon k2 are displayed side by side on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. The production stage is the castle town stage.

  FIG. 22B shows a state in which a moving animation in which the change notice icon k2 moves is started. In this example, the change notice icon k2 starts moving toward the hold icon f1. In the drawing, an arrow pointing upward on the left side of the change notice icon k2 represents the locus of the change notice icon k2. The change notice icon k2 is displayed across the two display devices of the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

  FIG. 22C shows a state in which a moving animation in which the change notice icon k1 moves is started. In this example, the change notice icon k1 starts moving toward the change icon e1. In the figure, an arrow pointing upward on the left side of the change notice icon k1 represents the locus of the change notice icon k1.

  FIG. 22D shows a state where the change notice icon k2 has moved to a position where it overlaps with a part of the hold icon f1. In the figure, the arrow pointing downward to the right on the left side of the change notice icon k2 represents the locus of the change notice icon k2.

  FIG. 22E shows a state in which the change notice icon k2 is erased and the effect image m1 is displayed overlapping the entire hold icon f1. When the change notice icon k2 is overlapped with a part of the hold icon f1, the change notice icon k2 is deleted and the effect image m1 is displayed instead. With the display of the effect image m1, a hold change display in which the mode of the hold icon f1 changes is displayed.

  FIG. 22 (e) shows a state in which the change notice icon k1 has moved to a position where it overlaps with a part of the change icon e1. In the figure, a downward-pointing arrow shown on the left side of the change notice icon k1 represents the locus of the change notice icon k1.

  FIG. 22F shows a state in which the change notice icon k1 is deleted and the effect image m2 is displayed overlapping the entire change icon e1. When the change notice icon k1 is overlapped with a part of the change icon e1, the change notice icon k1 is deleted and an effect image m2 is displayed instead. With the display of the effect image m2, a change display in which the mode of the variation icon e1 changes is displayed.

  FIG. 22G shows a state where the effect image m1 has been deleted. The deletion of the effect image m1 is the end of the hold change display, and the hold change display is performed, whereby the mode of the hold icon f1 changes from a white circle to a green circle. In this example, the hold icon f1 corresponding to the hold of the target of the prefetch notice changes to the same green as the change notice icon k2. There are a plurality of types of change candidate displays, and the mode of the hold icon may change to a mode corresponding to one change candidate display among the plurality of types of change candidate displays.

  FIG. 22 (h) shows a state where the effect image m2 has been deleted. The deletion of the effect image m2 is the end of the change icon change display, and the change icon e1 changes the form of the change icon e1 from a white circle to a blue circle. In this example, the change icon e1 changes to the same blue color as the change notice icon k1. There are a plurality of types of change candidate displays, and the mode of the variation icon may change to a mode corresponding to one change candidate display among the plurality of types of change candidate displays.

  FIG. 22 (i) shows a state in which an animation in which a red circular change notice icon k3 appears from the change notice display j is displayed. In the figure, the upward arrow shown below the change notice icon k3 represents the locus of the change notice icon k3. In the present embodiment, the change notice display j1 does not disappear after the change effect of the hold icon f1 and the change icon e1 shown in FIGS. 22E to 22G ends, and a change candidate display further appears from the change notice display j1. The animation to be displayed is displayed.

  FIG. 22J shows a state where the animation in which the change notice icon k3 appears is finished. The stationary start of the change notice icon k3 is the end of the animation.

  FIG. 22 (k) shows a state in which a moving animation in which the change notice icon k3 moves is started. The change notice icons k and 3 are displayed across the two display devices of the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the second decorative symbol display device 208M. In this example, an animation is displayed in which the change notice icon k3 moves between the hold icon f1 and the change icon e1. This makes it difficult to understand whether the change target is the hold icon f1 or the change icon e1, or both the hold icon f1 and the change icon e1, and allows the player to focus on the change target icon. May be possible.

  FIG. 22 (l) shows a state in which the change notice icon k3 has moved between the hold icon f1 and the change icon e1. The change notice icon k3 overlaps a part of the hold icon f1 and a part of the change icon e1. In the figure, the arrow pointing downward to the right on the left side of the change notice icon k represents the locus of the change notice icon k.

  FIG. 22 (m) shows a state in which the effect images m1, m2, and m3 are displayed. The effect image m1 is displayed overlapping with the hold icon f1, the effect image m2 is displayed overlapping with the change notice icon k3, and the effect image m3 is displayed overlapping with the change icon e1. Due to the effect images m1, m2, and m3, the hold icon f1, the change icon e1, and the change notice icon k3 become invisible. When the effect images m1, m2, and m3 are displayed, the change notice icon k3 may be deleted.

  FIG. 22 (n) shows a state where the effect images m1, m2, and m3 are deleted. Note that the change notice icon k3 is deleted before the effect images m1, m2, and m3 are deleted. The deletion of the effect images m1, m2, and m3 is the end of the change display. Since the change display is performed, in this example, the aspect of the change icon e1 is changed from the blue circle to the red circle, and the hold icon f1. The aspect of this remains a green circle. In this example, the change notice icon k3 is a display used for change display that changes the mode of the change icon e1, and the change icon e1 changes to the same red color as the change notice icon k3. The change notice icon k3 may be a display used for a hold change display that changes the mode of the hold icon f1, and the change notice icon k3 is used for a change display that changes the mode of the hold icon f1 and the change icon e1. May be.

  FIG. 22 (o) shows a state where the change notice display j is deleted. When the change notice display j is deleted, change display by the change candidate display for the hold icon f1 and the change icon e1 is not performed any more.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 22C, the moving animation of the change notice icon k1 is started before the change display result by the change notice icon k2 is displayed. The change display by the change notice icon k2 is for the hold icon f1, and the change display by the change notice icon k1 is for the change icon e1. When a plurality of hold icons are displayed, the change display by the change notice icon k1 may be a hold icon other than the hold icon f1. Further, as shown in FIG. 22 (i), after the change notice icons k1 and k2 are erased, the change notice display is not erased and a new change notice icon k3 appears. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may make it difficult to understand which icon is targeted for the change display by the change candidate display, and may allow the player to pay attention to the target and result of the change display.
(Example 10)
Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 10 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. Each of FIGS. 23A to 23N is a diagram showing the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. In each drawing of FIG. 23, the crest character 224E and the operation buttons 710 are not shown.

  FIG. 23A shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner, the fourth symbol lamp i1 is in the fourth symbol, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M is in the fifth symbol. Has been done. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 23 (a), since the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1, and the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 0, the hold icon f1 is displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area f. The hold icon is not displayed in the special figure 2 hold icon display area g, and the number of holds is displayed by the numbers “1” and “0” on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The mode of the hold icon f1 is a white circle. In addition, a variation icon e1 is displayed in the variation icon display area e. The aspect of the fluctuation icon e1 is a white circle. Further, a blue circular change notice icon k1 and a green circular change notice icon k2 are displayed side by side on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. The production stage is the castle town stage.

  FIG. 23 (b) shows a state immediately before the “decoration 7” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a when the speed of the variable display in the left symbol display area 208a becomes slow. A downward arrow shown below “decoration 7” in the figure indicates that a low-speed fluctuation display that allows the player to recognize the decoration symbol is displayed.

  FIG. 23C shows a state in which “decoration 7” is temporarily stopped and displayed in a manner in which the “decoration 7” slightly swings up and down in the left symbol display area 208a. In the figure, the two wavy lines shown in the upper left and lower right of “Decoration 7” indicate that “Decoration 7” slightly fluctuates up and down. In addition, the decorative symbol variation display in the right symbol display area 208c is changed to a low-speed variation display.

  FIG. 23D shows a state immediately before the variable display speed in the right symbol display area 208c is further reduced and “decoration 6” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. A downward arrow shown below “decoration 6” in the figure indicates that a low-speed fluctuation display that allows the player to recognize the decoration symbol is displayed. In addition, the decorative symbol variation display in the middle symbol display area 208b is changed to a low-speed variation display.

  FIG. 23E shows a state in which “decoration 6” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c so as to slightly swing up and down. In the figure, two wavy lines illustrated in the upper left and lower right of “decoration 6” indicate that “decoration 6” slightly fluctuates up and down. Further, in the middle symbol display area 208b, the speed of the variable display is further slowed, and the state immediately before the “decoration 6” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. A downward arrow shown below “decoration 6” in the figure indicates that a low-speed fluctuation display that allows the player to recognize the decoration symbol is displayed.

  FIG. 23 (f) shows a state in which “decoration 6” is temporarily stopped (swing fluctuation display) in a manner in which the “decoration 6” slightly swings up and down in the middle symbol display area 208 b. In the figure, two wavy lines illustrated in the upper left and lower right of “decoration 6” indicate that “decoration 6” slightly fluctuates up and down. As a result, “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 6” which is a shifted symbol form is temporarily stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c.

  FIG. 23 (g) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is out of date ("special figure G"). In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 6”, which is an off symbol mode, indicating that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct is out of display. Further, the fifth symbol of the combination “7-6-6” is stopped and displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. In addition, the change notice display j and the change notice icons k1 and k2 are displayed on the second decoration symbol display device 208M even during the stop display of the decorative symbol (during the symbol stop display).

  FIG. 23 (h) shows a state in which the fluctuation icon deletion animation is started. The variation icon e1 is deleted in such a manner that it moves downward and moves out of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In the drawing, a downward arrow illustrated above the variation icon e1 represents the locus of the variation icon e1. The variation icon erasing animation in this example is executed while the decorative symbol is stopped. The variation icon erasing animation may be started during the variation display of the decorative symbol and may end during the variation display of the decoration symbol, or after the variation display of the decoration symbol is terminated, You may finish in.

  FIG. 23 (i) shows a state in which the fluctuation icon deletion animation is displayed. The fluctuation icon e1 moves downward and is gradually erased.

  FIG. 23 (j) shows a state in which the fluctuation icon deletion animation is finished. The completion of the deletion of the fluctuation icon e1 is the end of the fluctuation icon deletion animation.

  In FIG. 23 (k), the special symbol 1 display device 212 (not shown) starts the special symbol 1 variable game, and the decorative symbol variable display, the fourth symbol, and the fifth symbol variable display are started. Shows the state. The decorative symbol variation display is initially displayed as a low-speed variation display, and is displayed as a high-speed variation display after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation. The number of holds in the special figure 1 is 0.

  FIG. 23 (l) shows a state in which the hold icon reduction animation is started. In the hold icon reduction animation, the hold icon f1 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f becomes the change icon e2 and starts moving toward the change icon display area e. In the figure, an arrow pointing to the upper right illustrated in the lower left of the variation icon e2 represents the locus of the variation icon e2.

  FIG. 23 (m) shows a state where the hold icon reduction animation is completed. The completion of the movement of the fluctuation icon e2 to the fluctuation icon display area e is the end of the hold icon reduction animation.

  FIG. 23 (n) shows a state where the display size of the variation icon e2 is enlarged. The display size of the variation icon is enlarged after the movement to the variation icon display area e is completed. Note that the display size of the fluctuation icon may be enlarged during movement display (while the hold icon reduction animation is displayed).

In this embodiment, change notice icons k1 and k2 and a change notice display are displayed over a plurality of special figure variable games. The change notice icons k1, k2 and the change notice display are displayed over a plurality of special figure change games than when the change notice icons k1, k2 and the change notice display are displayed during one special figure change game. In this case, it is easier to confirm and display the big hit symbol pattern in the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon and the variation icon to be changed.
(Example 11)
Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 11 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 24A, 24 </ b> C to 24 </ b> E, and FIGS. 24G to 24 </ b> J are diagrams showing the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. FIG. 24A shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner, the fourth symbol lamp i1 is in the fourth symbol, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M is in the fifth symbol. Has been done. Further, at the time shown in FIG. 24A, the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1, and the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 0. Therefore, the hold icon f1 is displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area f. The special icon 2 hold icon display area g does not display the hold icon, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N displays the number of holds by the numbers “1” and “0”. The mode of the hold icon f1 is a white circle. In addition, a variation icon e1 is displayed in the variation icon display area e. The aspect of the fluctuation icon e1 is a white circle. The production stage is the castle town stage.

  FIG. 24B shows a state immediately before a game ball wins the special figure 1 starting port 230. In this example, during the special figure 1 variable game, one game ball is won at the special figure 1 starting port 230, and the special figure 1 hold is increased by one.

  FIG. 24 (c) shows the state of the effect display immediately after one game ball is won in the special figure 1 starting port 230. A numerical image “2” is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and it is informed that the number of holdings in FIG. Moreover, the hold icon increase animation is started in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In the hold icon increase animation, the hold icon f2 corresponding to the increased hold appears in such a manner that it gradually moves from below toward the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f. The start of displaying “2”, which is the number of holds of the special figure 1 on the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and the start of displaying the hold icon increasing animation are simultaneous, and winning of the game ball to the special figure 1 starting port 230 is achieved. And almost at the same time. The mode of the hold icon f2 is a blue circle.

  FIG. 24D shows a state in which the hold icon increase animation is finished. The completion of the movement of the hold icon f2 to the second area of the special icon 1 hold icon display area f is the end of the hold icon increase animation. In addition, after the hold icon increasing animation ends, the second decorative symbol display device 208M starts displaying the button image q1 and the gauge image q2. The button image q1 is an image imitating the appearance of the chance button 136. The gauge image q2 displays the remaining time of the operation valid period (operation reception period) of the chance button 136 by the length of the blue portion (shown by right-up hatching). The operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started at the same time when the button image q1 and the gauge image q2 are started to be displayed. The button image q1 is displayed in red, and the chance button 136 emits red light during the operation effective period. The button image q1 and the gauge image q2 are displays prompting the player to operate (press) the chance button 136. The operation valid period of the chance button 136 may be started before the button image q1 gauge image q2 is started to be displayed, or may be started after the button image q1 and the gauge image q2 are started to be displayed. Good. It should be noted that the display of the button image q1 and the gauge image q2 and the start of the operation valid period of the chance button 136 are simultaneously with the start of the on-hold icon increasing animation (almost simultaneously with the winning of the game ball to the special figure 1 starting port 230). There may be.

  FIG. 24E shows a state during the operation effective period. The length of the blue portion of the gauge image q2 is shortened, and it is reported that the remaining time of the button reception period is shorter than the initial time. In the gauge image q2, the blue portion becomes shorter toward the left as the operation effective period elapses.

  FIG. 24F shows a state immediately before the player operates the chance button 136. In this example, the chance button 136 is operated by the player during the operation effective period.

  FIG. 24G shows the state of the effect display immediately after the chance button 136 is operated by the player. When the chance button 136 is operated and the operation is accepted, the button image q1 and the gauge image q2 are deleted, and instead, the effect image m4 is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. When the chance button 136 is operated once, the operation valid period of the chance button 136 ends, and the red emission of the chance button 136 ends.

  FIG. 24 (h) shows a state where the effect image m4 has been deleted. The second decorative symbol display device 208M displays a change notice display j instead of the effect image m4.

  FIG. 24 (i) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is out of date ("special figure G"). In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 6”, which is an off symbol mode, indicating that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct is out of display. Further, the fifth symbol of the combination “7-6-6” is stopped and displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

  In FIG. 24 (j), in accordance with the start of the special figure 1 variable game by the special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown), the decorative display, the fourth graphic, and the fifth graphic of the variable display are started. Shows the state. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the hold icon reduction animation is executed, and the hold icon f1 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f becomes the change icon e2 and the change icon display area. e, the hold icon f2 displayed in the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f moves to the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f. At the time shown in FIG. 24 (j), the hold icon reduction animation is finished, and the movement of the fluctuation icon e2 and the hold icon f2 is completed.

In this embodiment, a change notice display is displayed as an operation response display of the chance button 136. If the chance button 136 is not operated during the operation valid period of the chance button 136, the change notice display and the change candidate display may not be displayed.
(Example 12)
Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 12 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIGS. 25A and 25C are diagrams showing the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. FIG. 25A shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner, the fourth symbol lamp i1 is in the fourth symbol, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M is in the fifth symbol. Has been done. Further, at the time shown in FIG. 25 (a), since the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1 and the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 0, the hold icon f1 is displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area f. The special icon 2 hold icon display area g does not display the hold icon, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N displays the number of holds by the numbers “1” and “0”. The mode of the hold icon f1 is a white circle. In addition, a variation icon e1 is displayed in the variation icon display area e. The aspect of the fluctuation icon e1 is a white circle. The production stage is the castle town stage.

  FIG. 25B shows a state immediately before the game ball wins the special figure 1 starting port 230. In this example, during the special figure 1 variable game, one game ball is won at the special figure 1 starting port 230, and the special figure 1 hold is increased by one.

  FIG. 25C shows a state of effect display immediately after one game ball is won in the special figure 1 starting port 230. A numerical image “2” is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and it is informed that the number of holdings in FIG. Moreover, the hold icon increase animation is started in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In the hold icon increase animation, the hold icon f2 corresponding to the increased hold appears in such a manner that it gradually moves from below toward the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f. The start of displaying “2”, which is the number of holds of the special figure 1 on the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and the start of displaying the hold icon increasing animation are simultaneous, and winning of the game ball to the special figure 1 starting port 230 is achieved. And almost at the same time. The hold icon f2 is circular and is displayed in a mode that turns white when lit (hereinafter referred to as “white flashing circular mode” (indicated by vertical vertical hatching in FIG. 25)). The white blinking circular form is an aspect that is more easily changed to a blue circular, green circular, red circular, or iridescent circular aspect than the white circular aspect.

  FIG. 25D shows a state in which the hold icon increase animation is finished. The hold icon f2 has finished moving to the second area of the special icon 1 hold icon display area f, and the completion of the move of the hold icon f2 to the second area is the end of the hold icon increase animation. In addition, after the on-hold icon increasing animation ends, a change notice display r1 is displayed on the left side of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The change notice display r1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative symbol variation display in the left symbol display area 208a. The change notice display r1 is a display including a character display of Yoshimune (hereinafter referred to as “Yoshimune”) and a display imitating a signboard (hereinafter referred to as “signboard”). A character string image of “Change with next change !?” is displayed in the signboard, suggesting that the state of the hold icon changes during the next special figure moving game. The change notice display r1 in this example is a notice for notifying that the mode of the hold icon changes, similarly to the change notice display j shown in FIG. In this example, the change notice display r1 is a notice for notifying that the hold icon f2 in the form of white blinking changes. It should be noted that the hold icon subject to change notice in the change notice display r1 may be in the form of white blinking. The change notice display r1 may be displayed during the on-hold icon increase animation, or may be displayed simultaneously with the end of the on-hold icon increase animation.

  FIG. 25E shows a state in which the character string image in the signboard of the change notice display r1 has been deleted. The character string image in the signboard is erased during the final stage of the special figure variation game or during the temporary stop display of the decorative symbol. Note that the change notice display r1 is displayed while being overlapped with the decorative symbol that is temporarily displayed during the temporary stop display of the decorative symbol in the left symbol display area 208a.

  FIG. 25 (f) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is out of date ("special figure G"). In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 6”, which is an off symbol mode, indicating that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct is out of display. Further, the fifth symbol of the combination “7-6-6” is stopped and displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. During the decorative symbol stop display, the change notice display r1 is displayed so as to overlap the “decoration 7” displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the frame display surrounding it.

  In FIG. 25 (g), in response to the start of the special figure 1 variation game by the special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown), the variation display of the decorative symbol, the variation display of the fourth symbol, and the fifth symbol are started. Shows the state. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the hold icon reduction animation is executed, and the hold icon f1 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f becomes the change icon e2 and the change icon display area. e, the hold icon f2 displayed in the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f moves to the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f. The hold icon decreasing animation is finished, and the movement of the fluctuation icon e2 and the hold icon f2 is completed. After the decorative symbol variation display is started, the change notice display r1 is displayed overlapping the decorative symbol variation display in the left symbol display area 208a. As described above, the change notice display r1 is displayed so as to overlap the change display of the decorative symbol except when the decorative symbol is stopped. In addition, a character string image of “Take 1 is! Blue!” Is displayed in the signboard of the change notice display r1, and it is suggested that the hold icon f2 corresponding to the hold 1 may change to a blue circle. Yes. The character string image in the signboard of the change notice display r1 after FIG. 25 (g) is a change candidate display. The hold icon f2 may change to a mode corresponding to the change candidate display indicated by the character string image in the signboard.

  FIG. 25H shows a state in which Yoshimune r2 having a bow and arrow is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. Yoshimune r2 is a display corresponding to Yoshimune n and change item o shown in FIG. 17 and the like, and is a display for changing the change notice display r1.

  FIG. 25 (i) shows a state where an animation in which Yoshimune r2 shoots an arrow is displayed. The arrow flies toward the signboard of the change notice display r1.

  FIG. 25 (j) shows a state in which the effect image m4 starts to be displayed so as to overlap almost the entire signboard of the change notice display r1. When an arrow is inserted into the sign of the change notice display r1, the effect image m4 is displayed. A display in which the change notice display r1 is changed by the effect image m4 is performed.

  FIG. 25 (k) shows a state where the effect image m4 has been deleted. After the effect image m4 is deleted, a change notice display r1 in which the character string image in the signboard is changed to “Take 1! Red!” Is displayed. The character string image in the signboard of the change notice display r1 suggests that the hold icon f2 corresponding to the hold 1 may change to a red circle.

  FIG. 25 (l) shows a state where Yoshimune r2 is erased. When the Yoshimune r2 is deleted, the change display for the notice change display r1 is not performed any more. If Yoshimune r2 is continuously displayed, a change display for the change notice display r1 may be displayed again.

  FIG. 25 (m) shows a state in which the hold change display is started. In the hold change display of this example, the effect image m5 is displayed around the hold icon f2 to be changed. The display start of the effect image m5 is the display start of the hold change display.

  FIG. 25 (n) shows a state in which the hold change display is finished. The deletion of the effect image m5 is the end of the hold change display, and after the hold change display, the mode of the hold icon f2 changes to a red circle. Thus, the hold icon f2 changes to a mode corresponding to the change candidate display indicated by the character string image in the signboard. Note that the mode of the hold icon f2 may be changed during the hold change display, or may be changed simultaneously with the end of the hold change display.

  FIG. 25 (o) shows a state where the change notice display r1 is deleted. When the change notice display r1 is deleted, the hold change display for the hold icon f2 is not performed any more. Even after the change notice display r1 is erased, the hold change display for the hold icon f2 may be performed by an effect display different from the effect display shown in FIG.

In this embodiment, a change candidate display is displayed in the change notice display r3. The expected degree of change candidate display is set for each color in the same manner as the change notice icon k, etc., and is set to increase in the order of “blue”, “green”, “red”, “gold”, “rainbow”. ing. The change candidate display including the “blue” character image shown in FIGS. 25G to 25I is the first display, and the change including the “red” character image shown in FIGS. The candidate display may be the second display.
(Example 13)
Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 13 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 26 (a) to (r) and FIGS. 26 (a) to (r) and FIGS. 27 (a) to (r) are diagrams showing the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. FIG. 26A shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the symbol display areas 208 a to 208 c of the first decorative symbol display device 208 </ b> L, the symbol combination “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 1” in the case of detachment is shown, which indicates that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct. "Is stopped (confirmed display, final stop display). Further, the fifth symbol of the “7-7-1” combination is stopped and displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. The frame display surrounding each decoration symbol of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 1” is displayed in red, and a pre-reading notice for the red chance is executed. In the present embodiment, during the execution of the pre-reading advance notice of the chance, the character string image “Stop the same color ...” is displayed in the display area h, and the pre-reading advance notice of the chance is being executed. Has been suggested. In this example, the target of the pre-reading notice for the chance is the hold 1 in FIG. Further, since the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1 and the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 0, the hold icon f1 is displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area f, and the special figure 2 hold icon display area g is displayed. The hold icon is not displayed, and the number of holds is displayed by the numbers “1” and “0” on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The mode of the hold icon f1 is a red circle. In addition, a variation icon e1 is displayed in the variation icon display area e. The aspect of the fluctuation icon e1 is a white circle. Further, Yoshimune n is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. In this embodiment, Yoshimune n is a character display that is always displayed. The production stage is the castle town stage.

  FIG. 26B shows a state where the change icon e1 is deleted. In this embodiment, the variation icon is erased during the stop display of the decorative symbol, the fourth symbol, and the fifth symbol.

  In FIG. 26 (c), the special symbol 1 display device 212 (not shown) starts the special symbol 1 variable game, and the decorative symbol variable display, the fourth symbol, and the fifth symbol variable display are started. Shows the state. In FIG. 26 (c), the downward white arrows shown in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the first decorative symbol display devices 208La to 208c display a variable display at a speed that allows the player to recognize the decorative symbols. It represents the state being done. Also, with the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the hold icon reduction animation is executed, and the hold icon f1 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f becomes the change icon e2 and the change icon. Move to display area e. The arrow in the figure represents the locus of the fluctuation icon e2. At the time shown in FIG. 26 (c), the on-hold icon reduction animation is finished, and the movement of the fluctuation icon e2 is completed.

  FIG. 26 (d) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, after the variable display is displayed at a speed at which the player cannot recognize the decorative symbols, the decorative symbol changes in the left symbol display area 208a. The display changes to a low-speed fluctuation display.

  FIG. 26E shows a state immediately before the variable display speed in the left symbol display area 208a is slow and “decoration 7” is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a. A downward arrow shown below “decoration 7” in the figure indicates that a low-speed fluctuation display that allows the player to recognize the decoration symbol is displayed.

  FIG. 26 (f) shows a state in which “decoration 7” is temporarily stopped and displayed in a manner in which the “decoration 7” slightly swings up and down in the left symbol display area 208 a. In the figure, the two wavy lines shown in the upper left and lower right of “Decoration 7” indicate that “Decoration 7” slightly fluctuates up and down. In addition, the decorative symbol variation display in the right symbol display area 208c is changed to a low-speed variation display.

  FIG. 26 (g) shows a state immediately before the variable display speed in the right symbol display area 208c is further reduced and “decoration 6” is temporarily displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. A downward arrow shown below “decoration 6” in the figure indicates that a low-speed fluctuation display that allows the player to recognize the decoration symbol is displayed.

  FIG. 26 (h) shows a state in which “decoration 6” is temporarily stopped and displayed in a mode in which the “decoration 6” slightly swings up and down in the right symbol display area 208c. In the figure, two wavy lines illustrated in the upper left and lower right of “decoration 6” indicate that “decoration 6” slightly fluctuates up and down.

  FIG. 26 (i) shows a state in which the speed of the variable display is changed so that the player can recognize the decorative symbols in the middle symbol display area 208b. The middle symbol display area 208b is immediately before the “continue” decorative symbol including the “continue” character string image is temporarily displayed. In the figure, a downward arrow shown below the “Continue” decorative symbol indicates that a low-speed fluctuation display is displayed that allows the player to recognize the decorative symbol. The “Continue” decorative symbol is displayed when a pseudo-continuous effect display is performed. The pseudo-ream is an effect of performing pseudo-variation as if the decorative symbol variation display was performed a plurality of times during one special figure variation game, and is a notice effect of the variation. The variation display of the decorative symbols shown in FIGS. 26C to 26J is the first pseudo variation. The greater the number of times of pseudo-variation of pseudo-continuations, the easier it is to display the big hit symbol form in the symbol variation display.

  FIG. 26 (j) shows a state in which the “continue” decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208 b in a manner that slightly fluctuates up and down. In the figure, the two wavy lines shown in the upper left and lower right of the “Continue” decorative symbol indicate that the “Continuous” decorative symbol slightly swings up and down. A decorative symbol “decoration 7-continuation-decoration 6” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c.

  FIG. 26 (k) shows a state in which a cut-in display is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In this example, the cut-in display is displayed before the second pseudo fluctuation is started. The cut-in display is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern “decoration 7-continuation-decoration 6”.

  FIG. 26 (l) shows a state immediately before the second pseudo fluctuation is started. The cut-in display has been deleted, and an image of “× 2” is displayed in the lower left of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, so that it is notified that the second pseudo fluctuation is started. The “× 2” image is displayed so as to overlap a part of “decoration 7”.

  FIG. 26 (m) shows a state where the second pseudo fluctuation is started. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, variable display is performed at such a speed that the player cannot recognize the decorative symbol.

  FIG. 26 (n) shows a state where the “× 2” image is reduced.

  FIG. 26 (o) shows a state where the decorative symbol variation display in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c is changed to a low-speed variation display.

  FIG. 26 (p) shows a state in which “decoration 4” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. With the temporary stop display of “decoration 4”, reach effect display in which “decoration 4” is displayed in the decorative symbol variation display is started. In addition, a character string image of “if SP stops ...” is displayed in the display area h, and it is suggested that SP (super) reach is started when the decorative pattern of “SP” is displayed. ing.

  FIG. 26 (q) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display in the middle symbol display area 208b is changed to a low-speed variation display.

  FIG. 26 (q) shows a state in which the decorative symbol “SP” including the character string image “SP” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. The decorative pattern “SP” is displayed when the SP reach is started.

  FIG. 27 (a) shows a state continued from FIG. 26 (q). In FIG. 27A, SP reach is started, the left symbol display area 208a is reduced to the upper left corner of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the right symbol display area 208c is displayed as the first decorative symbol display. The display is reduced to the upper right corner of the display area of the device 208L. During SP reach, the frame display surrounding the decorative design is not displayed.

  FIG. 27B shows a state where SP reach development destination candidates are displayed. A character string image of “What is the development destination?” Is displayed at the upper part of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the candidate display s1 is displayed on the left side of the display area, and the candidate display is displayed on the right side of the display area. s2 is displayed. The candidate display s1 includes a character string image of “drinking comparison”, and the candidate display s2 informs that the development candidate is an effect of drinking comparison. The candidate display s2 includes a character string image of “bowling”, and the candidate display s2 informs that the development candidate is an effect of bowling. The number of “★” images included in the candidate displays s1 and s2 is a display suggesting the jackpot reliability of each production. In this example, one image of “★” is included in the candidate display s1, and two images of “★” are included in the candidate display s2, so that the direction of bowling rather than the effect of drinking comparison Is set to have a large hit reliability. A roulette display is displayed between the candidate displays s1 and s2.

  FIG. 27C shows a state in which roulette display is started. During the roulette display, the arrow in the roulette display is rotated clockwise. In the drawing, the arrows shown above and below the roulette display indicate that the arrow in the roulette display is rotating clockwise. The third decorative symbol display device 208N displays a character string image of “Ikuzo”. The character string image is a display that suggests that change display of the candidate display is started.

  FIG. 27D shows a state in which the change item o is started to be displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. In the present embodiment, the change item o is used for change display in which the modes of the candidate displays s1 and s2 change.

  FIG. 27E shows a state in which an animation in which the change item o is thrown by Yoshimune n is displayed. In this example, the change display target is the candidate display s1, and the change item o flies toward the candidate display s1. In the drawing, a left-pointing arrow illustrated to the right of the change item o represents the locus of the change item o.

  FIG. 27F shows a state in which the change item o is displayed overlapping the candidate display s1. After the change item o is displayed overlapping the candidate display s1, change display in which the aspect of the candidate display s1 changes is started.

  FIG. 27G shows a state in which the change item o has been deleted and the effect image m6 has started to be displayed instead. The effect image m6 is displayed so as to overlap the entire character and “★” portion of the candidate display s1. By displaying the effect image m6, a change display in which the mode of the candidate display s1 is changed is performed.

  FIG. 27 (h) shows a state where the change display is finished. The deletion of the effect image m6 is the end of the change display. In the candidate display s1, three character string images of “Swordsman” and “★” are displayed, and the mode of the candidate display s1 changes. The candidate display s1 after the change display is informed that the development candidate is an effect of a swordsman confrontation. In addition, three “★” are displayed in the candidate display s1, and the performance of the swordsman confrontation is set higher in the big hit reliability than the performance of the bowling.

  FIG. 27 (i) shows a state in which a blessing effect that has been successfully displayed for change is being executed. The mode of Yoshimune n displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N has changed to a mode of guts pose, and the blessing effect is executed by Yoshimune n who performed guts pose. The change display effect of the candidate display s1 may be provided with a failure pattern effect in which the aspect of the candidate display s1 does not change. When the effect of the change display of the candidate display is a success pattern, the effect shown by the candidate display after the change display is higher than the effect indicated by the candidate display before the change display. Further, the effect indicated by the candidate display (candidate display s1) after the change display may have a higher degree of jackpot expectation than the effect indicated by the candidate display (candidate display s2) that is not the target of the change display.

  FIG. 27 (j) shows a state where the development destination is informed that it is an effect of a swordsman confrontation. The arrow in the roulette display is stopped in the direction pointing to the candidate display s1 (leftward), and it is informed that the development destination is an effect of a swordsman confrontation.

  FIG. 27 (k) shows a state in which the development destination is informed that it is an effect of a swordsman confrontation. An effect image m7 is displayed so as to surround the candidate display s1, and it is notified that the development destination is an effect of a swordsman confrontation.

  FIG. 27 (l) shows a state immediately before the production of the swordsman confrontation is started. Prior to the start of the production of the swordsman confrontation, the character string image of “What is the development destination?”, Candidate displays s1, s2, roulette display, and Yoshimune n are deleted.

  FIG. 27 (m) shows a state in which the production of the swordsman confrontation has started. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an animation in which a swordsman appears is displayed.

  FIG. 27 (n) shows a state in which a confrontation between Yoshimune and Swordsman has started. The swordsman showdown is an effect that displays an animation in which Yoshimune and swordsman make a duel. A character display of Yoshimune is displayed on the left side of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and a character display of a swordsman is displayed on the right side of the display area. In this example, the change icon e2 is displayed even during the production of the swordsman confrontation. Note that the pedestal display in the variation icon display area e may be displayed even during the production of the swordsman confrontation.

  FIG. 27 (o) shows a state in which an animation of a scene in which Yoshimune and swordsman cut each other is displayed.

  FIG. 27 (p) shows a state in which an animation of a scene where Yoshimune won the confrontation is displayed. During the display of the scene, Yoshimune n is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

  FIG. 27 (q) shows a state in which “decoration 4—decoration 4—decoration 4” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c after the effect of the swordsman confrontation has ended. The end of the production of the swordsman confrontation is the end of SP reach, and after the end of SP reach, a temporary stop display of “decoration 4—decoration 4—decoration 4” is started. The change icon e2 is erased during the temporary stop display of “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4”. Note that the change icon e2 may be displayed during the temporary stop display of “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4”.

  FIG. 27 (r) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The determination result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit ("Special figure C"). In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 4—decoration 4—decoration 4”, which is a big hit symbol form, indicating that the determination result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit is stopped. Further, the fifth symbol of the combination “4-4-4” is stopped and displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. Further, when the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is a big hit, the fourth symbol lamp i1 is turned on in a big hit light emission mode.

In this embodiment, the development destination candidate display changes. The candidate display changes to a display showing an effect display having a higher hit reliability than before the change. It should be noted that the effect display shown in FIGS. 26 and 27 can be performed after the change display of the hold icon, the change icon, and the change candidate display shown in FIGS.
(Example 14)
Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 14 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 28 (a) to 28 (p) and FIGS. 29 (a) to 29 (h). 28 (a), (c), (d), (f) to (p) and FIGS. 29 (a), (b), (d) to (h) are the pachinko machines according to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows 100 in a time series. FIG. 28A shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner, the fourth symbol lamp i1 is in the fourth symbol, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M is in the fifth symbol. Has been done. Further, since the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1 and the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 0, the hold icon f1 is displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area f, and the special figure 2 hold icon display area g is displayed. The hold icon is not displayed, and the number of holds is displayed by the numbers “1” and “0” on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The mode of the hold icon f1 is a white circle. In addition, a variation icon e1 is displayed in the variation icon display area e. The aspect of the fluctuation icon e1 is a white circle. The production stage is the castle town stage.

  FIG. 28 (b) shows a state immediately before a game ball wins the special figure 1 starting port 230. In this example, during the special figure 1 variable game, one game ball is won at the special figure 1 starting port 230, and the special figure 1 hold is increased by one.

  FIG. 28 (c) shows the state of the effect display immediately after one game ball is won in the special figure 1 starting port 230. A numerical image “2” is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and it is informed that the number of holdings in FIG. Moreover, the hold icon increase animation is started in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In the hold icon increase animation, the hold icon f2 corresponding to the increased hold appears in such a manner that it gradually moves from below toward the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f. The start of displaying “2”, which is the number of holds of the special figure 1 on the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and the start of displaying the hold icon increasing animation are simultaneous, and winning of the game ball to the special figure 1 starting port 230 is achieved. And almost at the same time. The mode of the hold icon f2 is a white circle. In the present embodiment, the button icon t1 is started to be displayed together with the hold icon f2 by the hold icon increasing animation. The button icon t1 is a display imitating the appearance of the chance button 136 and is displayed in red. The button icon t1 is displayed above the hold icon f2 and moves upward together with the hold icon f2. The button icon t1 may be a part of the hold icon f2, or the button icon t1 may be displayed as the hold icon f2.

  FIG. 28 (d) shows a state where the hold icon increase animation is finished. The hold icon f2 has been moved to the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f, and the button icon t1 has been moved. The completion of the movement of the hold icon f2 to the second area and the completion of the movement of the button icon t1 are the end of the hold icon increase animation. When the movement of the button icon t1 is completed, the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started. Thereafter, the button icon t1 is being displayed during the operation valid period of the chance button 136. The button icon t1 is a display prompting the player to operate the chance button 136. In addition, the chance button 136 emits red light when the operation effective period starts.

  FIG. 28 (e) shows a state immediately before the player operates the chance button 136. In this example, the chance button 136 is operated by the player during the operation effective period.

  FIG. 28F shows the state of the effect display immediately after the chance button 136 is operated by the player. When the chance button 136 is operated and the operation is accepted, the button icon t1 is deleted, and instead, an image change notice display r3 simulating a sign is started to be displayed above the hold icon f2. As described above, the change notice display may be started when the chance button 136 is operated in a state where the hold icon in the form of the button icon is displayed. The change notice display r3 is displayed in contact with the hold icon f2 that is the target of the hold change display. The change notice display r3 is displayed so as to overlap the variation display of the decorative symbol. A character string image of “blue or red” is displayed in the change notice display r3, and the character string image is a change candidate display. As described above, the change notice display may include a change candidate display. When the chance button 136 is operated once, the operation valid period of the chance button 136 ends, and the red emission of the chance button 136 ends.

  In FIG. 28 (g), the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner at a speed at which the player can visually recognize the decorative symbols in the left symbol display region 208a, and “decoration 6” is displayed in the middle right symbol display regions 208b and 208c. The temporary stop display is shown. The change notice display r3 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative symbol variation display in the left symbol display area 208a.

  FIG. 28H shows a state in which “decoration 7” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. The change notice display r3 is displayed so as to overlap with “decoration 7” in the left symbol display area 208a.

  FIG. 28 (i) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is out of date ("special figure G"). In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 6”, which is an off symbol mode, indicating that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct is out of display. Further, the fifth symbol of the combination “7-6-6” is stopped and displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. During the decorative symbol stop display, the change notice display r3 is displayed so as to overlap the “decoration 7” displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the frame display surrounding it.

  In FIG. 28 (j), in response to the start of the special figure 1 variable game by the special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown), the decorative display, the fourth graphic, and the fifth graphic of the variable display are started. Shows the state. In addition, illustration of the fluctuation icon deletion animation displayed during the non-execution of the special figure 1 fluctuation game is omitted. The change icon e1 is deleted by the change icon deletion animation. In addition, during the decorative symbol variation display, the change notice display r3 is displayed so as to overlap the ornament symbol variation display.

  FIG. 28 (k) shows a state in which the hold icon reduction animation is started. Due to the hold icon decreasing animation, the hold icon f1 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f becomes the fluctuation icon e2 and moves to the fluctuation icon display area e, and the special figure 1 hold icon display area f The hold icon f2 displayed in the second area moves to the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f. The change notice display r3 moves together with the hold icon f2.

  FIG. 28 (l) shows a state in which the hold icon reduction animation is finished. The movement of the fluctuation icon e2 and the hold icon f2 has been completed. After the on-hold icon reduction animation ends, display of a princess character display (hereinafter referred to as “princess”) r4 is started on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. The princess r4 is a display that suggests that the change candidate display changes. The princess r4 may be displayed at the same time as the start of the decorative symbol change, may be displayed during the display of the hold icon reduction animation, or may be started at the end of the hold icon reduction animation. .

  FIG. 28 (m) shows a state in which the change display of the change candidate display is notified. A character string image of “Change” is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M to notify that the change display is started.

  FIG. 28 (n) shows a state where change display of the change candidate display is started. In the change display, an animation in which the change notice display r3 rotates is displayed. The start of the animation in which the change notice display r3 rotates is the start of the change display. At the time of the change display, the player may be able to recognize the character string image (“blue or red” or “green or red”) of the change candidate display.

  FIG. 28 (o) shows a state where the change display of the change candidate display is completed. The change candidate display included in the change notice display r3 changes from “blue or red” to a character string image of “green or red”. The end of the animation in which the change notice display r3 rotates is the end of the change display.

  FIG. 28 (p) shows a state where the princess r4 has been erased. Even after the princess r4 is erased, the change display of the change candidate display may be performed by the effect display different from the effect display shown in FIG.

  FIG. 29 (a) shows a state continued from FIG. 28 (p). In FIG. 29A, the button image and the gauge image are displayed overlapping the change candidate display in the change notice display r3. The operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started at the same time as the display of the button image and the gauge image. The button image is displayed in red, and the chance button 136 emits red light during the operation effective period.

  FIG. 29B shows a state during the operation effective period. The length of the blue portion of the gauge image q2 is shortened, and it is reported that the remaining time of the button reception period is shorter than the initial time. In the gauge image q2, the blue portion becomes shorter toward the left as the operation effective period elapses.

  FIG. 29C shows a state immediately before the player operates the chance button 136. In this example, the chance button 136 is operated by the player during the operation effective period.

  FIG. 29D shows the state of the effect display immediately after the chance button 136 is operated by the player. When the chance button 136 is operated and the operation is accepted, the button image and the gauge image are deleted, and instead, the effect image m6 is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. The change candidate display is changed by displaying the effect image m6.

  FIG. 29 (e) shows a state where the change candidate display is completed. The deletion of the effect image m6 is the end of the change display of the change candidate display. The change candidate display changes to a “red” character image. The change candidate display is a display that suggests that the hold icon f2 changes to a red circular form.

  FIG. 29 (f) shows a state in which the hold change display is started. In the hold change display of this example, the effect image m5 is displayed around the hold icon f2 to be changed. The display start of the effect image m5 is the display start of the hold change display.

  FIG. 29G shows a state in which the hold change display is finished. The deletion of the effect image m5 is the end of the hold change display, and after the hold change display, the mode of the hold icon f2 changes to a red circle. Thus, the hold icon f2 changes to a mode corresponding to the change candidate display indicated by the character image in the signboard. Note that the mode of the hold icon f2 may be changed during the hold change display, or may be changed simultaneously with the end of the hold change display.

  FIG. 29 (h) shows a state where the change notice display r3 is deleted. When the change notice display r3 is deleted, the hold change display for the hold icon f2 is not performed any more. Even after the change notice display r3 is erased, the hold change display for the hold icon f2 may be performed by the effect display different from the effect display shown in FIG.

  Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to a modification of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. Each figure of Drawing 29 (i)-(k) is a figure showing pachinko machine 100 by this modification in time series. 29 (i) to (k) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 28 (g) to (i), respectively, except that the ball removal display er1 is displayed.

As shown in FIGS. 29 (i) to 29 (k), the ball removal display er1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative symbol and the change notice display r3. The ball removal display er1 is displayed when the lower plate 128 is full of game balls and a lower plate full tank error occurs. The ball removal display er <b> 1 is a display for notifying a lower tray full tank error, and is a display for prompting the player to operate the ball discharge lever 132. As described above, the error display such as the ball removal display er1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative design, the change notice display r3, and the change candidate display. In addition, an error display other than the ball removal display er1, for example, a door release error display for informing a door release error, an error display for informing an abnormal winning or an illegal winning, an error display for informing magnetic detection or magnetic field detection, etc. It may be displayed overlapping the symbol, change notice display r3, and change candidate display. It should be noted that the ball removal display er1 and these error displays may be displayed so as to overlap all effect displays other than the decorative symbols, the change notice display r3, and the change candidate display.
(Example 15)
Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the fifteenth embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. Each figure of Fig.30 (a)-(e) is a figure which shows the pachinko machine 100 by a present Example in time series.

  FIG. 30 (a) shows a state in which a display with the change item display o is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The change item o in this example is a display used for the hold change display of the hold icon f1. Further, a blue circular change notice icon k is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

  FIG. 30B shows a state in which an animation in which Yoshimune n throws a change item o toward the hold icon f1 is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The change item o flies toward the hold icon f1, and is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L in FIG. 30 (b). In the drawing, an upward-pointing arrow illustrated on the right side of the change item o represents the locus of the change item o.

  FIG. 30C shows a state in which a display in which the change item o collides with the hold icon f1 is displayed. The change item o is displayed so as to overlap a part of the hold icon f1.

  FIG. 30D shows a state in which the change item o is deleted and the effect image m is displayed overlapping the entire hold icon f1. When the change item o is overlapped with a part of the hold icon f1, the change item o is deleted and the effect image m is displayed instead. With the display of the effect image m, a hold change display in which the mode of the hold icon f1 changes is displayed.

  FIG. 30E shows a state where the effect image m has been deleted. The deletion of the effect image m is the end of the hold change display, and the hold change display is performed, whereby the mode of the hold icon f1 changes from a white circle to a blue circle. In this example, the mode of the hold icon f1 corresponding to the hold of the target of the prefetch notice changes to the same blue circle as the change notice icon k. There are a plurality of types of change candidate displays, and the mode of the variation icon may change to a mode corresponding to one change candidate display among the plurality of types of change candidate displays. Note that the change notice icon k is blue, the hold icon f1 is also blue, and the change notice icon k and the hold icon f1 have the same form, so the hold change display using the change notice icon k is the hold icon. Although it is not used for the hold change display for f1, it may be used for the change display for the white circular variation icon e1.

As in the present embodiment, the change item o may be used for the change display of the hold icon. The mode of the hold icon changes to a mode corresponding to the change candidate display.
(Example 16)
Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 16 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. Each figure of Drawing 30 (f)-(j) is a figure showing pachinko machine 100 by this example in time series.

  FIG. 30 (f) shows a state in which the display with the change item display o by Yoshimune n is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208 </ b> N. The change item o in this example is a display used for changing display of the change icon e1. Further, a blue circular change notice icon k is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

  FIG. 30G shows a state in which an animation in which Yoshimune n throws a change item o toward the hold icon f1 is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The change item o flies toward the change icon e1, and is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L in FIG. In the drawing, an upward-pointing arrow illustrated on the right side of the change item o represents the locus of the change item o.

  FIG. 30H shows a state in which a display in which the change item o collides with the change icon e1 is displayed. The change item o is displayed so as to overlap a part of the change icon e1.

  FIG. 30 (i) shows a state in which the change item o is deleted and the effect image m is displayed so as to overlap the entire variation icon e1. When the change item o is overlapped with a part of the change icon e1, the change item o is deleted and the effect image m is displayed instead. By displaying the effect image m, a change display in which the mode of the variation icon e1 is changed is displayed.

  FIG. 30J shows a state where the effect image m has been deleted. Erasing the effect image m is the end of the change display, and the change display is performed, whereby the aspect of the variation icon e1 changes from a white circle to a blue circle. In this example, the aspect of the change icon e1 changes to the same blue circle as the change notice icon k. There are a plurality of types of change candidate displays, and the mode of the hold icon may change to a mode corresponding to one change candidate display among the plurality of types of change candidate displays.

As in the present embodiment, the change item o may be used for the change display of the change icon. The mode of the variation icon changes to a mode corresponding to the change candidate display. In the present embodiment, the change notice icon k is displayed. However, even when the change notice icon k is not displayed, the effect display shown in FIGS. 30F to 30J may be performed.
(Example 17)
Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 17 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. Each figure of Drawing 30 (k)-(o) is a figure showing pachinko machine 100 by this example in time series.

  FIG. 30 (k) shows a state in which the display with the change item o by Yoshimune n is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

  FIG. 30 (l) shows a state in which an animation in which Yoshimune n throws the change item o toward the change notice icon k is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The change item o flies toward the change notice icon k, and is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L in FIG. In the drawing, an upward-pointing arrow illustrated on the right side of the change item o represents the locus of the change item o.

  FIG. 30 (m) shows a state in which the change item o is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. In this embodiment, the change item o passes through the change notice icon k without colliding with the change notice icon k.

  FIG. 30 (n) shows a state in which a display in which the change item o passes through the change notice icon k without colliding with the change notice icon k is displayed. In the case of the production of a failure pattern in which the change notice icon k is not changed, the change item o passes through the change notice icon k without colliding with the change notice icon k.

FIG. 30 (o) shows a state in which the change item o has been deleted. The change item o moves to the left and is erased in such a manner that it disappears outside the display area of the second decorative symbol display device 208M. As in this embodiment, the change display of the change candidate display may be provided with a failure pattern in which the change candidate display does not change. Note that a failure pattern whose form does not change may be provided for the change display of the hold icon and the change icon.
(Example 18)
Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 18 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. Each figure of Fig.31 (a)-(o) is a figure which shows the pachinko machine 100 by a present Example in time series. FIG. 31A shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner, the fourth symbol lamp i1 is in the fourth symbol, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M is in the fifth symbol. Has been done. Further, at the time shown in FIG. 31 (a), since the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1 and the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 0, the hold icon f1 is displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area f. The special icon 2 hold icon display area g does not display the hold icon, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N displays the number of holds by the numbers “1” and “0”. The mode of the hold icon f1 is a white circle. In addition, a variation icon e1 is displayed in the variation icon display area e. The aspect of the fluctuation icon e1 is a white circle. Further, a change notice icon k is displayed on the sub table device 700, and a princess n1 is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The princess n1 is a display that suggests changing the type of change candidate display. The production stage is the castle town stage.

  FIG. 31 (b) shows a state in which a display in which the princess n1 has a change item display o is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The change item o is a display that suggests changing the type of change candidate display.

  FIG. 31C shows a state in which an animation in which the princess n1 throws the change item o toward the change notice icon k is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The change item o flies toward the change notice icon k, and is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L in FIG. 31 (c). In the drawing, an upward-pointing arrow illustrated on the right side of the change item o represents the locus of the change item o.

  FIG. 31D shows a state in which the change item o is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

  FIG. 31E shows a state in which a display in which the change item o collides with the change notice icon k is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. The change item o is displayed so as to overlap a part of the change notice icon k.

  FIG. 31F shows a state in which the change item o is deleted and the effect image m is displayed so as to overlap the entire change notice icon k. When the change item o is overlapped with a part of the change notice icon k, the change item o is deleted and the effect image m is displayed instead. By displaying the effect image m, a change display in which the type of the change notice icon k changes is displayed.

  FIG. 31G shows a state where the effect image m has been deleted. When the effect image m is erased, the change display ends, and the change display is performed, whereby the type of the change notice icon k is changed from the blue circle to the red circle. In this way, there is a case where the blue circle change candidate display is changed to the red circle change candidate display.

  FIG. 31 (h) shows a state in which the princess n1 is displayed even after the change display of the change candidate display. When the princess n1 is displayed continuously, the change display of the change candidate display is performed again.

  The effect display shown in FIGS. 31 (i) to 31 (m) is the same effect display as the effect display shown in FIGS. In the present embodiment, change display of the change candidate display is performed again.

  FIG. 31 (n) shows a state where the effect image m has been deleted. Erasing the effect image m is the end of the change display, and since the change display is performed, the type of the change notice icon k changes from a red circle to a gold circle. As described above, there is a case where a change candidate display of a red circle changes to a change candidate display of a gold circle.

  FIG. 31 (o) shows a state where the princess n1 has been erased. When the princess n1 is deleted, the change display for the change notice icon k is not performed any more.

In the present embodiment, the princess n1 is displayed when the change display of the change candidate display is performed. In this case, a change display of the change candidate display is always performed, and the change candidate display changes to a type with a high expectation. Expectation of change candidate display is higher when princess n1 is displayed when change display of change candidate display is performed than when Yoshimune n is displayed when change display of change candidate display is performed It is easy to change to a high type. For example, when the change display of the change candidate display is performed, when the change display of the change candidate display is performed, the princess n1 is displayed when the change display of the change candidate display is performed. The display is likely to change to a green change candidate display. The same applies when the change display of the hold icon or the change icon is performed, and the change of the hold icon or the change icon is greater than when Yoshimune n is displayed when the change display of the hold icon or the change icon is performed. When the display is performed, when the princess n1 is displayed, the hold icon and the change icon are more likely to change to a mode with high expectation. When the princess n1 is deleted, the change display by the princess n1 is not performed during the special figure 1 variable game, and when the princess n1 is continuously displayed, the change display using the princess n1 may be performed again. There is. In addition, when performing change display twice or more, you may change the object of change display for every change display.
(Example 19)
Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 19 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 32A to 32G are diagrams showing the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. FIG. 32A shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner, the fourth symbol lamp i1 is in the fourth symbol, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M is in the fifth symbol. Has been done. Further, at the time shown in FIG. 32 (a), since the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1 and the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 0, the hold icon f1 is displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area f. The special icon 2 hold icon display area g does not display the hold icon, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N displays the number of holds by the numbers “1” and “0”. The mode of the hold icon f1 is a white circle. In addition, a variation icon e1 is displayed in the variation icon display area e. The aspect of the fluctuation icon e1 is a white circle. The treasure chest u1 is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. The production stage is the castle town stage.

  FIG. 32 (b) shows a state in which the treasure box u1 is opened and an animation in which a pseudo-continuous icon u2 appears from the treasure box u1 is displayed. In the drawing, the upward arrow shown below the pseudo-continuous icon u2 represents the locus of the pseudo-continuous icon u2. The pseudo-ream icon u2 in this example is a display that suggests that a pseudo-ream effect display is performed. The form of the pseudo-continuous icon u2 is a form of a white square including the letter “N”. The pseudo-ream icon u2 includes a white square, a blue square, a green square, a red square, a gold square, and a rainbow square. The expectation of the pseudo-ream icon is set to increase in the order of white square, blue square, green square, red square, gold square, and rainbow square.

  FIG. 32 (c) shows a state where the treasure chest u1 is erased. The treasure chest u1 is a display for causing the pseudo continuous icon u2 to appear, and is erased after the pseudo continuous icon u2 appears. While the treasure chest u1 is not displayed, new icons (except for the hold icon and the change icon) are not displayed.

  FIG. 32 (d) shows a state in which the activation display of the pseudo continuous icon u2 is started. The pseudo-ream icon u2 moves upward. In the drawing, an upward-pointing arrow illustrated on the left side of the pseudo continuous icon u2 represents the locus of the pseudo continuous icon u2.

  FIG. 32E shows a state in which the activation display of the pseudo continuous icon u2 is displayed. In the activation display of this example, the effect image m5 is displayed around the pseudo continuous icon u2. The activation display of the pseudo-ream icon u2 is a display that suggests that the pseudo-ream effect display is performed during the special figure variable game.

  FIG. 32F shows a state in which the pseudo continuous icon u2 is deleted. When the activation display of the pseudo continuous icon u2 is completed, the pseudo continuous icon u2 is deleted.

  FIG. 32 (g) shows a state in which the decorative symbol “decoration 7-continuation-decoration 6” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, which is the same as the state shown in FIG. is there. The temporary stop display of the “continue” decorative symbol suggests that the second pseudo-variation of the pseudo-ream starts. After the time shown in FIG. 32G, the second pseudo fluctuation shown in FIG. In this embodiment, unlike the embodiment 13 shown in FIG. 26, Yoshimune n is not displayed.

  When the activation display of the pseudo-ream icon u2 is displayed during the special figure variable game, the “Continue” decorative symbol is temporarily displayed during the special figure variable game. In addition, when the activation display of the pseudo continuous icon u2 is displayed during the second pseudo variation, the third pseudo variation is always performed. Note that when the activation display of the pseudo-continuous icon u2 is displayed during the third pseudo-variation, the big hit symbol mode may be surely displayed in the special figure variation game.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 32 (h) to (l) and FIGS. 33 (a) to (o), an example of the effect of the pachinko machine 100 according to a modification of the nineteenth embodiment of the present embodiment will be described. 32 (h) to (l) and FIGS. 32 (a) to (o) are diagrams showing the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. FIG. 32 (h) shows the same state as FIG. 32 (c).

  FIG. 32 (i) shows a state in which Yoshimune n is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Yoshimune n in this example is a display that suggests changing the mode of the pseudo-ream icon u2.

  FIG. 32 (j) shows a state in which the display with the change item display o is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The change item o is a display that suggests changing the type of the pseudo-ream icon u2 of this example.

  FIG. 32 (k) shows a state where an animation in which Yoshimune n throws the change item o toward the pseudo-ream icon u2 is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The change item o flies toward the pseudo-ream icon u2 and is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In the drawing, an upward-pointing arrow illustrated on the right side of the change item o represents the locus of the change item o.

  FIG. 32 (l) shows a state in which a display in which the change item o collides with the pseudo continuous icon u2 is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. The change item o is displayed so as to overlap a part of the pseudo continuous icon u2.

  FIG. 33 (a) shows a state continued from FIG. 32 (l). In the state shown in FIG. 33 (a), the change item o is deleted, and the effect image m is displayed so as to overlap the entire pseudo continuous icon u2. When the change item o is overlapped with a part of the pseudo continuous icon u2, the change item o is deleted and the effect image m is displayed instead. With the display of the effect image m, a change display in which the mode of the pseudo continuous icon u2 changes is displayed.

  FIG. 33B shows a state where the effect image m has been deleted. Erasing the effect image m is the end of the change display, and the change display is performed, whereby the mode of the pseudo continuous icon u2 is changed from the white square to the red square. The red square pseudo-ream icon is a display for notifying that the “Continue” decorative symbol will be temporarily stopped more than once after the activation display, and the red square pseudo-ream icon is activated during the second pseudo-variation. When the display is displayed, the fourth pseudo-variation is necessarily executed, or the big hit symbol form may be surely displayed by full rotation reach. In addition, when the activation display of the red square pseudo-ream icon is displayed during the third pseudo-variation, the big hit symbol form may be surely displayed in the special figure variation game. Note that when the princess n1 is displayed instead of the Yoshimune n, the mode of the pseudo-ream icon may be changed.

  FIG. 33 (c) shows a state in which the activation display of the pseudo continuous icon u2 is started. The pseudo-ream icon u2 moves upward. In the drawing, an upward-pointing arrow illustrated on the left side of the pseudo continuous icon u2 represents the locus of the pseudo continuous icon u2.

  FIG. 33 (d) shows a state in which the activation display of the pseudo-continuous icon u2 is displayed. In the activation display of this example, the effect image m5 is displayed around the pseudo continuous icon u2. The activation display of the pseudo-ream icon u2 is a display that suggests that the pseudo-ream effect display is performed during the special figure variable game.

  FIG. 33 (e) shows a state in which the pseudo continuous icon u2 is deleted. When the activation display of the pseudo continuous icon u2 is completed, the pseudo continuous icon u2 is deleted.

  FIG. 33F shows a state in which Yoshimune n has been deleted. The effect display similar to the effect display shown in FIGS. 26 (d) to (m) is displayed after FIG. 33 (f). Illustration and description of the effect display similar to the effect display shown in FIGS.

  FIG. 33 (g) shows a state in which the second pseudo fluctuation is performed. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the variable display is displayed at such a speed that the player cannot recognize the decorative symbols.

  FIG. 33 (h) shows a state in which the speed of variable display in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c is slow.

  FIG. 33I shows a state in which “decoration 7” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and “decoration 6” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c.

  FIG. 33 (j) shows a state in which the speed of the variable display is changed so that the player can recognize the decorative symbols in the middle symbol display area 208 b. The middle symbol display area 208b is immediately before the “continue” decorative symbol including the “continue” character string image is temporarily displayed.

  FIG. 33 (k) shows a state in which the “continuation” decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed in a manner that slightly fluctuates up and down in the middle symbol display area 208b. A decorative symbol “decoration 7-continuation-decoration 6” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c.

  FIG. 33 (l) shows a state in which a cut-in display is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In this example, the cut-in display is displayed before the third pseudo fluctuation is started. The cut-in display is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern “decoration 7-continuation-decoration 6”.

  FIG. 33 (m) shows a state immediately before the third pseudo fluctuation starts. The cut-in display has been erased, and an image of “× 3” is displayed in the lower left of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, informing that the second pseudo-variation is started. The “× 3” image is displayed so as to overlap a part of “decoration 7”.

  FIG. 33 (n) shows a state in which the third pseudo fluctuation is started. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, variable display is performed at such a speed that the player cannot recognize the decorative symbol.

  FIG. 33 (o) shows a state in which the “× 3” image is reduced.

In this modified example, the mode of the pseudo continuous icon is changed. It should be noted that when the third pseudo-variation is started, the SP reach may always be developed. In addition, the larger the number of pseudo fluctuations, the easier it is to display the big hit symbol form.
(Example 20)
Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 20 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 34A to 34H are diagrams showing the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. FIG. 34 (a) shows a state similar to FIG. 19 (f). The change item o is displayed overlapping with a part of the change notice icon k1.

  FIG. 34B shows a state in which the change item o is deleted and the effect image m is displayed so as to overlap the entire change notice icon k1. When the change item o is overlapped with a part of the change notice icon k1, the change item o is deleted and the effect image m is displayed instead. By displaying the effect image m, a change display in which the type of the change notice icon k1 changes is displayed.

  FIG. 34 (c) shows a state where the effect image m has been deleted. Erasing the effect image m is the end of the change display, and since the change display is performed, the type of the change notice icon k1 is changed from the blue circle to the green circle.

  FIG. 34 (d) shows a state in which Yoshimune n is deleted. When the Yoshimune n is deleted, the change display for the change notice icon k1 is not performed any more. If Yoshimune n is continuously displayed, the change display for the change notice icon k1 is displayed again.

  FIG. 34 (e) shows a state in which a moving animation in which the change notice icon k2 moves is started. In this example, an animation is displayed in which the change notice icon k2 moves toward the hold icon corresponding to the hold that is the target of the prefetch notice. Since the target of the prefetch notice is the hold 1 in FIG. 1, the change notice icon k2 moves toward the hold icon f1 corresponding to the hold 1 in FIG. In the figure, the arrow pointing downward to the right on the left side of the change notice icon k2 represents the locus of the change notice icon k. The change notice icon k2 is displayed across the two display devices of the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

  FIG. 34 (f) shows a state where the change notice icon k2 has moved to a position where it overlaps with a part of the hold icon f1. In the figure, the arrow pointing downward to the right on the left side of the change notice icon k2 represents the locus of the change notice icon k2.

  FIG. 34 (g) shows a state in which the change notice icon k2 is deleted and the effect image m is displayed so as to overlap the entire hold icon f2. When the change notice icon k2 is overlapped with a part of the hold icon f1, the change notice icon k2 is deleted and the effect image m is displayed instead. With the display of the effect image m, a hold change display in which the mode of the hold icon f1 changes is displayed.

  FIG. 34 (h) shows a state where the effect image m has been deleted. The deletion of the effect image m is the end of the hold change display, and the hold change display is performed, whereby the mode of the hold icon f1 changes from a white circle to a green circle. In this example, the hold icon f1 corresponding to the hold for the prefetch notice changes to the same green as the change candidate display 2.

  In the present embodiment, change notice icons k1 and k2 of the same type (green circle) are displayed. When all the displayed change candidate displays are of the same type, the mode of the hold icon or the change icon may be changed. For example, when the change display of the hold icon or the change icon by the change notice icon k2 is a failure effect display, the change display of the hold icon or the change icon by the change notice icon k1 becomes the success display, and the hold icon or The aspect of the fluctuation icon may change.

  Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to a modification of Example 20 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 34 (i) to (k) are diagrams showing the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. FIG. 34 (i) shows the same state as FIG. 34 (a), and FIG. 34 (j) shows the same state as FIG. 34 (b).

FIG. 34 (j) shows a state where the effect image m has been deleted. When the effect image m is erased, the change display ends, and the change display is performed, so that the type of the change notice icon k1 changes from a blue circle to a rainbow color (shown by white dot hatching on a black background in FIGS. It changes to a circle. It should be noted that in the symbol variation display that starts after the hold corresponding to the rainbow-colored hold icon is digested, the big hit symbol pattern is always displayed in a definite manner. In addition, when change display is performed by the rainbow-colored change candidate display, the hold icon and the change icon to be changed are always rainbow-colored circles. When the change display is performed by the change candidate display other than the rainbow circle change candidate display, the change display target hold icon or the change icon is rainbow when the change display is performed by the rainbow circle change candidate display. It tends to change to a color circle. Further, at the stage when the rainbow-colored change candidate display is displayed, the big hit symbol pattern may always be confirmed and displayed in the changing or pending symbol variation display. In addition, when the princess n1 is displayed, it is easier to change to a rainbow-colored circular change candidate display than when the Yoshimune n is displayed. A character display that is displayed only when the change candidate display is changed to a rainbow-colored change candidate display may be provided. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 21 (e) to (i) may be performed after the effects are performed in FIGS. 34 (a) and 34 (b), or shown in FIGS. 21 (e) to (i). After the performance is performed, a change display in which the type of change candidate display changes may be performed.
(Example 21)
Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the example 21 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIGS. 35 (a), (c) and (h) are diagrams showing the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. FIG. 35 (a) shows the same state as FIG. 28 (d), and a description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 35B shows a state immediately before the player operates the chance button 136. In this example, the chance button 136 is operated by the player during the operation effective period.

  FIG. 35C shows the state of the effect display immediately after the chance button 136 is operated by the player. When the chance button 136 is operated and the operation is accepted, the button icon t1 is deleted, and the effect image m is displayed so as to overlap the hold icon f2. When the chance button 136 is operated once, the operation valid period of the chance button 136 ends, and the red emission of the chance button 136 ends.

  FIG. 35D shows a state where the effect image m has been deleted. The hold change display is performed by displaying the effect image m, and the mode of the hold icon f2 changes from a white circle to a blue circle.

The big hit reliability of the effect display by the change notice display r3 shown in FIGS. 28 and 29 is set higher than the big hit reliability of the hold change display according to the present embodiment. It should be noted that the effect display based on the change notice display r3 shown in FIGS. 28 and 29 is more likely to change the state where the hold icon and the variation icon are higher in the jackpot reliability than the jackpot reliability of the hold change display according to the present embodiment. It should be noted that the effect display based on the change notice display r3 shown in FIGS. 28 and 29 is more likely to produce a successful effect in which the status of the hold icon or the change icon changes than the jackpot reliability of the hold change display according to the present embodiment.
(Example 22)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 35 (e) to (n) and FIGS. 36 (a) to (h), an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 22 of the present embodiment will be described. 35 (e) to (l), (n and FIGS. 36 (a) to (h) are diagrams showing the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series, and FIG. Since the same state as in d) is shown, the description thereof is omitted.

  In this example, it is assumed that the chance button 136 is not operated during the special figure 1 variable game. In addition, the illustration and description from “e-decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 6” to the temporary stop display from FIG. FIG. 35 (f) shows a state in which “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 6”, which is a shifted symbol form, is temporarily stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208 a to 208 c.

  FIG. 35 (g) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is out of date ("special figure G"). In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 6”, which is an off symbol mode, indicating that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct is out of display. Further, the fifth symbol of the combination “7-6-6” is stopped and displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. In addition, the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is interrupted at the same time as the decorative symbol variation stop display. Outside the operation valid period of the chance button 136, the button icon t1 is displayed in white, and the chance button 136 does not emit red light. In the present embodiment, even if the button icon t1 is being displayed, the chance button 136 is outside the valid operation period during the fixed display of the symbol (during suspension of the change). When the next symbol variation display is started, the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started again.

  FIG. 35 (h) shows a state in which the variable icon deletion animation is started. The variation icon e1 is deleted in such a manner that it moves downward and moves out of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

  FIG. 35 (i) shows a state where the fluctuation icon erasing animation is finished. The completion of the deletion of the fluctuation icon e1 is the end of the fluctuation icon deletion animation.

  In FIG. 35 (j), the special symbol 1 display device 212 (not shown) starts the special symbol 1 variable game, and the decorative symbol variable display, the fourth symbol, and the fifth symbol variable display are started. It shows the state. The number of holds in the special figure 1 is 1. In FIG. 35 (k), the hold icon reduction animation is started. In the hold icon decreasing animation, the hold icon f1 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f becomes a change icon e2 and is moved toward the change icon display area e, and the special figure 1 hold icon display is displayed. The hold icon f2 displayed in the second area of the area f is moved toward the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f. In the figure, an upper right arrow shown at the lower left of the change icon e2 and the hold icon f2 represents the locus of the change icon e2 and the hold icon f2. The button icon t1 moves to the right together with the hold icon f2.

  FIG. 35 (k) shows a state where the hold icon reduction animation is completed. The completion of the movement of the fluctuation icon e2 to the fluctuation icon display area e and the completion of the movement of the hold icon f2 to the first area are the end of the hold icon reduction animation.

  FIG. 35 (l) shows a state where the operation valid period of the chance button 136 has been resumed. During the operation valid period of the chance button 136, the button icon t1 is displayed in red, and the chance button 136 emits red light.

  FIG. 35 (m) shows a state immediately before the player operates the chance button 136. FIG. In this example, the chance button 136 is operated by the player during the operation effective period.

  FIG. 35 (n) shows the state of the effect display immediately after the chance button 136 is operated by the player. When the chance button 136 is operated and the operation is accepted, the button icon t1 is deleted, and instead, an image change notice display r3 simulating a sign is started to be displayed above the hold icon f2. The change notice display r3 is displayed in contact with the hold icon f2 that is the target of the hold change display. The change notice display r3 is displayed so as to overlap the variation display of the decorative symbol. A character string image of “blue or red” is displayed in the change notice display r3, and the character string image is a change candidate display. As described above, the change notice display may include a change candidate display. When the chance button 136 is operated once, the operation valid period of the chance button 136 ends, and the red emission of the chance button 136 ends.

  FIG. 36 (a) shows a state continued from FIG. 35 (n). In FIG. 35A, a button image and a gauge image are displayed overlapping the change candidate display in the change notice display r3. The operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started at the same time as the display of the button image and the gauge image. The button image is displayed in red, and the chance button 136 emits red light during the operation effective period.

  FIG. 36B shows a state during the operation effective period. The length of the blue portion of the gauge image q2 is shortened, and it is reported that the remaining time of the button reception period is shorter than the initial time. In the gauge image q2, the blue portion becomes shorter toward the left as the operation effective period elapses.

  FIG. 36C shows a state in which the operation valid period of the chance button 136 has ended. In this example, it is assumed that the chance button 136 is not operated during the operation valid period.

  FIG. 36D shows a state of effect display immediately after the operation valid period of the chance button 136 ends. When the operation valid period of the chance button 136 ends, the button image and the gauge image are deleted.

  FIG. 36 (e) shows that the special figure 1 variable game is ongoing.

  FIG. 36F shows a state in which the hold change display is started. In the hold change display of this example, the effect image m5 is displayed around the hold icon f2 to be changed. The display start of the effect image m5 is the display start of the hold change display.

  FIG. 36G shows a state in which the hold change display is finished. The deletion of the effect image m5 is the end of the hold change display, and after the hold change display, the mode of the hold icon f2 changes to a red circle. Thus, the hold icon f2 changes to a mode corresponding to the change candidate display indicated by the character image in the signboard. The mode of the hold icon f2 changes during the hold change display, but may change simultaneously with the end of the hold change display.

  FIG. 36 (h) shows a state where the change notice display r3 is deleted. When the change notice display r3 is deleted, the hold change display for the hold icon f2 is not performed any more. Even after the change notice display r3 is erased, the hold change display for the hold icon f2 may be performed by the effect display different from the effect display shown in FIG.

  If the chance button 136 is not operated during the operation effective period shown in FIGS. 36A and 36B, the “red” change candidate display is displayed as shown in FIG. Alternatively, the change notice display r3 may be deleted without performing the hold change display, or the hold icon has the least expected change candidate among a plurality of change candidate displays (in this example, green or red). It may be determined that the display changes to an aspect corresponding to the display (in this example, green).

  Note that even during the operation effective period of the chance button 136, a gauge image (meter image) indicating the remaining time of the operation effective period may not be displayed. In this case, it may be notified that the operation is valid by a button image that is an operation suggestion, an operation suggestion display mode (red display or the like), or a lamp color (red light emission) of the operation means. After the effects shown in FIGS. 35 (e) to (n) are performed, the effects shown in FIGS. 28 (l) to (o) may be performed, or in FIGS. 28 (l) to (o). After the effects shown are performed, the effects shown in FIGS. 36A to 36N may be performed.

  Next, a characteristic configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 36 again.

(1)
Display means (for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N);
A holding means (for example, special figure 1 random value storage area, special figure 1 hold number storage area, special figure 2 random value storage area, special figure 2 hold number storage area) capable of storing start information as a hold; An amusement machine,
The display means is means capable of displaying a variation display of a decorative design,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of hold icons,
It is configured to notify the number of hold by the number of display of the hold icon,
The hold icon can be displayed in a plurality of modes (for example, white circle, blue circle, green circle, red circle, gold circle, rainbow circle)
The hold icon may change from one of the plurality of modes to another mode,
The display means includes a plurality of types of change candidate displays (for example, a blue circle change candidate display, a green circle change candidate display, a red circle change candidate display, a gold circle change candidate display, and a rainbow circle (Change candidate display)
The mode of the hold icon may change to a corresponding mode of one change candidate display among the plurality of types of change candidate displays displayed.
One of the plurality of types of change candidate displays is a first display (for example, a blue circular change notice icon k1),
One of the plurality of types of change candidate displays is a second display (for example, a green circular change notice icon k2),
The first display may change to the second display,
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine having such a configuration, the change candidate display may change, so that the player may be able to entertain the effect display by the change candidate display until the change candidate display is deleted.

(2)
The gaming machine according to (1) above,
One aspect of the plurality of aspects is a first aspect (for example, a white circle),
One aspect of the plurality of aspects is a second aspect (for example, a blue circle),
One aspect of the plurality of aspects is a third aspect (for example, a green circle),
The hold corresponding to the hold icon displayed in the second mode is used more than the variable display of the decorative design that starts after the hold corresponding to the hold icon displayed in the first mode is used. The decorative symbol variation display that is started is configured so that the jackpot symbol pattern is finally easier to be confirmed and displayed,
The hold corresponding to the hold icon displayed in the third mode is consumed rather than the variation display of the decorative symbol which is started after the hold corresponding to the hold icon displayed in the second mode is used. The decorative symbol variation display that is started is configured so that the jackpot symbol pattern is finally easier to be confirmed and displayed,
When the second display is displayed, the hold icon displayed in the first mode is configured to be easily changed to the third mode than the second mode.
A game stand characterized by that.

(3)
The game stand according to (2) above,
In the case where the first display (for example, a blue circle change notice icon k1) is displayed, the mode of the hold icon displayed in the first mode (for example, white circle) changes. , The mode of the hold icon is configured to change to the second mode (for example, blue circle),
When the second display (for example, the green circular change notice icon k2) is displayed, the mode of the hold icon displayed in the first mode (for example, white circle) changes. , The mode of the hold icon is configured to change to the third mode (for example, green circle),
A game stand characterized by that.

(4)
The game table according to (2) or (3) above,
When the second display (for example, a green circle change candidate display) is displayed and the mode of the hold icon displayed in the second mode (for example, blue circle) changes, The mode of the hold icon is configured to change to the third mode (for example, green circle),
A game stand characterized by that.

(5)
The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4) above,
The display means is means capable of displaying a first character display (for example, Yoshimune n),
The first character display is a display different from the change candidate display,
The first character display is a display different from the hold icon,
The first display is more easily changed to the second display when the first character display is displayed than when the first character display is not displayed. ing,
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine having such a configuration, it may be possible to expect whether or not the first character is displayed.

(6)
The game stand according to (5) above,
The display means is means capable of displaying a second character display (for example, princess n1),
The second character display is a display different from the change candidate display,
The second character display is a display different from the hold icon,
The first display is more easily changed to the second display when the second character display is displayed than when the first character display is displayed. ing,
A game stand characterized by that.

(7)
The game stand according to any one of (1) to (6) above,
The display means may display a plurality of the change candidate displays.
A game stand characterized by that.

(8)
The game stand according to (7) above,
When a plurality of change candidate displays are displayed, the hold icon may change to a mode corresponding to any one of the plurality of change candidate displays.
A game stand characterized by that.

(9)
The game stand according to (8) above,
One of the plurality of change candidate displays is a first change candidate display (for example, a blue circular change notice icon k1),
One of the plurality of change candidate displays is a second change candidate display (for example, a green circular change notice icon k2),
When the first change candidate display is displayed, the second change candidate display may start to be displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(10)
The game stand according to any one of (7) to (9) above,
When a plurality of change candidate displays are displayed, the plurality of change candidate displays may change due to a single change display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(11)
The gaming machine according to any one of (7) to (10) above,
In the case where a plurality of change candidate displays are displayed, the change candidate display is configured to change from the change candidate display corresponding to the mode of the hold icon having a low expectation of jackpot among the plurality of change candidate displays.
The jackpot expectation is the jackpot expectation of the held icon after the change.
A game stand characterized by that.

(12)
The game stand according to any one of (7) to (11) above,
In the case where a plurality of change candidate displays are displayed, one change candidate display (for example, a blue circular change notice icon k1) of the plurality of change candidate displays is the other of the plurality of change candidate displays. Change candidate display (for example, green circular change notice icon k2) may change to the same type of change candidate display,
The hold icon changes to a mode corresponding to the change candidate display when a plurality of change candidate displays of the same type are displayed, rather than when a plurality of change candidate displays of the same type are not displayed. Configured to be easy,
A game stand characterized by that.

(13)
The game stand according to any one of (7) to (12) above,
In the case where a plurality of change candidate displays are displayed, when the display number of the change candidate displays decreases, the mode changes to the hold icon mode to the mode corresponding to the remaining change candidate display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(14)
The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (13) above,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a change notice display (for example, a change notice display j),
The game stand according to claim 1, wherein the change notice display is a display for notifying that the change candidate display is displayed.

(15)
The game table according to (14) above,
The change notice display is a display that is displayed across a plurality of continuous display variations of the decorative symbol.
A game stand characterized by that.

(16)
The game stand according to any one of (1) to (15) above,
Operating means (for example, a chance button 136),
The change notice display is started by operation of the operation means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(17)
The gaming machine according to (16) above,
One aspect of the plurality of aspects is a fourth aspect (for example, a button icon aspect),
The fourth aspect is an aspect simulating the operation means,
The change notice display is started when the operation means is operated in a state where the hold icon of the fourth aspect is displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(18)
The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (17) above,
The gaming table, wherein the second display does not change to the first display.

(19)
The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (18) above,
One display of the plurality of types of change candidate displays is a third display (for example, a rainbow color change candidate display),
When the third display is displayed, the jackpot symbol form is confirmed in the variation display of one of the decoration symbols of the decoration symbol being executed and the variation display of the decoration symbol being held. A gaming table characterized by being configured to be displayed.

(20)
The game stand according to any one of (1) to (19) above,
The game table according to claim 1, wherein the display means includes a display device (for example, a third decorative symbol display device 208N) that does not display the decorative symbol variation display.

(21)
The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (20) above,
The game table is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).

  The hold change display of the hold icon, the change display of the change icon, and the change display of the change candidate display shown in FIGS. 16 to 36 may be performed by an effect display other than the effect display by the effect image. There may be no instantaneous display and it may be performed instantaneously.

  The second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may not be provided, and the effect display shown in FIGS. 16 to 36 may be displayed only by the first decorative symbol display device 208L. However, only one sub display device is provided, and the effect display shown in FIGS. 16 to 36 may be displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the sub display device, or the first decorative symbol display device. The effect display shown in FIGS. 16 to 36 may be displayed on 208L and three or more sub-display devices. 16 to 36 may be displayed on any display device on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. .

  In addition, what was called a lamp | ramp and illumination until now is an example of a light emission means, and if a lamp | ramp emits light, such as LED and a cold cathode tube, it can replace | exchange (hereinafter the same).

  For example, the above embodiment can also be applied to an enclosed game machine that circulates and uses game balls enclosed in a game machine. For example, the pachinko machine may be an enclosed pachinko machine that encloses a sphere and circulates the enclosed sphere in the pachinko machine, and this enclosed pachinko machine uses the enclosed sphere as a launch ball, The ball payout may be executed by electronic display.

  Note that the items described in the detailed description above, particularly those described in Examples 1 to 22 and the modified examples, can be combined.

  As mentioned above, although it was an example about a pachinko machine (bullet ball game machine) so far, the game stand of the present invention is not limited to this, for example, an enclosed pachinko machine shown in FIG. Or a slot machine shown in FIG.

  The present invention according to the above embodiment can be summarized as follows.

(Appendix 1)
Display means;
Hold means capable of storing start information as hold;
A game machine equipped with
The display means is means capable of displaying a variation display of a decorative design,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of hold icons,
It is configured to notify the number of hold by the number of display of the hold icon,
The hold icon can be displayed in a plurality of modes,
The hold icon may change from one of the plurality of modes to another mode,
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of change candidate displays,
The mode of the hold icon may change to a corresponding mode of one change candidate display among the plurality of types of change candidate displays displayed.
One of the plurality of types of change candidate displays is a first display,
One display of the plurality of types of change candidate displays is a second display,
The game table characterized in that the first display may change to the second display.
(Appendix 2)
The game machine according to appendix 1,
One aspect of the plurality of aspects is a first aspect,
One aspect of the plurality of aspects is a second aspect,
One aspect of the plurality of aspects is a third aspect,
The hold corresponding to the hold icon displayed in the second mode is used more than the variable display of the decorative design that starts after the hold corresponding to the hold icon displayed in the first mode is used. The decorative symbol variation display that is started is configured so that the jackpot symbol pattern is finally easier to be confirmed and displayed,
The hold corresponding to the hold icon displayed in the third mode is consumed rather than the variation display of the decorative symbol which is started after the hold corresponding to the hold icon displayed in the second mode is used. The decorative symbol variation display that is started is configured so that the jackpot symbol pattern is finally easier to be confirmed and displayed,
When the second display is displayed, the hold icon displayed in the first mode is configured to be easily changed to the third mode as compared to the second mode. A game table that features

(Appendix 3)
The game stand according to appendix 2,
In the case where the first display is displayed, when the mode of the hold icon displayed in the first mode is changed, the mode of the hold icon is changed to the second mode. Configured,
In the case where the second display is displayed, when the mode of the hold icon displayed in the first mode is changed, the mode of the hold icon is changed to the third mode. It is configured,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 4)
A game machine according to appendix 2 or 3,
In the case where the second display is displayed, when the mode of the hold icon displayed in the second mode is changed, the mode of the hold icon is changed to the third mode. It is configured,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 5)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 1 to 4,
The display means is means capable of displaying a first character display,
The first character display is a display different from the change candidate display,
The first character display is a display different from the hold icon,
The first display is more easily changed to the second display when the first character display is displayed than when the first character display is not displayed. ing,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 6)
A game machine according to appendix 5,
The display means is means capable of displaying a second character display,
The second character display is a display different from the change candidate display,
The second character display is a display different from the hold icon,
The first display is more easily changed to the second display when the second character display is displayed than when the first character display is displayed. ing,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 7)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 1 to 6,
The display means may display a plurality of the change candidate displays.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 8)
The game stand according to appendix 7,
When a plurality of change candidate displays are displayed, the hold icon may change to a mode corresponding to any one of the plurality of change candidate displays.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 9)
The game stand according to appendix 8,
One of the plurality of change candidate displays is a first change candidate display,
One display of the plurality of change candidate displays is a second change candidate display,
When the first change candidate display is displayed, the second change candidate display may start to be displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 10)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 7 to 9,
When a plurality of change candidate displays are displayed, the plurality of change candidate displays may change due to a single change display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 11)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 7 to 10,
In the case where a plurality of change candidate displays are displayed, the change candidate display is configured to change from the change candidate display corresponding to the mode of the hold icon having a low expectation of jackpot among the plurality of change candidate displays.
The jackpot expectation is the jackpot expectation of the held icon after the change.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 12)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 7 to 11,
When a plurality of change candidate displays are displayed, one change candidate display among the plurality of change candidate displays is the same type of change candidate display as another change candidate display among the plurality of change candidate displays. May change to
The hold icon changes to a mode corresponding to the change candidate display when a plurality of change candidate displays of the same type are displayed, rather than when a plurality of change candidate displays of the same type are not displayed. Configured to be easy,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 13)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 7 to 12,
In the case where a plurality of change candidate displays are displayed, when the display number of the change candidate displays decreases, the mode changes to the hold icon mode to the mode corresponding to the remaining change candidate display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 14)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 1 to 13,
The display means is means capable of displaying a change notice display,
The change notice display is a display for notifying that the change candidate display is displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 15)
The game stand according to appendix 14,
The change notice display is a display that is displayed across a plurality of continuous display variations of the decorative symbol.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 16)
The gaming machine according to appendix 14 or 15,
With operating means,
The change notice display is started by operation of the operation means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 17)
The game stand according to appendix 16,
One aspect of the plurality of aspects is a fourth aspect,
The fourth aspect is an aspect simulating the operation means,
The change notice display is started when the operation means is operated in a state where the hold icon of the fourth aspect is displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 18)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 1 to 17,
The second display does not change to the first display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 19)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 1 to 18,
One of the plurality of types of change candidate displays is a third display,
When the third display is displayed, the jackpot symbol form is confirmed in the variation display of one of the decoration symbols of the decoration symbol being executed and the variation display of the decoration symbol being held. Configured to be displayed,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 20)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 1 to 19,
The display means includes a display device that does not display a variable display of the decorative symbol.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 21)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 1 to 20,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

  Subsequently, a specific example of the hold change effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 capable of executing the effect described with reference to FIGS. 16 to 36 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 37 to 51. The reference numerals shown in FIGS. 37 to 51 represent common components when the same reference numerals used so far are used. Even if different codes are used, they may be common as technical ideas. That is, as the technical idea, the technical idea shown in FIGS. 16 to 36 can be applied to the technical idea shown in FIGS. 37 to 51, and conversely, in FIGS. 37 to 51. It is also possible to apply the technical idea shown to the technical idea shown in FIGS. At that time, components having the same reference numerals may be handled as the same constituent elements and may be replaced.

  In the configuration of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L in FIGS. 37 to 51, the holding frame UI is provided in the effect display area 208d. The first decorative symbol display device 208L in FIGS. Different from the configuration of the display screen. The hold frame UI can be viewed as an area icon displayed in the icon display area, and can also be viewed as a user interface that provides various information to the player. In the hold frame UI, a variable icon display area e is arranged at the left end, and a hold icon display area is arranged on the right side thereof. In the examples in FIGS. 37 to 51, the non-electric support state is set, and only the special figure 1 hold icon display area f is displayed as the hold icon display area, but the special figure 2 hold icon together with the special figure 1 hold icon display area f. An icon display area may be displayed. In the special figure 1 hold icon display area f, four areas corresponding to the maximum number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 are prepared, and one hold icon is displayed for each area. In the fluctuation icon display area e, a holding icon display area is provided with a stage that is higher and larger than the stage provided in each area of the special figure 1 holding icon display area f. Is displayed.

  Here, the fluctuation icons are summarized again. The fluctuation icon is an icon corresponding to the special figure variable game that is displayed after the hold is consumed and the special figure variable game is started, in other words, an icon related to the symbol fluctuation display being executed. That is, the hold icon becomes a change icon simultaneously with the start of the special figure change game corresponding to the hold icon. More precisely, when the first hold icon with the oldest start winning prize moves from the hold icon display area (for example, the special figure 1 hold icon display area f) to the variable icon display area e, the moving icon is referred to as a variable icon. It may be expressed that the fluctuation icon moves. Alternatively, an icon after the movement to the fluctuation icon display area e is completed may be referred to as a fluctuation icon. This variation icon is displayed in a display size (display size larger or smaller than the hold icon) different from the hold icon. Thereby, although the change icon and the hold icon may be easily identified, they may be the same size. In addition, the variation icon may have a display mode related to the display mode of the hold icon. Depending on the display mode, the change icon can be notified of whether or not the change is appropriate (normal notice that is the change notice), and is basically erased at a timing when the result of the change is notified. Therefore, the variation icon can be regarded as an icon related to the hold, and can also be considered as a kind of the hold icon in the sense that the notification of the success / failure result of the special figure change game is held. Note that the erasing timing may be a timing before the timing at which the change success / failure result is notified, the same timing, or a timing after the timing.

  On the other hand, with respect to the hold icon, a notice (pre-reading notice) about whether or not the symbol variation display that is started when the hold corresponding to the hold icon is digested is started depending on the display mode.

  In addition, the holding frame UI is provided with a base icon UIb extending to the left and right, and the four areas prepared in the holding icon display area are viewed as area icons that are displayed overlapping the base icon UIb from the front side. The stage prepared in the variable icon display area can also be viewed as a stage icon displayed overlapping the base icon UIb from the front side.

  Further, a chunklet display CR is displayed on the hold frame UI. The chunklet display CR shown in FIG. 37A is displayed in a closed state, and the upper and lower frame portions CRf are in contact with each other. On the other hand, the chainlet display CR shown in FIG. 37 (r) or the like is displayed in an open state, and the upper and lower frame portions CRf are separated from each other, and a display space CRs is provided therebetween. In the Chan throughlet display CR, a variable display is performed in the display space CRs (see (s) in the figure), and a tutorial display, a notice display, and the like are displayed in the display space CRs.

  A pattern may be attached to the base icon UIb or the frame portion CRf of the channel display CR. This pattern may be attached to various icons such as a hold icon and a change icon. Moreover, it may be attached to various displays described later. In addition, the pattern may be attached to the whole and may be attached only to one part. That is, a pattern is attached to at least a part of various icons such as the base icon UIb, the frame portion CRf of the channel display CR, the hold icon and the change icon. A plurality of types of patterns are prepared as other display modes in addition to the default display mode. Other display modes include a display mode of a pre-reading notice, a display mode of a normal notice, or a display form of a notice that a notice about these jackpots (pre-reading notice or normal notice) will be performed. . If it is a display mode of the notice about the jackpot, the expectation (reliability) of the jackpot differs depending on the display mode. The higher the degree of expectation for the jackpot, the easier it is to finally display the jackpot symbol. In the following description, the level of expectation of jackpot is expressed by the pattern. The default pattern is a dot pattern, which is the display mode when “no change” is selected in the effect lottery regarding the display mode. In the default pattern, the expected degree of jackpot is not announced, but the expected degree of jackpot may be announced. In this case, the icon pattern has the lowest degree of expectation for jackpot (0% or 0% to less than 1%). The pattern of the display mode of the notice for the big hit is a diagonal line pattern, a rhombus pattern, a lattice pattern, a vertical line pattern, and a horizontal line pattern in descending order of expectation of the big hit. The hatched pattern has a higher degree of expectation for jackpot than 0%. On the other hand, the vertical line pattern is rich in big hits, and the horizontal line pattern has a higher expectation degree for big hits (for example, 100%), and may be, for example, determined to be big hit. In the following description, when it is more than a lattice pattern, it means a lattice pattern, a vertical line pattern, and a horizontal line pattern.

  Here, the expectation degree of jackpot is represented by a pattern, but the expectation degree of jackpot may be represented by a color instead of the pattern. For example, the default dot pattern may be blinking white, the diagonal line pattern is blue, the rhombus pattern is green, the lattice pattern is red, the vertical line pattern is gold, and the horizontal line pattern is rainbow. In addition, the color may also be attached to the whole, and may be attached only to one part. In other words, at least a part of various icons such as the base icon UIb, the frame portion CRf of the chunklet display CR, the hold icon and the change icon is colored.

  The same is true for the display form of the notice that the notice of jackpot is made, and the expectation (reliability) that the notice of jackpot will be made differs depending on the display form.

  FIG. 37 is a diagram illustrating an example of the hold change effect.

  The background of the castle town is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L to the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 37 (a), and an effect mode display provided below the second decorative symbol display device 208M. In the area, “castle town” representing the castle town mode is displayed. Further, the stage SG is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N, but nothing is displayed on the stage SG. In FIG. 37 (a), the decorative symbols that have been continuously displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the first decorative symbol display device 208L stop at the combination of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 1”. Is displayed. The change icon e1 of the default mode is still displayed on the stage in the change icon display area e shown in FIG. In addition, two hold icons f1 and f2 are displayed in a default mode.

  In FIG. 37 (b), the final display of the decorative symbol is performed. When the definite display of the decorative symbol is started, the erasing animation of the variation icon e1 is started, and the variation icon e1 is considerably small in the stage in the variation icon display area e shown in FIG. In 37 (c), the erase animation of the variation icon e1 is completed, and nothing is displayed on the stage in the variation icon display area e.

  Subsequently, the symbol variation display of the special symbol 1 is started, and in FIG. 37D, the ornamental symbol variation display is performed in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Further, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variation display of the fifth symbol is performed, and the fourth symbol lamp i1 of the special symbol 1 is lit in white. Further, the number indicating the reserved number of the special figure 1 displayed on the upper part of the third decorative symbol display device 208N is reduced from “2” to “1”. However, two hold icons are displayed.

  In FIG. 37 (e), the movement animation of the hold icon is started, and the hold icon (first display) displayed in the first area (the area closest to the fluctuation icon display area e) of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f is displayed. The hold icon f1 has started moving toward the fluctuation icon display area e, and is displayed in the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f (the second area closest to the fluctuation icon display area e). The held icon (second held icon) f2 that has been started to move toward the first area.

  In FIG. 37 (f), the movement animation of the hold icon is completed, the change icon e1 of the default mode is displayed on the stage in the change icon display area e, and the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f is displayed. The first hold icon f1 in the default mode is displayed. That is, the display mode does not change before and after the start of the moving animation. However, it may be changed to a notice mode or a prefetch notice mode during or after the movement of the icon.

  In FIG. 37 (g), the character NJ for holding change effect jumps down on the stage SG in the third decorative symbol display device 208N while standing upright. Several types of hold change effects are prepared, and when the hold change effects here are distinguished from other hold change effects, they are referred to as “hold change first effects”. In FIG. 37 (h), the character NJ decides a pose, and further, a balloon display “Ikuzo” is displayed on the character NJ. In FIG. 37 (i), the character NJ has a shuriken in his hand, and in FIG. 37 (j), the shuriken is thrown. The first on-change change effect may be viewed as starting from the timing when the character NJ in FIG. 37 (g) appears, or the timing at which the character NJ in FIG. It may be seen that it has started from the beginning, or it may be seen that the character NJ in FIG. (I) has started the shuriken, or the character NJ in FIG. It may be seen that it starts from the timing of throwing.

  In FIG. 37 (k), the shuriken thrown by the character NJ overlaps with the first hold icon f1, and in FIG. 37 (l), the first hold icon f1 and the shuriken are covered with the effect image mf and cannot be seen. The state where the shuriken overlaps the icon can be seen as the shuriken hit the icon (and so on). It may be considered that the hold change first effect is started from the timing at which the display of the effect image mf is started. In FIG. 37 (m), the effect image mf becomes smaller and the first hold icon f1 starts to appear. That is, the effect image mf is smaller than the first hold icon f1, and the first hold icon f1 that has changed to a hatched pattern is starting to appear. Eventually, the effect image mf disappears, and in FIG. 37 (n), the first hold icon f1 in a diagonal pattern is displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f. The character NJ shown in FIG. 37 (n) takes a successful pose when the icon display mode change is successful. In FIG. 37 (o), the erasing animation of the character NJ is started, and the character NJ is covered with the smoke image and cannot be seen. In FIG. 37 (p), the smoke image disappears and the character NJ disappears, returning to a state where nothing is displayed on the stage SG. The hold change first effect may be regarded as the end when the effect image mf in FIG. 37 (n) disappears, that is, when the change in the state of the hold icon is completed, or at the timing when the character NJ in FIG. 37 (p) disappears. You can see it as finished.

  In FIG. 37 (p), the closed channel display CR starts to vibrate, and the roulette effect is started. In FIG. 37 (q), the upper and lower frame portions CRf begin to open, and the display space CRs begins to appear. In FIG. 37 (r), the Chan throughlet display CR is fully opened, and the display space CRs is “probably”. The display of the roaring effect is displayed. This roaring effect corresponds to an effect of notifying that the variable display is started by the channel display CR, and can be said to be a sign effect. In FIG. 37 (s), the variable display is started in the display space CRs. In addition, even if the roaring effect is performed, the variable display may not be started. In addition, there is a case in which no stuttering effect is performed and fluctuation display is not started. Alternatively, there is a case where the fluctuation display is suddenly started without performing the roaring effect, and in this case, the expectation (reliability) of the big hit is higher than when the roaring effect is performed and the variable display is started. On the contrary, it may be lower. In FIG. 37 (t), the fluctuation display in the channel display CR is finished, a character display of “next expectation” is displayed, and a pre-reading notice for the next fluctuation is performed. In FIG. 37 (u), the chunklet display CR starts to close, and in FIG. 37 (v), the chunklet display CR returns to the closed state. The channel play effect may be seen from FIG. 37 (p) to FIG. 37 (v) or from FIG. 37 (r) to FIG.

  In FIG. 37 (w), the decorations in the left symbol display area 208a among the decorative symbols of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, which have been continuously displayed at a high speed until now. The fluctuation speed of the symbol is reduced to the extent that the symbol can be recognized. In the same figure (x), a first stop (temporary stop) is performed in the left symbol display area 208a, and this time the decorative symbol in the right symbol display area 208c. The fluctuation speed of has fallen to such an extent that the symbol can be recognized. In FIG. 37 (y), the second stop (temporary stop) is performed in the right symbol display area 208c, but the reach state is not reached, and the variation rate of the decorative symbol in the middle symbol display area 208b recognizes the symbol. It has fallen to the extent possible. In FIG. 37 (z), a temporary stop is performed in the remaining middle symbol display area 208b, and the combination of “decoration 7-decoration 1-decoration 1” fluctuates (temporarily displayed). In FIG. 37 (END), the combination of “decoration 7-decoration 1-decoration 1” is stopped and displayed. As in FIG. 37A, immediately after the combination of decorative symbols is stopped and displayed, the variation icon e1 remains displayed.

  FIG. 38 is a diagram illustrating an example in which the hold change second effect is performed together with the hold change first effect. FIG. 38 shows two examples of the left half example and the right half example.

  First, an example of the left half will be described. FIG. 38 (a) is a continuation of FIG. 37 (f), and the decorative symbol changes in a state in which the hold icon moving animation is completed and one hold icon f1 having a default dot pattern is displayed. The display is done. In the second decorative symbol display device 208M shown in FIG. 38 (a), a part of the treasure chest image displayed as the change notice display j in FIG. 16 (f) and the like is shown. That is, an appearance animation in which the treasure chest TB gradually appears from the right end of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M is displayed. When the hold change effect related to the treasure box TB displayed as the change notice display is distinguished from other hold change effects, it is referred to as “hold change second effect”. In FIG. 38 (b), the appearance animation is completed and the entire treasure chest TB in the closed state is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. In the same FIG. 38 (c), the treasure chest TB is opened, A change candidate icon HKI appears. This change candidate icon HKI is a round icon having a diagonal pattern, and is displayed on the treasure chest TB. Note that the treasure chest TB shown in FIG. 38 is displayed in a dot pattern manner which is a default manner, and is not related to the aspect of the change candidate icon HKI that appears from the inside, but the treasure chest TB aspect and the middle The change candidate icon HKI that appears from the above may be matched with the aspect. For example, a change candidate icon HKI with a horizontal line pattern may appear in the treasure chest TB having a horizontal line pattern. Alternatively, the change candidate icon HKI does not always appear from the treasure box TB in any case, and the mode of the treasure box TB may indicate the ease with which the change candidate icon HKI appears. That is, there is a high possibility that the change candidate icon HKI appears in the order of the dot pattern, the diagonal line pattern, the rhombus pattern, the lattice pattern, the vertical line pattern, and the horizontal line pattern. If the pattern is a horizontal line pattern, the change candidate icon HKI always appears. You may do it.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 38 (d), the character NJ for the reserved change first effect appears on the stage SG. In FIG. 38 (e), the character NJ decides on a pose and a balloon “Ikuzo” is displayed. In FIG. 38 (f), the character NJ holds the shuriken. In FIG. 38 (g), the character NJ throws a shuriken. Further, in FIG. 38 (g), a moving animation of the change candidate icon HKI is started. The change candidate icon HKI that has been stopped and displayed on the treasure box TB until then starts moving, and the change candidate icon HKI is displayed across the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the first decorative symbol display device 208L. . That is, the left end portion of the change candidate icon HKI is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the right portion of the change candidate icon HKI is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Note that the frame surrounding the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M obstructs the central portion of the change candidate icon HKI.

  The hold change second effect may be regarded as being started from the timing when the appearance animation of the treasure box TB is started, and is started from the timing when the appearance animation is completed as shown in FIG. It may be seen that it starts from the timing when the change candidate icon HKI shown in FIG. 5C appears, or it starts from the timing when the moving animation of the change candidate icon HKI is started. You can see it.

  In FIG. 38 (h), the shuriken thrown by the character NJ overlaps the change icon e1 in the default mode (dot pattern mode). On the other hand, the change candidate icon HKI that has moved to the first decorative symbol display device 208L passes over the change icon e1. In FIG. 38I, the fluctuation icon e1 and the shuriken are covered with the effect image me and cannot be seen. In FIG. 38 (j), the effect image me becomes smaller and the fluctuation icon e1 starts to be seen. That is, the effect image me is smaller than the variation icon e1, and the variation icon e1 that has changed to a hatched pattern is beginning to be visible. In FIG. 38J, a part of the change candidate icon HKI overlaps with a part of the first hold icon f1. In FIG. 38 (k), the effect image me covering the variation icon e1 is gone, but this time, the first hold icon f1 and the change candidate icon HKI are covered with the effect image mf and cannot be seen. 38 (j) to FIG. 38 (k), both the effect image me covering the variation icon e1 and the effect image mf covering the first hold icon f1 and the change candidate icon HKI are displayed. There may be a period of time. In FIG. 38 (l), the effect image mf becomes smaller than the first hold icon f1, and the first hold icon f1 changed to the same hatched pattern as the change candidate icon HKI starts to be seen. Eventually, the effect image mf disappears, and in FIG. 38 (m), the first reserved icon f1 in a hatched pattern is displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 reserved icon display area f, and the character NJ has a success pose. Have taken. Thereafter, the treasure chest TB displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M disappears. Further, the continuation of FIG. 38 (m) leads to FIG. 37 (o).

  The hold change second effect may be regarded as being ended when the effect image mf of FIG. 38 (m) disappears, that is, when the change of the state of the hold icon is completed, or when the treasure box TB thereafter disappears. Also good.

  In the example of the left half described above, the change icon e1 is changed from the default mode to the normal notice mode (hatched pattern mode) by the first change effect by the ninja character NJ, and the first hold icon f1 is changed from the default mode to the pre-reading notice mode (hatched pattern mode) by the hold change second effect by the change candidate icon HKI. That is, the mode of different icons is changing.

  The change candidate icon HKI in the hold change second effect suggests a candidate for a mode to be changed from the time of appearance by its own mode, and corresponds to a change mode candidate display. In other words, in this example, the change candidate icon HKI has a hatched pattern from the time of appearance, and the first hold icon f1 has also finally changed to a hatched pattern. It should be noted that the change candidate icon HKI may be changed from the candidate mode of the mode to be changed to the mode of the candidate of the mode to be changed after the appearance at the present time. Further, the change candidate icon HKI suggests an icon of a change target candidate at the timing of FIG. 38 (j), and corresponds to a change target candidate display. Therefore, at the time of appearance, it is unclear which icon (a change icon or any hold icon if a plurality of hold icons is displayed) is a candidate for change.

  Further, the shuriken thrown by the ninja character NJ in the hold change first effect also suggests a change target candidate icon at the timing shown in FIG. 38H, and corresponds to a change target candidate display. Similar to the change candidate icon HKI, it is also possible to suggest a candidate for a mode to be changed by its own mode by a shuriken mode (pattern). Moreover, it is possible to suggest the candidate of the aspect to change not with the aspect (pattern) of a shuriken but with the aspect (pattern) of the kimono of the ninja character NJ.

  Subsequently, an example of the right half will be described, but a description overlapping the description of the left half example may be omitted.

  FIG. 38 (1) is a continuation of FIG. 38 (c), in which a change candidate icon HKI having a hatched pattern is displayed on the treasure box TB, and the change change icon HKI is displayed on the stage SG. A character NJ for one effect is also displayed. In FIG. 38 (2), the movement animation of the change candidate icon HKI in the hold change second effect is started. In FIG. 38 (3), the ninja character NJ in the hold change first effect determines the pose and “goes”. A balloon is displayed. In FIG. 38 (4), a part of the change candidate icon HKI overlaps a part of the first hold icon f1. A shuriken is thrown from the character NJ. In FIG. 38 (5), the first hold icon f1 and the change candidate icon HKI are covered with the effect image mf and cannot be seen. On the other hand, the shuriken thrown by the character NJ has not yet hit any icon. In FIG. 38 (6), the effect image mf becomes smaller than the first hold icon f1, and the first hold icon f1 changed to the same hatched pattern as the change candidate icon HKI starts to be seen. In addition, a part of the shunt sword thrown by the character NJ overlaps a part of the first hold icon f1. Here, when the effect image mf becomes smaller, the state (pattern) of the first hold icon f1 after the change is visible, but the state where the effect image mf or the like keeps being invisible is maintained. There may be. For example, when a part of the shuriken overlaps, the effect image mf may be maintained as it is without reducing the effect image mf, and the effect image mf resulting from the shuriken hit may be taken over as it is. In FIG. 38 (7), the first hold icon f1 is again covered with the effect image mf and cannot be seen. Further, the shuriken is also hidden by the effect image mf. Note that the next effect image mf shown in FIG. 38 (7) may be displayed before the effect image mf that has become smaller in FIG. 38 (6) disappears, or the effect image mf once disappears. The next effect image mf may be displayed. In FIG. 38 (8), the effect image mf is smaller than the first hold icon f1, and the first hold icon f1 that has changed to a rhombus pattern is starting to appear. Eventually, the effect image mf disappears, and in FIG. 38 (9), the first hold icon f1 having a rhombus pattern is displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f, and the character NJ has a success pose. Have taken. The continuation of FIG. 38 (9) leads to FIG. 37 (o). Note that the ninja character NJ in the hold change first effect and the treasure chest TB in the hold change second effect will disappear thereafter, but either may disappear first or disappear simultaneously.

  In the right half example described above, the first change icon f1 is the change target icon for both the change change first effect by the ninja character NJ and the change change second effect by the change candidate icon HKI. The first hold icon f1, which was a mode, has finally changed to a rhombus pattern mode in which the reliability of the jackpot in the pre-reading notice is increased by two stages. However, in this example, the timing of the mode change of the hold icon is shifted, but it may be simultaneous. Moreover, in the example of the right half, the mode change by the hold change first effect is ahead of the mode change by the hold change first effect, but conversely, the mode change by the hold change first effect is more. , It may be ahead of the mode change by the hold change second effect.

  FIG. 39 is a diagram illustrating an example in which the hold change first effect and the hold change second effect are combined in the left half, and an example of the hold change third effect in the right half.

  First, an example of the left half will be described, but description overlapping with the description in the example shown in FIG. 38 may be omitted.

  FIG. 39 (a) is a continuation from FIG. 38 (c), in which a change candidate icon HKI having a hatched pattern is displayed on the treasure box TB, and a pending change number is displayed on the stage SG. A character NJ for one effect is also displayed. In FIG. 39 (b), the moving animation of the change candidate icon HKI in the hold change second effect is started. In FIG. 39 (c), the ninja character NJ in the hold change first effect determines the pose and “goes”. A balloon is displayed. In FIG. 39 (e), the shuriken thrown by the character NJ overlaps the change candidate icon HKI. That is, the shuriken hits the change candidate icon HKI, and the icon (change candidate icon HKI) that acts on these final change target icons is not the change target but the change icon or the hold icon that is the final change target. It has become. In FIG. 39F, the change candidate icon HKI is covered with the effect image mh together with the shuriken and cannot be seen. In FIG. 39 (g), the effect image mh is smaller than the change candidate icon HKI, and the change candidate icon HKI that has changed to a diamond-shaped pattern one level higher than the hatched pattern is starting to appear. In FIG. 39 (h), the effect image mh completely disappears, and a part of the change candidate icon HKI that has changed to a rhombus pattern overlaps a part of the first hold icon f1. The change candidate icon HKI changed to a rhombus pattern form corresponds to the change form candidate display, and the change candidate icon HKI overlapped with a part of the first hold icon f1 corresponds to the change target candidate display. In FIG. 39 (i), the first hold icon f1 is covered with the change candidate icon HKI by the effect image mf and cannot be seen. In FIG. 39 (j), the effect image mf is smaller than the first hold icon f1, and the first hold icon f1 that has changed to a rhombus pattern is starting to appear. Eventually, the effect image mf disappears, and in FIG. 39 (k), the first hold icon f1 having a rhombus pattern is displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f, and the character NJ has a success pose. Have taken. The continuation of FIG. 39 (k) leads to FIG. 37 (o). In this case, the ninja character NJ in the reserved change first effect and the treasure chest TB in the reserved change second effect will disappear after this, but either may disappear first or disappear simultaneously.

  In the example of the left half described above, a rhombus pattern in which the first change effect by the ninja character NJ and the second change effect by the change candidate icon HKI are combined, and the change in the state of the hold icon is increased in two steps at a time. It has changed to the aspect. The shuriken thrown by the ninja character NJ did not hit the change candidate icon HKI, and the change candidate icon HKI remained in a hatched pattern, or the shuriken thrown by the ninja character NJ hit the change candidate icon HKI Nevertheless, if the change candidate icon HKI remains in a hatched pattern, the first reserved icon f1 changes only to a hatched pattern having a lower jackpot expectation than the diamond pattern.

  Next, an example of the right half will be described.

  FIG. 39 (1) is a continuation from FIG. 37 (f), and there is a winning of one ball at the first special figure starting port 230. FIG. In FIG. 39 (2), the increase animation of the hold icon is started in the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f, and the hold icon gradually increases. In FIG. 39 (3), the increase animation of the hold icon is finished, and the second hold icon f2 is displayed in the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f.

  In FIG. 39 (4), the first hold icon f1 starts to vibrate, and in the following FIG. 39 (5), the enlarged display of the first hold icon f1 is started. The first hold icon f1 is enlarged until it exceeds the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f. This expanded mode corresponds to a mode for notifying that the on-hold change effect is started. The enlarged first display icon f1 and the adjacent second display icon f2 may or may not overlap. In addition, the hold change effect started after this is referred to as “hold change third effect” in order to distinguish it from other hold change effects.

  In FIG. 39 (6), the length BC for the reserved change third effect appears on the hold frame UI, and in FIG. 7 (7), the length BC for that number determines the pose. Then, the enlarged first display hold icon f1 is covered with the effect image mf ′ (FIG. 39 (8)). The effect image mf ′ covers up to a part of the adjacent second reserved icon f2, but may cover the entire adjacent second reserved icon f2 or may not cover the adjacent second reserved icon f2. It may be.

  The hold change third effect may be seen as starting from the timing when the length-length character BC in FIG. 39 (6) appears, or from the timing at which the length-length character BC in FIG. It may be seen that it has started, or it can be seen that it has started from the timing at which the effect image mf ′ in FIG.

  In FIG. 39 (9), the effect image mf ′ is smaller than the enlarged first hold icon f 1, and the first hold icon f 1 that has changed to a rhombus pattern is starting to appear. Eventually, the effect image mf 'disappears completely, and in FIG. 39 (10), the enlarged first display icon f1 in the form of a rhombus is displayed. In FIG. 39 (11), the size of the first hold icon f1 returns to the original size, and in FIG. 12 (12), the length BC for the hold change third effect disappears. It should be noted that the decorative symbol display is still ongoing.

  The hold change third effect may be regarded as the end when the effect image mf ′ of FIG. 39 (10) disappears, that is, the change of the hold icon mode, or the first hold icon f1 of FIG. It may be regarded as the end when the size returns to the original size, or may be regarded as the end when the character length character BC in FIG.

  Note that the hold icon whose form is likely to be changed by the hold change third effect is the first hold icon f1 rather than the second hold icon f2, and the first hold icon f1 is most easily changed among all the hold icons. It may be easier to change as the hold is held earlier. Alternatively, only the first hold icon f1 may be changed among all the hold icons. In addition, the hold change third effect is easier to change to a mode in which the expectation (reliability) of the big hit is higher than the hold change first effect. That is, the mode of the icon is increased only by one step in the first change change effect, but is increased by two steps in the third change change effect. Similarly, the hold change third effect is more likely to be changed to a mode in which the big hit expectation (reliability) is higher than the hold change second effect.

  FIG. 40 is a diagram illustrating an effect example in which the character BC with the head length of the hold change third effect appears. FIG. 40 also shows two examples, the left half example and the right half example.

  First, an example of the left half will be described, but description overlapping with the description of the example shown in the right half of FIG. 39 may be omitted.

  FIG. 40 (a) is a continuation from FIG. 37 (f), and a number BC for the change change third effect appears on the hold frame UI. In FIG. 40 (b), the first hold icon f1 of the default mode starts to vibrate, and in the following FIG. 40 (c), the first hold icon f1 has been displayed so far. By jumping out from the first area and moving to the center of the display screen, it overlaps with the longest character BC sitting cross-legged. In the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f where the first hold icon f1 has been displayed until then, the trace of the first hold icon f1 popped out is displayed as a silhouette display Sil. Here, the silhouette display Sil is represented by a dotted line, but the silhouette display Sil may also be displayed in the same mode (in this example, the dotted pattern mode) as the first hold icon f1. The color of the first hold icon f1 may be displayed in gray on the silhouette display Sil regardless of the color of the first hold icon f1. For example, the color of the first hold icon f1 May be displayed in dark blue in the silhouette display Sil, and the color of the first hold icon f1 and the color of the silhouette display Sil may be unified in the same color system.

  In FIG. 40 (d), it appears that the longest character BC decides a pose, and the longest character BC just has the first hold icon f1. In FIG. 40 (e), the first hold icon f1 is covered with the effect image mb. In FIG. 40 (f), the effect image mb is smaller than the first hold icon f1 and changes to a hatched pattern. The first hold icon f1 is starting to be visible. In FIG. 40 (g), the effect image mb disappears completely, and it appears that the longest character BC has the first hold icon f1 that has changed to a hatched pattern. When the first hold icon f1 shown in FIG. 40G changes to blue, the silhouette display Sil shown in FIG. 40G may also change to dark blue. In FIG. 40 (h), the longest character BC disappears, and the first hold icon f1 changed to a hatched pattern remains in the center of the display screen. Eventually, the moving animation is started, and the first hold icon f1 in the hatched pattern starts moving toward the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f (FIG. 40 (i)), and FIG. In j), the first hold icon f1 having a hatched pattern is displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f.

  Next, an example of the right half will be described. The right half example is an example in which a hold change first effect by a ninja character NJ and a hold change third effect by a bancho character BC are performed.

FIG. 40 (1) is a continuation from FIG. 37 (f), and the number BC character for the hold change third effect is displayed on the hold frame UI, and the hold change is displayed on the stage SG. A ninja character NJ for the first performance is displayed. Whichever may be earlier or the same as the timing at which the longest character BC appears and the timing at which the ninja character NJ appears may be the same as the default mode (dot pattern mode). The 1 hold icon f1 jumps out of the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f that has been displayed so far, and moves to the center of the display screen, so that it overlaps the character BC of the chief who is sitting cross-legged. . As in the left half example, in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f where the first hold icon f1 has been displayed until then, the trace of the first hold icon f1 popped out is a silhouette display Sil. It is displayed as. In FIG. 40 (3), the ninja character NJ in the hold change first effect decides the pose and displays a balloon “Ikuzo”. In FIG. 40 (4), the ninja character NJ throws a shuriken, and in FIG. 40 (5), the shuriken overlaps the first hold icon f1 moved to the center of the display screen. In FIG. 40 (6), the first hold icon f 1 is covered with the shuriken by the effect image mf and cannot be seen. In FIG. 40 (7), the effect image mf is smaller than the first hold icon f1, and the change candidate icon HKI that has changed to a hatched pattern is starting to appear. In FIG. 40 (8), the effect image mf has completely disappeared, and the first hold icon f1 that has been changed to a hatched pattern is overlapped with the longest character BC. The mode change of the first hold icon f1 here is due to the hold change first effect, and the character NJ shown in FIG. 40 (8) takes a success pose. This character NJ continues to take a successful pose until it disappears.

  In FIG. 40 (9), it appears that the watchdog character BC decides to pose and the watchdog character BC just has the first hold icon f1. In FIG. 40 (10), the first hold icon f1 is covered with the effect image mb. In FIG. 10 (11), the effect image mb is smaller than the first hold icon f1 and changes to a rhombus pattern. The first hold icon f1 is starting to be visible. In FIG. 40 (12), the effect image mb disappears completely, and it appears that the longest character BC has the first hold icon f1 changed to a rhombus pattern. The mode change of the first hold icon f1 here is due to the hold change third effect. In FIG. 40 (13), the long character BC disappears, and the first hold icon f1 changed to a rhombus pattern remains in the center of the display screen. Although the ninja character NJ has also disappeared, the timing at which the Bancho character BC disappears and the timing at which the ninja character NJ disappears may be earlier or the same.

  FIG. 41 is a diagram showing a continuation of the right half example of FIG. 40 and a diagram showing a pending change fourth effect.

  In FIG. 41 (14) continuing from FIG. 40 (13), the movement animation of the first hold icon f1 is started, and the first hold icon f1 changed to a rhombus pattern is the first in the special figure 1 hold icon display area f. In FIG. 41 (15), the first hold icon f1 having a rhombus pattern is displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f.

  In the example of the right half of FIG. 40 described above, the first hold icon f1 is the change target icon for both the hold change first effect by the ninja character NJ and the hold change third effect by the bancho character BC. The first hold icon f1, which was the default mode, has finally changed to a rhombus pattern mode in which the reliability of the jackpot in the pre-reading notice is increased by two stages. However, in this example, the timing of the mode change of the hold icon is shifted, but it may be simultaneous. Further, the mode change by the hold change first effect is ahead of the mode change by the hold change third effect, but conversely, the mode change by the hold change third effect is the hold change first effect. It may be ahead of the mode change due to.

  Subsequently, the pending change fourth effect will be described.

  FIG. 41 (a) is a continuation from FIG. 37 (f), and there is a single winning at the first special figure starting port 230. FIG. In FIG. 41 (b), the second hold icon f2 is newly displayed in the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f. This second hold icon is a roulette icon of the hold change fourth effect, and the roulette icon which is the second hold icon f2 shown in FIG. The roulette icon of the mode during the variable display corresponds to the change target candidate display. In other words, this is a mode for notifying that the player himself / herself will change thereafter after winning (when appearing). In FIG. 41 (b), an on-hold increase sound is output from the speaker 120.

  In FIG. 41C, the decorative symbol variation display performed in FIG. 41B ends, and the combination of “decoration 7-decoration 1-decoration 1” is stopped and displayed. Note that immediately after the combination of decorative symbols is stopped and displayed, the variation icon e1 remains displayed. In addition, the roulette icon that is the second hold icon f2 shown in FIG. In FIG. 41 (d), a decoration symbol is confirmed and displayed. When the fixed display of the decorative symbol is started, the erasing animation of the variation icon e1 is started, and the variation icon e1 is considerably small in the stage in the variation icon display area e shown in FIG. In 41 (e), the erase animation of the variation icon e1 is completed, and nothing is displayed on the stage in the variation icon display area e. Even during the fixed display, the roulette icon as the second hold icon f2 remains in the state of the variable display.

  Subsequently, the symbol variation display of the special symbol 1 is started, and in FIG. 41 (f), the ornamental symbol variation display is performed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Further, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variation display of the fifth symbol is performed, and the fourth symbol lamp i1 of the special symbol 1 is lit in white. Further, the number indicating the reserved number of the special figure 1 displayed on the upper part of the third decorative symbol display device 208N is reduced from “2” to “1”. However, two hold icons are displayed, and the roulette icon that is the second hold icon f2 remains in the state of the variable display.

  In FIG. 41 (g), the movement animation of the hold icon is started, and the first hold icon f1 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f moves toward the variable icon display area e. The roulette icon, which is the second hold icon f2 displayed in the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f, moves toward the first area in the state of the variable display. Has started.

  In FIG. 41 (h), the movement animation of the hold icon is completed, the change icon e1 of the default mode is displayed on the stage in the change icon display area e, and the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f is displayed. Shows a roulette icon in the form of variable display as the special figure 1 hold icon f1. In this example, the roulette icon in the variation display mode is continuously displayed across the variation display of the decorative pattern (also referred to as the special symbol variation display). The roulette icon (holding icon) may disappear once, and the roulette icon (holding icon) may be displayed when the next decorative symbol variation display (also referred to as the special symbol variation display) is started.

  In FIG. 41 (i), the roulette icon, which has been in a variable display so far, has been changed to a mode in which the variable display is terminated and the characters “lattice” are stopped. The roulette icon in the form in which the characters “lattice” are stopped and displayed corresponds to the change form candidate display. That is, it is a mode for notifying that it will change to a grid pattern mode.

In FIG. 41J, the roulette icon that is the first hold icon f1 is covered with the effect image mf and cannot be seen. In FIG. 41 (k), the effect image mf is smaller than the first hold icon f1, and the first hold icon f1 changed to a lattice pattern is starting to be seen. In FIG. 4 1 (l), the effect image mf disappears completely, and the first hold icon f1 changed to a lattice pattern is displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f. That is, the mode change of the hold icon has been completed, and the hold change fourth effect ends at the timing of FIG. 4 1 (l). In addition, it may be considered that the hold change fourth effect starts from the timing when the roulette icon appears as shown in FIG. 41B, and the roulette icon stops as shown in FIG. It may be seen that it is started from the timing when the displayed mode is changed.

  As described above, the roulette icon corresponds to the hold change notice display for itself.

  FIG. 41 (i ′) is a diagram showing an example different from FIG. 41 (i). In FIG. 41 (i ′), the roulette icon that was in the mode of variation display ends the variation display and changes to the mode in which the characters of “lattice” are stopped and displayed, and at the same time, the base icon UIb and the chunklet display are displayed. The pattern of the CR frame portion CRf is changed to a lattice pattern. Further, the word “chance up” is displayed above the first hold icon f1. Even if the roulette icon changes to a mode in which the characters “lattice” are stopped and displayed, the roulette icon itself does not always change to a grid pattern. However, when the pattern of the frame portion CRf of the base icon UIb and the channel display CR changes to a lattice pattern in this way, the roulette icon itself has a lattice pattern rather than the case where it does not change (see FIG. 41 (i)). It becomes easy to change into an aspect. Or you may make it change always.

  The timing at which the pattern of the frame portion CRf of the base icon UIb and the channel display CR changes to a lattice pattern may be after the roulette icon has changed to a mode in which the characters “lattice” are stopped. Alternatively, when the roulette icon changes at the stage of the variably displayed state and the pattern of the frame portion CRf of the base icon UIb and the channel display CR changes, characters representing the pattern are likely to be stopped and displayed on the roulette icon. It may be.

  Note that only one of the base icon UIb pattern and the frame portion CRf pattern of the Chan-Sullet display CR may be changed. In this case, the roulette is more effective than the case where both are changed. The icon itself may be less likely to change to a lattice pattern. Or, if it changes before the stop display of the roulette icon, the character representing that pattern is stopped and displayed on the roulette icon when only one of the patterns changes than when both change. It may be difficult.

  FIG. 41 (l ′) is a diagram showing an example different from FIG. 41 (l). This FIG. 41 (l ′) is an example continued from FIG. 41 (i ′), and the roulette is set despite the fact that the pattern of the frame portion CRf of the base icon UIb and the chunklet display CR has changed to a lattice pattern. This is an example in which the icon itself has changed to the default mode without changing to the grid pattern mode. However, as described above, when the pattern of the base icon UIb and the frame portion CRf of the channel display CR changes to a lattice pattern, the roulette icon itself may necessarily change to the lattice pattern. In addition, the roulette icon has changed to a mode in which the characters “lattice” are displayed in a stopped manner, not foreseeing a change in the mode of the roulette icon, but other indications and icons (here, the base icon UIb and There may be a case in which a change in the mode of at least one pattern of the frame portion CRf of the display CR is predicted.

  It should be noted that when the roulette icon changes to a mode in which the characters “lattice” are stopped and displayed, the roulette icon itself may necessarily change to a grid pattern.

  FIG. 42 is a diagram illustrating an example of the pending change fifth effect.

  In FIG. 42 (1), the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner in a state where the two hold icons f1 and f2 in the default mode are displayed. In FIG. 42 (2), the appearance animation of the target icon TI is started, and a part of the target icon TI starts to be seen at the upper center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In this appearance animation, the target icon TI gradually descends, and in FIG. 42 (3), the target icon TI passes through the central portion of the display screen. Eventually, the target icon TI is attached to the second reserved icon f2, and the appearance animation ends (FIG. 42 (4)). The hold icon with the target icon TI is more likely to change its state than the hold icon without the target icon TI. Even with the hold icon with the target icon TI, the mode change does not always occur and may not occur. Alternatively, the hold icon with the target icon TI may be changed in form. The target icon TI attached to the icon corresponds to a change target candidate display.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M shown in FIG. 42 (5), the character YM of Yoshimune who is the character of the reserved change fifth effect appears, and in the same figure (6), the character YM of Yoshimune has a bow. I'm ready. In FIG. 42 (6), an arrow icon YI indicating that the Yoshimune character YM is aiming at the target icon TI is displayed. The arrow icon YI has a slight rear end on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and is displayed across the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Further, the tip of the arrow icon YI may or may not touch the target (here, the target icon YI), but it is only necessary to know that it is determined as an aim. The arrow icon YI is one type of aiming icon or designation icon, and the aiming icon or designation icon is not limited to the arrow, and may be a light irradiation mode. An aiming icon or a designated icon such as an arrow icon YI corresponds to a change target candidate display. Furthermore, the aiming icon or the designation icon such as the arrow icon YI may be displayed in a pattern in which the aiming or designated icon changes after this. That is, the display itself of the aiming icon such as the arrow icon YI or the designated icon may correspond to the change mode candidate display.

  Eventually, the decorative symbol variation display performed in FIG. 42 (1) is finished. In FIG. 42 (7), the combination of “decoration 7-decoration 1-decoration 1” is stopped and displayed, and in FIG. The final display of the decorative design has started. When the definite display of the decorative symbol is started, the erasing animation of the variation icon e1 is started, and the variation icon e1 is considerably small at the stage in the variation icon display area e shown in FIG. In 42 (9), the erase animation of the variation icon e1 is completed, and nothing is displayed on the stage in the variation icon display area e. The target icon TI is still attached to the second hold icon f2 even after the decorative symbol variation display is finished, and the same holds during the final display. Also, the Yoshimune character YM continues to hold the bow, the arrow icon YI continues to be displayed, and the same applies during the final display.

  Subsequently, the symbol variation display of the special symbol 1 is started, and in FIG. 42 (10), the ornamental symbol variation display is performed in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Further, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variation display of the fifth symbol is performed, and the fourth symbol lamp i1 of the special symbol 1 is lit in white. Further, the number indicating the reserved number of the special figure 1 displayed on the upper part of the third decorative symbol display device 208N is reduced from “2” to “1”. However, two hold icons are displayed, the target icon TI remains attached to the second hold icon f2, the Yoshimune character YM continues to hold the bow, and the arrow icon YI continues to be displayed.

  In FIG. 42 (11), the movement animation of the hold icon is started, and the first hold icon f1 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f moves toward the variable icon display area e. The second hold icon f2 displayed in the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f starts moving toward the first area with the target icon TI attached. ing.

  In FIG. 42 (12), the moving animation of the hold icon is completed, the change icon e1 of the default mode is displayed on the stage in the change icon display area e, and the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f is displayed. Is displayed as a special figure 1 hold icon f1, which is a default hold icon with the target icon TI attached. In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the Yoshimune character YM continues to hold a bow, and the arrow icon YI continues to be displayed. However, since the target icon TI moves together with the hold icon, the direction of the arrow icon YI slightly changes and the length is slightly shortened.

  After the movement animation of the hold icon is completed, the Yoshimune character YM has a bow as shown in FIG. 42 (13), but the arrow icon YI disappears. The disappearance of the display of the arrow icon YI can also be regarded as a preliminary operation of the hold change effect. When the display of the arrow icon YI disappears, an arrow is fired from the character YM of Yoshimune, and in FIG. 42 (14), the fired arrow moves the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It is displayed straddling.

  The hold change fifth effect may be seen as starting from the timing when the Yoshimune character YM in FIG. 42 (5) appears, or starting from the timing when the arrow icon YI disappears in FIG. It may be seen that it is made, or it may be seen that it is started from the timing when an arrow is fired from the character YM of Yoshimune.

  In FIG. 42 (15), an arrow hits the target icon TI attached to the first hold icon f1, and in FIG. 16 (16), the first hold icon f1 is covered with the effect image mf and cannot be seen. Yes. Note that the target icon TI and the arrow that hits the target icon TI are not covered by the effect image mf and are visible. However, the target icon TI and the arrow that hits the target icon TI may be covered with the effect image mf.

  In FIG. 42 (17), the effect image mf is smaller than the first hold icon f1, and the first hold icon f1 that has changed to a rhombus pattern is starting to appear. In FIG. 42 (18), the effect image mf disappears completely, and the first hold icon f1 changed to a rhombus pattern is displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f. The character YM of Yoshimune who is the character of the reserved change fifth effect changes the pose, takes the thumb, and takes the success pose taken when the icon display mode change is successful. In FIG. 42 (19), the character YM of Yoshimune has disappeared, but the target icon TI is still attached to the first hold icon f1 after the mode change, and an arrow has hit the target icon TI. It remains. The hold change fifth effect may be regarded as the end when the effect image mf of FIG. 42 (18) disappears, that is, the change of the state of the hold icon, or the Yoshimune character YM of FIG. It may be viewed as ending at the timing.

  Eventually, the variation display of the decorative symbols started in FIG. 42 (10) ends, the combination of “decoration 7-decoration 1-decoration 1” is stopped and displayed in FIG. 42 (20), and in FIG. The symbol display has been started. When the definite display of the decorative symbol is started, the erasure animation of the variation icon e1 is started, and the variation icon e1 is considerably small in the stage in the variation icon display area e shown in FIG. In 42 (22), the erase animation of the variation icon e1 is completed, and nothing is displayed on the stage in the variation icon display area e. Even when the decorative symbol variation display is finished, the target icon TI where the arrow has hit is still attached to the first reserved icon f1 in the rhombus pattern, and the same applies during the fixed display.

  Subsequently, the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and in FIG. 42 (23), the variation display of the decoration symbol is performed in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Further, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variation display of the fifth symbol is performed, and the fourth symbol lamp i1 of the special symbol 1 is lit in white. Further, the number indicating the reserved number of the special figure 1 displayed on the upper part of the third decorative symbol display device 208N has decreased from “1” to “0”. However, the first hold icon is displayed, and the target icon TI hit by the arrow remains attached to the first hold icon f1.

  In FIG. 42 (24), the movement animation of the hold icon is started, and the first hold icon f1 with the target icon TI hit by the arrow is displayed in the variable icon display area e with the target icon TI attached. The movement has started.

  In FIG. 42 (25), the movement animation of the hold icon is completed, and the change icon e1 having a rhombus pattern is displayed on the stage in the change icon display area e with the target icon TI hit by the arrow. ing. Note that the arrow that hits the target icon TI shown in FIG. 42 (25) is displayed across the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

  As described above, the target icon TI hit by the arrow does not disappear even after the mode of the hold icon changes, and remains attached to the hold icon whose mode has changed. By doing so, it is also possible to display a history of which type of hold change effect has been performed. For example, even if the icon mode changes to the same mode, if it changes due to the hold change fifth effect, the expectation (reliability) of the jackpot is higher than if it changes due to other hold change effects If the arrow icon is low or vice versa, it is useful information that the target icon TI that the arrow has hit remains.

  In addition, even if the icon whose form has changed, that is, the icon with the target icon TI hit by the arrow changes from the hold icon f1 to the change icon e1, the target icon TI hit by the arrow remains attached to the change icon e1. It is up to. In this case as well, the target icon TI hit by the arrow is displayed as a history, and also serves as information notifying that the big hit is approaching.

  In addition, when the aspect of the target icon TI changes when the arrow hits (for example, when the target icon TI changes from white to red or when a large hole is formed), the arrow may be deleted. The target icon TI hit by the arrow may disappear, and in this case, if the target icon TI hit by the arrow remains, the expectation of the big hit is higher than the case where the target icon TI has disappeared. The degree (reliability) may be high, or when the target icon TI hit by the arrow remains, the big hit may be confirmed. For example, even if the icon changes to the change icon e1, if the target icon TI that the arrow hits still remains attached, the currently displayed symbol change display may be a big hit confirmation.

  Further, although the illustration after FIG. 42 (25) is omitted, after that, it may be developed into a super reach production. For example, even if the icon changes to the change icon e1, if the target icon TI that the arrow hit is still attached, it may be easier to develop a super reach effect than when it is not attached. It may develop. Further, the target icon TI hit by the arrow may disappear together with the change icon during the confirmation display, or may disappear before the confirmation display. For example, it may disappear when the reach state is reached, or it may disappear when the super reach production is started. When the super reach production is started, the variation icon e1 may disappear or the variation icon e1 may not disappear.

  FIG. 43 is a diagram illustrating an example relating to the pending change fifth effect.

  FIG. 43 (a) is a continuation from FIG. 42 (15), and the first hold icon f1 with the target icon TI hit by the arrow is covered with the effect image mf and cannot be seen. In this example, the effect image mf is enlarged, and in FIG. 43B, the target icon TI is also covered with the effect image mf and cannot be seen, and a part of the arrow is also covered with the effect image mf and cannot be seen. ing.

  In FIG.43 (c), the effect image mf becomes small and the 1st holding | maintenance icon f1 changed into the pattern of the rhombus pattern has begun to be seen. At the same time as the effect image mf disappears, the target icon TI and the arrow that hits the target icon TI also disappear. In FIG. 43 (c), the target icon TI and the arrow that hit the target icon TI have already disappeared.

  In FIG. 43 (d), the effect image mf disappears completely, the first hold icon f1 changed to a rhombus pattern is displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f, and the second decorative design is displayed. In display device 208M, Yoshimune's character YM, which is the character of the reserved change fifth effect, changes the pose and takes a successful pose with a thumb. In FIG. 43 (e), the Yoshimune character YM disappears.

  43 may be regarded as ending when the target icon TI and the arrow hitting the target icon TI in FIG. 43 (c) disappear, or the effect image mf in FIG. 43 (d). May be regarded as the end when the state change of the hold icon is completed, or may be regarded as the end when the Yoshimune character YM in FIG.

  Next, an example in which the hold change first effect is performed together with the hold change fifth effect will be described.

  FIG. 43 (1) is a continuation from FIG. 42 (12), and in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the ninja character NJ for the reserved change first effect appears on the stage SG. In this example, the target icon TI, the Yoshimune character YM, and the ninja character NJ appear in this order. However, the ninja character NJ, the target icon TI, and the Yoshimune character YM may appear in this order. The target icon TI, the ninja character NJ, and the Yoshimune character YM may appear in this order, or may appear at the same time.

  In FIG. 43 (2), the ninja character NJ decides on a pose and displays a balloon “Ikuzo”. In FIG. 3 (3), the character NJ throws a shuriken. This shuriken hits the first hold icon f1, and in FIG. 43 (4), the first hold icon f1 hit by the shuriken is covered with the effect image mf and cannot be seen. In FIG. 43 (5), the effect image mf is smaller than the first hold icon f1, and the first hold icon f1 that has changed to a hatched pattern is starting to appear. In FIG. 43 (6), the effect image mf disappears completely, and the first hold icon f1 changed to the hatched pattern is displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f. In this way, the target icon TI is displayed, but in the hold change first effect, the hold icon itself is directly changed without aiming at the target icon TI. The ninja character NJ shown in FIG. 43 (6) is in a successful pose. In FIG. 43 (7), the ninja character NJ has disappeared, but until now, the Yoshimune character YM has continued to hold a bow and the arrow icon YI has also been displayed.

  Eventually, the arrow icon YI disappears and an arrow is fired from the Yoshimune character YM. The fired arrow hits the target icon TI attached to the first hold icon f1, and in FIG. 43 (8), the first hold icon f1 is covered with the effect image mf and cannot be seen.

  In FIG. 43 (9), the effect image mf is smaller than the first hold icon f1, and the first hold icon f1 changed to a lattice pattern is starting to be seen. In FIG. 43 (10), the effect image mf disappears completely, and the first hold icon f1 changed to a lattice pattern is displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f. Moreover, the character YM of Yoshimune who is the character of the reserved change fifth effect changes the pose and takes a successful pose with a thumb. This is followed by FIG. 42 (19).

  In the example described above, the first change icon 1 is the change target icon in both the first change effect by the ninja character NJ and the fifth change change effect by the Yoshimune character YM. The first hold icon f1 finally changes to a lattice pattern in which the jackpot reliability in the pre-reading notice is increased by three levels instead of two levels. However, in this example, the timing of the mode change of the hold icon is shifted, but it may be simultaneous. As described above, when a plurality of hold change effects are performed in combination for the same target, the state changes to a higher mode (a mode in which three steps are raised rather than two steps) than when the hold change effects are separately performed. . Here, the combination of the hold change fifth effect and the hold change first effect is used, but the combination of the hold change fifth effect and the hold change second effect may be used, and the hold change fifth effect and the hold change. It may be a combination of the third effects, a combination of the hold change fifth effect and the hold change fourth effect, or any other combination.

  FIG. 44 is a diagram illustrating another example in which the hold change first effect is performed together with the hold change fifth effect.

  FIG. 44 (1) is a continuation from FIG. 43 (1), and the ninja character NJ for the reserved change first effect appearing on the stage SG of the third decorative symbol display device 208N decides on a pose. A balloon “Ikuzo” is displayed. In FIG. 2B, the character NJ throws a shuriken. In FIG. 44 (3), the shuriken overlaps with the target icon TI attached to the first hold icon f1 instead of the first hold icon f1, and in FIG. 44 (4), the target icon TI hit by the shuriken is displayed. The attached first hold icon f1 is covered with the effect image mf and cannot be seen. In FIG. 44 (5), the effect image mf is smaller than the first hold icon f1, and the first hold icon f1 that has changed to a hatched pattern is starting to appear. In FIG. 44 (6), the effect image mf disappears completely, and the first hold icon f1 changed to a hatched pattern is displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f, and the ninja character NJ Has a success pose. As described above, the shuriken may hit the target icon TI even in the first change change effect.

  In FIG. 44 (7), the ninja character NJ has disappeared, but until now the Yoshimune character YM has continued to hold a bow and the arrow icon YI has also been displayed. Moreover, the target icon TI is still attached to the first hold icon f1 that has finished changing the mode, and the shuriken is still hit on the target icon TI.

  Eventually, the arrow icon YI disappears and an arrow is fired from the Yoshimune character YM. The fired arrow hits the target icon TI attached to the first hold icon f1. That is, the arrow also hits the target icon TI that the shuriken had previously hit. In FIG. 44 (8), the first hold icon f1 is covered with the effect image mf and cannot be seen.

  In FIG. 44 (9), the effect image mf is smaller than the first hold icon f1, and the first hold icon f1 changed to a lattice pattern is starting to appear. In FIG. 44 (10), the effect image mf disappears completely, and the first hold icon f1 changed to a lattice pattern is displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f. Moreover, the character YM of Yoshimune who is the character of the reserved change fifth effect changes the pose and takes a successful pose with a thumb.

  In FIG. 44 (11), the character YM of Yoshimune has disappeared, but the target icon TI is still attached to the first held icon f1 after the change of mode, and the target icon TI has a shuriken and an arrow. Is still hit. By doing so, it is also possible to display a history of which type of hold change effect has been performed. That is, a history display in which the hold change first effect is performed by the shuriken becomes a history display in which the hold change fifth effect is performed by the arrow.

  Eventually, the variation display of the decorative symbols that has been performed so far is finished. In FIG. 44 (12), the combination of “decoration 7-decoration 1-decoration 1” is stopped and displayed, and in FIG. Display has started. When the definite display of the decorative symbol is started, the erasing animation of the variation icon e1 is started, and the variation icon e1 is considerably small in the stage in the variation icon display area e shown in FIG. In 44 (14), the erase animation of the variation icon e1 is completed, and nothing is displayed on the stage in the variation icon display area e. Even when the decorative symbol variation display is finished, the target icon TI where the shuriken and the arrow hit is still attached to the first hold icon f1 in the lattice pattern mode, and the same applies during the fixed display.

  Subsequently, the symbol variation display of the special symbol 1 is started, and in FIG. 44 (15), the ornamental symbol variation display is performed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Further, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variation display of the fifth symbol is performed, and the fourth symbol lamp i1 of the special symbol 1 is lit in white. Further, the number indicating the reserved number of the special figure 1 displayed on the upper part of the third decorative symbol display device 208N has decreased from “1” to “0”. However, the first hold icon is displayed, and the target icon TI hit with the shuriken and the arrow remains attached to the first hold icon f1.

  In FIG. 44 (16), the movement animation of the hold icon is started, and the first hold icon f1 with the target icon TI hit by the shuriken and the arrow is displayed in the variable icon display area with the target icon TI attached. The movement is started toward e.

  In FIG. 44 (17), the movement animation of the hold icon is completed, and the change icon e1 in the checkered pattern is left on the stage in the change icon display area e with the target icon TI hit by the shuriken and the arrow. It is displayed. Note that the arrow that hits the target icon TI shown in FIG. 43 (17) is displayed across the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

  In the example described above, the shuriken and the arrow hit the target icon TI at different timings, but they may hit at the same timing. In addition, only one of the shuriken and the arrow may hit and the other may come off.

  FIG. 45 is a diagram showing another example of the pending change fourth effect shown in FIG.

  FIG. 45 (1) is a continuation from FIG. 37 (f), and the decorative symbol changes in a state where the hold icon moving animation is completed and one hold icon f1 having a default dot pattern is displayed. The display is done. In FIG. 45 (2), there is a single winning at the first special figure starting port 230, and in FIG. 45 (3), the increase animation of the hold icon in the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f. Will start and the hold icon will gradually increase. The hold icon that gradually increases due to the increase animation is a roulette icon of the hold change fourth effect, and becomes large in a state in which the change is being displayed. In addition, a hold increase sound is output from the speaker 120. In FIG. 45 (4), the increase animation of the hold icon is finished, and the second hold icon f2 is displayed in the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f. The roulette icon, which is the second hold icon f2 shown in FIG. 45 (4), is in a variable display state and corresponds to a change target candidate display. It should be noted that in the increase animation of the hold icon, it may be enlarged in a default mode, and may be changed to a roulette icon in a mode of variable display at the same time or after the expansion is completed.

  After that, the decorative symbol variation display is finished, the next hold is digested, and a hold icon moving animation is performed. In FIG. 45 (5), the movement animation of the hold icon is completed, the change icon e1 of the default mode is displayed on the stage in the change icon display area e, and the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f is displayed. Shows a roulette icon in the form of variable display as the special figure 1 hold icon f1. Also in this example, the roulette icon of the mode in which the variation is displayed is continuously displayed across the variation display of the continuous decorative symbol (also referred to as the special symbol variation display).

  In this example, the roulette icon in the variation display mode is covered with the effect image mf and cannot be seen without changing from the variation display mode to the mode in which characters representing the pattern are stopped and displayed (FIG. 45). (6)). In FIG. 45 (7), the effect image mf is smaller than the first hold icon f1, and the first hold icon f1 changed to a lattice pattern is starting to be seen. In FIG. 45 (8), the effect image mf disappears completely, and the first hold icon f1 changed to a rhombus pattern is displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f. In this example, the mode of the first hold icon f1 is changed without displaying the change mode candidate display.

  Next, an example in which the hold change first effect is performed together with the hold change fourth effect will be described.

  FIG. 45 (a) is a continuation from FIG. 45 (3), the increase animation of the hold icon is finished, and the roulette icon in the form of the variable display is displayed in the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f. Is displayed as the second hold icon f2.

  In FIG. 45 (b), the ninja character NJ for the reserved change first effect appears on the stage SG of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and in the following FIG. 45 (c), the ninja character NJ A pose is decided and a balloon “Ikuzo” is displayed. In FIG. 45 (d), the ninja character NJ throws a shuriken. In FIG. 45 (e), the shuriken overlaps with the second hold icon f2. That is, the shuriken hits the roulette icon in the mode of the variable display. In FIG. 45 (f), the second hold icon f2 hit by the shuriken is covered with the effect image mf and cannot be seen. In FIG. 45 (g), the effect image mf is smaller than the first hold icon f1, and the roulette icon in the changing display state that has changed to the rhombus pattern is starting to appear. In FIG. 45 (h), the effect image mf disappears completely, and the roulette icon of the variation display mode changed to the rhombus pattern mode is displayed in the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f. It is displayed as f2. Further, the character NJ shown in FIG. 45 (h) takes a success pose taken when the icon display mode change is successful.

  In FIG. 45 (i), the ninja character NJ has disappeared. Also in this example, the roulette icon does not change from the mode in which the variation is displayed to another mode, and the roulette icon in the mode in which the variation is displayed is covered with the effect image mf and cannot be seen (FIG. 45 (j )). In FIG. 45 (k), the effect image mf is smaller than the second hold icon f2, and the second hold icon f2 changed to a vertical line pattern is starting to be seen. In FIG. 45 (l), the effect image mf disappears completely, and the second hold icon f2 changed to a vertical line pattern is displayed in the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f. The frequency of the change to the vertical line pattern is low, and the change to the vertical line pattern is more likely to change from the roulette icon than from the normal hold icon.

  In this example, the roulette icon in the variation display mode changed to the rhombus pattern mode shown in FIG. 45 (h) corresponds to the change target candidate display. As a result, the second reserved icon f2 has a rhombus pattern. Since the mode has not changed, the roulette icon shown in FIG. 45 (h) does not correspond to the change mode candidate display. The roulette icon in the variation display mode changed to the rhombus pattern mode merely notifies the change to the rhombus pattern mode by the hold change first effect, and changes according to the hold change fourth effect. This is because it does not represent. Therefore, when the hold change fourth effect is a false effect, the second hold icon f2 finally changes to a rhombus pattern. Also, the shuriken thrown by the ninja character NJ does not hit the roulette icon which is the second hold icon f2, and the aspect of the second hold icon f2 (roulette icon) does not change, or the shuriken thrown by the ninja character NJ If the second hold icon f2 does not change in spite of hitting the second hold icon f2 (roulette icon), the second hold icon f2 is expected to be a big hit than the vertical line pattern. May be changed only to a low mode (lattice pattern mode, rhombus pattern mode, or diagonal pattern mode), or the mode may not change.

  In this example, the hold change first effect is performed first, and the hold change fourth effect is performed later. Conversely, the hold change fourth effect is performed first, and the hold change first effect is performed later. An effect may be performed, or the hold change first effect and the hold change fourth effect may be performed simultaneously. Further, the hold change second effect may be performed together with the hold change fourth effect, and the hold change third effect may be performed together with the hold change fourth effect.

  In addition, after the second hold icon f2 that is the roulette icon changes to a hold icon in a rhombus pattern at a certain timing in FIGS. 45 (b) to 45 (d), the second hold icon in the rhombus pattern form. There may be a case where a shuriken thrown by the ninja character NJ for holding change first effect hits f2, and the second holding icon f2 changes to a holding icon in a vertical line pattern. That is, the mode may be changed in two stages.

  FIG. 46 is a diagram illustrating an example in which the hold change fifth effect is performed together with the hold change fourth effect and an example of the hold change sixth effect.

  FIG. 46 (1) is a continuation from FIG. 45 (5), and in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f, a roulette icon in the form of variable display is shown as the special figure 1 hold icon f1. Is displayed. In addition, the appearance animation of the target icon TI is started, and a part of the target icon TI starts to be seen at the upper center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In FIG. 46 (2), the appearance animation continues, the target icon TI continues to fall, and eventually the target icon TI is attached to the first hold icon f1, which is the roulette icon in the form of variation display, and the appearance animation ends. (FIG. 46 (3)).

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M shown in FIG. 46 (4), the character YM of Yoshimune who is the character of the reserved change fifth effect appears, and in the following FIG. An arrow icon YI is displayed. Thereafter, the arrow icon YI disappears and an arrow is fired from the Yoshimune character YM.

  In FIG. 46 (6), an arrow hits the target icon TI attached to the first hold icon f1, and in FIG. 7 (7), the first hold icon f1 is covered with the effect image mf and cannot be seen. Yes. In FIG. 46 (8), the effect image mf becomes smaller than the first hold icon f1, and in FIG. 46 (9), the effect image mf disappears completely and appears in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f. The roulette icon in the mode of change display changed to the rhombus pattern mode is displayed as the first hold icon f1. Moreover, the character YM of Yoshimune who is the character of the reserved change fifth effect changes the pose and takes a successful pose with a thumb. In FIG. 46 (10), the character YM of Yoshimune has disappeared, but the target icon TI is still attached to the first reserved icon f1, and an arrow remains on the target icon TI.

  Also in this example, the roulette icon does not change from the mode in which the variation is displayed to another mode. In FIG. 46 (11), the roulette icon in the mode in which the variation is displayed is covered with the effect image mf and cannot be seen. ing. Also, the target image TI and part of the arrow are covered by the effect image mf and cannot be seen. In FIG. 46 (12), the effect image mf is smaller than the first hold icon f1, and the first hold icon f1 changed to a vertical line pattern is starting to be visible. In FIG. 46 (13), the effect image mf disappears completely, and the first hold icon f1 changed to a vertical line pattern is displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f.

  It should be noted that the arrow fired by the Yoshimune character YM does not hit the target icon TI, and the aspect of the first reserved icon f1 with the target icon TI does not change, or the arrow fired by the Yoshimune character YM is the target icon. If the aspect of the first reserved icon f1 with the target icon TI does not change in spite of hitting the TI, the first reserved icon f1 is expected to be a big hit than the vertical line pattern. There may be a case where the degree is changed only to a low degree (a lattice pattern aspect, a rhombus pattern aspect, or a diagonal pattern aspect) or the aspect does not change.

  Next, the pending change sixth effect will be described.

  FIG. 46 (a) is a continuation from FIG. 37 (f), and shows a first special icon in a state in which one hold icon f1 having a default dot pattern is displayed and the decorative symbol is changed. In FIG. 46 (b), an increase animation of the hold icon is started in the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f, and the hold icon of the default mode is displayed. Gradually grows. Before the increase animation is finished, there is again a single winning at the first special figure starting port 230 (FIG. 46 (c)), and in FIG. 46 (d), the special figure 1 holding icon display area f is displayed. In the third area, a countdown icon is displayed as the third hold icon f3. This countdown icon is due to the pending change sixth effect, and even if the increase animation is not performed or not, the increase animation of the countdown icon is shorter than the increase animation of the hold icon in the default mode. Become an animation. Therefore, in FIG. 46D, the second reserved icon f2 in the default mode that has been won first is still in the middle of the increase animation, but the countdown icon that has been won later has been displayed. The countdown icon is an unfinished gray form with numbers that decrease with the passage of time. The countdown icon at the time of appearance in FIG. 46D is marked with the number “3”. Further, the speaker 120 outputs a hold increase sound for the third hold icon f3.

  In FIG. 46E, the increase animation of the second hold icon f2 ends, the display of the second hold icon f2 is completed, and the hold increase sound for the second hold icon f2 is output from the speaker 120. In FIG. 46F, the number of the countdown icon is “2”. Further, in FIG. 46G, the number becomes “1”, and finally in FIG. 46H, it finally becomes “0”. Then, the countdown icon as the third hold icon f3 is covered with the effect image mf and becomes invisible (FIG. 46 (i)). In FIG. 46 (j), the effect image mf is smaller than the third hold icon f3, and the third hold icon f3 that has changed to a rhombus pattern is starting to appear. In FIG. 46 (k), the effect image mf disappears completely, and the third hold icon f3 changed to a rhombus pattern is displayed in the third area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f.

  Note that the timing at which the number of the countdown icon becomes “0” varies, but the interval between countdowns (decrease in the number according to the passage of time) is constant. However, the interval may be limited to exactly 1 second, but it may not be limited, in some cases it is unified at 2 seconds, and in some cases it is unified at 0.5 seconds. May be. In addition, in the variation display of the decorative design performed when the countdown icon appears, the number of the countdown icon is not “0”, and the number of the countdown icon is “ Although the value may be 0, the number does not decrease when a new decorative symbol variation display is started. Further, the hold icon of the countdown icon corresponds to a change target candidate display. The countdown icon hold icon also corresponds to a hold icon in the form of a prefetch notice, and the number is always “0” before the symbol variation display subject to the prefetch notice is started. However, there may be a case where the number does not become “0” (for example, a case where the number changes to a default mode before becoming “0”). In addition, when the number becomes “0”, the mode change of the hold icon may be caused, and even when the number becomes “0”, the mode change of the hold icon is changed. You may make it not occur.

  FIG. 47 is a diagram illustrating another example of the pending change sixth effect. FIG. 47 shows three examples.

  First, the first example will be described. This first example is an example in which the hold change first effect is performed together with the hold change sixth effect. FIG. 47 (1) is a continuation from FIG. 46 (d), and in the state in which the display of the countdown icon is completed as the third hold icon f3, the increase animation of the second hold icon f2 ends. The display of the second hold icon f <b> 2 is completed, and a hold increase sound for the second hold icon f <b> 2 is output from the speaker 120. In FIG. 47 (2), the ninja character NJ for the reserved change first effect appears on the stage SG of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and in FIG. A pose is decided and a balloon “Ikuzo” is displayed. In FIG. 47 (4), the ninja character NJ throws a shuriken. In addition, the number of the countdown icon of the third hold icon is “2”. In FIG. 47 (5), the shuriken thrown by the ninja character NJ overlaps with the third hold icon f3. In FIG. 47 (6), the third hold icon f3 is covered with the effect image mf and cannot be seen. Yes.

  In the examples shown in FIG. 37 and subsequent figures, a number of effect images are displayed. However, all of these effect images have no pattern. However, the effect image described so far may be displayed in the form of an icon pattern that changes thereafter. That is, the effect image display itself may correspond to the change mode candidate display. Alternatively, the effect image described so far may be displayed in the form of a pattern representing the magnitude (reliability) of the possibility that the form of the icon will change thereafter. In other words, there is a high possibility that the icon mode changes in the order of dot pattern, diagonal line pattern, rhombus pattern, lattice pattern, vertical line pattern, and horizontal line pattern. You may do it.

  In FIG. 47 (7), the effect image mf is smaller than the third hold icon f3, and the third hold icon f3 changed to a lattice pattern is starting to be seen. In this example, before the countdown icon number becomes “0”, the mode of the target hold icon is changed. In FIG. 47 (8), the effect image mf disappears completely, and the third hold icon f3 changed to a lattice pattern is displayed in the third area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f. Also, the character NJ shown in FIG. 47 (8) takes a success pose taken when the icon display mode change is successful. Although the number of the countdown icon has disappeared, the aspect of the third hold icon f3 may change once again at the timing when the number becomes “0”, but in this example, in FIG. At the timing of 7), a change corresponding to the pending change sixth effect is also made. Therefore, the aspect of the third hold icon f3 does not change any more. As described above, when the aspect of the target hold icon is changed by the two types of hold change effects of the hold change first effect and the hold change sixth effect, the case is changed by one type of hold change effect. Compared to the above, it is easy to change to a mode in which the degree of expectation of jackpot is high (for example, a mode in which the level of jackpot is higher than 3 steps), or it may be changed to a mode in which the expectation level of jackpot is high. . In other words, if the mode of the hold icon that was a countdown icon changes before the countdown icon number becomes “0”, it is likely to change to a mode in which the big hit expectation is high, or the big hit expectation You may make it change to a high aspect.

  Here, the combination of the hold change sixth effect and the hold change first effect is used, but the combination of the hold change sixth effect and the hold change second effect may be used, and the hold change sixth effect and the hold change. It may be a combination of the third effect, a combination of the sixth change on hold and the fourth change on hold, or a combination of the sixth change on hold and the fifth change on hold, Other combinations may be used.

  Next, a second example will be described. This second example is an example of simultaneous change effects. FIG. 47 (a) is a continuation from FIG. 46 (d), and when the display of the countdown icon is completed as the third hold icon f3, the increase animation of the second hold icon f2 ends. The display of the second hold icon f <b> 2 is completed, and a hold increase sound for the second hold icon f <b> 2 is output from the speaker 120. In FIG. 47B, the number of the countdown icon is “2”. Furthermore, in FIG. 47 (c), the number becomes “1”, and finally in FIG. 47 (d), it finally becomes “0”. Then, the simultaneous change effect is started, and the effect image mfn covering all the held icons displayed at this stage is displayed (FIG. 47 (e)). The effect image mfn here is a collection of a plurality of effect images, and is an effect image that covers all of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f. One large effect image may be used. In addition, the simultaneous change effect here is started in response to the countdown icon number being “0”, but the simultaneous change effect may be started when the hold is accumulated up to a certain hold number. May be. That is, there may be a case where a simultaneous change effect is started in response to a winning at the special figure starting port. For example, in the third hold or the fourth hold which is the maximum hold number, or the special figure starting point where the hold is accumulated until the eighth hold which is the maximum hold number combining the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 A simultaneous change effect may be started accordingly. Also, if the number of the decorative symbol variation display reaches a certain number of times, if the hold is accumulated, the simultaneous change effect may be started, or the decorative symbol variation display frequency may be a certain number of times. If n or more holds are stored when the number reaches, the simultaneous change effect may be started. For example, the simultaneous change effect may be started every 15th change, and more specifically, the simultaneous change effect is started in response to the start of the display of the change display of the decorative pattern which becomes the 15th change. There may be a case where the simultaneous change effect may be started after the display of the fluctuating display of the decorative symbol which becomes the fifteenth change is started. In FIG. 47 (f), each of the effect images mfn becomes smaller, and in FIG. 47 (g), the effect image mfn disappears completely, and the special figure 1 hold icon display area f has three hold icons f1, f2, and f3. Is displayed. Of these three hold icons f1, f2, and f3, the second hold icon f2 remains in the default mode, but the first hold icon f1 has changed to a hatched pattern and is a countdown icon. The 3-hold icon f3 changes to a lattice pattern. In the simultaneous change effect, the mode of all displayed hold icons may change, the mode of only the hold icon that was a countdown icon may change, or one hold icon may have a mode. It may not change.

  Finally, the third example will be described. FIG. 47 (d ′) shows the state shown in FIG. 47 (d), that is, three hold icons are displayed, and the number of one countdown icon among them is “0”. At the same time that becomes “0”, there is also a single winning at the first special figure starting port 230. It should be noted that the same is true even if there is a winning of one ball at the first special figure starting port 230 immediately before the number of the countdown icon becomes “0”. Also in FIG. 47 (d ′) following FIG. 47 (d ′), the simultaneous change effect is started, the effect image mnf covering all of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f is displayed, and the fourth hold icon f4 is increased. The animation is no longer visible. Eventually, in the figure (f '), the effect image mfn disappears, and four hold icons f1 to f4 are displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area f. In this example, the increase animation of the fourth hold icon f4 is canceled from the beginning and is not executed. However, as shown in FIG. 47 (f '), the speaker 120 outputs a hold increase sound of the fourth hold icon f4. If the number of the countdown icon becomes “0” during the display of the increase animation of the hold icon, the increase animation is canceled halfway or is not visible by the effect image mnf even if it is not canceled. If the increase animation is not canceled halfway, after the effect image mnf disappears, if the remaining scene of the increase animation remains, that scene is displayed. Of the four hold icons f1 to f4 shown in FIG. 47 (f ′), the first hold icon f1 to the third hold icon f3 are the same as those hold icons f1 to f3 shown in FIG. 47 (f), The fourth hold icon f4 shown only in FIG. 47 (f ′) is displayed in a hatched pattern. That is, the increased fourth hold icon f4 is displayed in a manner that is changed by the simultaneous change effect. Note that the fourth hold icon f4 may be displayed in a default manner even when the simultaneous change effect is performed.

  FIG. 48 is a diagram illustrating an example in which the hold change first effect is performed in a state where the curtain effect is being executed.

  The curtain effect is an effect that is executed by the display on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and is one of the overlap effects that overlap the display that has been displayed so far. At least a part of the display changes to a silhouette display due to the curtain effect, and the existence and outline can be understood, but the pattern and color are not understood.

  FIG. 48 (a) is a continuation of FIG. 37 (f), and the decorative symbol changes in a state where the hold icon moving animation is completed and one hold icon f1 having a default dot pattern is displayed. The display is done. In FIG. 48A, the curtain effect is started, and the upper edge CHu of the curtain display CH appears at the lower end of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. This upper edge portion CHu overlaps the base icon UIb from the front side, in a diagonal pattern, just below the stage prepared in the variable icon display region e and the four regions prepared in the hold icon display region f. It is displayed.

  In FIG. 48 (b), the curtain display CH is rising, the stage prepared in the variable icon display area e and the lower part of the hold icon (here, the first hold icon f1) are overlapped with the curtain part CHc, The silhouette is displayed. The silhouette display in the curtain effect is displayed in a black pattern with no pattern. Note that the frames of the four areas prepared in the hold icon display area f are not displayed as silhouettes, but these frames may also be displayed as silhouettes.

  In FIG. 48C, the curtain display CH rises to the upper end of the base icon UIb, the entire change icon e1 is overlapped with the curtain portion CHc, and the entire first hold icon f1 is also overlapped with the curtain portion CHc. Both icons e1 and f1 are displayed in silhouette. Further, the upper edge portion CHu of the curtain display CH overlaps a part of the lower frame portion CRf in the closed channel display CR in the closed state from the front side.

  In FIG. 48 (d), the curtain display CH has risen to a height that exceeds the chamber bullet display CR, and a part of the closed channel bullet display CR (frame portion CRf) is overlapped with the curtain portion CHc. The silhouette is not displayed and part of it is not visible.

  In FIG. 48 (e), the ninja character NJ for the reserved change first effect appears on the stage SG of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and in FIG. 48 (f), the ninja character NJ A pose is decided and a balloon “Ikuzo” is displayed. In FIG. 48 (g), the ninja character NJ throws a shuriken. In FIG. 48 (h), the shuriken thrown by the ninja character NJ is displayed behind the curtain part CHc, and the shuriken is displayed in silhouette. In addition, three lines representing the power of the shuriken are displayed across the curtain part CHc. In FIG. 48 (i), the shuriken flies to a position where it comes into contact with the silhouette-displayed first hold icon f1s. In FIG. 48 (j), the first hold icon f1s is visible, but the shuriken is visible. I can't see it. However, the three lines representing the power of the shuriken are displayed as silhouettes. In FIG. 48 (j), the shuriken displayed in silhouette overlaps the first hold icon f1s displayed in silhouette. That is, as shown in FIG. 37 (k), the shuriken hits the first hold icon f1. In FIG. 48 (k), the silhouette display of the effect image mf is displayed at the position where the first hold icon f1s has been displayed until then. In FIG. 48 (l), the silhouette-displayed effect image mfs is slightly reduced. ing. In FIG. 48 (m), the effect-displayed image mfs displayed in silhouette is not visible, and instead, the first hold icon f1s displayed in silhouette is displayed. In FIG. 48 (m), as shown in FIG. 37 (m), the effect image mf is smaller than the first hold icon f1. In FIG. 48 (n), no change is seen in the silhouette-displayed first held icon f1s, but the character NJ shown in FIG. 48 (n) takes a successful pose when the icon display mode is successfully changed. Have taken.

  In FIG. 48 (o), the erasing animation of the character NJ is started, and the character NJ is covered with the smoke image and cannot be seen. In FIG. 48 (p), the smoke image disappears and the character NJ disappears, returning to a state where nothing is displayed on the stage SG.

  After the character NJ disappears, the curtain display CH starts to descend, and in FIG. 48 (q), the curtain display CH descends to the upper end of the base icon UIb. However, at this stage, the mode of the first hold icon f1 cannot be confirmed yet. In FIG. 48 (r), the curtain display CH has been lowered to a position where the upper part of the first reserved icon f1 can be seen, and the mode of the first held icon f1 has changed from the default dotted pattern mode to the hatched pattern mode. You can see it changing. That is, before the descent of the curtain display CH is completed (before the curtain effect ends), it is possible to confirm the mode of the hold icon and the change icon. In FIG. 48 (s), the curtain display CH is completely lowered and the curtain display CH disappears. In this example, the curtain effect is executed from immediately before FIG. 48A to immediately before FIG. Note that the timing at which the entire holding icon and the entire variation icon start to overlap by the curtain portion CHc may be the timing at which the character NJ throws a shuriken, or the timing in FIG. 48 (h). The timing shown in FIG. Also, the timing at which a part of the overlapped hold icon or part of the variation icon starts to appear may be the timing shown in FIG. 48 (n) or the timing shown in FIG. 48 (o). However, the timing shown in FIG.

  In the curtain effect described above, the pattern and color are not known, but it can be seen to which hold icon the hold change effect is performed. Further, when the curtain effect is executed, the hold change effect may be easily performed or may be necessarily performed as compared with the case where the curtain effect is not executed.

  FIG. 48 (p ′) is a diagram showing an example different from FIG. 48 (p). In FIG. 41 (p ′), the upper edge portion CHu of the curtain display CH is displayed in a lattice pattern. The upper edge part CHu of the curtain display CH may be displayed in a pattern form representing the magnitude (reliability) of the possibility that the icon form has changed. That is, there is a high possibility that the icon mode changes in the order of dot pattern, diagonal line pattern, rhombus pattern, lattice pattern, vertical line pattern, horizontal line pattern. It may be changed. The mode of the upper edge portion CHu may continue to be displayed in the same mode from the time of appearance shown in FIG. Alternatively, the mode of the upper edge portion CHu is a default dot pattern mode when FIG. 48 (a) appears, and the mode may change at the timing of FIG. 48 (n). That is, the aspect of the upper edge portion CHu may also change to an aspect that represents the possibility that the aspect of the icon has changed at a timing when the aspect of the first hold icon f1 may have changed. In this case, the character NJ may not take a successful pose, or the icon form may not change even if the successful pose is taken. In addition, there may be a case where the aspect of the upper edge portion CHu changes at the timing immediately before the icon becomes visible as shown in FIG. Moreover, the aspect of upper edge part CHu may be displayed with the aspect of the pattern of the icon to change. That is, the display itself of the upper edge CHu may correspond to the change mode candidate display. Also in this case, the mode of the upper edge CHu may continue to be displayed in the same mode from the appearance shown in FIG. 48A, or the mode of the first hold icon f1 changes with the character NJ taking a successful pose. The mode may change at the timing shown in FIG. 48 (n), or the mode may change at the timing immediately before the icon becomes visible as shown in FIG. 48 (q). The mode of the upper edge portion CHu shown in FIGS. 48A to 48Q is a hatched pattern mode, and the mode of the first hold icon f1 that has begun to be seen from FIG. 48R is also a hatched pattern mode. is there. Further, since the mode of the upper edge portion CHu shown in FIG. 48 (p ′) is a grid pattern mode, the mode of the first reserved icon f1 that starts to appear thereafter is also a grid pattern mode.

  FIG. 49 is a diagram illustrating another example in which the curtain effect and the hold change first effect are combined.

  49A to 49E shown at the left end of FIG. 49 is an example in which a portion overlapping with the curtain portion CHc is displayed as a silhouette in the chunklet display CR. The notice that at least a part (or all) of the channel display CR may be displayed in silhouette in this way may indicate that the roulette effect may be started (the channel display CR may be opened). It corresponds to. However, the roulette effect is not necessarily started just because the silhouette is displayed, and it may not be started, or the roulette effect is always started when the silhouette is displayed. May be. FIG. 49 (a) is a continuation from FIG. 48 (c), and in FIG. 49 (b), the curtain display CH has risen to a height exceeding the chunk through display CR, and the closed through display CR is shown. A part of (frame part CRf) is overlapped with the curtain part CHc, and a part thereof is displayed in silhouette. In this example, as shown in FIG. 49 (b), the curtain display CH is further raised, and the upper edge portion CHu has reached a position where the lower end of the decorative display variation display is hidden.

  In FIG. 49 (c), the closed channel display CR starts to vibrate, and the roulette effect is started. In FIG. 49 (d), the upper and lower frame portions CRf begin to open and the display space CRs begins to appear, but the portion overlapping the curtain portion CHc is a silhouette display, and the displayed content is unknown. In FIG. 49 (d), only the question mark at the right end is visible. In FIG. 49 (e), the channel display CR is fully opened, and the upper frame portion CRf is displayed at a position beyond the upper edge CHu of the curtain display CH. Here again, the portion still overlapped with the curtain part CHc is a silhouette display, and only the question mark at the right end is visible. Thereafter, similarly to FIG. 37 (s), the variable display is started in the display space CRs. Eventually, as in FIG. 37 (t), the change display in the channel display CR is finished, and the character display such as the pre-reading notice is displayed in the display space CRs. The removed part cannot be seen by the silhouette display. Thereafter, as in FIG. 37 (v), the chunklet display CR returns to the closed state.

  The example of FIGS. 49 (1) to (5) is an example in which the success history display of the pending change effect is displayed. FIG. 49 (1) is a continuation from FIG. 48 (j). In FIG. 49 (1), a silhouette display of the effect image mf is displayed at the position where the first hold icon f1 has been displayed. In FIG. (2), the silhouette-displayed effect image mfs is slightly smaller. In the following FIG. 49 (3), the silhouette-displayed effect image mfs is not visible, and instead, the silhouette-displayed first hold icon f1s is displayed. In FIG. 49 (3), as shown in FIG. 37 (m), the effect image mf is smaller than the first hold icon f1. In FIG. 49 (4), no change is seen in the silhouette-displayed first held icon f1s, but the character NJ shown in FIG. 49 (4) takes a successful pose when it succeeds in changing the icon display mode. It is also possible to confirm that the hold change effect has been successfully displayed by displaying on the character NJ in this successful pose. Next, in FIG. 49 (5), a success history display SRH indicating that the hold change effect is successful is displayed on the curtain display CH. This success history display SRH is a display in which the characters “success” are displayed on a plain background, and is not directly above the first held icon f1s that is a silhouette display whose form should have changed, but a silhouette display. The change icon e1s displayed and the first hold icon f1s displayed in silhouette are displayed directly above.

  49A to 49H are examples in which the hold change effect is performed once more while the success history display SRH of the hold change effect is displayed. FIG. 49 (A) is a continuation from the state after the ninja character NJ displayed in FIG. 49 (5) disappears. In FIG. 49 (A), the success history display SRH is displayed on the curtain display CH. Is displayed.

  In FIG. 49 (B), the ninja character NJ for the reserved change first effect reappears on the stage SG of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and in the following FIG. 49 (C), the ninja character NJ Has decided the pose, and the speech balloon “Ikuzo” is displayed. Thereafter, although not shown in the figure, as in FIGS. 48 (g) to 48 (j), the ninja character NJ throws a shuriken and hits the first holding icon f1s in the silhouette display. In D), a silhouette display of the effect image mf is displayed at the position where the first hold icon f1s has been displayed so far, and in FIG. 49E, the silhouette-displayed effect image mfs is slightly smaller. In FIG. 49F, the silhouette-displayed effect image mfs is not visible, and instead, the silhouette-displayed first hold icon f1s is displayed. In FIG. 49 (F), as shown in FIG. 37 (m), the effect image mf is smaller than the first hold icon f1. In FIG. 49 (G), no change is seen in the silhouette-displayed first hold icon f1s, but the character NJ shown in FIG. 49 (G) takes a successful pose when the icon display mode is successfully changed. It is confirmed that the hold change effect has succeeded again. Next, in FIG. 49 (H), another success history display SRH is displayed on the success history display SRH displayed so far, and two success history displays SRH are displayed in total. That is, the number of success history displays SRH corresponding to the number of successes of the hold change effect is displayed.

  In addition, the display number of the success history display SRH may be displayed in a plurality by the success of one hold change effect. In this case, the display number of the success history display SRH represents the expected degree of jackpot of the aspect in which the icon changes. For example, when a default dot pattern icon (here, the first hold icon f1) is targeted, if one success history display SRH is displayed, the change in one step is performed once and the icon is a diagonal pattern. If two success history displays SRH are displayed, the change in one step is performed twice or the change for two steps is performed once and the icon is changed into a rhombus pattern. If three success history displays SRH are displayed, the change in one step is performed three times or the change for three steps is performed once and the icon is changed to a lattice pattern. If four success history displays SRH are displayed, the change in one step is performed four times or the change for four steps is performed once and the icon is changed to a vertical line pattern. If 5 SRHs are displayed, there will be one level change. Once done by icon is either out content changes once performed is changed to an aspect of the horizontal line pattern.

  FIG. 49 (H-1) is a diagram illustrating another example in which the success history display SRH is displayed. In this example, the success history display SRH is displayed immediately above the corresponding icon. That is, two success history displays SRH indicating that the mode change of the variation icon e1 is successful are displayed immediately above the variation icon e1, and the success history indicating that the mode change of the first hold icon f1 is successful. One display SRH is displayed immediately above the first hold icon f1. All of the success history displays SRH have the same display mode, and are displayed with the characters “success” displayed on a plain background.

  FIG. 49 (H-2) is a diagram illustrating another example in which the success history display SRH is displayed. In this example, one success history display SRH4 indicating that the mode change of the variation icon e1 is successful is displayed immediately above the variation icon e1, indicating that the mode change of the first hold icon f1 is successful. One success history display SRH2 is displayed immediately above the first hold icon f1. The success history display SRH4 indicating that the mode change of the variation icon e1 is successful is a display in which the letters “success” are displayed on the background of the lattice pattern, and the variation icon e1 has the same lattice pattern as the background pattern. It may be a fixed display indicating that it is changing. Alternatively, it may be a confirmation display indicating that the aspect has been changed to four or more levels. For example, when the change icon e1 before the change is a default dot pattern icon, it may be a definite display indicating that it has changed to a vertical line pattern or a horizontal line pattern. When the icon e1 is an icon with a diagonal line pattern, a confirmation display indicating that the icon e1 is changed to a horizontal line pattern may be used. In addition, the success history display SRH2 indicating that the mode change of the first hold icon f1 is successful is a display in which the characters “success” are displayed on the background of the diagonal line pattern, and the first hold icon f1 has a background pattern. It may be a fixed display indicating that the pattern changes to the same diagonal pattern. Alternatively, it may be a definite display indicating that the state has changed to two or more levels. For example, when the first hold icon f1 before the change is a default dot pattern icon, it may be a definite display indicating that it has changed to a mode higher than the rhombus pattern. When the hold icon f1 is an icon with a diagonal line pattern, it may be a fixed display indicating that the state is changed to a lattice pattern or more.

  FIG. 50 is a diagram illustrating an example of a combination of a curtain effect and a hold change effect.

  FIGS. 50A to 50E are examples in which the appearance animation of the target icon TI described with reference to FIG. 42 is performed during execution of the curtain effect. FIG. 50 (a) is a continuation from FIG. 48 (c), and in FIG. 50 (a), the curtain display CH rises to a height that exceeds the Chan throughlet display CR. In this example, the portion overlapped with the curtain portion CHc in the channel display CR is not displayed as a silhouette and is not visible. In FIG. 50B, the appearance animation of the target icon TI is started, and a part of the target icon TI starts to be seen at the upper center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In this appearance animation, the target icon TI gradually descends. In FIG. 50C, the target icon TI is very close to the curtain display CH. In FIG. 50D, the target icon TI is displayed across the curtain display CH, and the lower end portion of the target icon TI is overlapped with the curtain portion CHc to display a silhouette, while the upper end portion of the target icon TI is displayed. Is displayed normally. The intermediate portion of the target icon TI is overlapped with the upper edge portion CHu of the curtain display CH and cannot be seen. In FIG. 50 (e), the target icon TIs also displayed in silhouette is attached to the first hold icon f1s displayed in silhouette. In the silhouette display, when other icons such as target icons TIs are attached and the shape changes, or the shape of the icon itself is deformed, it can be determined from the outline, but the pattern, color, characters and symbols Etc. (for example, roulette display mode) change, it is impossible to judge.

  FIGS. 50 (1) to (5) are examples in which the countdown icon described with reference to FIG. 46 is displayed during execution of the curtain effect. FIG. 50 (1) is a continuation from FIG. 48 (c), and in FIG. 50 (1), the curtain display CH rises to a height that exceeds the Chan throughlet display CR. In FIG. 50 (2), there is a single winning at the first special figure start opening 230, and the increase animation of the hold icon in the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f is not performed. The speaker 120 outputs a hold increase sound for the second hold icon f2, and the second hold icon f2s displayed in silhouette is displayed. The hold increase sound here may be a dedicated hold increase sound that is output only when the countdown icon is displayed due to the hold increase. In the second hold icon f2s displayed in silhouette, the pattern, color, characters, symbols, and the like are unknown, but a dedicated hold increase sound is not output from the speaker 120, or the hold icon increase animation is not performed. Therefore, it can be inferred that the countdown icon is displayed due to the increase in the hold. Actually, here, the second hold icon f2 is displayed as a countdown icon, but since the number indicating the countdown is not visible at all, the countdown display is omitted. A person who can guess that the countdown icon has been displayed can wait for when the second hold icon f2 changes, which may improve the fun of the game. Eventually, at the timing when the number of the countdown icon that is the second hold icon f2 becomes “0”, as shown in FIG. 50 (4), the silhouette of the effect image mf at the position where the second hold icon f2s was displayed. In the subsequent FIG. 50 (5), the silhouette-displayed effect image mfs is slightly smaller.

  FIG. 50A to FIG. 50H are examples in which decoration display is performed across the decorative display in which the curtain effect continues. FIG. 50 (A) is a continuation from FIG. 48 (c), and in FIG. 50 (A), the curtain display CH has risen to a height that exceeds the Chan throughlet display CR. Thereafter, as long as the silhouette display is seen through the curtain part CHc, the on-hold change effect is not started and is omitted. However, the first stop (temporary stop) is performed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then the right symbol display area 208c. The second stop (temporary stop) is performed, and as shown in FIG. 50 (B), the last remaining middle symbol display area 208b is also temporarily stopped, and the combination of “decoration 7-decoration 1-decoration 1” Fluctuates (temporary display). In FIG. 50C, the combination of “decoration 7-decoration 1-decoration 1” is stopped and displayed, and the confirmation display is started. In FIG. 50 (D), the decorative symbol is confirmed and displayed, and the animation for erasing the variation icon e1s is started while the silhouette is displayed. On the stage in the variation icon display area e shown in FIG. 50 (D), the silhouette is displayed. The display variation icon e1s is considerably small. In FIG. 50E, the animation for erasing the variation icon e1s, which is a silhouette display, is completed, and nothing is displayed on the stage in the variation icon display area e. Absent.

  Subsequently, the symbol variation display of the special symbol 1 is started, and in FIG. 50 (F), the decorative symbol variation display is performed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Further, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variation display of the fifth symbol is performed, and the fourth symbol lamp i1 of the special symbol 1 is lit in white. Further, the number indicating the reserved number of the special figure 1 displayed on the upper part of the third decorative symbol display device 208N has decreased from “1” to “0”. However, one hold icon is displayed in the silhouette display, and nothing is displayed on the stage in the variable icon display area e. The curtain effect is still continued, and is executed across the continuous display of decorative symbols. Subsequently, the movement animation of the hold icon is started, but the illustration is omitted here. In FIG. 50G, the hold animation of the hold icon is completed, and no hold icon is displayed. A silhouette display variation icon e1s is also displayed on the silhouette display stage in the display area e. Further, the curtain display CH starts to descend, and the curtain display CH descends to the upper end of the base icon UIb. However, at this stage, the mode of the fluctuation icon e1 cannot be confirmed yet. In FIG. 50 (H), the curtain display CH has been lowered to a position where the entire variation icon e1 can be seen, and the aspect of the variation icon e1 has changed from the default dot pattern aspect to the lattice pattern aspect. Can be confirmed. As described above, as long as the silhouette display is viewed over the curtain part CHc, the change change effect e1 is changed, although the on-hold change effect is not started. In this example, the curtain effect itself corresponds to the hold change effect. Note that, as described above, the change icon e1 can be considered as a kind of the hold icon, and hence the change icon e.g. When the hold change effect is performed by the curtain effect itself, any one or a plurality of hold change effects from the hold change first effect to the hold change sixth effect, or all the hold changes You may comprise so that it may change to the aspect with a high expectation degree of jackpot compared with an effect.

  FIG. 51 is a diagram showing another example of the curtain effect.

  51 (a) to 51 (b) are examples in which the curtain display CH rises to the vicinity of the upper end of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. FIG. 51 (a) is a continuation from FIG. 48 (d). In the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In FIG. 51 (a), the upper edge CHu of the curtain display CH rises to the vicinity of the upper end of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol The display area 208c is completely covered by the curtain part CHc. The decorative symbol variation display performed in each of the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c is a state in which no silhouette is displayed and nothing can be seen.

  After this, although not shown, the first symbol (temporary stop) is performed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then the second symbol (temporary stop) is performed in the right symbol display area 208c. Temporary stop is also performed in the display area 208b, and the combination of decorative symbols fluctuates (temporary display). In FIG. 51B, the combination of decorative symbols is stopped and displayed, and the final display of the combination of decorative symbols is started. When the combination of decorative symbols is stopped and displayed, combinations of decorative symbols that have not been seen until then are displayed on the curtain portion CHc. That is, instead of the silhouette display, the decorative symbols displayed on the back side of the curtain part CHc are preferentially displayed on the front side. In FIG. 51B, a combination of “decoration 7-decoration 1-decoration 1” is displayed on the curtain portion CHc. Therefore, the player can know whether it is a big hit or a loss by combining the decorative symbols. Note that the variation icon e1 and the hold icon f1 remain in silhouette display.

  51 (1) to (3) are examples in which curtain effects and meter effects described with reference to FIGS. 52 to 77 are combined. FIG. 51 (1) is a continuation from FIG. 48 (c), in which the curtain display CH is raised to the upper end of the base icon UIb, and the upper edge portion CHu of the curtain display CH is closed. A portion of the lower frame portion CRf of the CR overlaps from the front side. In FIG. 51 (1), a meter display appears at the upper left of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The meter display here has a white meter frame mf and is hereinafter referred to as a white meter display MW. In the following description, white is treated as a dot pattern, blue as a diagonal pattern, green as a diamond pattern, red as a grid pattern, gold as a vertical line pattern, and rainbow as a horizontal line pattern. The white meter display MW shown in FIG. 51 (1) is an increase type, and is provided with five scales, and is full at the sixth stage. The meter of the white meter display MW has risen up to two scales. The appearance timing of the meter display varies as will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 52 to 77. For example, in the variable display of the decorative symbol executed in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the decorative symbol is displayed at high speed. For example, when a change occurs or when a symbol change starts. In addition, the meter display may start in an empty state (the meter is 0), or the meter is stored halfway as in the white meter display MW shown in FIG. 51 (1). Display may be started in the state.

  The effect by the meter display here may be a kind of hold change effect in which the state of the hold icon or the change icon changes when the meter is full. The color (pattern) of the meter frame mf and the color (pattern) of the meter may indicate the ease of success in changing the mode of the held icon or the variable icon. That is, the mode changes easily in the order of white (dot pattern), blue (hatched pattern), green (diamond pattern), red (lattice pattern), gold (vertical line pattern), and iridescent (horizontal line pattern). If it is a color (horizontal line pattern), it may be successful if the meter is full. Alternatively, the color (pattern) of the meter frame mf or the color (pattern) of the meter may represent a color (pattern) in which the mode of the hold icon or the change icon changes. For example, when the meter frame mf or the meter is red (lattice pattern), the state of the hold icon or the change icon may change to red (lattice pattern) when the meter is full. Further, when the meter is full and the meter frame mf or the meter is white (dotted pattern), the status of the hold icon or the change icon is changed to a mode one level higher, and blue (hatched pattern) If it is green (diamond pattern), it will change to a three-level top, if it is red (lattice pattern), it will change to a four-level top, gold (vertical line) If it is a pattern), it may be changed to a mode of five steps, and if it is a rainbow color (horizontal line pattern), it may be changed to a mode of six steps.

  In FIG. 51 (2), the curtain display CH continues to rise, and in FIG. 51 (3), the upper edge CHu of the curtain display CH rises to the vicinity of the upper end of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. doing. The upper half of the white meter display MW is not visible because it is overlapped with the upper edge portion CHu, but the lower half of the white meter display MW is covered by the curtain portion CHc, and is displayed in a black pattern with a black pattern. It is displayed. That is, the meter frame mf, the portion filled with the meter, and the portion not filled with the meter are all displayed in a single black color without distinction. For this reason, the player cannot grasp how much the meter has accumulated. On the other hand, even in the same silhouette display, as shown in FIG. 51 (3 ′), it is possible to distinguish and display the portion buried with the meter and the portion not buried with the meter. The player can grasp how far the meter has accumulated. Although the scale is displayed up to the scale in the white meter display MWs displayed in silhouette shown in FIG. 51 (3 '), the scale may be hidden.

  51A to 51E are examples in which the curtain effect is executed by display on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. The curtain effect may be executed by display on the third decorative symbol display device 208N, or any two of the first decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N. It may be executed by display on the symbol display device, or may be executed by display on all three decorative symbol display devices.

  FIG. 51 (A) is a continuation from FIG. 38 (c), and a change candidate icon HKI having a hatched pattern is displayed on the treasure box TB. In FIG. 51 (B), the curtain effect is started, and the upper edge CHu of the curtain display CH appears at the lower end of the second decorative symbol display device 208M. The upper edge portion CHu is displayed in a hatched pattern so as to overlap the character display of “castle town” representing the castle town mode from the front side.

  In FIG. 51C, the curtain display CH is rising, the character display of “Castle Town” is overlapped with the curtain part CHc, and a black pattern with no pattern is displayed, making it impossible to read the characters.

  In FIG. 51 (D), the curtain display CH has risen until it exceeds the treasure box TB, the entire treasure box TB is overlapped with the curtain portion CHc, and the entire treasure box TB is displayed as a black silhouette with no pattern.

  In FIG. 51 (E), the upper edge portion CHu of the curtain display CH rises to the upper end of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the change candidate icon HKI displayed on the treasure chest TB is displayed on the curtain portion CHc. Overlapping and even the change candidate icon HKI is displayed in a solid black silhouette. For this reason, it is impossible to confirm the mode of the change candidate icon HKI. In the state where the change candidate icon HKI is displayed in silhouette, it may be configured to change to a mode in which the degree of expectation of jackpot is higher than in the state where no silhouette is displayed, and before the curtain effect is started. The change candidate icon HKI displayed in a diagonal pattern may change to a rhombus pattern or more after the curtain effect, or it must change to a rhombus pattern or more. May be. On the other hand, the change display of the fifth symbol displayed on the upper end of the second decorative symbol display device 208M is displayed on the upper edge CHu. That is, instead of the silhouette display, the fifth symbol that is displayed in a variable manner that is displayed just behind the upper edge CHu is preferentially displayed on the front side.

  The display start timing of the curtain display CH may be before the treasure chest TB is displayed. In this case, the aspect such as the pattern and color of the treasure chest TB cannot be grasped from the beginning. Further, the display start timing of the curtain display CH may be after the treasure chest TB is displayed and before the change candidate icon HKI appears in the treasure chest TB. In this case, the change candidate is displayed. The aspect such as the pattern and color of the icon HKI cannot be grasped from the beginning.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 37 to 51 described above, the example of the shuriken and the arrow coming off is not shown. There are times when it gets stuck. Moreover, even if it hits, the aspect of an icon may not change. Alternatively, even if the watcher character BC appears to have an icon, the mode of the icon may not change, or even if the roulette icon changes to a mode in which characters representing a pattern are stopped, The roulette icon mode may not change. On the other hand, when a shuriken or arrow hits, the mode of the icon may be changed, or when the Bancho character BC appears to have an icon, or the roulette icon represents a pattern. Even when the character is changed to the stopped display mode, the icon mode may be changed.

  As mentioned above, although it was an example about a pachinko machine (bullet ball game machine) so far, the game stand of the present invention is not limited to this, for example, an enclosed pachinko machine shown in FIG. Or a slot machine shown in FIG.

In the above explanation,
“Display means [e.g., all of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, or any one of these three decorative symbol display devices 208L-N. One or two],
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of hold icons [for example, a first hold icon f1 to a fourth hold icon f4]
It is configured to notify the number of holds by the number of hold icons displayed
The hold icon has a plurality of modes [for example, a default dot pattern (blinking white), a diagonal line pattern (blue color) of the prefetching notice mode, a rhombus pattern (green) of the prefetching notice mode, and a grid pattern (red) of the prefetching notice mode , Vertical line pattern (gold color) of prefetch notice mode, horizontal line pattern (rainbow color) of prefetch notice mode]
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of effects,
One effect of the plurality of effects is a first effect [for example, any one of the hold change first effect to the hold change sixth effect]
One effect of the plurality of effects is a second effect [e.g., an effect different from the first effect among the hold change first effect to the hold change sixth effect]
The first effect is an effect that may change the mode of the hold icon,
The second effect is an effect that may change the mode of the hold icon,
Either one of the first effect and the second effect is an effect that may be displayed during the display of the other effect [for example, in FIGS. 38 and 39] During the display of the hold change second effect in which the treasure box TB and the change candidate icon HKI are displayed, the display of the hold change first effect in which the ninja character NJ is displayed is started. While the hold change third effect is displayed, the display of the hold change first effect where the ninja character NJ is displayed is started, or the Yoshimune character YM shown in FIGS. 43 and 44 is displayed. While the hold change fifth effect is being displayed, the hold change first effect in which the ninja character NJ is displayed is displayed, or during the display of the hold change fourth effect in which the roulette icon is displayed as shown in FIG. Ninja's The hold change first effect in which the character NM is displayed is displayed while the hold change first effect in which the character NJ is displayed is displayed or the hold change fourth effect in which the roulette icon is displayed as shown in FIG. An effect is started to be displayed, or a hold change first effect in which a ninja character NJ is displayed is displayed during display of a hold change sixth effect in which a countdown icon is displayed as shown in FIG. 47],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  Here, the second effect may be an effect that may be displayed during the display of the first effect, and the first effect may be during the display of the second effect. An effect that may be displayed may be used.

  In addition, the first effect may be an effect that may be performed when the mode of the hold icon is changed, or may be an effect that always changes the mode of the hold icon. In addition, the second effect may be an effect that may be performed when the mode of the hold icon is changed, or may be an effect that always changes the mode of the hold icon.

  The first effect may be an effect that always changes the mode of the hold icon, or may be an effect that does not change the mode of the hold icon. The second effect may be an effect that always changes the mode of the hold icon, or may be an effect that does not change the mode of the hold icon. Furthermore, any one of the first effect and the second effect may be an effect that always starts to be displayed while the other effect is being displayed, or when the display is not started. There may be a production.

Also,
When the first effect and the second effect are effects for the same hold icon [for example, the example shown on the right side of FIG. 38, the example shown on the right side of FIG. 40, or the example shown on the right side of FIG. 44, the example shown on the right side of FIG. 45, the example shown on the left side of FIG. 46, and the example shown on the left side of FIG.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, one icon of the plurality of hold icons may be a first hold icon, the first effect may be an effect on the first hold icon, and the second effect may be provided. May be directed to the first hold icon.

  The first effect and the second effect may always be effects for the same hold icon, or may be effects for different hold icons.

Also,
“The first effect is an effect in which a change notice display may be displayed.
The change notice display is a display [for example, a change target candidate display or a change form candidate display] for making a notice about a change in the state of the hold icon.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“One of the plurality of holding icons is a first holding icon [for example, the second holding icon f2 in the example shown on the right side of FIG. 45],
The first effect [for example, the hold change fourth effect] may be an effect for the first hold icon,
The second effect [for example, hold change first effect] may be an effect for the first hold icon,
One aspect of the plurality of aspects is a first aspect [e.g., an aspect in which a roulette icon is variably displayed]
The hold icon displayed in the first mode is an icon for notifying that the mode of the hold icon changes,
As the change notice display, there are cases in which the first hold icon is displayed in the first mode [for example, FIG. 45 (a) to FIG. 45 (e)].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Note that, as the change notice display, the first hold icon may be always displayed in the first mode, or the first hold icon may not be displayed in the first mode. .

Also,
“The second effect is configured to be displayed on the first hold icon displayed in the first mode.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the mode of the first hold icon [for example, the second hold icon f2 in the example shown on the right side of FIG. 45] displayed in the first mode changes as predicted by the first mode. [For example, the mode of the second hold icon f2 has changed as an object to be changed although the mode of change is unknown], then the mode of the first hold icon is changed to the second effect [eg, change of hold It may be configured such that there is a case of changing again according to the first effect [for example, changing to a vertical stripe pattern].

  The second effect may be configured to always start to be displayed for the first hold icon displayed in the first mode, or the second effect may be displayed. It may be configured not to be performed.

Also,
`` Change target candidate display may be displayed as the change notice display,
The change target candidate display is a display that suggests which hold icon is a hold icon whose form may change [for example, a shuriken thrown by a ninja character NJ and hits the icon, overlapping the icon Change candidate icon HKI, target icon TI attached to icon, arrow icon YI, hold icon for roulette icon, hold icon for countdown icon]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
"The display means is a means capable of displaying a variation display of decorative symbols,
The change target candidate display is a display that may be displayed across a plurality of continuous decorative symbol variation displays [for example, FIG. 41 (b) to FIG. 41 (h), FIG. 42 (6). )-(2), FIG.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  It should be noted that the change target candidate display may be a display that is always displayed across a plurality of continuous decorative symbol variation displays, or a plurality of consecutive decorative symbol variation displays. Display may not be displayed.

Also,
“While the change target candidate display is being displayed, the second effect [for example, the hold change first effect in which the ninja character NJ is displayed] for the hold icon suggested in the change target candidate display is started. In the case [for example, FIG. 43 (2) to FIG. 6 (6)],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  In addition, during the display of the change target candidate display, the second effect for the hold icon suggested in the change target candidate display may be surely started. You may be comprised so that this 2nd production with respect to the hold icon suggested may not be started.

Also,
`` Change mode candidate display may be displayed as the change notice display,
The change mode candidate display is a display that suggests which mode of the hold icon that may change [for example, the change candidate icon HKI, "lattice" shown in FIG. 41 (i) It is a roulette icon in a state where characters are stopped and displayed]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
”It is configured so that the big hit symbol is finally displayed more easily when the display of the one effect is started during the display of the other effect than when only the one effect is displayed. ,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, if it describes collectively once again, as a combination of a 1st effect and a 2nd effect, a hold change 1st effect and a hold change 2nd effect, a hold change 1st effect and a hold change 3rd effect, a hold change 1st One production and the fourth change of the hold change, the first change of the hold change and the fifth change of the hold change, the first change of the hold change and the sixth change of the hold change, the second change of the hold change and the third change of the hold change, the second change of the hold change And hold change fourth effect, hold change second effect and hold change fifth effect, hold change second effect and hold change sixth effect, hold change third effect and hold change fourth effect, hold change third effect and hold Change 5th effect, Hold change 3rd effect and Hold change 6th effect, Hold change 4th effect and Hold change 5th effect, Hold change 4th effect and Hold change 6th effect, Hold change 5th effect and Hold change 1st There are six productions. And, in any combination of these combinations, when one of the effects starts to be displayed while the other effect is displayed, the jackpot symbol is finally determined and displayed more easily. May be. In other words, when two types of effects are combined (when they are overlapped), it is easier to hit a big hit than when they are not combined (when they are not overlapped).

Also,
“The one effect [for example, the first change change effect in which the ninja character NJ in FIGS. 43 and 44 is displayed, and the fifth change effect in the change effect in which the character YM of Yoshimune in FIG. 46 is displayed] Production [For example, the change change fifth effect in which the character YM of Yoshimune in FIGS. 43 and 44 is displayed, the change change fourth effect in which the roulette icon in FIG. 45 is displayed, and the change in hold in which the roulette icon in FIG. 46 is displayed. Although the display starts after the display of the “fourth effect”, the display may end before the other effect [for example, FIG. 43 (7) and FIG. 44 (7 ), FIG. 45 (i), FIG. 46 (10)],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  The one effect may be an effect in which the display always ends before the other effect although the display is started later than the display of the other effect. It may be an effect that the display may not end before the effect.

Also,
“Even if the appearance of the hold icon does not change due to the one effect started during the display of the other effect, the one effect is not started during the display of the other effect. The case where the display of the one effect is started while the display of the other effect is displayed is configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally easily displayed and displayed,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  In addition, in any example of the combination of the first effect and the second effect described above, the mode of the hold icon did not change due to one effect that was started during the display of the other effect. Even when the one effect is not displayed during the display of the other effect, the last effect is displayed when the one effect is displayed while the other effect is displayed. In other words, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be easily displayed. In other words, when two types of effects are combined (overlapping), even if the status of the hold icon does not change, it is a big hit than when it is not combined (when it does not overlap) Cheap.

Also,
“The one effect [for example, the hold where the ninja character NJ in FIG. 39 is displayed] is started while the other effect [for example, the hold change second effect in which the treasure box TB in FIG. 39 is displayed] is displayed. Depending on the first change effect, the mode of the hold icon [for example, the first hold icon f1] may change to the third mode (for example, a rhombus pattern),
When the display of the other effect is not started during the display of the other effect, the mode of the hold icon may change to the second mode [for example, the mode of the rhombus pattern] due to the other effect. ,
The third aspect is an aspect with higher expectation of jackpot than the second aspect.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
[The other effect [for example, the hold change second effect in which the treasure box TB in FIG. 39 is displayed, the hold change fourth effect in which the roulette icon in FIG. 45 is displayed, and the hold change in which the roulette icon in FIG. 46 is displayed. One of the effects started during the display of [four effects] [for example, a change change first effect in which the ninja character NJ in FIG. 39 is displayed, and a change change first in which the ninja character NJ in FIG. 45 is displayed. 46. Even if the mode of the hold icon does not change, the other effect that changes the mode of the hold icon may change due to the effect, the fifth change display of the Yoshimune character YM in FIG. [For example, FIG. 39 (h), FIG. 45 (h), FIG. 46 (10)],
The other effect is an effect that makes it easier to change the mode of the hold icon to a mode with a high expectation of jackpot after the change than before the change.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
In the above description,
“Display means [e.g., all of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, or any one of these three decorative symbol display devices 208L-N. One or two],
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of hold icons [for example, a first hold icon f1 to a fourth hold icon f4]
It is configured to notify the number of holds by the number of hold icons displayed,
The hold icon has a plurality of modes [for example, a default dot pattern (blinking white), a diagonal line pattern (blue color) of the prefetching notice mode, a rhombus pattern (green) of the prefetching notice mode, and a grid pattern (red) of the prefetching notice mode. , Vertical line pattern (gold color) of prefetch notice mode, horizontal line pattern (rainbow color) of prefetch notice mode]
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of effects,
One effect of the plurality of effects is a first effect [for example, any one of the hold change first effect to the hold change sixth effect]
One effect of the plurality of effects is a second effect [e.g., an effect different from the first effect among the hold change first effect to the hold change sixth effect]
The first effect is an effect that may change the mode of the hold icon,
The second effect is an effect that may change the mode of the hold icon,
Any one of the first effect and the second effect is an effect that may be displayed during the display of the other effect [for example, in FIGS. 38 and 39] During the display of the hold change second effect in which the treasure box TB and the change candidate icon HKI are displayed, the display of the hold change first effect in which the ninja character NJ is displayed is started, or the roulette icon shown in FIG. 45 is displayed. While the displayed hold change fourth effect is displayed, the display of the hold change first effect in which the ninja character NJ is displayed or the roulette icon shown in FIG. 46 is displayed. In the middle, the fifth change on hold change in which Yoshimune's character YM is displayed starts.]
The other effect [for example, the hold change second effect in which the treasure box TB in FIG. 39 is displayed, the hold change fourth effect in which the roulette icon in FIG. 45 is displayed, and the hold change fourth in which the roulette icon in FIG. 46 is displayed. One of the effects started during the display of [effect] [for example, the hold change first effect in which the ninja character NJ in FIG. 39 is displayed, and the hold change first effect in which the ninja character NJ in FIG. 45 is displayed. 46, the other change that changes the mode of the hold icon may change even if the mode of the hold icon does not change [for example, the fifth change display of the Yoshimune character YM displayed in FIG. 46] 39 (h), 45 (h), 46 (9)],
The other effect is an effect that makes it easier to change the mode of the hold icon to a mode with a high expectation of jackpot after the change than before the change.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.
Also,
“The one effect is an effect using a character [for example, Ninja character NJ or Yoshimune character YM]
The one effect is an effect that starts when the character starts to be displayed [for example, FIG. 38 (1), FIG. 39 (a), FIG. 45 (b), FIG. 46 (4)].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
Also,
“The one effect is an effect using a character [for example, Ninja character NJ or Yoshimune character YM]
The one effect is an effect that starts when the character starts moving [for example, FIG. 38 (3), FIG. 39 (c), FIG. 45 (c), FIG. 46 (5)].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
Also,
The one effect is an effect that ends when the display of the character ends [for example, FIG. 37 (p), FIG. 45 (i), FIG. 46 (10)].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
Also,
“The one effect is displayed as a first effect image [for example, the effect image mf shown in FIG. 38 (7), the effect image mh shown in FIG. 39 (f), the effect image mf shown in FIG. 45 (f)]. Is the production
The one effect is an effect that starts when the first effect image starts to be displayed [for example, FIG. 38 (7), FIG. 39 (f), FIG. 45 (f)]
The one effect is an effect that ends when display of the first effect image ends [eg, FIG. 38 (9), FIG. 39 (h), FIG. 45 (h)].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
Also,
“The other effect is an effect in which an icon [for example, an icon of a treasure chest TB, a roulette icon] is displayed,
The other effect is an effect that starts when the icon starts displaying [for example, FIG. 38 (1), FIG. 38 (b), FIG. 45 (a), FIG. 45 (4)].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
Also,
“The other effect is an effect that ends when the icon display ends [eg, FIG. 37 (o)].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
Also,
“The other effect is the second effect image [for example, the effect image mf shown in FIG. 38 (5), the effect image mf shown in FIG. 39 (i), the effect image mf shown in FIG. 45 (j), FIG. The effect image mf] shown in (11) is displayed.
The other effect is the end of display of the second effect image [for example, between FIG. 38 (6) and FIG. 7 (7), FIG. 39 (k), FIG. 45 (l), FIG. 46 (13)]. ] To end the production,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 52 to 105, a ball game machine (including a sealed type) such as a pachinko machine 100 to which the present invention can be applied will be described in detail. Note that the enclosed type here means an enclosed type gaming machine or the like that circulates and uses game balls enclosed in the gaming machine. The reference numerals shown in FIGS. 52 to 105 are used only in the description using FIGS. 52 to 105 in principle, and even when the overlapping reference numerals are shown in other drawings, FIGS. In the description using, the codes shown in FIGS. 52 to 105 are given priority. On the other hand, as the technical idea, the technical idea shown in FIGS. 52 to 105 can be applied to the technical idea shown in FIGS. 1 to 51, and vice versa. It is also possible to apply the technical idea shown in FIG. 52 to the technical idea shown in FIGS. At that time, components having the same reference numerals may be handled as the same constituent elements and may be replaced.

<Overall configuration>
First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the figure is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side).

  As an external structure, the pachinko machine 100 includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a door 108 with a ball storage tray, a launching device 110, and a game board 200 (see FIG. 54). . The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation location (island facilities or the like) provided in a gaming machine installation sales shop. The main body 104 is referred to as an inner frame, and is a member that is provided inside the outer frame 102 and serves as a longitudinal rectangular gaming machine base body that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112. The main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space inside. In addition, when the main body 104 is opened, an inner frame opening sensor (not shown) that detects the opening of the main body 104 is provided.

  The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104 on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 so as to be openable and closable with a lock function, and is configured in a frame shape so that the inner side of the front frame door 106 can be opened and closed. Is a door member having an opening. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin at the opening, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. Note that the frame lamp 122 is an example of a light emitting means, and in this specification, a lamp whose light source is an LED is also referred to as a lamp, and a lamp that emits light such as a fluorescent lamp or a cold cathode tube is referred to as a lamp. And emits light corresponds to an example of light emitting means.

  A game area 124 (see FIG. 54) is defined by the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200. Further, when the front frame door 106 is opened, a door open sensor 609 (see FIG. 55) for detecting the opening of the front frame door 106 is provided.

  The front frame door 106 is provided with a transmission unit 190. The transmission unit 190 includes a transmission unit 191 that is different from the transparent plate member 118, and the transmission unit 191 is rotatable in the front-rear direction around a drive shaft (not shown) provided in the lower part. The transmission unit 190 includes a light emitting diode (LED). The transmission part 191 of the transmission part unit 190 shown in FIG. 52 is in the initial position. The transmission unit 191 functions as an operation unit (button) and corresponds to an example of a movable unit.

  The door 108 with a ball storage tray is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to have a lock function and be openable and closable. The ball storage tray-equipped door 108 is capable of storing a plurality of game balls (hereinafter simply referred to as “balls”), and an upper plate 126 provided with a passage for guiding the game balls to the launching device 110. A lower plate 128 that stores game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, a ball removal button 130 that discharges the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by the player's operation, A ball discharge lever 132 that discharges game balls stored in the lower plate 128 to a game ball collection container (common name, dollar box) by operation, and a game ball guided to the launching device 110 by operation of the player A ball launching handle 134 for launching into the game area 124 of 200, a chance button 136 for changing the effect mode of various effect devices 206 (see FIG. 54) by the player's operation, and a chance button 136 It provided an opportunity button lamp 138 to light. The chance button 136 is an effect button and corresponds to an example of an operation unit. The chance button 136 is also an example of a movable means, and the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 52 is in the initial position. As will be described in detail later, the chance button 136 can execute an advance / retreat operation. In addition, a lower pan full sensor (not shown) that detects that the lower pan 128 is full is provided.

  In addition, an operation key unit 181 is provided on the right side of the chance button 136. The operation key unit 181 includes a cross key 181a, an OK button 181b, and a cancel button 181c. A panel display unit 183 is also provided at the upper right of the operation key unit 181.

The launching device 110 is attached to the lower side of the main body 104, and a launching rod (not shown) that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching ball that hits the game ball at the tip of the launching rod (not shown). And a launcher. The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104.

  53 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 52 viewed from the back side. The upper part of the back surface of the pachinko machine 100 has an opening that opens upward, a ball tank 150 for temporarily storing game balls, and a lower part of the ball tank 150 that is positioned below the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 is provided for guiding a ball passing through the formed communication hole and dropping to the dispensing device 152 located on the right side of the back surface.

  The payout device 152 is formed of a cylindrical member, and includes a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown) inside. The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor. The sprocket that temporarily passes through the tank rail 154 and flows down into the payout device 152 is temporarily retained, and the payout motor is driven to rotate by a predetermined angle. Thus, the temporarily accumulated game balls are sent one by one downward to the payout device 152.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket. When the game ball is passing, either a high signal or a low signal is passed. Either the high signal or the low signal is output to the dispensing control unit 600. Note that the game ball that has passed through the payout sensor passes through the discharge port 152a and reaches the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100, and the pachinko machine 100 is configured to play games. The ball is paid out to the person.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, a main board case 158 that houses the main board 156 that constitutes the main control section 300 that performs control processing for the entire game, and control related to effects based on the processing information generated by the main control section 300 The first sub-board case 162 that houses the first sub-board 160 that constitutes the first sub-control unit 400 that performs processing, and the second sub-board that performs control processing related to effects based on the processing information generated by the first sub-control unit 400. An error release switch that constitutes a second sub-board case 166 that houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the control unit 500, a payout control unit 600 that performs control processing related to the payout of game balls, and that releases an error by the operation of a game clerk Discharge board case 172 storing the payout board 170 having 168, launch base constituting the launch control unit 630 that performs control processing relating to the launch of the game ball A launch board case 176 that houses 174, a power control unit 660 that supplies power to various electrical gaming machines, and a power switch 178 that turns the power on and off by the operation of a game store clerk and an RWM clear that is operated by turning on the power A power board case 184 that houses a power board 182 that includes an RWM clear switch 180 that outputs a signal to the main controller 300, and a CR interface 186 that transmits and receives signals between the payout controller 600 and the card unit are provided. ing.

  FIG. 54 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front.

  A game board 200 shown in FIG. 54 is a so-called right-handed machine game board. In the game board 200, an outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are provided, and a game area 124 in which a game ball can roll is defined. In a generally known right-handed game board, by changing the strength of launching a game ball by a player's operation, a general-purpose starting port 228 and a second special-purpose starting port 232, which will be described later, 1 special drawing start port 230. Specifically, the game ball that rolls in the first area (the left side in the game area) provided with the first special figure starting port 230 is disposed on the game area 124 by arranging the game nail 238 and the like. A game ball that rolls in the second area (the right side in the game area) where the second special figure start port 232 is provided is configured such that it is difficult or impossible to enter the special view start port 232. 1 It is difficult or impossible to enter the special drawing starting port 230. The present invention is not limited to the pachinko machine 100 provided with a right-handed game board, and can be applied to a wide range of pachinko machines equipped with a general game board.

  An effect device 206 is disposed in the approximate center of the game area 124. In the effect device 206, three decorative symbol display devices are arranged side by side. That is, the first decorative symbol display device 208L disposed at the center of the three decorative symbol display devices, the second decorative symbol display device 208M disposed on the left side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the first decoration. The display is performed by the third decorative symbol display device 208N arranged on the right side of the symbol display device 208L. The first decorative symbol display device 208L may be referred to as a main display device, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be referred to as sub-display devices. The length in the width direction of 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is shorter than the half of the length of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the height is also short. However, the display screens of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N need only be smaller than the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the length and height in the width direction are shown in FIG. It is not limited to the embodiment. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M shown in FIG. 54 has its right end side portion overlapped with the front side of the left end side portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the third decorative symbol display device shown in FIG. The left end portion of 208N overlaps the front side of the right end portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The position of the second decorative symbol display device 208M shown in FIG. 54 may be the initial position of the second decorative symbol display device 208M. The position of the third decorative symbol display 208N shown in FIG. 54 may be the initial position of the third decorative symbol display device 208N. However, the initial position of the second decorative symbol display device 208M does not partially overlap with the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and is a position deviated from the first decorative symbol display device 208L (first decorative symbol display device 208L). It may be a position separated from the left side toward the left). Also, the initial position of the third decorative symbol display device 208M does not overlap with the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and is a position away from the first decorative symbol display device 208L (on the right side from the first decorative symbol display device 208L). It may be a position distant from each other. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are configured to be slidable in the direction of contacting and separating from each other along the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N can rotate integrally along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L when they are closest to each other. It is configured to be able to. The names of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are not necessarily displayed in a variable manner for each display device. However, it is added here just in case that the interpretation of the display device is not narrowed. Further, a combination of these decorative symbol display devices (first decorative symbol display device 208L, second decorative symbol display device 208M, and third decorative symbol display device 208N) is used as an effect display means, and the effect display means is a decoration symbol. It is also possible to display various fluctuations or to display a plurality of types of effects. Furthermore, there is no limitation on the number of decorative symbol display devices, and the decorative symbol display device may be a pachinko machine having only one, or may be a pachinko machine having only two. It may be a pachinko machine provided with two or more. Further, the positional relationship between the plurality of decorative symbol display devices is not limited to the positional relationship shown in FIG.

  In addition, a transparent light guide plate is arranged on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the player can visually recognize the display state of the first decorative symbol display device 208L through the light guide plate. . The light guide plate has a predetermined lens cut in the transmission region. A light emitter such as an LED is provided at an appropriate position near the side edge of the light guide plate, and light from the light emitter is reflected forward by the lens cut portion, so that the transmission region emits light in a predetermined pattern. It is configured so that it can appear to be. For example, a lens cut having a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image is applied to the light guide plate. Note that the light guide plate is configured such that the thickness of the portion of the region where light is refracted toward the player side is thinner than the thickness of light irradiation. Therefore, the display states of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be easily visible. Further, the light guide plate may be movable. Further, the light guide plate may be provided on the near side of at least one of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

  Below the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208M, a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a normal symbol hold lamp 216, and a first special symbol. A holding lamp 218, a second special symbol holding lamp 220, and a high-probability medium lamp 222 are provided. Hereinafter, the normal symbol may be referred to as “general symbol” and the special symbol may be referred to as “special symbol”. The effect device 206 will be described later.

  The three decorative symbol display devices 208 </ b> L to 208 </ b> M are display devices for performing various displays used for decorative symbols and effects, and here are configured by liquid crystal display devices (Liquid Crystal Display). The display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L can be divided into four display areas: a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, and an effect display area 208d. The area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c display different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect. Further, the positions and sizes of the display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, and 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In addition, although the liquid crystal display device is employ | adopted as the 1st decoration symbol display apparatus 208L, even if it is not a liquid crystal display device, it should just be comprised so that a various effect and various game information can be displayed, for example, a dot matrix Other display devices including a display device, a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

  The general map display device 210 is a display device for displaying a general map, and here, it is constituted by a 7-segment LED. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying a special figure, and here are configured by 7-segment LEDs. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are symbol display means. The decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is a symbol that represents the symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device 212 or the second special symbol display device 214 in an enhanced form. The first decorative symbol display device 208L is also a kind of symbol display means.

  The general figure hold lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of general figure variable games (details will be described later) that are on hold. Here, the general figure variable game is held to a predetermined number (for example, two). Is possible. The first special figure holding lamp 218 and the second special figure holding lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of special figure variable games (details will be described later) that are being held. Here, a predetermined number of special figure variable games are displayed. It is possible to hold up to (for example, four). The high-probability medium lamp 222 is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur or a high probability state, and the gaming state is changed from a low probability state in which a big hit is unlikely to occur. Turns on when switching to the probability state, and turns off when switching from the high probability state to the low probability state.

  In addition, there are predetermined ball entrances, for example, a general prize opening 226, a general start port 228, a first special view start port 230, a second special view start port 232, around the effect device 206. A central variable winning opening 234 and a right variable winning opening 235 are provided.

  A plurality of general winning ports 226 are arranged on the game board 200, and when a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning port 226 (when winning the general winning port 226). Then, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The player can freely take out the balls discharged to the upper plate 126. With these configurations, the player can pay out the winning balls to the player based on winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. In the following, a ball paid out to a player as a consideration for winning a prize may be referred to as a “prize ball”, and a ball lent out to a player may be referred to as a “lending ball”, and the “principal ball” and “lending ball” are collectively referred to as “ Sometimes called a “ball (game ball)”.

  The normal start port 228 is configured by a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed through a predetermined area of the game area 124. One is arranged. For this reason, the game start ball 228 is expected to enter a game ball by hitting it to the right. Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the usual starting port 228 is not discharged to the amusement island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that a ball has passed through the general map starting port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts a general map variable game by the general map display device 210.

  Only one first special figure starting port 230 is arranged at the center of the game board 200. The first special figure starting port 230 is a first starting region where the size of the entrance through which the game ball enters does not change. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the first special figure starting port 230, the payout device 152 shown in FIG. At the same time, the special figure changing game by the first special figure display device 212 is started. The ball that has entered the first special figure starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. The first special figure starting port 230 is one of the starting regions, and corresponds to an example of a fixed starting region in which the size of the first special diagram starting port 230 does not change.

  Only one second special figure start port 232 is disposed below the general view start port 228. That is, the second special figure starting port 232 is provided on the right side of the game board 200, and entering the ball is expected by hitting to the right. In the vicinity of the second special figure starting port 232, a pair of blade members 2321 that can be opened and closed by a solenoid are provided. A combination of the pair of blade members 2321 and the second special figure starting port 232 is provided. It corresponds to a variable starting means and is generally called an electric tulip (electric chew). The pair of blade members 2321 are members that change the difficulty level of winning a prize to the second special figure starting port 232. That is, when the pair of blade members 2321 is closed, it is impossible to enter the second special figure starting port 232, and the mode in which the pair of blade members 2321 is closed is an open / close mode in which winning is difficult. On the other hand, when the universal figure change game is won and the universal figure display device 210 stops and displays the symbol, the pair of blade members 2321 are opened and closed at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times, and the second special figure starting port 232 is opened. The ball can be entered (easy winning state), and the open state in which the pair of blade members 2321 are open is an easy winning state. In other words, the second special figure starting port 232 has either a small size (corresponding to the first size) or a large size (corresponding to the second size) of the entrance (game ball entrance). A variable starting area in which the ease of entering a game ball, which changes from one size to the other, is equivalent to an example of a second starting area. The size of the large size is larger than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230. In the state where the pair of blade members 2321 are opened, out of the game balls that have entered the game area 124, the second special feature that is the variable start area is more than the game ball that has entered the first special figure start opening 230 that is the fixed start area. There are more game balls entering the starting port 232 in the figure. On the other hand, the size of the small size is smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230 or smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special diagram starting port 230. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special figure starting port 232, the payout device 152 is driven and a predetermined number (for example, four) of balls is discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball that has entered the second special figure starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  The pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 52 is provided with two variable winning holes. A central variable winning opening 234 (corresponding to the first variable winning opening) provided in the center of the game board 200 is disposed below the first special figure starting opening 230. Further, a right variable winning opening 235 (corresponding to a second variable winning opening) provided on the right side of the game board 200 is disposed below the second special figure starting opening 232, and can be entered by hitting right. There is expected. Each of the variable winning openings 234 and 235 includes a winning opening and door members 2341 and 2351 that can open and close the winning opening by a solenoid. The winning opening may be referred to as a big winning opening, and the variable winning openings 234 and 235 may be referred to as attackers. The central variable winning opening 234 is kept closed until the big hit game is started when the big hit is made in the non-electric support state, and when the big hit game is started, the state is changed between the open state and the closed state. repeat. The right variable winning opening 235 is kept closed until the big hit game when the big hit is made in the electric support state, and when the big hit game is started, the state is changed between the open state and the closed state. repeat. In other words, each of the variable winning openings 234 and 235 has a predetermined first opening / closing state (here, the closed state) and a second opening / closing state (here, the opening / closing state) where the winning of the game ball is easier than the first opening / closing state. Is a variable winning means that can change the open / closed state from one to the other, and when the special figure change game is won in the non-electric support state and the first special figure display device 212 stops and displays the jackpot symbol The door member 2341 of the central variable prize opening 234 opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. On the other hand, when the special figure variation game is won in the electric support state and the second special figure display device 214 stops and displays the big hit symbol, the door member 2351 of the right variable prize winning opening 235 is set at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. Open and close with. In any of the variable winning openings 234, 235, the closed state does not necessarily need to be completely closed, and may be in a state where it is impossible or difficult to enter a game ball even if it is slightly opened. . When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the central variable winning port 234 or the right variable winning port 235, the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls is used as a winning ball. It discharges to 126. It should be noted that both the ball that has entered the central variable winning opening 234 and the ball that has entered the right variable winning opening 235 are guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  According to the arrangement of the general figure starting port 228, the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232, the central variable winning port 234, and the right variable winning port 235 described above, Strike is an advantage for the player, and in the non-electric support state, a left strike is an advantage for the player.

  Further, a plurality of disc-shaped hitting direction changing members 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails 238 are arranged in the vicinity of these winning openings and start openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, An out port 240 is provided for guiding a ball that has not won a prize or starting port to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging it to the game island side.

  This pachinko machine 100 supplies the ball stored in the upper plate 126 by the player to the launch position of the launch rail, drives the launch motor with strength according to the operation amount of the player's operation handle, and launches 146 Further, the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are passed by the launcher 148 and driven into the game area 124. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the advancing direction by the hitting direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and the winning hole (general winning hole 226, central variable winning hole 234, right variable The winning opening 235) or the starting opening (the first special figure starting opening 230, the second special drawing starting opening 232), or without winning any of the winning opening or starting opening, or the ordinary drawing starting opening 228 Just passing through will reach the outlet 240.

<Directing device 206>
Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. On the front side of the effect device 206, a warp device 242 and a stage 244 are arranged in an area where the game ball can roll. In addition, the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N described above are disposed on the back side of the effect device 206. That is, in the effect device 206, the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N are located behind the warp device 242 and the stage 244.

  The warp device 242 discharges the game balls that have entered the warp inlet 242a provided at the upper left of the effect device 206 to the stage 244 below the front surface of the effect device 206 from the warp outlet 242b.

  The stage 244 can roll a ball discharged from the warp outlet 242b, a ball carried on by a nail of the game board 200, or the like, and the passed ball is a first special figure starting port 230 at the center of the stage 244. A special route 244a is provided to facilitate entry into the golf course.

  In a state where the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are fully opened (fully open state), the player can visually recognize part or all of the display on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N can be stopped at arbitrary positions, for example, which decorative symbol is the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It is possible to shield only a part of the decorative design to the extent that the player can identify the game. In addition, when the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are completely closed (fully closed state), the decorative symbols displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Shield everything. Therefore, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, which are the effect display means, are both the shielding means and the effect moving means of the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

  In addition, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an Yatsushiro character 224Fa and a general character 224Fb, which are one of the effect movable bodies, are arranged, and each moves in the vertical direction according to the effect contents. It is configured to be able to. In addition, the Yatsushiro character 224Fa and the shogun character 224Fb each have a built-in light emitting means such as a full color LED, and can emit light in various light emission modes according to the contents of the production.

  Note that the above-described chance button 136 capable of executing the advancing / retreating operation and the transmitting portion 191 that can be rotated in the front-rear direction are also a kind of effect moving means.

  In addition, here, a family crest member 224E (see FIG. 65 and the like) (not shown) is prepared as the effect moving means. The family crest member 224E is disposed at an initial position below the first decorative symbol display device 208L. When the operation starts, the family crest member 224E rises from the initial position to the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and overlaps the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L from the front side (player side). In the state in which the family crest character 224E is in the initial position, it is more difficult for the player to visually recognize than the state in which it overlaps the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L from the front side. Further, the family crest member 224E includes a light emitting means such as a full color LED, and can emit light in various light emission modes depending on the contents of the production.

<Control unit>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. This figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

  The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 can be roughly classified into a main control unit 300 that controls the central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. A first sub-control unit 400 that controls the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on a command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and a command transmitted by the main control unit 300 The payout control unit 600 that mainly controls the game ball payout, the launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of the game ball, and the power supply control unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100 are configured. Yes.

  Here, the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400, and the second sub-control unit 500 are made of different circuit boards, but these three control units (300, 400, 500) are common. The first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 may be composed of a common circuit board different from the circuit board of the main control unit 300. There may be. Therefore, the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the second sub control unit 500 are each controlled by control means (for example, main control means (300), first sub control means (400), second sub control means (500). )), Or a combination of these three control units (300, 400, 500) can be considered as control means, or the main control part 300 can be regarded as the first control means. A combination of the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 may be regarded as a second control unit.

<Main control unit>
First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, and temporary data. RAM 308 for storing data, I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, counter timer 312 for measuring time and frequency, and WDT 314 for monitoring abnormalities in program processing are mounted. . Note that another storage device may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock.

  The basic circuit 302 includes a random value generation circuit 318 for deriving a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 every time a clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received (this circuit includes two random value generation circuits). And a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor that detects a game ball passing through each start port, a winning port, a variable winning port, a door opening of a front frame door opening sensor, an inner frame opening sensor, etc. A sensor circuit 322 for receiving signals output from various sensors 320 including a sensor and a full plate sensor, and outputting a comparison result with an amplification result and a reference voltage to the random value generation circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302; A drive circuit 324 for performing display control of a symbol display device such as the first special symbol display device 212 or the second special symbol display device 214, and a predetermined symbol display device such as the universal symbol display device 21. Drive circuit 326 for performing display control and various status display units 328 (for example, general map hold lamp 216, first special figure hold lamp 218, second special figure hold lamp 220, high accuracy medium lamp 222, etc.) A drive circuit 330 for performing display control, a predetermined movable member, for example, a blade member 2321 of the second special figure starting port 232, a door member 2341 of the central variable winning port 234, a door member 2351 of the right variable winning port 235, and the like. A drive circuit 334 for controlling various solenoids 332 that are opened and closed is connected.

  The random value generation circuit 318 generates a random value used in the basic circuit 302. Random number generation in the random value generation circuit 318 can be broadly divided into two types of methods: counter mode and random number mode. In the counter mode, a numerical value that is counted up (down) at a predetermined time interval is acquired, and the numerical value is derived as a random number. There are two more methods in the random number mode. The first method in the random number mode performs an operation using a predetermined function (for example, a modulus function) using a seed of random numbers, and derives the operation result as a random number. In the second method, a numerical value is read from a random number table in which numerical values in the range of 0 to 65535 are randomly arranged, and the read numerical value is derived as a random number.

  The random value generation circuit 318 acquires an irregular value using white noise superimposed on a signal input from the various sensors 320 to the sensor circuit 322. The random value generation circuit 318 uses the acquired value as an initial value of a counter that counts up (down) in the counter mode, uses it as a seed of random numbers, or determines a read start position of the random number table. .

  When the ball detection sensor 320 detects that a ball has won the first special figure starting port 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the ball has been detected to the random value generation circuit 318. The random value generation circuit 318 that has received this signal latches the value at that timing of the random value generation circuit corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230, and the latched value is incorporated in the random value generation circuit 318. It is stored in a random value storage register corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230. Similarly, when the random value generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that a ball has won the second special figure starting port 232, the timing of the random value generation circuit corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232 is also the same. Is latched, and the latched value is stored in a random value storage register corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232 incorporated in the random value generation circuit 318.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 is connected to an information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via this information output circuit 336. The game information (for example, game state) of the machine 100 is output.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power source control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 338 is a voltage value of the power source. Is less than a predetermined value (for example, 9v), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has decreased is output to the basic circuit 302.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When the activation signal is input, game control is started (main control unit main processing described later is started).

  The main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. With this configuration, the first control unit 300 Communication with the sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is enabled. The main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 transmit / receive a communication confirmation command when the power is turned on, the main control unit 300 always transmits the number of payouts, and the payout control unit 600 transmits error information. Both can communicate bidirectionally. On the other hand, the information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 is configured to transmit a signal such as a command to the first sub control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 is configured not to transmit a signal such as a command to the main control unit 300.

<Sub control unit>
Next, the first sub control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 mainly based on commands transmitted from the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404 and A RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, the number of times, and the like are mounted. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock, and controls programs and data for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 400, various effect data, etc. Is connected to the ROM 406.

  The basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and amplifier), a drive circuit 420 for controlling various lamps 418 (for example, the chance button lamp 138), and a second decorative design. A drive circuit 432 for controlling the drive of the display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a position detection sensor 430 for detecting the current positions of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and , A detection unit 710 for detecting that the chance button 136 is pressed, and a detection signal from the operation key unit sensor 425 for detecting the operation of the position detection sensor 430, the detection unit 710 of the chance button 136, and the operation key unit 181. From the CPU 404 and the sensor circuit 428 that outputs the A VDP 434 (video display) that reads out image data and the like stored in the ROM 406 based on the signal, generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 436, and displays the image on each of the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N.・ Processor) is connected.

  Next, the second sub control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer for measuring time and frequency 512 is installed. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock, and controls a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, and an image display A ROM 506 storing data and the like is provided.

  The basic circuit 502 includes various movable means (chance button 136 capable of performing advancing and retreating operations, a transparent portion 191 that can be rotated in the front-rear direction, an eight-story role 224Fa, a general role 224Fb, and a family crest role 224E). Based on a drive circuit 516 for performing drive control, various movable means sensors 424 for detecting the current positions of various movable means 136, 191, 224Fa, 224Fb, and 224E, and detection signals from the various movable means sensors 424. A sensor circuit 518 that outputs to the circuit 502 is connected. Further, the basic circuit 502 includes a game board lamp drive circuit 530 for controlling the game board lamp 532, a game table frame lamp drive circuit 540 for controlling the game table frame lamp 542, and A serial communication control circuit 520 that performs lighting control by serial communication between the game board lamp drive circuit 530 and the game stand frame lamp drive circuit 540 is connected.

  In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 52, the first sub control unit 400 performs image display control of each of the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N, and the second sub control unit 500 performs various movable units 136, 191, 224Fa, 224Fb, and 224E are controlled, the second sub-control unit 500 performs image display control of each of the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N, and the first sub-control unit 400 performs various movable units 136, 191, 224 Fa, 224 Fb, 224 E may be controlled, or any one of the sub-control units may perform both controls.

  Although not shown in FIG. 55, the first sub control unit 400 or the second sub control unit 500 also performs display control of the panel display unit 183 shown in FIG.

<Discharge control unit, launch control unit, power supply control unit>
Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  The payout control unit 600 controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 mainly based on a command signal or the like transmitted from the main control unit 300, and a prize ball or a rental ball based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604 It is detected whether or not the payout has been completed, and communication with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 is performed via the interface unit 606.

  Further, a detection signal of the door opening sensor 609 is input to the dispensing control unit 600, and a door opening command is transmitted from the dispensing control unit 600 to the main control unit 300. Also, when there is a payout error, an error command is transmitted from the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300.

  As for the door opening command, the detection signal of the door opening sensor 609 may be directly input to the main control unit 300 without using the dispensing control unit 600, or the dispensing control unit 600 is used as a relay base. Then, a door opening command may be transmitted from the door opening sensor 609 to the main control unit 300.

  The launch control unit 630 outputs a control signal output from the payout control unit 600 to permit or stop the launch, or a launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134 to operate the ball launch handle 134 by the player. Control of the launch motor 632 that drives the launcher 146 and launcher 148, and control of the ball feeder 634 that supplies the launcher 110 with a ball from the upper plate 126 based on a control signal that indicates the launch intensity according to the amount. I do.

  The power control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into a DC voltage, converts it to a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400, the payout device 152, etc. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 supplies a power storage circuit (for example, a power supply circuit) for supplying power to a predetermined part (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the external power supply is cut off. , Capacitor). Here, a predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the payout control unit 600 and the first sub control unit 400, and from the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300, the second sub control unit 500, and the launch control unit 630. Although the predetermined voltage is supplied, the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit and each device through another power supply path. For example, the main control unit 300 may be directly supplied with a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660. The second sub control unit 500 may be configured to supply a voltage after a predetermined voltage is supplied to the payout control unit 600, the main control unit 300, and the first sub control unit 400. The second sub control unit 500 may be supplied with a predetermined voltage from the first sub control unit 400. The firing control unit 630 may be directly supplied with a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660. The payout control unit 600 may be supplied with a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 via other control units (such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400) and each device. The first sub-control unit 400 may be supplied with a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 via other control units (main control unit 300, payout control unit 600, etc.) and devices. The payout control unit 600, the main control unit 300, and the first sub control unit 400 may be supplied with a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 almost simultaneously. The payout control unit 600 may be supplied with the predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 earlier than both of the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 or at least one of them. The main control unit 300 may be configured to supply the predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 earlier than at least one of the payout control unit 600 and the first sub control unit 400. The first sub control unit 400 may be supplied with the predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 earlier than at least one of the payout control unit 600 and the main control unit 300.

  The second sub control unit 500 may be supplied with a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 almost simultaneously with the payout control unit 600, the main control unit 300, and the first sub control unit 400. The second sub control unit 500 is configured so that the predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 earlier than all of the payout control unit 600, the main control unit 300, and the first sub control unit 400, or one or more control units. May be. The second sub control unit 500 may be directly supplied with a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660.

  In an island facility provided in a game machine installation store, a 100V AC power supply is stepped down to a voltage of 24V, and a 24V AC current is supplied to the pachinko machine 100. The 24V AC current is converted into a 12V DC voltage by the power supply control unit 660 of the main control unit 300. Although not shown in FIG. 55, the main control unit 300 is also provided with a voltage conversion circuit, and the 12V DC current is further stepped down to a predetermined voltage (here, 5V) by the voltage conversion circuit, and the predetermined voltage (5V ) Is supplied to the CPU 304 provided in the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300. Further, the direct current converted to a voltage of 12 V by the power supply control unit 660 is also supplied to the voltage monitoring circuit 338 and the start signal output circuit 340 of the main control unit 300. When the voltage value of the 12V supply current drops below a predetermined value (9V in this example), the voltage monitoring circuit 338 outputs a low voltage signal to the I / O port 310 of the basic circuit 302. Therefore, the voltage monitoring circuit 338 monitors the voltage value of the power line connecting the power control unit 660 and the voltage monitoring circuit 338 and through which a DC current of 12 V flows. This power line is an example of a predetermined power line. It corresponds to. Note that a low voltage signal may be directly input to the CPU 304. The power management unit 660 also outputs the input 24V AC current as it is, or converts it into a 36V DC current and outputs it. Furthermore, the current of the operating voltage (here, 5V) may be supplied to the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 via a circuit different from the voltage conversion circuit.

  The activation signal output circuit 340 outputs an activation signal when the voltage value of the direct current supplied from the power supply control unit 660 by turning on the power reaches a voltage value at which the CPU 304 can operate. Further, when the WDT 314 times out, a reset signal is output from the WDT 314 to the CPU 304. When the WDT 3141 times out, there is a case where the CPU 304 cannot perform the originally designed operation due to a runaway state due to a program mistake or a voltage drop caused by a lightning strike or an illegal act. In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 52, a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in the WDT 3141 as an initial value. The activation signal from the activation signal output circuit 340 and the reset signal from the WDT 3141 are input to the CPU 304 through a common signal line, but may be input through dedicated lines. The activation signal output from the activation signal output circuit 340 and the reset signal output from the WDT 314 described here correspond to an example of a predetermined activation signal.

  In the case of a momentary power loss when the power supply is cut off and immediately restored, that is, when the power supply switch 178 is automatically restored without being turned on, a stop voltage signal is output and the WDT 3141 times out, and the main control unit 300 performs reset processing. Is executed. In this reset process, it is first determined whether or not the reset operation to be executed is a system reset operation. There are two reset operations executed by the basic circuit 302: a system reset operation and a user reset operation. Here, when the system reset operation is executed, the values of the core of the CPU 304 and the built-in register are initialized. Subsequently, a security check process is executed. In the security check process, recalculation is performed to determine whether the authentication code calculated based on the user program is correct. If the authentication code is correct, the extension process is executed. The extension time in the extension process may be a fixed time, or may be a time obtained by adding a randomly selected random time to the fixed time. When the extension process ends, a main process of the main control unit 300 described later is executed, and game control is started. On the other hand, when executing the user reset operation, the values of the core of the CPU 304 and the built-in register are initialized. However, the value of the register that controls the random number generation circuit 318 is maintained in the state before the reset. Thereafter, main processing of the main control unit 300 described later is executed, and game control is started.

<Type of design>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 56A to 56C, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the normal symbol display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are provided. The types of special maps and general maps to be stopped will be described. Fig.56 (a) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of a special figure.

  The special figure 1 variable game is started on the condition that the first start port sensor detects that the ball has entered the first special figure start port 230, and the ball has entered the second special figure start port 232 The special figure 2 variable game is started on the condition that the second start port sensor has detected. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the first special symbol display device 212 performs “variable display of special figure 1” by repeating all lighting of seven segments and lighting of one central segment. In addition, when the special figure 2 variable game is started, the second special symbol display device 214 displays “fluctuation display of special figure 2” which repeats lighting of all seven segments and lighting of one central segment. Do. These “variation display of special figure 1” and “variation display of special figure 2” correspond to an example of the symbol fluctuation display. Then, when the variation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 elapses, the first special symbol display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special figure 1, and the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 2 When elapses, the second special symbol display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special symbol 2. Further, after that, a fixed display for maintaining the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec) is performed.

  Therefore, from the start of “figure display of special figure 1” until the stop display of special figure 1 is stopped and finalized display is completed, or after “fluctuation display of special figure 2” is started. The process up to the stop display of 2 stop symbol forms and the end of the final display corresponds to an example of the symbol variation display. As will be described later, the symbol variation display may be continuously performed a plurality of times. FIG. 56 (a) shows ten types of special drawings from “special drawing A” to “special drawing J” as stop symbol forms in the symbol variation display. In FIG. 56 (a), the white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments that are turned on.

  “Special Figure A” is a 15 round (15R) special jackpot symbol, and “Special Figure B” is a 15R jackpot symbol. In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 52, as will be described later, whether or not a big hit in the special figure variable game is determined by lottery of hardware random numbers, and whether or not it is a special big hit is determined by lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the jackpot and the special jackpot is the difference in whether the probability of winning the jackpot is high (special jackpot) or low (jackpot) in the next special figure variation game. Hereinafter, a state having a high probability of winning the jackpot is referred to as a special figure high probability state, and a state having a low probability is referred to as a special figure low probability state. Moreover, after the 15R special jackpot game ends and after the 15R jackpot game ends, both shift to the time-saving state. Although the time reduction will be described in detail later, the state that shifts to the time reduction state is referred to as a normal high probability state, and the state that does not shift to the time reduction state is referred to as a normal low probability state. “Special figure A”, which is a 15R special jackpot symbol, is a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state, and “Special figure B”, which is a 15R jackpot symbol, is a special figure low probability ordinary figure high probability state. These “special chart A” and “special chart B” are symbols that give a relatively large profit amount to the player.

  “Special figure C” is a 2R jackpot symbol called sudden probability change, and is a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state. That is, “Special Figure C” is 2R compared to “Special Figure A” which is 15R. "Special figure D" is a 2R jackpot symbol called sudden time reduction, and is a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state. That is, “Special Figure D” is 2R compared to “Special Figure B” which is 15R.

  “Special figure E” is a 2R jackpot symbol called hidden probability change, and is a special figure high probability normal figure low probability state. "Special figure F" is a 2R jackpot symbol suddenly called normal, and is a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. These “special drawing E” and “special drawing F” are both 2R and are in a state in which they do not shift to the time-saving state.

  "Special figure G" is a first small hit symbol, and "Special figure H" is a second small hit symbol, both of which are in a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. The small hit here is equivalent to the same short hit big hit with 2R. That is, the “special drawing G” and “special drawing H” are in the same state as the “special drawing F”, but the effects displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L are different from each other. The special interest G, “special H” and “special F” are provided to enhance the interest of the game.

  In addition, “Special Figure I” is a first off symbol, and “Special Figure J” is a second off symbol, and the profit amount given to the player is a relatively small profit amount.

  In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 52, symbols other than “Special Figure A” are prepared as 15R special jackpot symbols, and the same applies to other symbols such as 15R jackpot symbols.

  FIG. 56B shows an example of a decorative design. There are ten types of decoration designs, “Decoration 1” to “Decoration 10”. The first start port sensor detects that a ball has won the first special figure start port 230 or the second special view start port 232, that is, the ball has entered the first special view start port 230; or On the condition that the second start port sensor detects that a ball has entered the second special symbol start port 232, the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the right In each symbol display area of the symbol display area 208c, “decoration 1” → “decoration 2” → “decoration 3” →... “Decoration 9” → “decoration 10” → “decoration 1” →. Switch the display with to “decorative pattern change display”. At the beginning of the decorative symbol change display, the decorative symbol changes at a high speed (scrolled) for each symbol display area. When the 15R jackpot of “Special Figure B” is notified, a symbol combination (for example, “decoration 1—decoration 1—decoration”) corresponding to the 15R jackpot corresponding to the 15R jackpot is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. 1 ”or“ decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2 ”). When the 15R special jackpot of “special drawing A” is notified, a combination of three symbols of the same odd number of decorative symbols (for example, “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 3” or “decoration 7—decoration 7—decoration 7”). Etc.) is stopped and displayed.

  In addition, the 2R jackpot called “hidden probability change” of “Special Figure E”, the 2R jackpot called “Special Figure F” suddenly, or the first small hit of “Special Figure G”, “Special Figure H” When notifying the second small hit, “decoration 1-decoration 2—decoration 3” is stopped and displayed. Furthermore, in order to notify the 2R jackpot called “sudden change” of “special drawing C” or the 2R jackpot called “sudden time reduction” of “special drawing D”, “decoration 1-decoration 3—decoration 5” is displayed. Stop display.

  On the other hand, when notifying the first deviation of “Special Figure I” and the second deviation of “Special Figure J”, the symbol combinations other than the symbol combinations shown in FIG. 54B are stopped in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. indicate.

  Further, the fifth symbol may be displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and / or the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The fifth symbol is a display of a decorative symbol smaller than the decorative symbol displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. For example, the decorative design shown in FIG. 56 (b) may be reduced, or may be a number having a display form different from the display form of the decorative design shown in FIG. 56 (b). Therefore, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and / or the third decorative symbol display device 208N is also a kind of symbol display means. Note that the fifth symbol may be displayed in a region outside the symbol display regions 208a to 208c even in the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

  Further, the fourth symbol may be displayed on the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208M. The 4th symbol is a display of a decorative symbol indicating that the symbol is changing or being stopped.

FIG. 56 (c) shows an example of a usual stop display symbol. There are two types of stop display modes for normal maps: “general map A”, which is a winning symbol, and “general symbol B”, which is a missed symbol. Based on the fact that the above-mentioned gate sensor has detected that a sphere has passed through the general-purpose start opening 228, the normal symbol display device 210 repeats all lighting of the seven segments and lighting of the central one segment. Perform a “normal change display”. Then, when notifying the winning of the common figure variable game, the “normal figure A” is stopped and displayed, and when notifying the usual figure variable game, the “normal figure B” is stopped and displayed. Also in FIG. 56C, the white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments that are turned on.
<Main control unit main processing>
Next, a main control unit main process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 55 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing of the main control unit.

  55. The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 55 includes, for each of FIG. 1 and FIG. 2, a counter for generating a big hit special figure determining random number counter initial value, a big hit special figure determining random number counter, and a small hitting time. Special figure determination random number counter initial value generation counter, small hit special figure determination counter, loss special figure determination random number counter initial value generation counter, loss special figure determination random number counter, and special figure timer Each counter of a random number counter for number determination is provided. In addition, the RAM 308 stores, for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, the number of holdings, the random number for determining the big hit, the random number for determining the special figure for the big hit, the random value for determining the special figure for the small hit, and the special figure for the lost time The random number value for use, the determination result of prior / impossible determination, the special determination result / pre-judgment result, the determination of correct / incorrect determination, the special figure determination result, and the special figure timer determination result are stored. Further, in RAM 308, special figure holding storage sections divided into the maximum number of areas (four in this example) that can hold the start of the determination (lottery) are separately provided for special figure 1 and special figure 2. It is prepared. The special storage unit shown in FIG. 1 includes special figure 1 big hit determination random value, big hit special figure 1 determination random value, small hit special figure 1 determination random value, and lost special figure 1 determination random value. The four random number values are stored as one set for each area in the winning order (holding order). In addition, the special storage unit for special figure 2 big hit determination random number, big hit special figure 2 determination random value, small hit special figure 2 determination random value, and lost special figure 2 determination The four random number values of the random number value are set as one set, and these four random number values are stored for each area one set at a time in winning order (holding order).

  As described above, the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 55 is provided with the start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which this activation signal has been input resets by a reset interrupt and executes the main process of the main control unit shown in FIG. 57A in accordance with a control program stored in the ROM 306 in advance.

  In step S101, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization process, first, as initial setting 1, setting of a stack initial value (temporary setting) to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, setting of an interrupt mask, initial setting of the I / O 310, various kinds of information stored in the RAM 308 Initial setting of variables, operation permission to WDT 314, initial value setting, and the like are performed. In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 52, a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in the WDT 314 as an initial value. Next, the value of the WDT 314 counter is cleared, and the time measurement by the WDT 314 is restarted (hereinafter, this process is referred to as a WDT process). Following the WDT process, in the initialization process of step S101, whether or not the low voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage monitoring circuit 338, the power management unit 660 via the second sub control unit 500, the main control unit When the voltage value of the power source supplied to 300 is less than a predetermined value (for example, 9 v), it is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has decreased is output. When the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects that the power supply is cut off), the process returns to the WDT processing. When the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect the power supply is cut off), Perform setting 2. Even when the predetermined value (9 V) is not yet reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value. In the initial setting 2, a process for setting a numerical value for determining a cycle for executing a main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, in the counter timer 312, a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, a second output port, etc.) 1) a process of outputting a clear signal from the output port 1), a setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like.

  Next, in step S103, after setting for interrupt prohibition, the basic random number initial value updating process is performed. In the basic random number initial value updating process, three initial values for generating initial values of the big hit special figure determining random number counter, the small hit special figure determining random number counter, and the lost special figure determining random number counter are generated. Update the value generation counter. After this basic random number initial value update process ends, the process proceeds to step S105.

  In step S105, effect random number update processing is performed. The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a random number counter for timer number determination for special drawing and for universal use, both of which determine a timer number that can take a value in the range of 0 to 99. Generate a random number value. In step S105, the value of this counter is updated. After this effect random number update process is completed, interrupt permission is set and the process returns to step S103.

  The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the processes of steps S103 and S105 except during a timer interrupt process that starts every predetermined period (for example, 4 ms).

<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 57B is a flowchart showing the flow of main control unit timer interrupt processing.

  The main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 55 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (for example, about once every 4 ms), and the main control unit timer is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. Interrupt processing is started at a predetermined cycle. At the start of the timer interrupt processing, the values of the registers of the CPU 304 are temporarily saved in the stack area, or the WDT 314 is periodically saved (for example, once every about 2 ms which is the main controller timer interrupt cycle). ) Restart.

  First, in step S201, input port state update processing is performed. In this input port state update process, the detection signals of various sensors 320 shown in FIG. 55 including various ball detection sensors are input via the input port of the I / O 310 to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signals, and various kinds of data are stored in the RAM 308. The data is stored in a signal state storage area provided for each sensor 320. If the detection signal of the sphere detection sensor is described as an example, information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in the timer interruption process (about 4 ms before) is stored in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area partitioned and stored in the RAM 308 in the previous detection signal storage area partitioned for each sphere detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before) ) Is read from the current detection signal storage area provided for each sphere detection sensor in the RAM 308, and this information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area described above. To remember. Further, the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-described current detection signal storage area.

  Further, in this step S201, the information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each sphere detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern information. This main control unit timer interrupt process that is repeatedly started at a very short interval of about 2 ms while one game ball passes one ball detection sensor is started several times. For this reason, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, in step S205 described above, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before, a previous detection signal, and a current detection signal. In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 52, in consideration of erroneous detection of the sphere detection sensor and noise, if the detection signal is stored twice consecutively after the absence of the detection signal, it is determined that there has been a prize. In the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 55, winning determination pattern information (for example, information indicating that there is no previous detection signal, previous detection signal, and current detection signal) is stored. In this step S205, the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (for example, no previous detection signal, previous detection signal, current detection signal). In the case of the general winning port 226, the central variable winning port 234, the right variable winning port 235, the first special figure starting port 230, and the second special figure starting port 232, It is determined that the starting port 228 has passed. In other words, it is determined that there has been a winning at these winning ports 226, 234, 235 and these starting ports 230, 232, 228. For example, when the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three matches with the above-described winning determination pattern information in the general winning opening sensor for detecting the winning at the general winning opening 226, there is a winning at the general winning opening 226. If the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winnings are performed. The process branches to the subsequent process without performing the process associated with winning the prize to the mouth 226. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (for example, information indicating that there is a detection signal before, no previous detection signal, and no current detection signal). After it is determined that there has been a single win, it is not determined that there has been a win until the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times matches the winning determination clear pattern information in each ball detection sensor, and the winning determination is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is next determined whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information.

  In the basic random number initial value update process (step S203), the value of the counter for generating various random number counter initial values is updated in the range of 0 to 99, and in the subsequent basic random number update process (step S205), the values of the various random number counters are updated. For example, every time the big hit special figure 1 determination random number counter makes one round, the value of the generation counter is set in the big hit special figure 1 determination random number counter. The same processing is performed for other random number counters.

  In step S207, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update processing, the normal symbol display symbol update timer for timing the time for the symbol to be changed / stopped on the normal symbol display device 210, and the time for the symbol to be changed / stopped to be displayed on the first special symbol display device 212 are timed. Special symbol 1 display symbol update timer for performing, special symbol 2 display symbol update timer for measuring the time for the symbol to be changed and stopped on the second special symbol display device 214, a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined opening time Various timers including a timer for measuring a predetermined closing time, a predetermined end effect period, and the like are updated.

  Subsequently, a winning determination process (step S209) is performed. In the winning determination process (step S209), first, in the case where the winning holes 226, 234, 235 and the starting holes 230, 232, 228 are won, a prize provided in the RAM 308 for each winning hole or for each starting hole. The value in the number-of-balls storage area is read out, and 1 is added to set the original number of prize balls as the storage area.

  Subsequently, in this winning determination process, the first special figure starting port 230 or the second special figure starting port 232 has won a prize, and the number of special figure variable games held is less than a predetermined number (for example, 4). If this is the case, the predetermined starting information is stored. That is, if the number of holdings is less than the predetermined number, the jackpot determination random number value and various special figure determination random number values are stored. The jackpot determination random value is a value obtained by processing the value acquired from the random value storage register of the random value generation circuit 318 shown in FIG. 55 (for example, the acquired value + the value of the R register + 1). On the other hand, the special figure determination random number value is a value obtained by processing a software random number derived from the special figure determination random number counter provided in the RAM 308 (software random number value + R register value + 1). A combination of the random value generation circuit 318 shown in FIG. 55, the special figure determination random number counter provided in the RAM 308, and the main control unit 300 that performs random number processing corresponds to an example of the starting information deriving means. Various random values (starting information) are stored as a set of starting information in a vacant area corresponding to a winning order (holding order) in a special-purpose holding storage unit provided in the RAM 308. This special figure storage unit stores a predetermined upper limit number (4 here) of start information derived based on the game ball entering the first special figure start port 230 or the second special figure start port 232. This corresponds to an example of starting information storage means that can store up to. At this time, various random values (starting information) may be temporarily stored in a temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the value stored in the temporary area may be stored in a special storage storage unit. In this case, the temporary area is started. Information storage means may be used, and the reserved storage section and temporary area of the special figure may be used as the start information storage means. In addition, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 adds 1 to the value of the number of reserved special figures stored in the RAM 308, and the number of special figure held increases by one. Therefore, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 corresponds to an example of a holding unit.

  In addition, when it is detected that a ball has passed through the general map start port 228 and the number of the general map variable games held is less than a predetermined number (for example, 2), the general map winning selection at that timing is performed. The value of the random number counter for numerical value generation is stored in a random number value storage area provided in the RAM 308 that is different from that for the special figure, as a normal winning random number value as start information.

  In this winning determination process, the predetermined special ball detection sensor is used to move to the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232, the ordinary drawing starting port 228, the central variable winning port 234, or the right variable winning port 235. The first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232, the universal figure starting port 228, the central variable are included in the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 when the winning (winning) is detected. The winning acceptance information indicating the presence / absence of winning (winning) in the winning opening 234 and the right variable winning opening 235 is set.

  Whether the start information of the special figure or the start information of the usual figure, if the number of holdings is equal to or more than the predetermined number, the start information is not stored and the process proceeds to step S211.

  When this winning determination process (step S209) ends, the prefetch process is called. In this prefetching process, first, it is determined whether or not the number of holds has increased from the prefetching process executed last time. That is, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 also stores the number of holds until now (the number of holds at the end of the previous timer interrupt process, which is referred to as the old number of holds). The pending number at the time of executing the current pre-reading process after the winning determination process (step S209) is compared with the old pending number, and it is determined whether or not the pending number is increasing. If the number of holds has not increased, the prefetching process is terminated without prefetching the starting information. On the other hand, if the number of reservations has increased, the increase in the random number for special figure 1 big hit determination in the special memory 1 in the special memory 1 provided in the RAM 308 is prefetched, or the special memory in the special memory in the special memory 2 in FIG. FIG. 2 Prefetch the increase in the random number for jackpot determination. In the prefetching here, only the increment is prefetched, but all may be prefetched. Note that the prefetching here means that the start information is read first before the success / failure determination (final lottery), but in the subsequent prefetching processing, the word “prefetching” is used as the result of the predecessor (prevention / correction (final lottery)). ) May be used to mean read.

  The pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 52 is in one of the control states of a special figure low probability state with a relatively low probability of winning a jackpot and a relatively high special figure high probability state. The special figure high probability state is called during probability fluctuation. A probability variation flag is prepared in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. When the probability fluctuation glag is set to ON, a special figure high probability state (during probability fluctuation) is set, and when the probability fluctuation glag is set to OFF, a special figure low probability state is set.

  The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores a pre-adjustment determination table used in the prefetching process. In this success / failure pre-determination table, a random number range is defined for a special figure high probability state and a special figure low probability state. When the pre-reading of the special figure 1 big hit determination random number value or the special figure 2 big hit determination random number value is finished, the pre-read special figure 1 big hit determination random number value or the special figure 2 big hit determination random value is determined in advance. The random number range in the table is determined. That is, referring to the probability variation flag prepared in the RAM 308, in the case of the special figure low probability state, the pre-read special figure 1 big hit determination random value or the special figure 2 big hit determination random value is within a predetermined numerical range. In some cases, the success / failure determination result is determined in advance as “big hit”, and in other cases, the determination result is determined as “losing”. In the special figure related process (step S213 shown in FIG. 57 (b)) described later, the success / failure determination of the special figure variable game is performed again by using the success / failure determination table having the same contents as the previous / failure determination table. The determination result here is only a result of prior determination.

  When the pre-judgment result is “big hit”, the random number value for determining the big hit special figure 1 in the reserved storage part of the special chart 1 provided in the RAM 308 is prefetched, or in the reserved memory part of the special figure 2 Prefetch random number for determining special figure 2 for big hits. When the result of the prior / no-go determination is “small hit”, the random number value for determining the special figure 1 at the time of small hits in the reserved storage unit of the special figure 1 provided in the RAM 308 is prefetched, or the reserved memory in the special figure 2 is stored. The random number for determining the special figure 2 for small hits in the department is prefetched. If the result of the preliminary determination is “losing”, the random number value for determining the special figure 1 at the time of losing in the special memory 1 of the special chart 1 provided in the RAM 308 is prefetched or the special memory in the special memory 2 of the special figure 2 is stored. The random number for determining the special figure 2 at the time of loss is prefetched. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 also stores a special figure prior determination table used in the prefetching process. In the special figure predetermination table, a random number range corresponding to each of the ten types of stop symbols ("Special Figure A" to "Special Figure J") shown in FIG. 56A is defined. Depending on which random number range the figure determination random value belongs to, a special figure prior determination result (which stop symbol form shown in FIG. 56A is stopped and displayed) is obtained. Note that the determination result of the special figure here is also a result of the preliminary determination, and the determination of the stop symbol form of the special figure is also performed again in the special figure related process (step S213 shown in FIG. 57B) described later. .

  The pre-reading of the start information and the pre-determination using the pre-read start information described above are executed before the success / failure determination (main lottery) of the special figure related process (S213) described later is performed. The main controller 300 that pre-reads the special figure 1 big hit determination random number value and various special figure 1 determination random number values corresponds to an example of the first start information pre-reading means. The main control unit 300 that prefetches the special figure 2 determination random number value corresponds to an example of second start information prefetching means. Further, the main control unit 300 that performs pre-determination based on the special figure 1 big hit determination random value and various special figure 1 determination random numbers corresponds to an example of the first pre-determination means. The main control unit 300 that performs a prior determination based on the random value and various special figure 2 determination random values corresponds to an example of a second prior determination unit.

  The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a prefetch information temporary storage section for special figure 1 divided into areas for each hold and a prefetch information temporary storage section for special figure 2 divided into areas for each hold. It has been. Information representing the special figure pre-determination result (which is also information representing the special figure and hereinafter referred to as prefetch information) is stored in a corresponding reserved area of the prefetch information temporary storage unit.

  If the number of holds has not increased, the prefetch information “no hold” is stored in the corresponding hold area of the prefetch information temporary storage unit. Further, in the prefetching process, when the big hit game is being played and when the current control state is the electric support state (the time flag is on), the prefetching and pre-determination of the start information in FIG. 1 is performed. In these cases, the “undetermined” information indicating that the stop symbol pre-determination based on the pre-read start information in FIG. 1 is not performed is stored in the corresponding reserved area in the pre-read information temporary storage unit. To remember. That is, it is acquired during a big hit game and during electric support based on entering a starting port where the pair of blade members 2321 are not provided (first special figure starting port 230 which is a fixed starting region). Pre-determination based on the started information is not performed, and notification (pre-reading notice) of the pre-determination result is not performed. By doing so, the fairness of the player is secured. In addition, although the pre-reading of the start information itself is not performed, the pre-reading may be performed and the preliminary determination and the result notification (pre-reading advance notice) may not be performed. The notification (pre-reading notice) may not be performed.

  In the main control unit timer interruption process shown in FIG. 57 (b), the common figure related process is performed following the winning determination process in step S209 (step S211). In this common figure-related process, first, one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the state of the common figure is performed as a general figure state update process. For example, in the process during the normal symbol change display (the value of the above-mentioned general symbol display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the lighting / extinguishing drive control that repeatedly turns on and off the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is performed. Do. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs a usual fluctuation display (ordinary figure fluctuation game).

  Further, in the processing at the timing when the normal symbol display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the normal symbol display symbol update timer is changed from 1 to 0), the winning symbol (the common symbol A shown in FIG. 56 (c)) and the lost symbol are displayed. The 7-segment LED constituting the universal display device 210 is controlled to be turned on / off so that one of the display modes of the general map B shown in FIG. 56C is obtained. In addition, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the common drawing related processes here. Here, the above-described lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and the setting area is set to indicate that the normal stop display is being performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs fixed display of one of the winning symbols and the lost symbols. Further, after that, for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 0.6 seconds), information indicating the stop period is always set in the storage area of the normal stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display. By this setting, the winning symbol that is confirmed and displayed is always stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is informed of the result of the usual figure variation game.

  Further, if the result of the usual figure variable game is a hit, the usual figure hit flag is turned on. When the usual figure hit flag is on, in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (when the usual figure stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), The normal operation is set in the setting area, and the blade member 2321 is opened to a solenoid (332) for opening and closing the blade member 2321 of the second special figure starting port 232 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds). And a signal indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  In the usual state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the blade member has a predetermined closing period (for example, 500 milliseconds). A signal for holding the blade member in the closed state is output to the opening / closing drive solenoid 332, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the normal state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (when the value of the blade closing time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the non-operating state is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. To do. Furthermore, if the result of the usual figure variable game is lost, the usual figure lost flag is turned on. When the usual figure loss flag is on, even in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (when the value of the usual figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, normal operation inactive is set.

  Subsequently, in this general drawing-related lottery process, the opening and closing control of the general figure variable game and the second special figure starting port 232 is not performed (the state of the normal figure is inactive), and the pending general figure When the number of variable games is one or more, the result of the general variable game is won by the random lottery based on the normal random number value stored in the random value storage area described above, or is not selected A hit determination is performed to determine whether or not, and in the case of winning, a hit flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. If unsuccessful, turn off the winning flag. Regardless of the result of the hit determination, next, the value of the random number counter for generating the normal figure timer random value is acquired as the normal figure timer random number value, and a plurality of fluctuation times are obtained based on the acquired general figure timer random number value. One time is selected for variably displaying the normal map on the general map display device 210, and this variable display time is stored as a normal map variable display time in a general map variable time storage area provided in the RAM 308. In addition, the number of pending general figure variable games is stored in the usual figure pending number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of pending custom figure variable games each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is re-stored in the usual figure reservation number storage area. Also, the random number value used for the hit determination is deleted.

  In the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 57 (b), a special figure related process (step S213) is performed subsequent to the common figure related process of step S211 described above. In this special figure related process, first, a special figure state update process for special figure 2 (special figure 2 state update process) is performed, and then a special figure state update process for special figure 1 (special figure 1 state update). Process). In the special figure 2 state update process, one of the following eight processes is performed according to the state of the special figure 2. For example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the above-mentioned special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the second special symbol display device 214 is turned on. Performs lighting / extinguishing drive control that repeatedly turns off. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 performs the variable display of the special figure 2 (special figure 2 variable game).

  Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the general command rotation start setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area described above, and the process ends.

  Also, in the special figure 2 state update process starting at the timing when the special figure 2 variable display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), On / off drive control of the 7-segment LED constituting the second special figure display device 214 is performed based on the special figure determination result (special figure stop pattern mode), and special figure 2 stop display is being performed in the setting area of the RAM 308. Make settings to indicate this. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 has a 15R special jackpot symbol (special symbol A), a 15R jackpot symbol (special symbol B), a 2R special jackpot symbol (special symbol C), and a sudden time shortening symbol (special symbol). Figure D), hidden probability variation (special E), suddenly normal (special F), first small hit (special G), second small (special H), first loss (special) One of the symbols (Fig. I) and the first lost symbol (special symbol J) is confirmed and displayed. After that, information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 milliseconds). With this setting, the specially displayed special figure 2 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 2 variable game is notified to the player. Further, when a value is set in the electric support number storage unit provided in the RAM 308, if the value is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the shortest number of times, and the subtraction result becomes 1 to 0. In this case, if the special figure probability is not changing, the time reduction flag is turned off. Further, the hourly flag is also turned off during a big hit game (in a special game state) or a small hit game. That is, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 enters the non-electric support state (first entry rate control state) when the big hit gaming state and the small hit gaming state (in the special gaming state).

  In addition, a predetermined transmission information indicating that a general command rotation stop setting transmission process is executed in a command setting transmission process (step S215) to be described later is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and a pattern for stopping the variable display is displayed. Special figure 2 identification information indicating that it is special figure 2 is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data, which will be described later, and the processing is terminated.

  The RAM 308 also has a big hit flag. If the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on at the start of the special figure 2 variable game. When the jackpot flag is on, in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the RAM 308 In the setting area, special figure 2 is in operation, and a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, an image for notifying the player that the big hit game is started is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L or the like. In order to wait for a certain period, information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 waiting time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, 5H is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the above-described transmission information storage area in order to execute the general command winning effect start setting transmission process in the command setting transmission process (step S233).

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a predetermined release period (for example, 29 seconds) Or, until a winning of a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected at the central variable winning opening 234 or the right variable winning opening 235, the door member 2341 of the central variable winning opening 234 or the door member of the right variable winning opening 235 A signal for holding the door members 2341 and 2351 in an open state is output to the open / close drive solenoid (332) 2351, and information indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the door open time management timer provided in the RAM 308. To do. Further, 7H is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the above-described transmission information storage area in order to execute the general command big prize opening release setting transmission process in the command setting transmission process (step S233).

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the door opening time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the door member 2341 of the central variable prize opening 234 or the right side A signal for holding the door members 2341 and 2351 in a closed state is output to a solenoid (332) for opening and closing the door member 2351 of the variable prize opening 235 for a predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) and provided in the RAM 308. Information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the door closing time management timer. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In addition, in the special figure 2 state update process in which the opening / closing control of the door member is repeated a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 rounds or 2 rounds) and started at the end timing, a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a big hit Production in the storage area of the production standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308 for setting to wait for the period during which the image for informing the player of the end of the game is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L or the like. Information indicating the waiting period is set.

  As described above, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 changes the open / closed state of the door member 2341 of the central variable winning port 234 or the door member 2351 of the right variable winning port 235 during the big hit gaming state (in the special gaming state). This corresponds to an example of variable winning control means for performing control. Note that the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores the opening / closing patterns of the door members 2341 and 2351, and the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 stores the opening / closing patterns according to whether the special figure variation game is successful or not from the ROM 306. get.

  Further, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 sets the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag provided in the RAM 308 to be on simultaneously with the end of the big hit game, based on the stop symbol form represented by the special figure determination result. That is, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 sets both the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag to ON when the special figure determination result is “special figure A” or “special figure C” in the special figure lottery process described later. . When the special figure determination result is “special figure E”, only the probability variation flag is set to ON among the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag. Furthermore, when the special figure determination result is “special figure B” or “special figure D”, only the short time flag is set to ON among the probability variation flag and the short time flag, and the electric support number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is set. Set power support 100 times. The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 sets the entry rate control state, which is a state in which the ease of entry of the game ball into the second special figure start port 232 (variable start region) (entrance rate) is controlled, This corresponds to an example of an approach rate changing unit that changes between a non-electric support state that is an approach rate control state and an electrical support state that is a second approach rate control state.

  Furthermore, 6H is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the above-described transmission information storage area in order to execute the general command end effect setting transmission process in the command setting transmission process (step S233).

  Also, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (when the production standby time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 is not activated in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set medium. Furthermore, a loss flag is also prepared in the RAM 308. If the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a loss, the loss flag is turned on. When the lost flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, special figure 2 inactive is set. In the special figure 2 state update process when the special figure 2 is not in operation, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next process.

  When the special figure 2 state update process is completed, the special figure 1 state update process is performed. In the special figure 1 state update process, each process described in the special figure 2 state update process is performed according to the state of the special figure 1. Each process performed in the special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” in the contents described in the special figure 2 state update process is replaced with “special figure 1”. Omitted. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

  When the special figure state update process described above is completed, a special figure related lottery process is performed. In the special figure related lottery process, the process for the special figure 2 (the special figure 2 related lottery process) is first performed, and then the process for the special figure 1 (the special figure 1 related lottery process) is performed. In this way, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery process before the special figure 1 related lottery process, so that the same timing (winning determination process in the main control unit timer interruption process started at a predetermined opportunity) When starting information is acquired based on the game ball entering the first special figure starting port 230 in S209) and starting information is acquired based on the game ball entering the second special figure starting port 232 in S209) If the start condition of the special figure 2 variable game and the start condition of the special figure 1 variable game are satisfied at the same time, or both the start condition of the special figure 2 variable game and the start condition of the special figure 1 variable game are satisfied Even in such a case, since the special figure 2 variable game is changing first, the special figure 1 variable game does not start changing. In addition, the main control unit 300 notifies the result of the jackpot determination of the special figure variable game by the first special figure display device 212 or the second special figure display device 214, and wins a prize to the second special figure start port 232. The lottery result notification based on the first special figure start opening 230 is prioritized over the lottery result notification based on the winning of the first special figure start opening 230. In the state where only the start information of FIG. 1 among the start information of 2 remains, when the start information of FIG. 2 is newly stored, it is based on the newly stored start information of FIG. The notification of the lottery result is performed prior to the notification of the lottery result based on the already stored start information of FIG. The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that executes the special drawing related lottery process corresponds to an example of a lottery means (whether or not judgment means).

  In the special figure 2 related lottery process, a lottery (win / no decision) is executed, a special figure to be stopped and determined, and a timer number is determined. First, it is determined whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied. That is, first, it is determined whether or not a predetermined success / failure determination prohibition condition is not satisfied. Here, it is determined whether or not the second special figure display device 214 is in the special figure fluctuation display or in the stop display. Returning, if neither is displayed, it is determined whether it is set during special figure operation or special figure non-operation, and if it is set during special figure operation, the main controller timer interrupt processing Returning to FIG. 5, if the special figure is set to be inactive, it means that the validity determination prohibition condition has not been established, and this time, it is determined whether or not a predetermined validity determination condition has been established. This determination is made by referring to the reserved storage unit of the special figure 2 provided in the RAM 308 to determine whether or not the number of the special figure 2 variable games held is larger than zero. If the number of holds is 0, the process returns to the main control unit timer interrupt process. If the number is 1 or more, a predetermined success / failure determination condition is established.

  If a predetermined success / failure determination condition is satisfied, one set of random values (the special figure 2 big hit judgment random number value) which is the start information stored in the past from the reserved storage unit of the special figure 2 provided in the RAM 308. , Random number value for determining special figure 2 at the time of big hit, random number value for determining special figure 2 at the time of small hit, and random number value for determining special figure 2 at the time of loss), and starting information (random) The numerical value set) is transferred from the currently stored area to the next area. That is, if the starting information stored in the past is taken out from the holding storage unit of FIG. 2 and the starting information is stored in the holding storage unit of FIG. 2, the Nth oldest starting information is held in FIG. It is set as the (N-1) oldest starting information in the storage unit. Also, 1 is subtracted from the pending number stored in the RAM 308. One set of random values from the reserved storage unit of the special figure 2 of the RAM 308 (the special figure 2 big hit determination random value, the big hit special figure 2 decision random value, the small hit special figure 2 decision random value, and the loss time The main control unit 300 that performs processing for extracting the special figure 2 determination random number value) corresponds to an example of a second start-up information acquisition unit.

  Next, a success / failure determination process is performed. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 also stores a determination table for determining whether or not it is correct. The contents of this success / failure determination table are the same as the contents of the previous / failure determination table described above. In the success / failure determination process, the probability variation flag prepared in the RAM 308 is referred to, and the special figure 2 big hit determination random number value is stored in the success / failure determination table in accordance with the control state (special figure low probability state, special figure high probability state). Based on which of the random number ranges, “big hit”, “small hit”, or “losing” is derived as a result of the determination of success / failure. In the special figure high probability state, the probability of winning a big hit is higher than in the special figure low probability state. Deriving “big hit”, “small hit”, or “losing” corresponds to the determination (lottery), and the CPU 304 of the main control unit 30 that executes the determination processing here selects lottery means (passage determination means). It corresponds to an example. Further, “big hit” corresponds to an example of a specific determination result.

  When the execution of the success / failure determination process is completed, the process proceeds to a special symbol design determination process. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 also stores a special figure determination table. The contents of the special figure determination table are the same as the contents of the special figure advance determination table described above. In this special symbol design determination process, when the result of the determination is “big hit”, based on which random number range in the special symbol determination table belongs to which random number value for determining the big bonus special figure 2 belongs, The special figure determination result is determined as one of “Special Figure A” to “Special Figure F”. In addition, when the determination result is “small hit”, the special figure determination result is determined based on which random number range in the special figure determination table the random number value for determining the special figure 2 at the time of small hits belongs. Determine "Special Figure G" or "Special Figure H". Further, when the determination result is “lost”, the special figure determination result is set to “special figure determination result” based on which random number range in the special figure determination table the random figure value for determining the special figure 2 at the time of loss belongs. The figure is determined as “I” or “Special Figure J”. The CPU 304 of the main control unit 30 that executes the special symbol design determining process corresponds to an example of a symbol determining unit.

  In the variation time determination process following the special symbol determination process, the variable display period in the special figure variable stop display is determined. In this variation time determination process, a timer number determination random number is acquired from a timer number determination random number counter provided in the RAM 308. The acquisition timing of the timer number determination random number is the timing immediately before the start of the special figure change, but may be the timing of acquiring the start information. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 also stores a timer number determination table. In the timer number determination table, a timer number and a random number range corresponding to the timer number are defined for each special figure determination result. The timer number is the time from when the second special symbol display device 214 or the first special symbol display device 212 starts changing the symbol until the stop symbol indicating the result of the determination of the success / failure is displayed, that is, the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. This represents the fluctuation table time period (special figure fluctuation time) to be used, but may be a variation table time period of the decorative symbol.

  In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 52, timers 1 to 8 are prepared as timers. Timer 1 indicates that the special figure fluctuation stop period will be 2 seconds, resulting in an extremely shortened special figure fluctuation time. Represents that Note that the determination of the timer 1 or the timer 2 may be referred to as a special figure change. The timer 3 has a special figure fluctuation stop period of 10 seconds. In timers 1 to 3, the decorative pattern variation pattern in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 54 is not reached.

  The timer 4 indicates that the special figure variation stop period is 12 seconds. When the timer 4 is determined, normal reach is selected as the variation pattern of the decorative symbols in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In general reach, generally, decorative symbols having the same two symbol display areas (for example, the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c shown in FIG. 54) are stopped and displayed (strictly temporarily stopped) (first stop and second stop are performed). ) The remaining one symbol display area (for example, the middle symbol display area 208b) is variably displayed, that is, the symbol display area that is variably displayed is a specific symbol (the symbol display area that is stopped and displayed). Is a state in which a combination of predetermined big hit symbols is stopped and displayed. Timer 5 indicates that the special figure fluctuation time is 40 seconds, timer 6 indicates that the special figure fluctuation time is 60 seconds, and timer 7 indicates that the special figure fluctuation time is 80 seconds. When the timers 5 to 7 are determined, super reach is selected as the decorative pattern variation pattern in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Super reach is a product obtained by adding special variation display to normal reach to improve the production effect (long reach, normal reverse reach, double line reach, etc.).

  The timer 8 indicates that the special figure fluctuation time is 120 seconds. When the timer 8 is determined, a special variation is selected as the variation pattern of the decorative symbol in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The special variation includes special multi-line reach, full rotation reach, special full rotation reach, and the like. When the timer 8 is determined, the full rotation reach is selected as the variation pattern of the decorative symbol in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The The probability that timer 8 is selected is much lower than the probability that other timers are selected, and this full rotation reach corresponds to premier reach.

  Note that the term “reach” simply means a decorative pattern variation pattern including normal reach, super reach, and special variation.

  This reach is after the determination of whether or not the result of the determination of the success / failure (the final lottery) in the special figure related process is a specific determination result (a predetermined result with a high player's advantage). It is a notice effect that informs the player in advance before notifying the result of the success / failure determination, and whether or not the reach is performed is determined after the determination of the success / failure.

  In this variation time determination process, the timer number is determined based on the timer number determination random number using the timer number determination table. That is, the timer number is determined depending on which random number range corresponding to the special figure determination result the acquired timer number determination random number belongs to. In determining the timer number, if the timer number determination table defines the timer number according to the number of reservations, the timer number determination random number as well as the current number of reservations shown in FIG. Based on this, the timer number may be determined.

  The timer number representing the special figure variation time described above is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 308.

  Before the special drawing lottery-related process is executed (for example, the above-described winning determination process S209), the special figure preliminary determination result is obtained from a plurality of types of timer selection tables including timer numbers as one or a plurality of period information. One type of timer selection table may be selected based on a predetermined dedicated random number lottery, and the timer number may be determined from the timer selection table here. In determining the timer number here, a lottery may be performed using a dedicated random number (for example, a random number for timer number determination), or the timer number may be uniquely determined without performing the lottery. . In addition, a timer selection table may be selected in the special drawing lottery related process, and the first sub-control unit 400 may be selected based on the timer selection table.

  When the variation time determination process is completed, other processes are performed, and the special drawing 2 related lottery process is terminated.

  Subsequently, in the special figure related process, a special figure 1 related lottery process is performed. Each process performed in the special figure 1 related lottery process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” in the contents described in the special figure 2 related lottery process is replaced with “special figure 1”. Omitted.

  Thus, the special figure related process (step S213) in the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 57B ends, and the process proceeds to the command setting transmission process (step S215). In this command setting transmission process, various commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. The output schedule information transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of 16 bits, bit 15 is strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bits 11 to 14 are command Type (for example, basic command, symbol variation start command, symbol variation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect starting command, per round number designation command, winning prize opening command, winning prize closing command, power recovery command, RAM Information that can specify the type of command such as clear command, special figure hold increase command, general figure hold increase command), and bits 0 to 10 are constituted by command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on and off in the command transmission process described above. If the command type is a symbol variation start command, the command data includes information indicating a special symbol stop symbol, information indicating a control state (information indicating a setting state of a time reduction flag and a probability variable flag), and information indicating a timer number. In the case of a symbol variation stop command, it includes information indicating a special symbol stop symbol (special symbol determination result), information indicating a control state, etc., and in the case of a winning effect start command and an end effect start command. In the case of a per-round number designation command, information indicating the control state, the number of rounds, etc. are included. When the command type indicates a basic command, the device information in the command data, the presence / absence of winning at the first special figure starting port 230, the presence / absence of winning at the second special figure starting port 232, the winning at the central variable winning port 234 Presence or absence, presence or absence of winning in the right variable winning opening 235, and the like.

  In the general command rotation start setting transmission process described above, information indicating the special figure stop symbol (special figure determination result), information indicating the control state, information indicating the timer number, information stored in the RAM 308 as command data Information indicating the number of the first special figure variable games or the second special figure variable games being set is set. In the general command rotation stop setting transmission process described above, information indicating the special figure stop symbol (special figure determination result), information indicating the control state, and the like stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data. In the above-described general command winning effect start setting transmission process, the command data includes information indicating the special figure determination result, information indicating the control state, the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game held, etc. Set the information indicating. The winning effect start command here corresponds to a jackpot game start command. In the above-described general command end effect setting transmission process, command control data stored in the RAM 308, effect control information to be output to the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period, Information indicating the control state, information indicating the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game being held, etc. are set. The first sub control unit 400 that has received the end effect start command transmits an end effect control command to the second sub control unit 500 based on the end effect start command. Receiving the end effect control command, the second sub-control unit 500 displays on the first decorative symbol display device 208L or the like an image for notifying the player that the predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, the big hit game is to end. And the jackpot game ends. The end effect start command here corresponds to a jackpot game end command. In the above-described general command special winning opening release setting transmission process, information indicating the number of winning rounds stored in the RAM 308, the current number of rounds, information indicating the control state, etc. is set as command data of the special winning opening release command. . In the above-described general command big prize opening closing setting transmission process, the current round number stored in the RAM 308, the information indicating the control state, the first special figure variable game held as command data of the big prize opening closing command Alternatively, information indicating the number of second special figure variable games is set.

  In step S215, general command special figure hold increase processing is also performed. In this general command special figure hold increase processing, special figure identification information (information showing special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308 in the command data of the special figure hold increase command, the control state And information indicating the stop symbol of special figure 1 or special figure 2 determined in advance (special figure preliminary determination result).

  Furthermore, in this step S215, general command usual figure hold increase processing is also performed. In this general command usual figure hold increase process, information indicating a control state is set in the command data of the general figure hold increase command. In addition, the main control unit 300 also transmits to the first sub-control unit 400 a general map change start command indicating that the normal map display has started (or is) as a general command-related command. Note that the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400 start (do) the usual figure change stop command indicating that the usual change display has stopped (do), or the pair of blade members 2321. An electric chew opening start command indicating that, or an electric chew closing command indicating that the pair of blade members 2321 are closed (to do) may be transmitted.

  In the first sub-control unit 400, it is possible to determine the production control according to the change of the game control in the main control unit 300 by the command type included in the received output schedule information, and it is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, the contents of effect control can be determined. In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 acquires the number of remaining rounds until all the rounds are completed based on the number of rounds included in the command and the current number of rounds.

  In this command setting transmission process, a command is also transmitted to the payout control unit 600 shown in FIG. The output schedule information and the payout request information output to the payout control unit 600 are composed of 1 byte, strobe information (indicating that data is set when turned on) in bit 7, and power-on information in bit 6. (In the case of ON, it indicates that this is the first command transmission after power-on), the current processing type (0-3) for encryption in bits 4-5, and the encrypted processing in bits 0-3 The number of payout requests is indicated.

  Next, in the main control unit timer interruption process shown in FIG. 57B, an external output signal setting process (step S217) is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336 shown in FIG.

  In step S219, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of the various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S201 described above are read, and the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or a bottom pan full error is monitored to open the front frame door. When an error or a lower pan full error is detected, device information indicating whether there is a front frame door opening error or a lower pan full error is set in the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. The device information set here is included in the basic command and transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. Also, the solenoids 332 shown in FIG. 55 are driven to control the opening and closing of the second special figure starting port 232, the central variable winning port 234 and the right variable winning port 235, and via the drive circuits 324, 326, and 330. Display data to be output to the normal symbol display device 210, the first special diagram display device 212, the second special diagram display device 214, various state display units 328, and the like is set in the output port of the I / O 310.

  When the device monitoring process in step S219 ends, the process returns to the main control unit main process shown in FIG. 57A. Before the return, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is returned to each original register. Make settings and enable interrupts. In addition, before recovery, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is on. If the low voltage signal is on (when power-off is detected), it returns to the power-off state when power is restored. A specific variable or stack pointer for saving is saved as a return data in a predetermined area of the RAM 308, subjected to an interruption process such as initialization of the input / output port, and then returned to the main process of the main control unit. Also good.

<Processing of First Sub-Control Unit 400>
Next, processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 5B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 5C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 4D is a flowchart of the image control process of the first sub control unit 400.

  First, in step S301 in FIG. 9A, various initial settings are performed. When power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in S301. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

  In step S303, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more. This process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S305. In step S305, 0 is substituted into the timer variable. In step S307, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

  In step S309, effect control processing is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S307, processing such as reading effect data corresponding to the command from the ROM 406 is performed, and when update of the effect data is necessary, effect data update processing is performed. An effect involving operation means, which will be described below, is first controlled by this effect control process. In other words, when a symbol variation start command including information related to symbol variation time is received, whether or not an effect involving the operating means is executed according to the length of the variation time is determined in this effect control process. When it is determined and executed by the lottery process, the effect data is read from the ROM 406. In accordance with the effect data read here, image display control in each of the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N is executed in step S313, and for the movable means control, the second sub control unit 500 reads the effect read here. A control command corresponding to the data is transmitted, and is performed by the second sub-control unit 500 in step S713 described later.

  In step S311, it is determined whether or not the chance button 136 has been pressed by detecting the detection signal output from the detection unit 710 via the sensor circuit 428. As a result of the determination here, when the pressing operation of the chance button 136 is detected, the processing of changing the effect data updated in step S309 to the effect data corresponding to the pressing operation of the chance button 136, or the pressing of the chance button 136 When the operation is valid, processing for preparing production data corresponding to an operation reception production described later is performed.

  In step S313, if there is a command to VDP 434 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to VDP 434 (details will be described later). In step S315, if there is a command to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to the sound source IC 416. In step S317, if there is a command to the various lamps 418 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to the drive circuit 420.

  In step S319, if there is an operation command (movement command or rotation command) to the second decorative symbol display device 208M and / or the third decorative symbol display device 208N in the effect data read out in step S309, The command is output to the drive circuit 432.

  In step S321, when there is a control command (for example, control commands related to various movable units 136, 191, 224Fa, 224Fb, and 224E) to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read in step S309. The control command is set to be output, and the process returns to step S303. If the door opening command has been transmitted from the main control unit 300, the setting for outputting the door opening command to the second sub-control unit is performed in step S321.

  Next, the command reception interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described using FIG. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output from the main control unit 300. In step S401 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

  Next, the first sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (for example, once every 2 ms). Run in cycles.

  In step S501 of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S303 in the first sub control unit main process shown in FIG. Is stored in the timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S303, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S503 of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process, transmission of a control command to the second sub-control unit 500 set in step S319, an effect random number update process, and the like are performed.

  Next, the image control process in step S313 in the main process of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing the flow of image control processing.

  In step S601, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 404 first swaps the designation of the display areas A and B in the VRAM 436. As a result, an image of one frame stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L or the like. Next, the CPU 404 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 406), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 436) and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 434 based on the position information table and the like, and then the image from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 434 transfers the image data from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436 based on the command set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 436 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 404.

  In step S603, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 is input. If a transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S605. If not, a transfer end interrupt signal is input. Wait for it. In step S605, parameters are set based on the production scenario configuration table and attribute data. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 436 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 436 in step S601, the CPU 404 has information on the image data constituting the display image (coordinate axis and image size of the VRAM 436). , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates, etc.) are instructed to the VDP 434. The VDP 434 sets parameters according to attributes based on instructions stored in the attribute register.

  In step S607, a drawing instruction is performed. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 404 instructs the VDP 434 to start drawing an image. The VDP 434 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer in accordance with an instruction from the CPU 404.

  In step S609, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 based on the end of image drawing is input. If a generation end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S611. If not, the generation end interrupt signal is determined. Wait for input. In step S611, a scene display counter that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 and counts how many scene images have been generated is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

<Processing of Second Sub-Control Unit 500>
Next, processing of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 7B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the second sub control unit 500. FIG. 8C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500.

  First, in step S701 in FIG. 9A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, first, initialization processing is executed in S701. In this initialization processing, initial setting of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 508, and the like are performed.

  In step S703, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S705. In step S705, 0 is assigned to the timer variable. In step S707, command processing is performed. The CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 determines whether a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400.

  In step S709, an effect control process is performed. For example, if there is a new command in step S707, the effect data corresponding to this command is read from the ROM 506, and if the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated. In step S <b> 711, if there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the game board lamp 532 or the game table frame lamp 542, this command is output to the serial communication control circuit 520.

  In step S713, a movable means control process is performed, and then the process returns to step S703. In the movable means control processing here, various movable means (chance button 136 capable of executing advancing and retreating operation, transparent portion 191 that can be rotated in the front-rear direction, and eight-position movable object that can be moved up and down are provided from the first sub-control unit 400. When a control command relating to 224Fa and the general character 224Fb, which is also a family crest character 224E that can be moved up and down, is received, various processes corresponding to the control command are performed, and various movable units 136, 191, 224Fa, 224Fb, 224E are performed. Control each operation.

  Next, the command reception interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub control unit 500 detects the strobe signal output from the first sub control unit 400. In step S801 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the first sub control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

  Next, the second sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (for example, once every 2 ms), and the timer interrupt processing is performed at a predetermined cycle triggered by this timer interrupt. Run with.

  In step S901 of the second sub control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S703 in the second sub control unit main process shown in FIG. Is stored in the timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S703, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S903 of the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process, an effect random number update process is performed.

  Next, an example of a specific effect in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 52 will be described.

  FIG. 60 is a diagram showing an example of button effects in stages. In FIG. 60, time elapses in the order of alphabets and the like written in parentheses (the same applies to the following drawings unless otherwise specified). The time interval between the alphabet written in parentheses and the alphabet written next in parentheses may be equal or different in one figure. , Equal intervals and different intervals may be mixed (the same applies to the following drawings).

  In FIG. 60, among the three decorative symbol display devices 208208L to 208N, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are omitted, and only the first decorative symbol display device 208L is shown.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 60, a variable icon display area 208e is provided at the center of the effect display area 208d, and a hold icon display area 208f is located to the right of the variable icon display area 208e. Is provided. A frame-like image indicating the position of the fluctuation icon display area 208e is displayed on the outer periphery of the fluctuation icon display area 208e. This frame-like image is always displayed, but when the display condition is satisfied (for example, when the variation icon is not displayed in the variation icon display area or when it is displayed in the opposite direction, a reach effect is further performed. It may be displayed only when not). Note that only one of the change icon display area 208e and the hold icon display area 208f may be provided.

  One or a plurality of hold icons can be displayed in the hold icon display area 208f. On the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 60 (a), four hold icons h1 to h4 are displayed. These four hold icons h1 to h4 are all displayed as black circles, and the display of white circles with dotted lines indicates that the hold icons are not displayed. The hold icon is an icon indicating that the start of the special symbol variation display or the start of special symbol determination is suspended, and the number of the hold icons to be displayed is basically that of the special diagram variable game. It is the same number as the number of holds. However, there may be a timing at which the display number of the hold icon does not represent the hold number before and after the hold use. The hold icons include the hold icon shown in FIG. 1 and the hold icon shown in FIG. 2, and the hold icon display area 208f may be divided into two to display areas for both icons. Further, the hold icon can be pre-readed about whether or not the hold is appropriate depending on the display mode. As animation related to the hold icon, for example, an increase animation that is executed when the hold increases and a new hold icon is displayed, and the rank of the hold changes due to digestion of the previous hold, and the hold Moving animation that is executed when the icon moves to another display position (for example, the position on the left), change animation that is executed when the display mode of the holding icon changes based on the look-ahead result, etc. Erase animation executed when the hold icon is deleted, and a save animation executed when the hold icon of the non-priority side special figure is evacuated when the hold of the priority side special figure increases in the priority change machine Etc. In addition to the above animation, the stand-by animation that can be executed independently during a period other than the execution of the animation (for example, a period in which there is no increase / decrease of the hold or change of the hold icon) and can be executed in duplicate with the animation. There is. As an example of this standby animation, an animation that is performed on the spot without changing the display position (for example, a repeated animation of a certain scale of animation) is given as an example. Note that a plurality of animations for increasing, moving, changing, erasing, saving, and waiting for the hold icon may be executed in duplicate.

  One variation icon can be displayed in the variation icon display area 208e. On the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 60 (b), a star-shaped variation icon c is displayed. The fluctuation icon is an icon corresponding to the special figure variable game that is displayed after the hold is consumed and the special figure variable game is started, in other words, an icon related to the symbol fluctuation display being executed. That is, the hold icon becomes a change icon simultaneously with the start of the special figure change game corresponding to the hold icon. More precisely, when the first hold icon with the oldest start prize moves from the hold icon display area 208f to the change icon display area 208e, the moving icon is referred to as a change icon, or the change icon is expressed as moving. May be. Alternatively, an icon after the movement to the fluctuation icon display area 208e is completed may be referred to as a fluctuation icon. This variation icon is displayed in a display size (display size larger or smaller than the hold icon) different from the hold icon. Thereby, although the change icon and the hold icon may be easily identified, they may be the same size. In addition, the variation icon may have a display mode related to the display mode of the hold icon. The change icon can be notified of whether or not the change is appropriate (the change notice) depending on the display mode, and is basically erased at a timing when the result of the change is notified. Therefore, the variation icon can be regarded as an icon related to the hold, and can also be considered as a kind of the hold icon in the sense that the notification of the success / failure result of the special figure change game is held. Note that the erasing timing may be a timing before the timing at which the change success / failure result is notified, the same timing, or a timing after the timing.

  As an animation related to both the hold icon and the fluctuation icon, the hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area 208f and having the earliest start winning timing is changed to the change icon display area 208e when the hold is consumed. There are a movement animation for moving the icon as a variable icon and a change animation for changing the display mode of the hold icon to the display mode of the variable icon. These animations may be combined and executed at the same time. When the display mode of the hold icon and the display mode of the variation icon are the same, the execution of the change animation can be omitted.

  The animation related to the fluctuation icon includes a standby animation executed during execution of the special figure variable game, an erase animation executed when the special figure variable game ends and the fluctuation icon is deleted, and a fluctuation icon. There is a change animation executed when the display mode is changed in the middle. These animations may be executed at the same time in combination with each other. Further, the standby animation of the variation icon may be executed at the same time in combination with the movement animation or the change animation.

  Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 60, a fourth symbol 2081 of special figure 1 and a fourth symbol 2082 of special figure 2 are displayed on the upper right. The 4th symbol 2081 of the special figure 1 is a round display, and the 4th graphic 2082 of the special figure 2 is a square display. In any of the 4th symbols 2081 and 2082, gray indicates that the symbol is changing, black indicates that the jackpot symbol is stopped (determined display), and white indicates that the lose symbol is stopped (determined display). It represents that. These fourth symbols 2081 and 2082 are also a kind of decorative symbols.

  In addition to the first decorative symbol display device 208L, FIG. 60 includes a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a first special symbol hold lamp 218, and a second special figure hold lamp 220. It is shown.

  In addition, FIG. 60 also shows a chance button 136 on the right side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 60, a white display indicates a white lighting state or a non-lighting state of the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136, and a hatched display indicates the chance button lamp 138. Represents the red lighting state. The state in which the chance button lamp 138 is lit in red is a state in which pressing of the chance button 136 is urged. The hatched display may be in a lighting state other than red. In addition, although “lighting” is used here, it may be “flashing” (hereinafter the same).

  The background image of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 60 is a castle town background image. When the background image is a background image of a castle town, the pachinko machine 100 is in the castle town mode among a plurality of types of production modes. That is, the background image and the effect mode are associated with each other.

  In FIG. 60A, both the first special symbol display device 212 and the second special symbol display device 214 display (determine display) the stop symbol of the loss, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L has a random pattern. A certain “decoration 3”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 1” is displayed. In addition, the fourth symbol 2081 of the special figure 1 and the fourth symbol 2082 of the special figure 2 are both displayed in a stopped state. 60A, four first special symbol hold lamps 218 are lit, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L displays four black circle hold icons, which are the hold indications of special figure 1. Thus, no variation icon is displayed in the variation icon display area 208e.

  In FIG. 60B, the special symbol variation display is started on the first special symbol display device 212, and the decorative symbol variation display is also started on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. That is, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the decorative symbol is updated (varied display) continuously in each of the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c. In addition, only three first special symbol hold lamps 218 shown in FIG. 60B are lit, and three hold icons (hold icons h1 to h3) are displayed in the hold icon display area 208f of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. ) Only, and a star-shaped variation icon c is displayed in the variation icon display area 208e. This is because, among the four hold icons h1 to h4 displayed in FIG. 5A, the hold icon h1 with the oldest start winning timing becomes a change icon, and the change icon display from the hold icon display area 208f. This is a result of moving to the area 208e. Furthermore, the 4th symbol 2081 of the special figure 1 which is a round display is changed to a display during change (gray).

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 60 (c), the reach effect is started. Up to now, the variation display of the decorative symbols, which has been performed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, is reduced in the left corner and is in a reach state with the numeral 3. .

  In this example, when the reach effect is started, the button effect is also started. The button production here is the production that tells the development of super reach. In addition, the button effect may be an effect that tells the type of super reach that develops. When the button effect is started, as shown in FIG. 60 (d), the button image 136a imitating the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 52 and the operation of the chance button 136 are displayed at the center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. An arrow display 136b and a character display “push” as a prompt display for prompting (pressing), and a remaining period meter display 136c as a display regarding a period (operation effective period) for accepting the operation of the chance button 136 as valid Are displayed as a set. The remaining period meter display 136c is a display representing the remaining period in which the operation of the chance button 136 is accepted. Further, the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 60 is in an initial position at any stage, and the chance button lamp 138 shown in FIG.

  In this example, the player does not operate the chance button 136 immediately after the button effect is started, but operates (presses) the chance button 136 after a while (see FIG. 60F). When the chance button 136 is operated, the chance button 136, which has been lit in red until then, is switched to lighting in white or turned off.

  When the chance button 136 is operated within the operation effective period, the first decorative symbol display device 208L displays a cut-in notice indicating whether or not it is likely to develop into super reach. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 60 (g), the display “CHANCE” is interrupted so as to overlap the background image, and then developed into super reach A as shown in FIG. 60 (h). doing. On the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 60 (h), a character “super reach A” is displayed, indicating that the effect of super reach A is being performed. In this example, the background of the castle town is from the beginning to the end, and the effect display of Super Reach A is also performed in the background of the castle town. Moreover, when the effect display of super reach A is started, all the hold icons h1 to h3 disappear and are not visible. On the other hand, frame-like images indicating the positions of the fourth symbols 2081 and 2082, and the variation icon c and the variation icon display area 208e continue to be displayed. Note that the fourth symbols 2081, 2082, the variation icon c, and the frame-like image may be erased so that they cannot be seen. Super Reach A is not a big hit-determined super reach, but just because it has evolved into Super Reach A does not necessarily mean a big hit. In addition, even if a display that is expected to develop into a super reach called “CHANCE” is made, the super reach is not necessarily started, and the lose symbol is stopped and displayed without starting the super reach. There is also a case. The display “CHANCE” shown in FIG. 60G may be a dedicated display that is not displayed unless the chance button 136 is operated, or a general-purpose display that is displayed even when the chance button 136 is not operated. It may be.

  On the other hand, in FIG. 60 (g ′) showing another example following FIG. 60 (f) in which the chance button 136 is operated (pressed), “unfortunate” is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. As shown in FIG. 11 (h ′), the first decorative symbol display device 208L does not develop into a super reach, and the decorative symbol “Lack of decoration 3” − “Decoration 1” − “Decoration 3” is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The combination is stopped. Even if “unfortunate” is displayed, there is a case where a big hit is caused by a reverse effect.

  The operation of the chance button 136 is always accepted, but the operation outside the operation valid period is finally treated as invalid, and a new effect such as a cut-in notice is not started. That is, the state within the operation effective period in the pachinko machine 100 is a state (operation effective state) where execution of a new effect such as a cut-in notice is started when the chance button 136 is operated. However, the operation of the chance button 136 is not always accepted, and control may be performed to accept only the acceptance period.

  FIG. 61 is a diagram for explaining in detail the operation means provided in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG.

  The pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 52 is provided with a chance button 136 that can perform an advance / retreat operation and a transmission portion 191 that can rotate in the front-rear direction.

  FIG. 61A shows a state in which the chance button 136 and the transmission part 191 are in their initial positions, as in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. That is, the chance button 136 does not protrude, and the transmission part 191 is also substantially parallel to the transparent plate member 118. The chance button 136 can be operated (pressed) even in the initial position, and the built-in chance button lamp 138 can be turned on or blinked. Further, the chance button 136 may vibrate, and can vibrate even at the initial position. Even when the chance button 136 is vibrating, the chance button lamp 138 can be turned on or blinking, and a sound effect or effect sound can be output from the speaker 120. The chance button 136 may be capable of vibrating only at the position where it is pushed.

  FIG. 61B shows a state in which the transmission part 191 is rotated from the initial position around a drive shaft (not shown) and tilted forward. This drive shaft is a horizontal shaft extending in the left-right direction of the pachinko machine 100. The transmission unit 191 rotates forward while the LED built in the transmission unit 190 is turned on or blinking, and a sound effect or effect sound is output from the speaker 120. The transmission part 191 may also vibrate and can vibrate even at the initial position. Further, even in a state inclined forward as shown in FIG. Moreover, the transmission part 191 may rotate in the front-back direction in small increments as strong vibration with a large vibration amplitude. Even when the transmission part 191 is vibrating, the LED built in the transmission part unit 190 can be lit or blinking, and a sound effect or a production sound can be output from the speaker 120. The state (second state) of the transmission part 191 shown in FIG. 61 (b) is closer to the player than the state (first state) in the initial position shown in FIG. The player can operate to push the transparent portion 191 toward the initial position by hand, and the transparent portion 191 corresponds to an example of an operation means. Even when the transmission unit 191 is operated and pushed in, the LED built in the transmission unit 190 is turned on or blinks, and a sound effect or effect sound is output from the speaker 120. Note that the transmission part 191 may not vibrate at the initial position.

  FIG. 61 (c) shows a state where the chance button 136 has started to advance upward from the initial position. The chance button 136 advances while the built-in chance button lamp 138 is lit or blinking, and a sound effect or effect sound is output from the speaker 120. FIG. 4D shows a state where the chance button 136 has advanced to the maximum advance position. The chance button 136 can be stopped at one or more positions between the initial position and the maximum advance position. Therefore, it is possible to advance in several stages. Further, the chance button 136 that has advanced (protruded) from the initial position can also vibrate, and in the state of having advanced (protruded), it vibrates laterally or vertically. Also at this time, the chance button lamp 138 can be turned on or blinked, and a sound effect or effect sound can be output from the speaker 120. Furthermore, the chance button 136 that has advanced (protruded) from the initial position can be operated so as to be pushed toward the initial position. Even when the chance button 136 is operated and pushed in, the chance button lamp 138 lights up or flashes, and a sound effect or effect sound is output from the speaker 120. The chance button 136 may be automatically retracted toward the initial position only by being lightly pressed in the advanced state.

  It should be noted that the vibration of the chance button 136 and the vibration of the transmission part 191 may be a function that appears only in a certain setting state. For example, it may be a function that is manifested by a setting by a player's effect customization function or by a switch setting on the game store clerk side. That is, depending on the setting state, there may be a case where the vibration does not occur at all, or a case where only a part thereof vibrates.

  FIG. 62 is a diagram for explaining an effect involving operating means in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG.

  Here, as the operation means, the chance button 136 described with reference to FIG. 61 will be described as the operation means A, and the transmission unit 191 will be described as the operation means B. When the operation means A and the operation means B are compared here, the operation means B is an operation means larger than the operation means A (an operation means having a large operation surface), and the operation means A can be operated even at the initial position. Although the means B cannot be operated at the initial position, the operating means B and the operating means A may be reversed, both may be the same size operating means, or the initial position Both may be an operation means that can be operated, or both may be an operation means that cannot be operated. It should be noted that only one type of examples among the plurality of types of operation means listed here may be applied, or multiple types of examples may be applied, or all types may be applied. Also good.

  Further, the operation means described as the transparent portion 191 in the following description can be replaced with other operation means such as a second chance button provided separately from the chance button 136.

  As shown in FIG. 62 (a), an effect involving the operation of the operation means B (transmission portion 191) is more successful than an effect involving the operation of the operation means A (chance button 136). Expectation is high. Further, both the function A are provided, but the function B is provided only in the operation means A. Examples of the function A include a function of vibrating at an operating position and a function of shining. Examples of function B include a function of rotating and a function of vibrating at an initial position. As shown in FIG. 62 (a), the operation means B is inferior to the operation means A in the number of functions.

  However, as shown in FIG. 62 (b), both may have the same number of functions. That is, the function B is provided only in the operation means A, but the operation means B may be provided with the function C. As an example of the function C, there is a function capable of performing strong vibration.

  The operation means A and the operation means B may have the same number of functions.

  FIG. 62C shows a part of the effect data of the operation means A. Here, the display data on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is “liquid crystal”, the operation data on the Yatsushiro character 224Fa, the general character 224Fb and the family crest character 224E is “movable means”, and the audio output data from the speaker 120 is “ “Sound”, frame lamp 122, LED, and light emission data of various built-in lamps are displayed as “LED”, and vibration data of operation means A is displayed as “vibration”. "..." in the figure represents omission of data. Production No. The data of “vibe” in 1 is “E0”, and this “E0” indicates that no vibration occurs. Production No. The data of “Vibration” in FIG. 2 is “E1”, and this “E1” represents that the operating means A is vibrated before the operating means A (chance button 136) is operated. Production No. The production data of “liquid crystal”, “movable means”, “sound”, and “LED” in No. 2 becomes the production data after operation of the operation means A, and the operating means A that is vibrating before the operation is operated. Then, the effect after the operation is started in accordance with each effect data. Production No. 3 is “E2”, and this “E2” indicates that the operation means A is vibrated after the operation means A (chance button 136) is operated. Production No. The production data of “liquid crystal”, “movable means”, “sound”, and “LED” in FIG. Production No. 2 data and production no. The data 3 may be called even when the operating means B (transparent portion 191) is operated. This is because the production data after the operation of the operation means B can be used for the production data of “liquid crystal”, “movable means”, “sound”, and “LED”. In this case, after the operation means B is operated, the effect No. 2 data or production No. The production according to the production data “liquid crystal”, “movable means”, “sound”, “LED” in the data 3 is started, and the operation means A vibrates according to the data “E1” or “E2”. That is, the production No. The data 2 includes data (E1) that vibrates the operating means A before operating the operating means A, and other data such as “liquid crystal” becomes data after the operating means A is operated. The operation No. When the second data is read, the “vibration” data is also executed after the operation means B is operated in accordance with other data such as “liquid crystal”. In addition, production No. 2 data and production no. 3 is different from at least “Liquid Crystal” data such as “A1” and “A2”, and the “Liquid Crystal” data of “A1” is used after the operation means B is operated. No. Production No. 3 2 data needs to be read.

  The production data related to the operation means B may also be called when the operation means A is operated. After the operation means A is operated, the “liquid crystal”, “movable means”, The production according to the production data of “Sound” and “LED” is started, and the operation means B vibrates according to the data of “Vibration”. However, the effect data related to the operation means B may not be called even when the operation means A is operated.

  FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the execution timing related to the effect involving the operation means A and the effect involving the operation means B. In the flowchart shown in FIG. 63, time elapses from the left to the right in the figure. In the flowchart shown in FIGS. 63A to 63C, “operation means B related effects” started in response to the operation of the operation means B (transmission portion 191), and the operation means B are operated in order from the top. Then, the “operation means B operation valid state” that the operation means B related effects will be started, “operation means B operation” indicating that the operation means B is operated, and the operation means A (chance button 136). “Operation means A related effect” that is started in response to an operation, “Operation means A operation valid state” that the operation means A related effect is started when the operation means A is operated, and the operation means A is operated “Operation means A operation” is shown to indicate that. The “operation means B related effects” include effects in which the operation means B itself vibrates, and effects display, sound effect output, LED light emission, and the like. In addition, the “operation means A related effects” include effects in which the operation means A itself vibrates, and effects display, sound effect output, LED light emission, and the like are also included. However, the “operation means A related effects” may only indicate that the operation means A itself vibrates. It should be noted that during the “operation means B operation valid state”, a notification that prompts the user to operate the operation means B may or may not be performed. There is a case where a notification (operation promotion notification) prompting to operate the means A is performed and a case where it is not performed. If these notifications are made, the player can know that the operation is in an effective state, but if not, each operation means becomes a so-called back button.

  In the example shown in FIG. 63A, the operation means B is not operated during the operation means B operation valid state, but the operation means B related effects are started simultaneously with the end of the operation means B operation valid state. Thus, the “operation means B related effects” may be started even when the operation means B is not operated. The “operation means B related effects” may be effects that always start even if the operation means B is not operated. Further, the content of the “operation means B related effects” may be varied depending on whether or not the operation means B is operated. On the other hand, with respect to the operation means A, the operation means A related effects are started simultaneously with the start of the operation means B related effects without passing through the “operation means A operation valid state” and without operating the operation means A. . Thus, the “operation means A related effects” may be started even when the operation means A is not operated. The “operation means A related effects” may also be effects that always start even if the operation means A is not operated. Further, the content of the “operation means A related effects” may be varied depending on whether or not the operation means A is operated. In this example, the execution period of the operation means B related effects is the same as the execution period of the operation means A related effects. For example, the vibration of the operation means B (transmission portion 191) and the vibration of the operation means A (chance button 136). Starts at the same time and ends at the same time.

  In the example shown in FIG. 63 (b), when the operation means B is operated during the operation means B operation effective state and the operation means B is operated, the operation means B related effective operation is executed from the operation means B operation effective state. Switch. On the other hand, regarding the operation means A, the operation means A-related effect starts simultaneously with the start of the operation means B-related effect without going through the “operation means A operation valid state” and without operating the operation means A. Has been. Also in this example, the execution period of the operation means B related effects and the execution period of the operation means A related effects are the same. For example, the vibration of the operation means B (transmission portion 191) and the vibration of the operation means A (chance button 136). Starts at the same time and ends at the same time.

  In the example shown in FIG. 63 (c), when the operation unit B is operated during the operation unit B operation effective state and the operation unit B is operated, the operation unit B operation effective state is changed to the execution of the operation unit B related effects. Switch. On the other hand, regarding the operation means A, the operation means A-related effect starts simultaneously with the start of the operation means B-related effect without going through the “operation means A operation valid state” and without operating the operation means A. Has been. In the example shown in FIG. 63 (c), the execution period of the operation means B related effects is longer than the execution period of the operation means A related effects. For example, the vibration of the operation means B (transmission part 191) and the operation means The vibration of A (chance button 136) is started at the same time, but after the vibration of the operation means A is finished first and the vibration of the operation means A is finished, the vibration of the operation means B is finished.

  Note that the start times are the same, and the execution period of the operation means A related effects may be longer than the execution period of the operation means B related effects. Alternatively, the start time is different, the operation means B related effects start first, the operation means A related effects start, the operation means A related effects end first, and then the operation means B related effects end. May be. On the other hand, even if the operation means A related effect starts first, then the operation means B related effect starts, the operation means B related effect ends first, and then the operation means A related effect ends. Good. Also, the end time may be the same, the operation means B related effects start first, then the operation means A related effects start, and the operation means B related effects and the operation means A related effects end together. Or, conversely, the operation means A related effects start first, then the operation means B related effects start, and the operation means A related effects and the operation means B related effects may end together. .

  Further, as described with reference to FIG. 63 (a), when the operation unit B related effect is executed without operating the operation unit B, for example, the operation unit B related effect is effective for the operation unit B operation. As long as the operation unit B is operated at an early stage, the execution time of the operation unit B-related effects may be increased as long as the operation is performed until the first time has elapsed from the start of the state. become able to.

  FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the execution timing related to the effect involving the operation means. An arrow in each of FIGS. 64A to 64C represents the vibration period of the operating means A.

  The example shown in FIG. 64 (a) is an example in which the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. While the vibration of the means A (chance button 136) is started, a judgment effect is started in the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the like. The judge effect here is a judge effect for a big hit, and corresponds to an example of a first effect. This first effect is a notice effect that does not use the operation of the operation means A (chance button 136). The first effect is not a notice effect related to the operation means A (chance button 136). When the result of the judge effect is displayed, the judge effect is ended, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L starts to display the fluctuation variation of the three decorative symbols as the decorative symbol variable display. The vibration of the operating means A is continued until the middle of the execution period of the fluctuation variation display. Eventually, the fluctuation variation display ends, and the combination of the three decorative symbols is confirmed and displayed.

  Here, as shown in the lower timing chart of FIG. 64 (a), when the operation timing of the operation means B is delayed, the fluctuation time of the whole decorative symbol is already determined, so that the fluctuation variation of the three decorative symbols is displayed. Thus, the vibration of the operating means A is continued until shortly before the end of the shortened swing fluctuation display execution period.

  As shown in FIG. 64 (a), an effect such as vibration of the operation means A is terminated before notification of the result related to the player's profit, such as a confirmation display, so that the player can concentrate on the notification of the result related to the profit. I have to.

  The example shown in FIG. 64 (b) is an example during a big hit game, and when the operation means B is operated while the operation promotion notification of the operation means B (transmission portion 191) is being performed, the operation means A ( The vibration of the chance button 136) is started, and a judgment effect is started on the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the like. The judge in the judge performance here is a judge related to whether or not to shift to the probability variation state. When the result of the judge effect is displayed, the judge effect ends, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L is notified that it aims at a specific winning opening (for example, a V winning opening) in the next round. The vibration of the operating means A is continued halfway through this notification execution period. Eventually, the next round is started, and it is notified again that a specific winning opening (for example, V winning opening) is aimed.

  Here, as shown in the lower timing chart of FIG. 64 (b), when the operation timing of the operation means B is delayed, the maximum permissible time of one round is already determined, and the specific winning mouth is aimed at the next round. The execution period for notifying this is shortened, and the vibration of the operating means A is continued until shortly before the end of the shortened execution period of the notification.

  As described above, even during the big hit game, the effect involving the operation means is executed. In addition, the rounds that should aim for the specific winning opening are limited, and if the specific winning opening can be won in that round, the game shifts to a probable state after the big hit game is over. For this reason, the round that should aim for the specific winning opening is an important round that leads to the profit of the player, and before the start of the round that leads to the profit of the player, the effect such as vibration of the operation means A is ended, It is possible to concentrate on aiming for a specific winning opening.

  In addition, the example shown in FIG. 64A and the example shown in FIG. 64B are examples in which the vibration period of the operation unit A remains constant even when the operation timing of the operation unit B changes.

  The example shown in FIG. 64 (c) is an example of a pseudo-continuous effect during the decorative symbol variation display, and the operation means B is operated by the operation means B (transmission portion 191) in a state where the operation promotion notification is being performed. Then, the vibration of the operating means A (chance button 136) is started, and at the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the like, the pseudo-continuous symbol stop display is started. The vibration of the operating means A is continued until the stop display of the pseudo-continuous symbols is finished, and at the same time as the stop display of the pseudo-continuous symbols is finished, the vibration of the operating means A is also finished. Then, the next pseudo-variable display is started, and the number of pseudo-continuous operations is n-th, and the operation promotion notification of the operation means B is also performed in this n-th pseudo-variable display.

  Here, as shown in the lower timing chart of FIG. 64 (c), when the operation timing of the operation means B is delayed, the period of the pseudo-continuous symbol stop display started by the operation of the operation means B is shortened. The vibration of the operation means A ends at the same time as the stop display of the shortened pseudo-continuous symbols.

  The example shown in FIG. 64C is an example in which when the operation timing of the operation unit B changes, the vibration period of the operation unit A also changes.

  In summary, including what has been described above, the operating means A can vibrate in a period during which at least a judge effect corresponding to an example of the first effect is being executed. Further, the operation means A may be capable of vibrating during at least a part of a period in which a judge effect corresponding to an example of the first effect is executed. For example, the vibration may end simultaneously with the end of the judge effect, the vibration may continue even when the judge effect ends, or the vibration may end before the judge effect ends. Further, the vibration period during which the operation means A vibrates may be constant, or may be different depending on whether or not the operation means B is operated and the operation timing.

The upper example shown in FIG. 64D is an example in which the final judgment effect is started in response to the operation of the operation means A. The final judge effect is a judge related to whether or not a big hit will be made in the variation display during the variation display of the decorative design, or a judge showing the end in the reach production (the final stage reach production such as strong SP reach). There is. In this upper example,
The period during which the operating means A vibrates is a period in which the operation of the operating means A is treated as valid. When the operating means A is operated, the vibration is finished and the final judgment effect is started. Therefore, if the operation of the operation means A is delayed, the period L1 between the vibration start timing of the operation means A and the start timing of the final judge effect becomes longer, and the period during which the operation means A vibrates becomes longer. Even when the operation means A is not operated, the final judgment effect is started. In this case, the period L1 is the longest and has a certain period length.

  On the other hand, in the lower example shown in FIG. 64D, the final judge effect is started in response to the operation of the operation unit B, and the vibration of the operation unit A is also started. Therefore, the vibration start timing of the operating means A and the start timing of the final judge effect are simultaneous, and the period length between them is zero. However, the period during which the operating means A is vibrating can be secured for a certain period. The final judge effect here also corresponds to an example of the first effect, is a notice effect that does not use the operation of the operation means A (chance button 136), and is not a notice effect related to the operation means A (chance button 136).

  In addition, while the final judgment effect is started in response to the operation of the operation unit B, the vibration of the operation unit A is started by operating the operation unit A after the operation unit B is operated. As in the example, if the operation of the operation means A is delayed, the period between the start timing of the final judgment effect and the vibration start timing of the operation means A becomes longer, and the period during which the operation means A vibrates becomes longer.

  Next, meter production will be described.

  FIG. 65 is a diagram showing an example of a meter effect in stages.

  65 (1) shows the first decorative symbol display device 208L at the center, the second decorative symbol display device 208M on the left side, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N on the right side.

  Further, a family crest member 224E (not shown in FIG. 54) is shown below the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The position of the family crest character 224E shown in FIG. 65 (1) corresponds to the initial position. Note that the family crest character 224E and the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N have a front-rear relationship (positional relationship in the depth direction), with the crest character 224E being the forefront and the first decorative symbol display device 208L being the most. On the rear side, a second decorative symbol display device 208M and a third decorative symbol display device 208N are arranged between the family crest character 224E and the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

  65, which is not shown in the drawing, is executed in the first special figure display device 212 (see FIG. 52, etc.) and is displayed on the second special figure display device 214 (see FIG. 52, etc.). The variable display symbol (special symbol) corresponds to the first symbol. Also, a variable display symbol (ordinary symbol) executed in the ordinary symbol display device 210 (see FIG. 52, etc.) (not shown) corresponds to the second symbol. Then, the decorative symbol of variable display executed in the first decorative symbol display device 208L corresponds to the third symbol pd3. That is, the decorative symbol shown in FIG. 56 (b) displayed in a variable manner in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c in the first decorative symbol display device 208L corresponds to the third symbol pd3. The third symbol pd3 is an effect symbol representing the first symbol (not shown) with an enhanced decoration. The display of the first symbol is controlled by the main control unit 300, and the display of the third symbol pd3 is controlled on the sub-control units 400 and 500 side. As described above, on the side of the sub-control units 400 and 500, the timer interrupt process is executed every predetermined period. For this reason, in the first symbol and the third symbol pd3, at least a time lag is generated for a predetermined period of the timer interrupt process on the sub-control unit 400, 500 side. When the symbol pd3 also starts to be changed and the first symbol is stopped, the third symbol pd3 is also stopped. The following description will be made using the third symbol pd3 or based on the third symbol pd3. However, the same thing can be said even if the third symbol pd3 is replaced with the first symbol.

  In addition, in FIG. 65, the eight generations 224Fa and the shogun 224Fb are shown above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Further, the fourth symbol pd4 is shown on the right side of the general character 224F. The fourth symbol pd4 has a square display and a circle display. The square display corresponds to FIG. 1 and the circle display corresponds to FIG. Whether it is a square display or a circle display, the gray display indicates that the stop symbol of the loss is being displayed in the special figure display device (212, 214), and the black display indicates the special figure display device. In (212, 214), the big hit stop symbol is being displayed, and the white display indicates that the symbol variation is being displayed in the special symbol display device (212, 214). This fourth symbol pd4 may be displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, may be displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, or may be displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208M. It may be displayed on the device 208N, or may be displayed on other display means or dedicated display means. In addition, you may distinguish and display during change display and stop display by lighting of the LED lamp etc. of a board surface. Further, on the upper part of the second decorative symbol display device 208M on the left side, a mini decorative symbol obtained by reducing and displaying the third symbol pd3 is shown, and this mini decorative symbol corresponds to the fifth symbol pd5. The display pattern of the fifth symbol pd5 may be different from that of the third symbol pd3, as long as it is smaller than the size of the third symbol pd3, the display position is different, or the display position is different. Good. The 5th symbol pd5 also performs a variable display and a stop display, and, like the 4th symbol pd4, plays a role of clearly indicating the variation display and the stop display of the 3rd symbol pd3. Accordingly, the fourth symbol pd4 and the fifth symbol pd5 are synchronized with each other. A plurality of the third symbol pd3, the fourth symbol pd4, and the fifth symbol pd5 may be displayed. The third symbol pd3, the fourth symbol pd4, and the fifth symbol pd5 correspond to decorative symbols in a broad sense.

  The state shown in FIG. 65 (1) is a stop display of a combination of the decorative symbols of the third symbol pd3 and the fifth symbol pd5. Further, the fourth symbol pd4 is a gray square display and a gray circle display, and both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are being stopped.

  In addition, a holding frame UI is shown in the effect display area 208d of the first special figure display device 212 shown in FIG. 65 (1). The hold frame UI can be viewed as an area icon displayed in the icon display area, and can also be viewed as a user interface that provides various information to the player. The hold frame UI has a variable icon display area in the center, a hold icon display area on the left side, and an effect display area on the right side. In the hold icon display area, four stages hs1 to hs4 corresponding to the maximum number of balls to be held shown in FIG. 1 or FIG. 2 are prepared, and one hold icon is displayed for each stage. In addition, the stage corresponding to the number (for example, eight) which added the number of reservation balls of special figure 1 and the number of reservation balls of special figure 2 may be prepared. In the variation icon display area, a stage cs that is higher and larger than the four stages hs1 to hs4 prepared in the hold icon display area is prepared, and the variation icon is displayed on the stage cs. In addition, the holding frame UI shown in FIG. 65 (1) is provided with a base icon UIb extending in the left and right with a vertical stripe pattern, and four stages hs1 to hs4 prepared in the holding icon display area, The stage cs prepared in the variable icon display area can also be viewed as a stage icon displayed overlapping the base icon UIb from the front side. A tutorial display ts is displayed in the effect display area shown in FIG. This tutorial display ts can also be viewed as a tutorial icon overlapping the base icon UIb from the front side.

  In the hold icon display area 208f shown in FIG. 65 (1), one hold icon h1 is displayed, and it is notified that the number of holds in the current special figure is one. In other words, the hold icons are displayed for the number of reserved balls in the special figure, and the older the winning timing is, the closer to the center (right side) is displayed. A first hold icon (first hold icon) h1 shown in FIG. 65 (1) is a hold icon for the special figure 1 and is displayed in a red display mode, which is a display mode of a prefetch notice. In addition to the white display mode, which is the default display mode, various display modes are prepared for the hold icon. For each display mode, the expectation (reliability) of the jackpot in the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold mode is provided. ). However, even in a display mode in which the degree of expectation of a big hit is high, the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold is not necessarily a big hit, and there may be a loss. That is, the higher the degree of expectation for jackpot, the easier it is to finally display the jackpot symbol form in the first symbol. In addition, the timing when the hold icon starts to be displayed in the pre-reading notice mode or the default display form and then changes to the pre-reading notice mode is as follows. The winning time can be given.

  In addition, on the stage cs of the variation icon display area shown in FIG. 65 (1), a variation icon c having a white display mode, which is a default display mode, is displayed. In FIG. 65 (1), as described above, both the third symbol pd3 and the fifth symbol pd5 are stopped and the fourth symbol pd4 is also displayed as stopped. In FIG. 65 (1), the symbol is stopped. The change icon c is still left without disappearing. In FIG. 65 (2), the stop symbol is confirmed and the change icon c disappears.

  In addition, on the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N on the right side shown in FIG. The numerical value display hn of the number of holdings here indicates that the number of holdings in the special figure 1 is “1” and the number of holdings in the special figure 2 is “0”. Further, a mini character display (hereinafter referred to as “mini character”) is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. This mini character is a display that is displayed regardless of whether the third symbol pd3 (decorative symbol) is displayed in a variable state or not (so-called constant display), and is displayed across the variable display of the third symbol pd3 multiple times. The In the example shown in FIG. 65, the display of the character cd of the lord who becomes the main character is displayed on the display stage ss. The posture of the lord-like character cd shown in FIG. 65 (1) is an initial posture.

  In addition, an information display unit ST1 is provided at the lower part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M on the left side shown in FIG. 65 (1). In the example shown in FIG. 65, the name of the background stage is displayed on the information display unit ST1. Here, it is a castle town stage, “castle town” is displayed on the information display section ST1, and the streets of the castle town are displayed in common in the background of the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N. The information display unit ST1 may display an effect mode, a current control state (for example, during probability change), a pre-reading notice, or a currently performed symbol. A notice (normal notice) for the variable display may be displayed.

  Further, in FIG. 65 (1), the speaker 120 is shown in the left corner, and the chance button 136 (corresponding to the first operation means) is also shown in the lower left. A second chance button 137 (corresponding to the second operation means) is also shown on the right side of the chance button 136. The second chance button 137 may be an OK button 181b of the operation key unit 181 shown in FIG. 52, or may be an operating means newly provided separately from the chance button 136.

  Note that the display positions, sizes, and display numbers of the various displays described with reference to FIG. 65 are not limited to those described here, and can be changed as appropriate. Further, the fourth symbol pd4 and the fifth symbol pd5 may be displayed with priority over other displays. For example, when movable means such as the family crest character 224E, the Yatsushiro character 224Fa, and the general character 224Fb overlap with the fourth symbol pd4 or the fifth symbol pd5 from the front side, the fourth symbol pd4 or the second symbol A plurality of five symbols pd5 may be displayed, or the display position may be changed according to the movement of the movable means.

  As shown in FIG. 65 (2), after the stop symbol is confirmed and the change icon c disappears, in FIG. 65 (3), the first hold icon h1 of the special figure 1 shown in FIG. The symbol variation display based on the hold of is started. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 65 (3), the variable display of the third symbol pd3 is started, and the variable display is also started for the fifth symbol pd5. Note that the third symbol pd3 is a low-speed fluctuation because the fluctuation display has just started. A thick, short arrow with white outline represents a low-speed fluctuation (the same applies hereinafter). During low-speed fluctuations, it may be possible to recognize the changing symbols. Also, the first hold icon h1 shown in FIG. 65 (2) moves to the stage cs in the fluctuation icon display area, and the red fluctuation icon c is displayed on the stage cs. Here, the display mode (red) of the icon when it has been a hold icon until then matches the display mode (red) of the icon after it has become a variable icon. The display mode of the variation icon represents the expectation degree (reliability) of the big hit in the symbol variation display being displayed. In other words, the normal notice is executed according to the display mode of the fluctuation icon. Even in a display mode in which the degree of expectation of a big hit is high, the symbol variation display during display is not necessarily a big hit and may result in a loss. In FIG. 65 (3), the hold icon disappears, and the numerical value display hn of the number of holds displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N on the right side becomes “0” in both FIG. 1 and FIG. In the fourth symbol pd4 shown in FIG. 65 (3), the square display corresponding to the special figure 1 has changed from gray to white, indicating that the variable figure in the special figure 1 is being displayed. In FIG. 65 (3) where the symbol variation display is started, the display content of the tutorial display ts is not changed.

  The third symbol pd3 shown in FIG. 65 (4) fluctuates at high speed. White thin and long arrows represent high-speed fluctuations (hereinafter the same). When it becomes high-speed fluctuation, it becomes difficult to recognize the fluctuating symbol. In FIG. 65 (4), a meter display appears on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The display position of the meter display is above the third symbol pd3, but the display position is not limited to this position. The display size of the meter display is larger than the hold icon and larger than the fluctuation icon c, but the display size is not limited to this size. Furthermore, the appearance timing of the meter display is not only when the third symbol pd3 becomes a high-speed fluctuation, but also when the symbol fluctuation starts, when the movement of the fluctuation icon c is completed, when a prize is awarded to the special figure starting port (when holding increases), At the start of the pre-reading notice at the time of winning (the meter display itself corresponds to the pre-fetching notice at the time of winning), at the success of a certain effect, at the first stop of the third symbol pd3, at the temporary stop of the third symbol pd3 in the pseudo-continuous effect Alternatively, it is possible to enumerate when continuing (at the start of re-variation), when reaching a reach state, when starting a super reach, during super reach, and the like. That is, all of the above-mentioned enumerations may be used as the appearance timing of the meter display. On the other hand, some of those listed above may not be applied. When the meter display appears, the display contents of the tutorial display ts are changed to display contents related to the meter display. The meter display shown in FIG. 65 (4) has a white meter frame mf and is hereinafter referred to as a white meter display MW. This white meter display MW corresponds to an example of a first meter display. The meter display includes an increase type, a decrease type, and an increase / decrease type. The meter display in the example shown in FIG. 65 is an increase type, is provided with five scales, and becomes full at the sixth stage. The white meter display MW shown in FIG. 65 (4) is displayed in an empty state (the meter is 0). This empty state corresponds to an example of the first state.

  In FIG. 65 (5), the left symbol of the third symbol pd3 changes from high-speed fluctuation to low-speed fluctuation. In FIG. (6), the fluctuation of the left symbol becomes even slower, and the left symbol (here “ The decoration 7 ") can be recognized. In FIG. 65 (6), the right symbol of the third symbol pd3 also changes from high speed fluctuation to low speed fluctuation. And in the same figure (7) following FIG. 65 (6), the left symbol temporarily stops and the fluctuation fluctuation is started (first stop). In addition, the meter rising item UpI appears at the same time as the temporary stop of the left symbol or at the timing before and after that. The meter rising item UpI corresponds to the first mini item or the first mini icon (hereinafter the same), and the display position of the meter rising item UpI is a decorative pattern that fluctuates (temporarily stops). Although the position overlaps from the front side, the display position is not limited to this position. Moreover, although the display size of the meter rising item UpI is smaller than the decorative design that is fluctuating (temporarily stopped), the display size is not limited to this size. Furthermore, the appearance timing of the meter rising item UpI is the first stop timing, when the third symbol pd3 changes rapidly, at the start of symbol variation, when the movement of the variation icon c is completed, At the time of winning (when holding increases), at the start of the pre-reading notice at the time of winning (the meter display itself corresponds to the pre-fetching notice at the time of winning), at the success of a certain performance, at the time of temporary stop of the third symbol pd3 or during the pseudo-continuous performance Time (at the start of re-variation), start of reach state, start of super reach, during super reach, etc. can be listed. That is, all the above-mentioned enumerations may be used as the appearance timing of the meter rising item UpI. On the other hand, some of those listed above may not be applied. The meter raising item UpI is an item for raising the meter displayed meter. The meter rising item UpI shown in FIG. 65 (7) is white, but as will be described later, a plurality of types of meter rising item UpI are prepared, and the rate of increase of the meter differs depending on the type.

  In FIG. 65 (8), the moving animation of the meter ascending item UpI is started, and the meter ascending item UpI displayed at the position overlapping the decorative pattern that is fluctuating (temporarily stopped) from the front side is displayed on the white meter display MW. Move from the front side to the overlapping position. In FIG. 65 (9), the variation of the right symbol in the third symbol pd3 becomes even slower, and the right symbol (here “decoration 6”) can be recognized. Further, the meter rising item UpI disappears, and the meter of the white meter display MW is increased (increased) by one scale. The color of the meter itself to be increased or decreased is a color different from the meter frame mf (here, blue), but may be the same color as the meter frame mf. The timing at which the meter rising item UpI disappears, that is, the meter increase timing is the second stop timing, when the third symbol pd3 changes rapidly, at the start of symbol variation, when the movement of the variation icon c is completed, At the time of winning a prize at the starting point (when holding increases), at the start of a pre-reading notice at the time of winning (the meter display itself corresponds to a pre-fetching notice at the time of winning), at the success of a certain production, and at the pseudo-continuous production, When stopping or continuing (at the start of re-variation), at the start of reach state, at the start of super reach, during super reach, etc. can be listed. That is, all the above-mentioned enumerations may be used as the timing of meter increase. On the other hand, some of those listed above may not be applied.

  In FIG. 65 (10), the right symbol of the third symbol pd3 temporarily stops and starts shaking fluctuation (second stop), and the second meter rising item UpI appears. The display position of the second meter raising item UpI is a position overlapping the right symbol from which the fluctuation fluctuation (temporary stop) has started from the front side. In FIG. 65 (11), the moving animation of the second meter rising item UpI is started, and the second meter rising item UpI is also moved from the front side to the position overlapping the white meter display MW. In FIG. 65 (12), the meter rising item UpI disappears, and the meter of the white meter display MW rises (increases) by one scale. As a result, the meter of the white meter display MW has been raised to the second scale.

  In FIG. 65 (13), the middle symbol that has continued to fluctuate at high speed in the third symbol pd3 becomes slow, and the middle symbol can be recognized. Here, the middle symbol is a pseudo-continuous symbol (“continuation”). In FIG. 65 (14), the pseudo-simultaneous symbol fluctuates (temporarily stops), and the entire third symbol pd3 (“decoration 7”-“continuation”). "-" Decoration 6 ") is temporarily stopped, and the pseudo-continuous production is started. In FIG. 65 (15), the pseudo-continuous effect cut-in display is performed so as to overlap the entire third symbol pd3 from the front side. In the cut-in display here, the main character, Tono-sama, appears, and the line “Still Still” is displayed, indicating that re-variation is likely to start. In FIG. 65 (16), the cut-in display disappears, and the state in which the entire third symbol pd3 (“decoration 7”-“continuation”-“decoration 6”) is temporarily stopped is displayed again and temporarily stopped. A character display of “× 2”, which is a continuous count display, is displayed so as to partially overlap the left pattern. In FIG. 65 (17), re-variation of the third symbol pd3 in the pseudo-continuous effect is started, and each of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol starts high-speed variation. In FIG. 65 (18), the character display of “× 2”, which is the continuous count display, is reduced and displayed in the lower left corner of the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

  FIG. 66 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example of the meter effect shown in FIG. 65 in stages.

  In FIG. 66 (19) following FIG. 65 (18), while the three symbols of the third symbol pd3 continue to fluctuate at high speed, the second decorative symbol display device 208M on the left starts a notice that a mini item will appear. . That is, a treasure chest icon gradually appears from the left end of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and in FIG. 66 (20), a closed treasure chest icon I1 is displayed on the information display section ST1. This treasure box icon I1 becomes a notice icon for the appearance of a mini item. In FIG. 66 (21), the treasure box icon I1 opens, and the meter rising item UpI appears from the treasure box. Here, a white meter rising item UpI appears.

  It should be noted that the treasure box icon I1 shown in FIG. 66 (20) is closed without being opened, disappears even when opened, or an item different from the meter rising item UpI (for example, an item with a question mark) Or x-marked items or unfortunate character display items) may appear. In other words, even if the treasure box icon I1 is displayed, there may be a false notice as a notice that a mini item will appear.

  Next, the movement animation of the meter rising item UpI is started, and the meter rising item UpI that appears on the second decorative symbol display device 208M moves toward the white meter display MW displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Start. In FIG. 69 (22), the meter rising item UpI that moves is located between the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the first decorative symbol display device 208L. That is, it appears that the left half of the meter rising item UpI is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the right half thereof is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. However, the frame surrounding the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M obstructs the part of the meter rising item UpI.

  In FIG. 66 (23), the meter rising item UpI is displayed so as to reach the white meter display MW and overlap the white meter display MW from the front side. In FIG. 66 (24), the meter rising item UpI disappears, the meter of the white meter display MW further rises by one scale, and the white meter display MW rises to the third scale.

  When the meter rising item UpI is displayed, the meter may always rise, but the meter may not rise. For example, the meter rising item UpI may disappear without reaching the meter display, or the meter may not rise even if it reaches.

  In FIG. 66 (25), the left symbol and right symbol of the third symbol pd3 change at a low speed, and in FIG. That is, “Decoration 4” temporarily stops in each of the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, and the fluctuation of the swing is started. The “reach” sound is output from the speaker 120 shown in FIG. In FIG. 66 (27), the change of the middle symbol that has continued to fluctuate at high speed in the third symbol pd3 becomes low, and in FIG. The right symbol that has moved to the upper left corner of 208L and also fluctuated similarly moves to the upper right corner of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Then, as shown in FIG. 66 (29), it has developed into a super reach production (swordsman reach production), and the first decorative symbol display device 208L has changed from a castle town background screen to a swordsman visit screen. However, the white meter display MW is still displayed at the top. On the other hand, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N remain the background screen of the castle town, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N still displays the display of the character cd on the display stage ss. Then, the information display unit ST1 is still displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. However, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the treasure chest icon I1 disappears.

  In addition, when it develops into a super reach production, the hold frame UI disappears and the tutorial display ts also disappears. Here, no hold icon remains, but if the hold icon remains, the hold icon also disappears. However, only the variation icon c corresponding to the currently performed symbol variation is continuously displayed. However, the fluctuation icon c may also disappear together. Alternatively, when the hold icon remains, the display of the hold icon may be continued. Moreover, the display of the tutorial display ts may be continued, and further, the display of the hold frame UI may be continued.

  In FIG. 66 (30), all the backgrounds of the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N are switched to the wilderness background, the information display unit ST1 disappears from the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device is displayed. The display of the display stage ss and the Tono-sama character cd disappears from the device 208N. However, the fifth symbol pd5 is still displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the numerical value hn of the number of reservations is still displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. In addition, on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 66 (30), the Tono-sama character and the swordsman character are displayed, and a duel scene of two people is started. However, the white meter display MW is still displayed at the top here.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 66 (31), the white meter display MW is enlarged and the Tono-sama character and the swordsman character are hidden by the enlarged white meter display MW. The enlarged white meter display MW shown in FIG. 66 (31) is a state where the meter has accumulated up to three scales (corresponding to an example of the second state). In addition, the text “Power-up” is also displayed to notify the hero of the power-up that the meter has accumulated. 66 (32) to FIG. 33 (33), the meter is used, and the white meter display MW decreases, and in FIG. 33 (33), the state is 0 (corresponding to an example of the first state). I'm back. In FIG. 66 (34), the white meter display MW which has been enlarged and returned to the state of 0 disappears, and a green aura icon OI1 is added behind the main character's character. The color of the aura icon OI1 represents the degree of expectation that is a big hit in the currently displayed symbol variation display. For example, the green aura icon has a higher expectation of jackpot than the blue aura icon, the red aura icon has a higher expectation of jackpot than the green aura icon, and the golden aura icon has a rich hit The rainbow-colored aura icon that changes into seven colors has the highest expectation level for the jackpot, and corresponds to a higher level of the jackpot (for example, a jackpot decision).

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 66 (35), a scene after the swordsman character and the swordsman character cut each other is displayed. In FIG. Is displayed, and “decoration 3”, which is different from “decoration 4” displayed in the upper left corner and upper right corner, is displayed as a medium symbol. Thereafter, the symbol variation display is finished, and the third symbol pd3 of “decoration 4”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 4” is fixedly displayed on the first ornamental symbol display device 208L, and the second ornamental symbol display device is displayed. In 208M, the fifth symbol pd3 of “decoration 4”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 4” is stopped and displayed. The super reach production here was a Hazle Supa Reach production.

  The example shown in FIGS. 65 and 66 described above is an example in which the white meter display MW does not change from the empty state (the meter is 0 state) to the full state, and the jackpot symbol is not finally displayed. Become.

  FIG. 67 is a diagram showing step by step an example in which a meter effect is performed and a big hit is made.

  Hereinafter, differences from the examples illustrated in FIGS. 65 to 66 will be mainly described, and overlapping descriptions may be omitted.

  In the state shown in FIG. 67 (1), as in the state shown in FIG. 65 (1), both the third symbol pd3 and the fifth symbol pd5 are the stop display of the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss. However, here, it is a combination of “decoration 2”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 6”. Further, the first hold icon (first hold icon) h1 shown in FIG. 67 (1) is a hold icon for the special figure 1 and is displayed in a green display mode which is a display mode of the pre-reading notice. Yes. The green display mode has a lower jackpot expectation than the red display mode.

  In FIG. 67 (2), after the stop symbol is confirmed and the change icon c disappears, in FIG. 67 (3), the first hold icon h1 of the special figure 1 shown in FIG. The base symbol variation display is started. On the stage cs in the variation icon display area shown in FIG. 67 (3), a variation icon c having a green display mode is displayed.

  In FIG. 67 (4), the white meter display MW appears on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The white meter display MW shown in FIG. 67 (4) is also an increase type, and the display is started in an empty state (a state where the meter is 0).

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 67 (5), the line “Ikuzo” is displayed on the display of the Tono-sama character cd. The display of the line “Ikuzo” corresponds to a notice that a mini item will appear. In FIG. 67 (6), a change ball icon cI appears, and the character cd of Tono-sama bears the change ball icon cI. In FIG. 67 (7), Tono-sama character cd throws a change ball icon cI, and a moving animation of the change ball icon cI is displayed. 67 (7), the change ball icon cI has moved from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In FIG. 67 (8), the change ball icon cI has a white meter display MW. The white meter display MW is displayed so as to overlap from the front side. The display state of the change ball icon cI shown in FIG. 67 (8) is changed, and an effect display ed1 is added. In FIG. 67 (9), the change ball icon cI to which the effect display ed1 is added disappears, and the white meter display MW changes to the red meter display MR while remaining empty (the meter is 0). That is, the color of the meter frame mf is replaced with a red meter display MR. 67 (6) to FIG. 67 (8), an effect in which the Tono-sama character cd continues to appear corresponds to an example of a meter change effect. The red meter display MR corresponds to an example of a fourth meter display. The red meter display MR has a higher rank than the white meter display MW (for example, the appearance rate is low), and the meter change effects shown in FIGS. 67 (6) to (8) are a kind of rank-up effects. It corresponds to. The red meter display MR shown in FIG. 67 (9) is also empty (the meter is 0). Also, a sound effect for notifying the change in meter display is output from the speaker 120 shown in FIG. 67 (9).

  In FIG. 67 (10), the left symbol of the third symbol pd3 changes from high-speed fluctuation to low-speed fluctuation. In FIG. (11), the left symbol fluctuates further, and the left symbol (here “ The decoration 7 ") can be recognized. In addition, the character cd displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N has returned to the initial posture. In FIG. 67 (11), the right symbol of the third symbol pd3 also changes from high speed fluctuation to low speed fluctuation. And in FIG. 67 (12), the left symbol temporarily stops and the fluctuation fluctuation is started (first stop). Similarly to FIG. 65 (7), the white meter rising item UpI appears at the same time as the temporary stop of the left symbol or at the timing before and after. In FIG. 67 (13), similarly to FIG. 65 (8), the movement animation of the meter rising item UpI is started, and the meter rising item UpI moves from the front side to the position overlapping the red meter display MR. In FIG. 67 (14), the meter rising item UpI disappears, and the meter of the red meter display MR rises (increases) by three graduations. This means that the red meter display MR shown in FIG. 67 is easier to accumulate than the white meter display MW shown in FIG. In other words, the probability that the red meter display RM displayed in the empty state changes to the full tank state is higher than the probability that the white meter display MW displayed in the empty state changes to the full tank state. It is comprised so that it may become. This is a state change amount (amount of increase by one meter rising item UpI) in the red meter display MR rather than a state change amount (amount of increase by one meter increase item UpI) in the white meter display MW. There will be more. Note that the color of the meter itself to be increased or decreased is a color different from the red color of the meter frame mf (blue color here), but may be the same color as the meter frame mf. The timing at which the meter rising item UpI disappears, that is, the timing at which the meter increases, is the same as the timing described in FIG. In FIG. 67 (14), the variation of the right symbol of the third symbol pd3 starts to slow down, and in FIG. 67 (15), the variation of the right symbol becomes even slower, and the right symbol (here “decoration” 7 ") becomes recognizable, and it will eventually reach the reach state. In FIG. 67 (16), it is a reach state, and the second meter rising item UpI appears so as to overlap the right symbol from the front side. In FIG. 67 (17), the movement animation of the second meter rising item UpI is started, and the second meter rising item UpI also moves from the front side to the position overlapping the red meter display MR. In FIG. 67 (18), the meter rising item UpI disappears, the meter of the red meter display MR is again increased (increased) by 3 scales, and the red meter display MR is in a full state. It should be noted that the “reach” sound is output from the speaker 120 shown in FIG. 67 (18) where the meter rising item UpI has disappeared and the rising effect of the red meter display MR has ended.

  FIG. 68 is a diagram showing the continuation of an example of the meter effect shown in FIG. 67 in stages.

  In FIG. 68 (19) that continues from FIG. 67 (18), the middle symbol that has continued to fluctuate at high speed in the third symbol pd3 becomes slow, and in the following (20), the left symbol that has fluctuated fluctuates. The right design that has moved to the upper left corner of the first decorative design display device 208L and also fluctuated similarly moves to the upper right corner of the first decorative design display device 208L. Then, as shown in FIG. 68 (21), it has developed into a super reach effect (swordsman reach effect), and as in FIG. 65 (29), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the holding frame UI disappears, and the castle town The screen changes from the background screen to the swordsman Misan screen. However, the full red meter display MR is still displayed at the top. In this super reach production, as shown in FIG. 68 (22), the background of only the first decorative symbol display device 208l among the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N is switched to the wilderness background, and the second decorative symbol is displayed. The background of the display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is still the background of the castle town, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M still has the display of the fifth symbol pd5 and the information display unit ST1. In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the display of the display stage ss and the character cd of the lord remains. Also, the full red meter display MR is still displayed at the top here. 66 may be the same as the super reach effect shown in FIG. 68. Conversely, the super reach effect shown in FIG. 68 is the same as the super reach effect shown in FIG. It may be.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 68 (23), the full red meter display MR is enlarged and the Tono-sama character and the swordsman character are hidden by the enlarged red meter display MR. Yes. In addition, the text “Power-up” is also displayed to notify the hero of the power-up that the meter has accumulated. Here, because the meter is full, Tono-sama greatly powers up and wins, that is, the expectation of jackpot increases. 68 (24) to FIG. 25 (25), the meter is used, the red meter display MR decreases, and after passing through the fifth state, in FIG. It corresponds to an example of a state). In FIG. 68 (26), the red meter display MR that has been enlarged and returned to the state of 0 disappears, and a gold aura icon OI2 is added behind the main character's character. As described above, the color of the aura icon OI2 corresponds to a color that suggests a big hit in the currently displayed symbol variation display. It should be noted that the color of the aura icon OI2 may be a rainbow color corresponding to a higher level of big hit (for example, big hit determination).

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 68 (27), a scene after the swordsman character and the swordsman character cut each other is displayed, and in FIG. Is displayed, and “decoration 7”, which is the same as “decoration 7” displayed in the upper left corner and upper right corner, is displayed as a large symbol. In FIG. 68 (29), three third symbols pd3 of “decoration 7”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 7” are displayed in a shaking manner. In FIG. pd3 is fixedly displayed, and it is notified that the jackpot with probability change has been won.

  The example shown in FIGS. 67 and 68 described above is an example in which the red meter display MR changes from the empty state (the meter is 0) to the full state, and the big hit symbol is finally displayed. become. When the red meter display MR changes from the empty state to the full tank state, the jackpot symbol is finally more than when the red meter display MR remains empty and does not change to the full state. It is easy to confirm. Further, in the red meter display MR, when the state changes from the empty state to the full tank state, the big hit symbol is finally displayed more easily than when the empty state does not change to the full tank state. Also, the super reach effect described with reference to FIG. 68 corresponds to an example of a notice display that is displayed when the red meter display MR changes to the full tank state.

  FIG. 69 is a diagram showing step-by-step modifications of the effect by the change ball icon cI described with reference to FIG.

  FIGS. 69 (1) to (6) are the same as FIGS. 67 (1) to (6). In FIG. 69 (7), the character cd throws a change ball icon cI and changes. A moving animation of the ball icon cI is displayed. In FIG. 69 (7), the changing ball icon cI moves from the third decorative symbol display device 208N toward the changing icon c in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In FIG. The icon cI hits the variation icon c, and the variation icon c is displayed so as to partially overlap from the front side. In addition, the display state of the change ball icon cI shown in FIG. 69 (8) is changed, and an effect display ed2 is added. The effect display ed2 here is the same effect display as the effect display ed1 when the meter display hits as shown in FIG. 67 (8), but may be a different effect display. In FIG. 69 (9), the change ball icon cI to which the effect display ed2 is added disappears, and the change icon c that has been green so far changes to red. The red variation icon is more likely to win a big hit in the displayed symbol variation display than the green variation icon, and is ranked up here. Note that the rank may be lowered by the change ball icon cI. In the example shown in FIG. 69, the change ball icon cI changes the display mode of the variation icon c, but the display mode of the hold icon may be changed.

  FIG. 70 is a diagram for explaining various types of meter displays in detail. The meter display described with reference to FIG. 70 is an increase type.

  The meter display shown in FIGS. 70A to 70F corresponds to an example of the white meter display MW (first meter display shown in FIGS. 65 and 66 and FIGS. 67 (4) to (8). ). That is, the meter frame mf is a white meter display. The white meter display MW is a default meter display. Further, the white meter display MW shown in FIG. 70A is in an empty state (a meter is in a 0 state), and corresponds to an example of a first state. Further, FIG. 70 (a) also shows a white meter raising item UpI. The meter rising item UpI is an item whose rate of increase of the meter changes depending on the type of meter display, and the white meter rising item UpI is an item for raising the meter displayed meter by a first amount.

  FIG. 70B shows a state in which the meter of the white meter display MW that has been in the empty state is raised by one scale by the white meter raising item UpI shown in FIG. The white meter rising item UpI is an item to be raised by one scale with respect to the white meter display MW. Note that the state of the white meter display MW shown in FIG. 70 (b) corresponds to an example of a second state that is a state between a full state and an empty state.

  FIG. 70 (c) shows a blue meter rising item UpIb of the same color as the color of the meter itself to be increased or decreased. This blue meter raising item UpIb is an item for raising the meter-displayed meter by a second amount.

  FIG. 70 (d) shows a state (second state) in which the meter of the white meter display MW, which is in an empty state, is raised by two scales by the blue meter raising item UpIb shown in FIG. 70 (c). Has been. The blue meter rising item UpIb is an item to be raised by two scales with respect to the white meter display MW.

  FIG. 70 (e) shows a red meter rising item UpIr. This red meter rising item UpIr is an item for raising the meter-displayed meter by a third amount.

  FIG. 70 (f) shows a state (second state) in which the meter of the white meter display MW that has been empty has been raised by four scales by the red meter rising item UpIr shown in FIG. Has been. The red meter rising item UpIr is an item to be raised by 4 scales with respect to the white meter display MW.

  In addition, a golden meter rising item may be displayed. The meter of the white meter display MW that was in an empty state is in a state where it has been raised by 5 scales (second state) or a full tank state (in which it has been raised by 6 scales) by the golden meter rising item. . Thus, the rate of increase of the meter is not constant and may vary depending on the lottery result or the like.

  The meter display shown in FIGS. 70 (g) to (l) is the red meter display MR (corresponding to an example of the fourth meter display) shown in FIGS. 67 (9) to (18). That is, the meter frame mf is a red meter display. The red meter display MR has a greater amount of meter storage than the white meter display MW. In the increase type meter display, the closer to the full state, the higher the expectation (reliability) of the big hit. Therefore, the expectation level (reliability) of the big hit is higher in the state in which the red meter display MR is displayed than in the state in which the white meter display MW is displayed. The higher the degree of expectation for jackpot, the easier it is to finally display the jackpot symbol form in the first symbol. Further, the expectation of winning an advantageous jackpot may be higher in the state in which the red meter display MR is displayed than in the state in which the white meter display MW is displayed. The advantageous big hit here is, for example, a big hit with probability variation or a big hit with a large number of rounds with a ball.

  FIG. 70 (g) shows a default white meter rising item UpI, and FIG. 70 (h) shows a red meter display MR meter in an empty state, the white meter rising item. A state (fifth state) is shown that is raised by 3 scales at a time by UpI. The white meter rising item UpI is an item to be raised by 3 scales with respect to the red meter display MR.

  FIG. 70 (i) shows a blue meter rising item UpIb. In FIG. 70 (j), a red meter display MR meter that is empty is displayed by the blue meter rising item UpIb. It shows a state where it has risen by 6 scales at once, that is, a state where the tank is full (sixth state). The blue meter rising item UpIb is an item to be raised by 6 scales (all scales) with respect to the red meter display MR.

  As described above, in the state where the red meter display MR is displayed, the rate of increase of the meter by the meter increase item UpI is tripled compared to the state where the white meter display MW is displayed.

  FIG. 70 (k) shows a green meter rising item UpIm. The green meter rising item UpIm is an item to be raised by 9 scales with respect to the red meter display MR. In the meter display, when the meter is full, the remaining scale (the overflowed scale) may be invalidated. However, in order to handle the remaining scale effectively, the empty meter display is additionally displayed. Is done. The type of meter display that is additionally displayed may be the same as the type of meter display that is full, or may be ranked up. That is, in FIG. 70 (l), a red meter display MR of the same type as the meter display type that is full is additionally displayed below the meter display that is full. On the other hand, unlike FIG. 70 (l), a meter display in which the meter frame mf is a gold meter may be displayed below the red meter display MR that is full. The additionally displayed red meter display MR shown in FIG. 70 (l) has risen to 3 scales corresponding to the remaining scales.

  The meter display shown in FIG. 70 (m) and FIG. 70 (n) is a rainbow meter display MN whose meter frame mf is a rainbow color. This rainbow meter display MN also corresponds to an example of a fourth meter display. In the state in which the rainbow meter display MN is displayed, the rainbow meter display MN is always full no matter how many colors of the meter rising item are displayed. For example, as shown in FIG. 70 (m), even if the rainbow meter display MN is empty and the white meter rising item UpI, the rainbow meter display MN is full as shown in FIG. 70 (n). Become a tongue. In such a rainbow meter display MN, when the meter rises, the rainbow meter is always full, and further, the jackpot is confirmed.

  However, in the rainbow meter display MN, even if there is a remaining scale (overflowed scale) when the tank is full, the big hit is confirmed, so a new meter as shown in FIG. The display is not added and the remaining scale is invalidated.

  In addition, when one meter rising item is displayed regardless of a color, you may make it raise only by the same scale (for example, 1 scale). In this case, the color of the meter rising item becomes the big hit expectation.

  In addition, the appearance timing of the meter rising item has been described above. However, if supplemented here, the meter rising item may be a big hit during symbol variation, long-term variation, pre-reach, super-reach, or temporary It may be easy to appear when stopping.

  The meter display described above may be a jackpot notice (so-called normal notice) in the symbol fluctuation display (the fluctuation) being displayed when the meter display starts to be displayed, or starts after the fluctuation. It may be a jackpot notice (pre-read notice) in the symbol variation display. That is, in the case of the expected degree of jackpot in the above description, the expected degree of jackpot in the fluctuation may be used, or the expected degree of jackpot in the symbol variation display started after that.

  Further, the white meter display MW shown in FIGS. 70 (a) to (f), the red meter display MR shown in FIGS. 70 (g) to (l), FIG. 70 (m) and FIG. In addition to the color of the meter frame mf, the rainbow meter display MN shown in) may have different display sizes, and may have different display positions. Further, in the white meter display MW, the red meter display MR, and the rainbow meter display MN, the colors of the meters themselves may be different so that all the colors are different.

  Further, when viewed on one meter display, the first state is that the meter frame is white and empty as shown in FIG. 70 (a), and FIG. 70 (b), FIG. 70 (d), or FIG. The intermediate state shown in (f) where the meter frame is white and is neither empty nor full is the second state, and the meter frame is white and full is the third state (not shown in FIG. 70). In FIG. 70 (g) and the like, the meter frame is red and empty is the fourth state, and the meter frame is red and is not empty and not full as shown in FIG. 70 (h). Is the fifth state, and the meter frame shown in FIG. 70 (j) is red and full is the sixth state.

  Hereinafter, the description of the meter effect will be continued, but the description of matters that overlap with the items described so far may be omitted.

  FIG. 71 is a diagram showing, in stages, an example of a rank-up effect that tells whether the meter display changes.

  The state shown in FIG. 71 (1) is a stop display of the combination of the decorative symbols of both the third symbol pd3 and the fifth symbol pd5. However, here, it is a combination of “decoration 5”-“decoration 6”-“decoration 3”. In this state, there is no special figure hold, and the first symbol pd1 continues to be stopped until it wins the special figure starting port 230,232. Further, a white meter display MW is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 71 (1). The white meter display MW here is empty. The white meter display MW may continue to be displayed from the stage before FIG. 71 (1), and may already be displayed across multiple variations.

  In FIG. 71 (2), there is one ball in the first special figure starting port 230, and in FIG. (3), the variation display of the third symbol pd3 is started in accordance with the start of the symbol variation display of the special diagram 1. On the stage cs in the variation icon display area, the display of the variation icon c in the white display mode, which is the default display mode, is started. Further, even when the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, the empty white meter display MW is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the display of the empty white meter display MW is displayed. Continues until FIG. 71 (18).

  In FIG. 71 (4), which is changing the pattern of special figure 1, there is a single ball in the first special figure starting port 230, and the first stage hs1 in the holding icon display area shown in FIG. Display of the hold icon (the first hold icon h1 in FIG. 1) in the white display form, which is the default display form, has started. Further, also in FIG. 71 (6), there is a single ball entering at the first special figure starting port 230, and the display state of the pre-reading notice is displayed in the second stage hs2 in the hold icon display area shown in FIG. The display of the hold icon in the green display mode (second hold icon h2 in FIG. 1) is started.

  In the third symbol pd3 shown in FIG. 71 (8), “decoration 7”-“decoration 1”-“decoration 1”, which is a combination of the decorative symbols of the lost symbol, is stopped and displayed, and in FIG. The combination of the decorative symbols of the symbols is confirmed and displayed, and the variation icon c in the white display mode disappears from the stage cs in the variation icon display area. The white meter display MW continues to be displayed even during the period during which the third symbol pd3 is being stopped (including during the fixed display) in FIGS. 71 (1) and 71 (8) to (9). The meter display may be always displayed. That is, the meter display may be displayed across a plurality of variable displays in the third symbol pd3.

  In FIG. 71 (10), the variable display of the third symbol pd3 by the hold of the special figure 1 represented by the first hold icon h1 which is the default display mode is started, and the first hold icon h1 is changed to the change icon c. doing. The variation icon c shown in FIG. 71 (10) is the default display mode, similar to the display mode for the hold icon. In FIG. 71 (9), the hold icon that was the second hold icon h2 in the display mode of the pre-reading notice is shifted to the display mode as it is, and becomes the first hold icon h1 in FIG. Yes.

  In FIG. 71 (11), a rank-up effect that tells whether the meter display changes is started, and a change icon I2 appears gradually from the left end of the second decorative symbol display device 208M on the left side. In FIG. A change icon I2 is displayed on the display unit ST1. The change icon I2 is marked with the characters “weird”.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N on the right side shown in FIG. 71 (13), the Tono-like character cd draws a bow, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. It has been changed to

  In FIG. 71 (14), the Tono-sama character cd releases an arrow, and the arrow icon that is released and represents the arrow is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M on the left side. Flying toward the displayed change icon I2. In FIG. 71 (15), the flying arrow icon is located between the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the first decorative symbol display device 208L. That is, the left half of the arrow icon appears on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the right half appears to be displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. However, the frame surrounding the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M obstructs and part of the arrow icon is invisible.

  In FIG. 71 (16), the arrow icon has successfully hit the change icon I2 displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and in FIG. The display mode of I2 is changed, and an effect display ed3 is added. The effect display ed3 here is also an effect display similar to the effect display ed1 shown in FIG. 67 (8), but may be a different effect display such as a different color. It should be noted that the character cd displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N has a different posture from the initial posture although the pose has been changed. In FIG. 71 (18), the change icon I2 to which the effect display ed3 is added moves from the second decorative symbol display device 208M toward the white meter display MW displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the white icon The meter display MW is displayed so as to overlap from the front side.

  72 is a diagram showing the continuation of an example of the rank-up effect shown in FIG. 71 in stages.

  In FIG. 72 (19) following FIG. 71 (18), the change icon I2 to which the effect display ed3 is added disappears, and the white meter display MW changes to the red meter display MR while remaining empty (the meter is 0). It has changed. That is, the color of the meter frame mf is replaced with a red meter display MR. The red meter display MR shown in FIG. 72 (19) is also empty (the meter is 0). In the rank-up effect described above, the meter display has succeeded in raising the rank from the white meter display MW to the red meter display MR, but may fail. For example, an icon different from the change icon I2 (for example, an icon with a question mark) appears, and the character cd disappears without pulling the bow, or the arrow of the one with the bow pulled. The icon disappears without hitting the icon, and even if the arrow icon hits, the icon disappears without adding the effect display, or even if the effect display is added, the white meter display MW There may be a case where the icon disappears without moving and the meter display remains the white meter display MW without any change. Similarly, even with the change icon I2, the Tono-sama character cd does not draw a bow, the arrow icon does not hit, the effect display is not added, or the white meter display MW does not move. Then, the change icon I2 may disappear, and the meter display may remain unchanged with the white meter display MW. In addition, even if the change icon I2 with the effect display ed3 added or the change icon I2 not added has overlapped with the white meter display MW from the front side, the meter display itself is not ranked up, but the meter may rise. On the contrary, the meter may never rise. Furthermore, the meter display itself may be ranked down (for example, the red meter display MR changes to the white meter display MW).

  In FIG. 72 (20), the variation display of the third symbol pd3 and the fifth symbol pd5 is ended, and the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 5”-“decoration 6”-“decoration 3” is stopped and displayed. The character cd has returned to the initial posture. Further, the fourth symbol pd4 is also displayed as a gray square and a gray circle, and the loss of the special figure 1 is represented. In FIG. 72 (21), the final display of the combination of the decorative pattern of the lost pattern in the third pattern pd3 is performed, and the change icon c disappears. The red meter display MR continues to be displayed even during the period in which the third symbol pd3 is stopped and displayed. Here, the red meter display MR is empty.

  In FIG. 72 (22), the symbol fluctuation display based on the hold of the first hold icon h1 of the special figure 1 shown in FIG. 72 (21) is started, and the low speed fluctuation is started in the third symbol pd3. Further, the display content of the tutorial display ts is changed in accordance with the start of the variable display of the third symbol pd3, and the display content is related to the meter display. In FIG. 72 (23), the third symbol pd3 starts high-speed fluctuation, and in the second decorative symbol display device 208M on the left side shown in FIG. That is, as in the example shown in FIG. 66, a treasure box icon gradually appears from the left end of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and in FIG. 72 (25), a closed treasure box icon is displayed on the information display unit ST1. I1 is displayed. In FIG. 72 (26), the treasure box icon I1 is opened, and a white meter rising item UpI appears from the treasure box.

  Next, the movement animation of the meter rising item UpI is started, and the meter rising item UpI that appears on the second decorative symbol display device 208M moves toward the red meter display MR displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Start. 72 (27), the meter rising item UpI is located between the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In FIG. 72 (28), the meter rising item UpI is red. The meter display MR is displayed so as to overlap from the front side. In FIG. 72 (29), the meter ascending item UpI disappears, and in the red meter display MR in which the meter can be stored more easily than the white meter display MW, the meter is increased by 3 scales at once.

  In FIG. 72 (30), the left symbol and the right symbol of the third symbol pd3 change at a low speed, and in FIG. That is, “Decoration 4” temporarily stops in each of the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, and the fluctuation of the swing is started. In the following FIG. 72 (32), the left symbol that has fluctuated has moved to the upper left corner of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the right symbol that has also fluctuated has also changed to the upper right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Move to the corner. 72 (33), as in the example shown in FIG. 66, has developed into a super reach production (swordsman reach production), and the first decorative symbol display device 208L has changed from a castle town background screen to a swordsman visit screen. It has changed. However, the red meter display MR is still displayed in a state where three scales are accumulated.

  In FIG. 72 (34), the backgrounds of the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N are all switched to the wilderness background. Duel scene of has started. The red meter display MR is still displayed in a state where three scales are accumulated.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 72 (35), the red meter display MR is enlarged and displayed in a state where three scales are accumulated (corresponding to an example of the fifth state). In addition, the text “Power-up” is also displayed to notify the hero of the power-up that the meter has accumulated.

  In addition, the meter of the white meter display MW may rise between FIG. 71 (3)-the same figure (10) before a meter display changes.

  FIG. 73 is a diagram showing step by step a continuation of the example of the rank-up effect shown in FIG.

  The meter is used from FIG. 72 (36) to FIG. 73 (37), and the red meter display MR decreases. In FIG. I'm back. In FIG. 73 (38), the red meter display MR that has been enlarged and returned to the zero state disappears, and a golden aura icon OI2 suggesting a big hit is added behind the main character's character.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 73 (39), the scene after the Tono-sama character and the swordsman character cut each other is displayed. In FIG. Is displayed, and “decoration 4” that is the same as “decoration 4” displayed in the upper left corner and upper right corner is displayed as a large symbol. 73 (41), three third symbols pd3 of “decoration 4”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 4” are displayed in a shaking manner. In FIG. 42 (42), these three third symbols are displayed. pd3 is fixedly displayed, and it is informed that the jackpot with a short time (electric support) is won.

  In the example shown in FIG. 66 and the examples shown in FIGS. 72 to 73, the meter display is the same as the three scales, but in the example shown in FIG. 66 that is the white meter display MW, the lost super reach effect is produced. In this example, which is a red meter display MR, it is a big hit super reach production. In this way, the degree of expectation for jackpots varies depending on the meter display itself (here, the meter frame mf) separately from the storage state of the meter. That is, if the meter storage state (including the empty state) is the same, the red meter display MR has a higher expectation level than the white meter display MW.

  FIG. 74 is a diagram showing an example of re-lottery that may continue from FIG. 73 (41).

  In the example shown in FIG. 73, a red meter display MR having a higher expectation degree of jackpot than the white meter display MW is displayed, and further, the red meter display MR is not in an empty state but in a state where three scales are accumulated. . Therefore, the degree of expectation for winning an advantageous jackpot is high, and a re-lottery may be performed as shown in FIG. In other words, winning big wins (for example, big hits with probability variation or big hits with many rounds) that are more advantageous when the red meter display MR is stored for 3 scales than the white meter display MW is stored for 3 scales. Expectation to be higher.

  Here, from the state where three third symbols pd3 “decoration 4”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 4” shown in FIG. As shown, a button effect is started at the center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Here, the button effects include a button image 136a imitating the chance button 136, an arrow display 136b and a character display of “press” as a prompt display prompting the operation (pressing) of the chance button 136, and the chance button 136. The remaining period meter display 136c as a display relating to a period during which an operation is accepted as valid (operation valid period) is displayed as one set. The remaining period meter display 136c is a display representing the remaining period in which the operation of the chance button 136 is accepted. It should be noted that the button image 136a is displayed in red, and the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 is also lit in red to prompt the user to press the button image 136a.

  In FIG. 74 (43 ') to (44'), the chance button 136 is not pressed, the operation effective period decreases, and the chance button 136 is pressed at the timing shown in FIG. In response to pressing of the chance button 136, as shown in FIG. 74 (46 ′), the shaking display of “decoration 4”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 4” is “decoration 7”-“decoration 7”-“ In the same figure (47 '), the combination of "decoration 7"-"decoration 7"-"decoration 7" is confirmed and displayed, and it is informed that the jackpot with probability change has been won. Yes. In other words, it is promoted from jackpot with short time (electric support) to jackpot with probability change.

  Even when the chance button 136 is not pressed within the operation effective period, after the operation effective period elapses, the shaking display of “decoration 4”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 4” is displayed as “decoration 7”-“decoration”. 7 "-" decoration 7 "will change to a shaking display, will be confirmed, and will be promoted to a big hit with certainty.

  FIG. 75 is a diagram showing step by step an example of a mini-game that tells whether or not a meter display appears.

  In FIG. 75 (1), the variation display of the third symbol pd3 and the fifth symbol pd5 is ended, and the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 7”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 1” is stopped and displayed. . Further, the fourth symbol pd4 is also displayed as a gray square and a gray circle, and the loss of the special figure 1 is represented. In FIG. 75 (2), the final display of the combination of the decorative symbols of the lost pattern in the third symbol pd3 is performed, and the variation icon c disappears.

  In FIG. 75 (3), the symbol fluctuation display based on the hold of the first hold icon h1 of the special figure 1 shown in FIG. 75 (2) is started, and the low speed fluctuation is started in the third symbol pd3. Further, the display content of the tutorial display ts is changed in accordance with the start of the variable display of the third symbol pd3, and the display content is related to the mini-game such as “If you win over drinking”. In FIG. 75 (4), the third symbol pd3 starts high-speed fluctuation.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 75 (5), the third symbol pd3 disappears, and the background image of the townscape of the castle town so far changes to a background image of a mini-game compared to drinking between Tonosama and Tsuji. doing. In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the fifth symbol pd5 is continuously displayed. In FIG. 75 (6), an explanation display that a sword dance meter (meter display) is displayed when Tono-sama wins the mini game is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L of the background image of the mini game. In FIG. (7), a mini-game for drinking comparison is started. In FIG. 75 (8), the victory of Tono-sama in the mini game is notified, and in FIG. 75 (9), it is displayed that a sword dance meter has been acquired.

  In FIG. 75 (10), the effect display ed4 is displayed together with the sword dance meter on the display of the third symbol pd3 on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Here, it is difficult to visually recognize what color the sword dance meter is displayed by the effect display ed4. In the present specification, the phrase “difficult to visually recognize” means that it is relatively difficult to visually recognize compared to the states before and after that. In FIG. 75 (11), the effect display ed4 disappears, and the white meter display MW, which is a sword dance meter, is clearly displayed.

  If Tono-sama is defeated in the mini game, the sword dance meter is not displayed. The effect by the mini game described with reference to FIG. 75 corresponds to the effect of acquiring the meter display.

  FIG. 76 is a diagram showing interstage examples in which a big hit is determined by the change when the meter display becomes full.

  FIGS. 76 (1) to (9) are the same as FIGS. 65 (1) to (9). In FIG. 76 (10), the right symbol of the third symbol pd3 temporarily stops, Swing fluctuation is started (second stop), and a golden meter rising item UpIg appears. As described above, the golden meter raising item UpIg raises the meter of the white meter display MW by 5 scales or 6 scales. In FIG. 76 (10), the white meter display MW stored for one scale is displayed, and the appearance of the golden meter rising item UpIg means that the big hit is determined with the change. That is, when a meter rising item (gold color here or red as shown in FIG. 70 (e)) where the meter is easy to accumulate appears, a big hit is greater than when a meter rising item (for example, white) where the meter is difficult to accumulate appears. Expectation increases. In FIG. 76 (11), the golden meter rising item UpIg moves from the front side to the position overlapping the white meter display MW. In FIG. 76 (12), the golden meter rising item UpIg disappears, and the meter of the white meter display MW becomes full. In the case of an increase of 6 divisions, there is an excess of one division, but since the big hit has been confirmed by the change and the next change will be after the big hit game ends, the remaining one division will continue until the next change. It cannot be carried over and is invalidated. In addition, a voice “Congratulations” is output from the speaker 120 illustrated in FIG. The sound output here corresponds to a jackpot notification sound for notifying that the meter is full and the jackpot is confirmed.

  In FIG. 76 (13), the middle symbol that has continued to fluctuate at high speed in the third symbol pd 3 becomes slow, and the middle symbol (here “decoration 7”) can be recognized. In FIG. 76 (14), three third symbols pd3 of “decoration 7”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 7” are displayed in a shaking manner. In FIG. pd3 is fixedly displayed, and it is notified that the jackpot with probability change is won.

  The example shown in FIG. 76 described above is an example of the case where the white meter display MW changes from an empty state (a state where the meter is 0) to a full state, and the big hit symbol is finally displayed. When the white meter display MW changes from the empty state to the full tank state, the big hit symbol is finally reached, rather than when the white meter display MW remains empty and does not change to the full tank state. Is easy to confirm. Further, also in the white meter display MW, the case where the state is changed from the empty state to the full state is more than the case where the state is not changed from the empty state to the full state as in the examples shown in FIGS. However, it is easy to finally display the big hit symbol.

  FIG. 77 is a diagram showing step by step an example in which the meter display is displayed in the holding frame.

  77 is also provided with a base icon UIb ′ extending left and right with a vertical stripe pattern. The base icon UIb ′ shown in FIG. 77 is a base icon UIb shown in FIG. Higher than. Also, an empty white meter display MW is displayed instead of the tutorial display ts in the effect display area provided on the right side in the holding frame UI ′ shown in FIG. 77. Since the white icon display MW has a high base icon UIb ′ shown in FIG. 77, the white meter display MW is completely within the holding frame UI ′ and is integrated with the holding frame UI ′. It suffices if a part of UI ′ is covered. In other words, the meter display only needs to partially or entirely overlap with the holding frame UI ′, and the holding frame UI ′ corresponds to an example of a holding display area in a broad sense, and is also an example of an icon display area. Equivalent to. In the example shown in FIG. 77, the meter display is always displayed in the holding frame UI '. That is, the meter display is also displayed during the period in which the hold frame UI 'is displayed, and the meter display also disappears when the hold frame UI' disappears. However, the tutorial display ts is always displayed, and the meter display may be displayed instead of the tutorial display ts only when the meter is produced.

  In FIG. 77 (1), the variation display of the third symbol pd3 and the fifth symbol pd5 is ended, and the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 2”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 6” is stopped and displayed. . Further, the fourth symbol pd4 is also displayed as a gray square and a gray circle, and the loss of the special figure 1 is represented. In FIG. 77 (2), the combination display of the decorative pattern of the loss in the third pattern pd3 is displayed, and the variation icon c disappears.

  77 (3), the symbol fluctuation display based on the hold of the first hold icon h1 of the special figure 1 shown in FIG. 77 (2) is started, and the low speed fluctuation is started in the third symbol pd3. Then, the third symbol pd3 starts high-speed fluctuation. In the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 77 (5), the line “Ikuzo” is displayed on the display of the character cd of Tono-sama, and a mini-item appearance notice is performed. In FIG. 77 (6), a white meter rising item UpI has appeared, and Tono-sama's character cd carries the meter rising item UpI. In FIG. 77 (7), the Tono-like character cd throws the meter rising item UpI, and the meter rising item UpI is displayed on the white meter display MW in the holding frame UI '. Note that the meter rising item UpI shown in FIG. 77 (7) does not overlap with the white meter display MW, but only partially overlaps the base icon UIb ′. You may display so that all may overlap.

  In FIG. 77 (8), the meter rising item UpI disappears, and the white meter display MW changes to a state where one scale is accumulated. In the central portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 77 (9), a tutorial display such as “Continue when meter is full” is displayed.

  In FIG. 77 (10), the left symbol of the third symbol pd3 changes from high-speed fluctuation to low-speed fluctuation. In FIG. (11), the left symbol fluctuates further, and the left symbol (here “ The decoration 7 ") can be recognized. In FIG. 77 (11), the right symbol of the third symbol pd3 also changes from high speed fluctuation to low speed fluctuation. And in FIG. 77 (12), the left symbol temporarily stops and the fluctuation fluctuation is started (first stop). In addition, a golden meter rising item UpIg appears at the same time as the temporary stop of the left symbol or at the timing before and after that. In FIG. 77 (13), the movement animation of the golden meter rising item UpIg is started, and the golden meter rising item UpIg moves to above the white meter display MW in the holding frame UI '. In FIG. 77 (14), the variation of the right symbol in the third symbol pd3 becomes even slower, and the right symbol (here “decoration 6”) can be recognized. Further, the golden meter rising item UpIg disappears, and the meter of the white meter display MW rises (increases) to a full tank at once.

  In FIG. 77 (15), the middle symbol that has continued to fluctuate at high speed in the third symbol pd3 becomes slow, and the middle symbol can be recognized. Here, the middle symbol is a pseudo-continuous symbol (“continuation”). In FIG. 77 (16), the pseudo-simultaneous symbol fluctuates (temporarily stops), and the entire third symbol pd3 (“decoration 7”-“continuation”). "-" Decoration 6 ") is temporarily stopped, and the pseudo-continuous production is started. In FIG. 77 (17), as in FIG. 65 (15), the pseudo-continuous effect cut-in display is performed so as to overlap the entire third symbol pd3 from the front side. In FIG. 77 (18), the cut-in display disappears, the third symbol pd3 in the pseudo-continuous effect starts to change again, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol each start low-speed fluctuation, and the left symbol A character display of “× 2”, which is a continuous count display, is displayed so that a part thereof overlaps. The white meter display MW that has been in a full state continues to be displayed until re-variation is started, but the white meter display MW returns to an empty state in response to the start of re-variation. Then, after the pseudo-continuous effect continues, the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed by the symbol variation display currently being performed.

  77, the pseudo-continuous effect described with reference to FIG. 77 shows that the meter display (in this case, the white meter display MW, but other meter display (for example, red meter display MR)) may be full. This corresponds to an example of a notice display that is displayed when the display changes.

  The white meter display MW may continue to be displayed in a full state until the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed. Alternatively, the full white meter display MW may be displayed only until the temporary stop of the pseudo continuous symbol (start of the pseudo continuous effect) in FIG. 77 (16), and may return to an empty state.

  The timing at which the meter display returns to the empty state is the symbol variation display (including the symbol variation display subject to notice when the meter display is a normal notice), or the meter display. Is a symbol change display immediately before the symbol change display subject to the prefetch notice, or in the symbol change display subject to the prefetch notice, the empty symbol is displayed when the lost symbol is stopped or confirmed. You may return to the state. For example, in each of the symbol variation displays described above, the state may be returned to the empty state when the symbol is stopped without being full. That is, the second state may return to the first state, or the fifth state may return to the fourth state. Further, in the second state or the fifth state, it may be configured to always return to the empty state at the timing when the lost symbol is stopped or displayed. Alternatively, even in the third state or the sixth state, it may be configured to always return to an empty state at the timing when the lost symbol is stopped or confirmed. In addition, the meter display may be returned to the empty state and the display of the empty state may be continued only after the lost symbol is stopped and displayed, and the next symbol variation display starts immediately without any subsequent hold. If not, the meter display may disappear, but the display may continue in an empty state. In addition, when there is a subsequent hold and the next symbol variation display is started immediately, the meter display may continue to be displayed in an empty state.

  Further, the white meter display MW may be changed to the red meter display MR within the holding frame UI ′, or the red meter display MR may be displayed from the beginning.

  FIG. 78 is a diagram showing step by step an example in which a mini item is acquired and stocked when the meter display meter is full.

  FIGS. 78 (1) to (6) are the same as FIGS. 65 (1) to (6). In FIG. 78 (7), the left symbol (here “decoration 7”) is temporarily stopped. The shaking fluctuation is started (first stop). Also, a red meter rising item UpIr appears at the same time as the temporary stop of the left symbol or at the timing before and after that. This red meter rising item UpIr is displayed at a position overlapping the left symbol from the front side.

  In FIG. 78 (8), the moving animation of the red meter rising item UpIr is started, and the red meter rising item UpIr moves from the front side to the position overlapping the empty white meter display MW. In FIG. 78 (9), the fluctuation of the right symbol of the third symbol pd3 becomes even slower, and the right symbol (here “decoration 7”) can be recognized. Further, the red meter rising item UpIr disappears, and the meter of the white meter display MW is increased (increased) by 4 scales.

  In FIG. 78 (10), the right symbol of the third symbol pd3 temporarily stops, starts swinging fluctuation (second stop), and a reach state is formed. In addition, the golden meter rising item UpIg appears at the same time as the reach state is formed or at the timing before and after. In FIG. 78 (11), the golden meter rising item UpIg moves from the front side to the position where it overlaps with the white meter display MW stored for four scales. In FIG. 78 (12), the golden meter rising item UpIg disappears, and the meter of the white meter display MW becomes full. The golden meter rising item UpIg is an item for raising the meter of the white meter display MW by 5 scales. If the white meter display MW stored for 4 scales, the scale of 3 scales (overflow) However, in FIG. 78 (12), there is no indication of the remaining scale. In FIG. (13), the mini item is displayed at the right end of the full white meter display MW. A pseudo-announcement item NI, which is a type, appears, and a character display of “GET” is displayed so as to overlap from the front side on the right symbol or the like temporarily stopped in the third symbol pd3. The pseudo-continuous notice item NI is an icon for notifying that the pseudo-continuous effect will be started thereafter, and the character display “GET” is a character display indicating that the pseudo-continuous notice item NI has been acquired.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 78 (14), the “decoration 7” is in the reach state. In the reach state, the white meter display MW that has been full until then changes to an empty state, the character display “GET” disappears, and the pseudo-continuous notice item NI moves to the second decorative symbol display device 208M. And it is displayed on the information display part ST1. The second decorative symbol display device 208M functions as a means for displaying the stocked icon, and the pseudo continuous notice item NI is stocked.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 78 (15), the remaining three graduations are added to the empty white meter display MW. In other words, the display of the overflowed state due to the full tank state is started at this timing. The opportunity to raise the white meter display MW continues after this.

  The white meter display MW in FIGS. 78 (12) to (15) described above is not ranked down, but the portion that has become full is replaced with the pseudo-continuous notice item NI, and the remaining portion. Is displayed again.

  In FIG. 78 (16), the pseudo continuous announcement item NI stocked in the second decorative symbol display device 208M moves to the position of the middle symbol that continues to change at high speed, and the pseudo continuous announcement item NI is digested. In addition, a text display of “Activate” is displayed below the pseudo-continuous notice item NI displayed at the position of the middle symbol. The character display of “Activation” is a character display indicating that the pseudo-announcement item NI is activated, and the pseudo-continuous effect is started immediately thereafter.

  In FIG. 78 (17), the middle symbol that has continued to fluctuate at high speed in the third symbol pd3 is fluctuating (temporarily stopped). The middle symbol here is a pseudo-continuous symbol ("continuation"), and the entire third symbol pd3 ("decoration 7"-"continuation"-"decoration 6") is temporarily stopped, and the pseudo-continuous effect starts. Is done.

  In the example described above, when the meter display becomes full, various mini items appear without being limited to the pseudo-continuous notice item NI, and the appearing mini items can be stocked. If the mini item that appears is an item related to jackpot (for example, a pseudo-announcement item NI), the meter display full state is equivalent to high expectation of jackpot, Eventually, the big hit symbol is easily displayed.

  FIG. 79 is a diagram showing an example in which a plurality of items are stocked in a single full meter display.

  FIGS. 79 (1) to (6) are the same as FIGS. 65 (1) to (6). In FIG. 79 (7), the left symbol (here “decoration 7”) is temporarily stopped. The shaking fluctuation is started (first stop). Further, two meter rising items, a red meter rising item UpIr and a blue meter rising item UpIb, appear at the same time as the temporary stop of the left symbol or at the timing before and after. That is, a plurality of meter rising items appear simultaneously.

  In FIG. 79 (8), the movement animation of two meter rising items is started, and the red meter rising item UpIr and the blue meter rising item UpIb move from the front to the position where the white meter display MW in the empty state overlaps. To do. As described above with reference to FIG. 70, the meter of the white meter display MW is an item for raising the red meter up item UpIr by 4 scales, and the blue meter rise item UpIb is an item for raising the scale by 2 scales. is there. In FIG. 79 (9), the meter rising items of both the red meter rising item UpIr and the blue meter rising item UpIb disappear, and the white meter display MW meter, which has been empty until now, is the red meter rising item. Ascending up to 4 scales as UpIr, and ascending by 2 scales as blue meter rising item UpIb, the white meter display MW shown in FIG. 79 (9) is full.

  In FIG. 79 (10), two pseudo-announcement items NI that are a kind of mini-item appear at the right end of the full white meter display MW, and “decoration 7” of the right design that is temporarily stopped, etc. One character display of “GET” is displayed so as to overlap from the front side. In the example shown in FIG. 78, the white meter display MW is full with one red meter rising item UpIr. In this example, there are two red meter rising items UpIr and blue meter rising item UpIb. White meter display MW is full with meter rising items. Whether the red meter rise item UpIr or the blue meter rise item UpIb, the meter rise rate is higher than the default white meter rise item UpI, and the red meter rise item UpIr and the blue meter rise item UpIb This is an easy-to-store item. From this, it can be said that there is a high possibility that a plurality of items can be stocked when a meter rising item that easily stores the meter appears. The red meter display MR may be more likely to be able to stock a plurality of items than the white meter display MW.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L in the reach state shown in FIG. 79 (11), the white meter display MW that has been full until then changes to an empty state, and the character display “GET” disappears. One pseudo continuous notice item NI moves to the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and two pseudo continuous notice items NI are stocked in the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 79 (12), the white meter display MW in the empty state is still displayed, and the opportunity to raise the white meter display MW remains after this. When there is no chance or when the big hit is confirmed, the white meter display MW may be erased when it becomes empty or may be erased after returning to the empty state. Also, one of the two pseudo-continuous notice items NI stocked in the second decorative symbol display device 208M moves to the position of the middle symbol that continues to fluctuate at high speed. “Activate” is displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 79 (12), first, the one pseudo-announcement item NI is digested, and the entire third symbol pd3 is temporarily stopped and re-variation is started. Then, a second temporary stop and a start of re-variation are performed by the stocked second pseudo-continuous notice item NI.

  Of the items stocked in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, there are items that can be carried over until the next symbol variation display (for example, pre-reading notice items), but they cannot be carried over and are currently being carried out. There is also an item (for example, a pseudo-continuous notice item NI) that is digested during the symbol change display.

  Also, as in the example shown in FIG. 79, there may be a case where a plurality of items are stocked when one meter is full. On the contrary, there are cases where items are not stocked even when the meter is full. May be. For example, when the white meter display MW becomes full due to the white meter rising item UpI, the pseudo continuous notice item NI itself does not appear or is not stocked even if it appears.

  FIG. 80 is a diagram showing step by step an example in which the meter display in the full state may be carried over to the next symbol variation display.

  FIGS. 80 (1) to (8) are the same as FIGS. 79 (1) to (8). In FIG. 79 (9), the change in the right symbol of the third symbol pd3 is slow. Thus, the right design (here “decoration 1”) can be recognized. Further, the meter rising items of both the red meter rising item UpIr and the blue meter rising item UpIb disappear and the white meter display MW meter which has been empty so far becomes full even in the example of FIG. It has become. However, as shown in FIG. 80 (10), in this example, an item such as the pseudo-continuous notice item NI does not appear, and the white meter display MW is kept full. Further, in the third symbol pd3, “decoration 1” different from the left symbol of “decoration 7” is temporarily stopped in the right symbol, and fluctuation fluctuation is started. That is, it does not enter the reach state as in the example shown in FIG. In FIG. 80 (10), the display content of the tutorial display ts is changed in response to the white meter display MW becoming full, and the display content is related to the pre-reading notice such as “next chance”. .

  In FIG. 80 (11), the change of the middle symbol that has continued the high-speed fluctuation in the third symbol pd3 becomes low speed, and the middle symbol (here “decoration 1”) can be recognized. In FIG. 80 (12), three third symbols pd3 of “decoration 7”-“decoration 1”-“decoration 1” are displayed in a shaking manner. This combination of “decoration 7”-“decoration 1”-“decoration 1” is a chance, and in FIG. 80 (13), the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed in response to the shaking indication (temporary stop) of the chance. The flash pattern fd emits light with a transparent light guide plate arranged on the front side of the light. Note that the flash symbol may be displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L instead of the light guide plate.

  In FIG. 80 (14), the third symbol pd3 of the chance is stopped and displayed, and the fourth symbol pd4 is also displayed as a gray square and a gray circle, indicating the loss of the special symbol 1 in FIG. In FIG. 80 (15), the third symbol pd3 of the chance is displayed and the fluctuation icon c disappears. Also, in response to the final display of the third symbol pd3, the display content of the tutorial display ts is changed again, and the display content suggests a chance item such as “the order of 711”. Even if the third symbol pd3 is displayed in a stopped state or a final display, the full white meter display MW is still displayed. In FIG. 80 (16), the symbol fluctuation display based on the hold of the first hold icon h1 of the special figure 1 shown in FIG. 15 (15), that is, the next symbol fluctuation display is started, and the low speed fluctuation starts in the third symbol pd3. Has been. Even when the next symbol variation display is started, the full white state meter display MW continues to be displayed in a full state and is displayed across the continuous symbol variation display. 80 (9) to (15) in FIG. 80 corresponds to a pre-reading notice, and the full white meter display MW in FIG. 16 (16) corresponds to a normal notice.

  FIG. 81 is a diagram showing step by step an example in which the meter display is full and the item is digested without being stocked even if the item appears.

  FIGS. 81 (1) to (6) are the same as FIGS. 65 (1) to (6). In FIG. 81 (7), the left symbol (here “decoration 7”) is temporarily stopped. The shaking fluctuation is started (first stop). In addition, a golden meter rising item UpIg appears at the same time as the temporary stop of the left symbol or at the timing before and after that. This golden meter rising item UpIg is displayed at a position overlapping the left symbol from the front side.

  In FIG. 81 (8), the movement animation of the golden meter rising item UpIg is started, and the golden meter rising item UpIg moves from the front side to the position where it overlaps the empty white meter display MW. In FIG. 81 (9), the variation of the right symbol in the third symbol pd3 becomes even slower, and the right symbol (here “decoration 7”) can be recognized. Further, the golden meter rising item UpIg disappears, and the meter of the white meter display MW is full.

  In FIG. 81 (10), the right symbol of the third symbol pd3 temporarily stops, starts swinging fluctuation (second stop), and a reach state is formed. At the same time as the reach state is formed, or at the timing before and after the reach state, an operation means notice display icon 136I which is a kind of mini item appears on the right end of the full white meter display MW, and the third symbol pd3 is displayed. Among them, the character display of “GET” is displayed so as to overlap the temporarily stopped right symbol or the like from the front side. The operation means notice display icon 136I is an icon for notifying that an effect of the operation means notice (for example, button notice) will be started thereafter, and the character display “GET” has acquired the operation means notice display icon 136I. It is a character display showing that. The operation means notice display icon 136I is an icon imitating the operation means (here, the chance button 136), and the operation means notice display icon 136I shown in FIG. 81 (10) is a white icon. The white color here means that no change occurs even if the operating means is operated. That is, an effect (for example, a notice effect) according to the operation of the operation means is not started. Therefore, it can be said that the operation of the operation means has not been accepted, or that the operation has been invalidated as accepted. In the following description, it is assumed that the operation of the operation unit is not accepted, and that the operation is invalidated as accepted, and the operation of the operation unit is invalid. This color indicates that the operation is invalid.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L in the reach state shown in FIG. 81 (11), the white meter display MW that has been full until then changes to an empty state, and the character display “GET” disappears and continues. In FIG. 12 (12), the operation means notice display icon 136I displayed at the right end of the white meter display MW moves to the position of the middle symbol during high-speed fluctuation, and changes the display mode. That is, as shown in FIG. 81 (13), the button effect is started for the middle symbol. Also in the button effect here, as with the button effect shown in FIG. 74, the button image 136a, the arrow display 136b as the promotion display, the character display of “press”, and the remaining period meter display 136c are one set. Is displayed. Further, red is a color that prompts the operation means to operate, the button image 136a is displayed in red, and the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 is also lit in red to prompt the user to press the button.

  In FIG. 81 (14), the chance button 136 is not pressed and the operation valid period is reduced. However, the chance button 136 is pressed at the next timing (15) in FIG. In response to pressing of the chance button 136, as shown in FIG. 81 (16), a character display “Gekiatsu” is displayed so as to overlap the third symbol pd3 from the front side. This character display corresponds to a normal notice.

  In the example shown in FIG. 81 described above, the item acquired by the meter full is used immediately. That is, the acquired item is used without moving to a decorative symbol display device that is different from the decorative symbol display device whose display has been started. It is also used during symbol variation display that is being performed when display is started. However, there may be cases where the operation means notice display icon 136I remains white and is stocked until the operation valid period of the operation means arrives, and in some cases, stock until the next and subsequent symbol fluctuation display may be stocked. Also good.

  Even if the chance button 136 is not pressed within the operation effective period, after the operation effective period has elapsed, the character display “Gekiatsu” is displayed and the normal notice is executed.

  FIG. 82 is a diagram showing step by step an example in which two meter displays are displayed and both are disappeared.

  In FIG. 82 (1), the variation display of the third symbol pd3 and the fifth symbol pd5 is ended, and the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 7”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 1” is stopped and displayed. The 4 symbol pd4 is also displayed as a gray square and a gray circle, and the loss of the special figure 1 is represented. In FIG. 82 (2), the combination display of the decorative pattern of the lost pattern in the third pattern pd3 is displayed, and the variation icon c disappears.

  In FIG. 82 (3), the symbol fluctuation display based on the hold of the first hold icon h1 in the special figure 1 shown in FIG. 82 (2) is started, and the low speed fluctuation is started in the third symbol pd3. As shown in FIG. 82 (4), in the first decorative symbol display device 208, after the display of variation of the third symbol pd3 is started, an empty white meter display MW (for example, on the upper left of the third symbol pd3) , Corresponding to an example of the first meter display). Next, as shown in FIG. 82 (5), an empty white meter display MW (for example, corresponding to an example of a fourth meter display) is displayed at the upper right of the third symbol pd3. Here, the display of the two white meter displays MW is started separately, but the display may be started together.

  In FIG. 82 (7), a red meter rising item UpIr appears in the left pattern of “decoration 7” temporarily stopped, and in FIG. 82 (8), the red meter rising item UpIr is displayed on the left white meter display MW. To the position where it overlaps from the front side. In FIG. 82 (9), the red meter rising item UpIr disappears, and only the meter on the left white meter display MW is increased by four scales.

  In FIG. 82 (10), a golden meter rising item UpIg appears in the right pattern of “decoration 7” temporarily stopped, and in FIG. (11), the gold meter rising item UpIg is displayed on the right white meter display MW. To the position where it overlaps from the front side. In FIG. 82 (12), the golden meter rising item UpIg disappears, and only the meter on the right white meter display MW is increased by 5 scales.

  In FIG. 82 (13), the fluctuation of the middle symbol that has continued to fluctuate at high speed in the third symbol pd3 becomes low speed, and in FIG. 82 (14), the middle symbol can be recognized. Here, the middle symbol is a pseudo-continuous symbol (“continuation”), and in FIG. 82 (15), the pseudo-continuous symbol fluctuates (temporarily stops) and overlaps the pseudo-continuous symbol from the front side. Three white meter rising items UpI are displayed. As shown in FIG. 82 (16), two of these three white meter rising items UpI move to the left white meter display MW, and the other one moves to the right white meter display MW.

  In each of the two white meter displays MW shown in FIG. 82 (17), the meter is raised by the meter raising item UpI that has moved. That is, the white meter display MW on the left side rises by two scales and becomes full, and the white meter display MW on the right side rises by one scale and becomes full. Furthermore, when the tank is full, a chance-up item CUI appears on the left white meter display MW and a character display of “GET” is displayed. On the right white meter display MW, the swordsman reach item RI is displayed. A character display of “GET” is displayed as it appears. The chance-up item CUI that appears on the left white meter display MW is an icon indicating that the degree of expectation to be a big hit in the current symbol change display has increased, and the swordsman reach item that appeared on the right white meter display MW RI is an icon for notifying that it will develop into a swordsman reach that is a kind of super reach production in the currently displayed symbol variation display.

  In FIG. 82 (18), each of the two white meter displays MW that have been fully filled disappears, the character display of each “GET” disappears, and the chance decoration item CUI, the swordsman reach item RI, and the second decorative design It moves to the display device 208M and is stocked on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. Note that each of the two white meter displays MW that are full may be changed to an empty state without erasing them. As shown in FIG. 82 (18), the meter display may be turned off.

  FIG. 83 is a diagram showing an example in which two meter displays are displayed and only one of them disappears.

  In the third symbol pd3 shown in FIG. 83 (1), “decoration 7”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 1”, which is a combination of the decorative symbols of the lost symbol, is stopped and displayed, and in FIG. The combination of the decorative pattern of the symbol is confirmed and displayed, and the variation icon c having the white display mode disappears from the stage cs in the variation icon display area.

  In FIG. 83 (3), the variable display of the 3rd symbol pd3 by the hold of the special figure 1 represented by the first hold icon h1 which is the default display mode is started, and the first hold icon h1 is changed to the change icon c. doing. The variation icon c shown in FIG. 83 (3) is the default display mode, similar to the display mode for the hold icon. In FIG. 83 (2), the hold icon, which was the second hold icon h2 in the display mode of the pre-reading notice, is shifted and shifted to the first hold icon h1 in FIG. 83 (3). Yes.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 83 (4), after the variation display of the third symbol pd3 is started, the empty white meter display MW (for example, the first symbol pd3 is displayed on the upper left of the third symbol pd3). Equivalent to an example of meter display). Next, as shown in FIG. 83 (5), an empty white meter display MW (for example, corresponding to an example of a fourth meter display) is displayed at the upper right of the third symbol pd3.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 83 (6), the line “Ikuzo” is displayed on the display of the character cd of Tono-sama, and a mini-item appearance notice is performed. In FIG. 83 (7), a change ball icon cI appears, and the character cd of Tono-sama bears the change ball icon cI. In FIG. 83 (8), the Tono-sama character cd throws the change ball icon cI. In FIG. 83 (9), the change ball icon cI hits the right white meter display MW, and the right white meter display MW It is displayed so as to overlap the right end from the front side. The display state of the change ball icon cI shown in FIG. 83 (9) is changed, and an effect display ed1 is added. The change ball icon cI displayed with the effect display ed1 added at the right end of the right white meter display MW is displayed across the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Yes. In FIG. 83 (10), the change ball icon cI to which the effect display ed1 is added disappears, and only the white meter display MW on the right side changes to the red meter display MR while being empty (the meter is 0). Yes. That is, it corresponds to an example in which the fourth meter display is changed from the first state to the fourth state. A plurality of meter displays MW may change at the same time. That is, according to this example, the white meter display MW on the left side may be changed to the red meter display MR while remaining empty (the meter is in the zero state) together with the white meter display MW on the right side.

  In FIG. 83 (11), the left symbol of the third symbol pd3 changes from high speed fluctuation to low speed fluctuation, and in FIG. 83 (12), the left symbol temporarily stops and starts fluctuation fluctuation (first). Stop). In addition, a blue meter rising item UpIb appears at the same time as the temporary stop of the left symbol or at the timing before and after. That is, one blue meter rising item UpIb is displayed so as to overlap the left symbol of “decoration 7” from the front side.

  In FIG. 83 (13), the split animation of the blue meter rising item UpIb is started, and one blue meter rising item UpIb is split into two, and the left empty white meter display MW and the right side A blue meter rising item UpIb is displayed on each empty red meter display MR. As described above, the blue meter rising item UpIb is an item that is raised by 2 scales for the white meter display MW and is raised by 6 scales for the red meter display MR. In FIG. 83 (14), the blue meter rising items UpIb on the left and right sides disappear, and the meter on the left white meter display MW rises by only two scales, whereas the meter on the right red meter display MR It is rising to a full tank at once. In the red meter display MR on the right side that is full, a swordsman reach item RI appears and a character display of “GET” is displayed. It should be noted that no item has appeared in the left white meter display MW that has not reached the full state.

  In FIG. 83 (17), only the red meter display MR on the right side of the two meter displays that has been full disappears, and the character display “GET” also disappears, and the swordsman reach item RI is the second decorative design. It moves to the display device 208M and is stocked on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. In FIG. 83 (17), the third symbol pd3 is stopped and displayed, and the fourth symbol pd4 is also displayed as a gray square and a gray circle, indicating the loss of the special symbol 1 in FIG. In FIG. 83 (18), the third symbol pd3 is confirmed and the fluctuation icon c disappears. After all, the stock swordsman reach item RI was not used in the symbol change display at the time of appearance. Accordingly, the swordsman reach item RI here corresponds to a pre-reading type icon for notifying the development of the swordsman reach which is a kind of super reach production in the next symbol variation display.

  84 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 83 in stages.

  In FIG. 84 (19) following FIG. 83 (18), the symbol variation display based on the hold of the red first hold icon h1 which is the pre-reading notice mode of FIG. In the 3 symbol pd3, the low speed fluctuation is started. Note that the fluctuation icon c is also displayed in a red display mode, and functions as a normal notice. In addition, the white meter display MW on the left side accumulated up to two scales shown in FIG. 83 (18) is still displayed even after a new symbol variation display is started, and has been carried over to the next symbol variation display. become. That is, a continuous symbol variation display is straddled with the meter accumulated.

  In FIG. 84 (20), the third symbol pd3 starts high-speed fluctuation, and in FIG. 84 (21), the left symbol of the third symbol pd3 changes from high-speed fluctuation to low-speed fluctuation. In FIG. 84 (22), the left symbol fluctuates more slowly, the left symbol (here “decoration 7”) becomes recognizable, and the right symbol of the third symbol pd3 also changes from the fast fluctuating to the low fluctuating. Has changed.

  In FIG. 84 (23), the left symbol temporarily stops and the fluctuation of the shake starts (first stop). In addition, a white meter rising item UpI appears at the same time as the temporary stop of the left symbol or at the timing before and after.

  In FIG. 84 (24), the movement animation of the white meter rising item UpI is started, and the white meter rising item UpI moves from the front side to the position overlapping the white meter display MW. In FIG. 84 (25), the white meter rising item UpI disappears, and the meter of the white meter display MW is raised by one scale. Also, at the timing shown in FIG. 84 (25), the vehicle enters the reach state, and the sound “reach” is output from the speaker 120 shown in FIG.

  In FIG. 84 (26) after entering the reach state in this way, the swordsman reach item RI stocked in the second decorative symbol display device 208M is activated, and the character display “invoking” is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. Is displayed. In FIG. 84 (27), the left symbol that has fluctuated has moved to the upper left corner of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the right symbol that has also fluctuated has changed to the upper right corner of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Move to. The white meter display MW displayed at the upper left also moves to the center position. Then, as shown in FIG. 84 (28), it has developed into a super reach effect (swordsman reach effect), and the first decorative symbol display device 208L has changed from a castle town background screen to a swordsman visit screen. The swordsman reach item RI has disappeared from the second decorative symbol display device 208M shown in FIG. 84 (28). The swordsman reach production started in this way is the same as the swordsman reach production shown in FIG. 68 (22) and after, and detailed explanation is omitted, but here, the white meter display MW has been stored only up to 3 scales. Nevertheless, in FIG. 84 (33), a golden aura icon OI2 is added behind the Tono-sama character. In the example shown in FIG. 66, in the power-up from the white meter display MW that has been stored only up to 3 divisions, the green aura icon OI1 is shown in FIG. 66 (34), but this is shown in FIG. In the example, if multiple meter displays are displayed in the previous symbol variation display, it is easier to hit big than the case where only one meter display is shown, and the color of the aura icon is also a color with high expectation of big hit It becomes easy to become. Even when a plurality of meter displays are displayed, a meter display different from the white meter display MW (for example, a red meter display MR or the like) is displayed rather than only the default white meter display MW. Is displayed more easily, and the color of the aura icon is likely to be a color with a higher expectation level for the jackpot.

  All of the meter displays so far are of the increase type, and the display was started in the empty state (the meter is 0), but the meter display is between the empty state and the full state. The display may be started in the state (second state or fifth state).

  FIG. 85 is a diagram showing step by step an example in which the display is started in a state where the increase type meter display is accumulated halfway.

  In FIG. 85 (1), the variation display of the third symbol pd3 and the fifth symbol pd5 is finished, and the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 2”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 6” is stopped and displayed. . In FIG. 85 (2), the final display of the combination of the decorative symbols of the losing pattern in the third symbol pd3 is performed, and the variation icon c disappears. Further, the fourth symbol pd4 is also displayed as a gray square and a gray circle, and the loss of the special figure 1 is represented.

  In FIG. 85 (3), the symbol fluctuation display based on the hold of the first hold icon h1 of the special figure 1 shown in FIG. 85 (2) is started, and the low speed fluctuation is started in the third symbol pd3. Further, the display content of the tutorial display ts is changed in accordance with the start of the variable display of the third symbol pd3, and here, a character string such as “when the meter appears with a little accumulated” scrolls in the tutorial display ts. Displayed.

  In FIG. 85 (4), the third symbol pd3 starts high-speed fluctuation, and the display is started on the third symbol pd3 while the white meter display MW is accumulated from the beginning to the middle. The white meter display MW shown in FIG. 85 (4) is a state where one scale is stored, and corresponds to an example of the second state. In addition, a “chance” sound is output from the speaker 120 shown in FIG. 85 (4) in accordance with the appearance of the meter display in a state where the meter is accumulated halfway.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 85 (5), the line “Ikuzo” is displayed on the display of the character cd of Tono-sama, and a mini item appearance notice is made. In FIG. 85 (6), a golden meter rising item UpIg appears, and the character cd of Tono-sama bears the golden meter rising item UpIg. In FIG. 85 (7), Tono-like character cd throws a golden meter rising item UpIg, and the golden meter rising item UpIg is located between the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. ing. In FIG. 85 (8), the golden meter rising item UpIg hits the white meter display MW and is displayed so as to overlap the white meter display MW from the front side. In FIG. 85 (9), the golden meter rising item UpIg disappears, and the white meter display MW changes from a state where one scale is accumulated to a full state. Since the gold meter rising item UpIg is an item that raises the meter at least for 5 scales, when the display is started with the meter display accumulated halfway, when the golden meter rising item UpIg appears, The meter is full.

  In the white meter display MW, the big hit symbol is finally determined when the state of being stored halfway is changed to the full tank state than when the state of being stored halfway is not changed to the full tank state. Easy to display. Furthermore, in the case where the white meter display MW is displayed in the state where it is accumulated halfway, the big hit symbol is finally displayed more easily than when the display is started in an empty state. The same applies to the red meter display MR.

  In the state where the meter is stored halfway (second state), the rate of increase of the meter by the meter increase item is increased. For example, compared with the state where the meter is 0 (first state), the rate of increase of the meter by the meter increase item may be doubled.

  So far, the bar type (gauge type) meter display has been described, but the meter display may be a display indicating a numerical value.

  FIG. 86 is a diagram showing an example of a meter effect by meter display showing numerical values in a stepwise manner.

  In FIG. 86 (1), the third symbol pd3 is changing at high speed, and the tutorial display ts has a display content such as “When the meter is red”. On the second decorative symbol display device 208M shown in FIG. 86 (2), a white numerical meter display DW appears, and from the speaker 120 shown in FIG. 86 (2), a sound effect (appearance) appears. Sound) is output. The white numerical meter display DW shown in FIG. 86 (2) corresponds to an example of the first meter display, and its state is a state where the numerical value is 00%. This state is an example of the first state. Equivalent to. In FIG. 86 (2), the tutorial display ts has changed to display contents such as “Meter MAX reached”.

  In FIG. 86 (3), the eight-seen character 224Fa, which is one of the movable means, falls from above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In response to the operation of the movable means, a white meter rising item UpI appears as shown in FIG. 86 (4). However, the falling Yatsushiro character 224Fa is located in front of the white meter rising item UpI, and a part of the white meter rising item UpI is relatively difficult to visually recognize. In FIG. 86 (5), the white meter rising item UpI moves downward, the overlap with the falling Yatsushiro character 224Fa is eliminated, and the visibility of the meter rising item UpI is improved. In FIG. 86 (6), the eight generations 224Fa rises and returns to the initial position, and the movement animation of the white meter raising item UpI is started. The white meter rising item UpI moves from the front side to the position overlapping the white numerical meter display DW displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. The white meter rising item UpI shown in FIG. 86 (6) is located between the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the white meter rising item UpI shown in FIG. 86 (7). The UpI is displayed at a position overlapping the white numerical meter display DW. The numerical display of the white numerical meter display DW shown in FIG. 86 (7) is temporarily difficult to visually recognize due to the white meter rising item UpI. In FIG. 86 (8), the white meter rising item UpI disappears, the visibility of the numerical display of the white numerical meter display DW is restored, and the numerical display increases from 00% to 10%. Yes. The state of the white numerical meter display DW displaying the numerical value of 10% shown in FIG. 86 (8) corresponds to an example of the second state.

  In FIG. 86 (9), the shogunate 224Fb falls from above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. As shown in FIG. 86 (10), a change ball icon cI appears at a position behind the general character 224Fb in accordance with the movement of the general character 224Fb, which is a movable means. A part of the change ball icon cI is relatively difficult to visually recognize. In FIG. 86 (11), the change ball icon cI moves downward, the overlap with the falling general's character 224Fb is eliminated, and the visibility of the change ball icon cI is improved. In FIG. 86 (12), the general character 224Fb moves up and returns to the initial position, and the change ball icon cI moves from the front side to the position overlapping the white numerical meter display DW displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. doing. In FIG. 86 (13), the change ball icon cI disappears, and the white numeric meter display DW until then changes to a red numeric meter display DR (corresponding to an example of a fourth meter display). In other words, the meter display is replaced with a different type. The change of the meter display here is not made by the accumulated numerical value but by a change effect (in this case, an effect using the change ball icon cI). Further, the rate of increase in the numerical value varies depending on the relationship between the color of the numeric meter display and the color of the meter rising item, that is, the relationship between the type of the numeric meter display and the type of the item, as in the description using FIG. To do.

  In FIG. 86 (14), there is a single ball in the first special figure starting port 230, and the first stage hs1 in the holding icon display area shown in FIG. Should be displayed. However, in FIG. 86 (15), the green meter rising item UpIm is displayed at the display position of the first hold icon h1, and it is difficult to confirm the presence of the first hold icon h1. . In FIG. 86 (16), the green meter rising item UpIm moves from the front side to the position where it overlaps the red numerical meter display DR, and the first stage hs1 shown in FIG. The presence of the hold icon h1 can be confirmed. Note that the hold icon may be displayed on the near side of the meter rising item.

  The appearance of the meter rising item here is triggered by winning a prize at the first special figure starting port 230, but it may be triggered by winning a prize at the usual figure starting port accompanied by a prize ball, or accompanied by a prize ball Regardless of whether or not it is possible to trigger a game ball passing through the usual figure starting gate, it may be triggered by winning a prize at the second special figure starting port 232 (electric Chu), or there is only a prize ball It may be triggered by winning a prize in the general winning opening 226, or may be triggered by entering a ball outlet for production.

  Further, when the meter display is displayed, the item (not limited to the meter rising item, for example, a chance-up item) can be obtained by winning or entering the special drawing start opening 230, 232, etc., compared to the case where the meter display is not displayed. CUI, swordsman reach item RI, etc.) are likely to appear.

  In FIG. 86 (17), the green meter rising item UpIm disappears, and the numerical display of the red numerical meter display DR increases from 10% to MAX. This MAX is a display representing 100%, for example. The state of the red numeric meter display DW shown in FIG. 86 (17) corresponds to an example of a sixth state.

  In the meter effect shown in FIG. 86, when the numerical meter display is in the MAX display state, as shown in FIG. 86 (18), the character display of “Gekiatsu” is displayed so as to overlap the numerical meter display from the front side. . The character display of “Gekiatsu” may be a display indicating that the big hit in the change is rich or that the big hit is confirmed.

  FIG. 87 is a diagram showing step by step an example in which the numerical meter display shown in FIG. 86 changes according to the operation of the operation means.

  87 (1) shows that the third symbol pd3 is changing at high speed. In FIG. 87 (2), there is one ball entering the first special figure starting port 230, and the holding shown in FIG. In the first stage hs1 of the icon display area, the display of the first hold icon h1 of the special figure 1 is started. The first hold icon h1 shown in FIG. 87 (3) is a button image 136a imitating the chance button 136 displayed on the white round icon in red to prompt the operation. That is, the display mode of the first hold icon h1 is a so-called button hold display mode. Further, the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 is also lit in red to prompt the operation. In FIG. 87 (4), the chance button 136 is operated.

  In FIG. 87 (5), in response to the operation of the chance button 136, the white numerical meter display DW changes to a red numerical meter display DR. On the other hand, in the display mode of the first hold icon h1, the button image 136a is eliminated, and only the white round icon, that is, the default display mode is set. Here, when the chance button 136 is actually operated, the first hold icon h1 does not change to the display mode of the prefetch notice, even though the first hold icon h1 is in the button hold display mode. The meter display has been replaced with a different type of meter display. This is an effect of notifying the big hit with the change, and in the case of a pre-reading notice for notifying the big hit after the next change, the first hold icon h1 may be changed to the display form of the pre-reading notice. Note that the numerical meter display can also be used as a pre-reading notice (for example, carry over to the next change after the MAX display).

  Thus, when the meter display is displayed, the hold icon for the button hold is more likely to be displayed when winning or entering the special figure starting port 230, 232 or the like than when the meter display is not displayed.

  FIG. 88 is a diagram showing an example of an effect different from the meter effect described so far in stages.

  FIG. 88 shows an effect in which a display representing a certain amount or number is displayed as in the meter display described so far, but here, the number of characters appearing is used instead of the meter. The display using the number of appearances of the character corresponds to an example of the first meter display or an example of the fourth meter display.

  In FIG. 88 (1), the variation display of the third symbol pd3 and the fifth symbol pd5 is ended, and the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 7”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 1” is stopped and displayed. . In FIG. 88 (2), the final display of the combination of the decorative pattern of the lost pattern in the third pattern pd3 is performed, and the change icon c disappears. Further, the fourth symbol pd4 is also displayed as a gray square and a gray circle, and the loss of the special figure 1 is represented.

  In FIG. 88 (3), the symbol fluctuation display based on the hold of the first hold icon h1 of the special figure 1 shown in FIG. 88 (2) is started, and the low speed fluctuation is started in the third symbol pd3. Further, the display content of the tutorial display ts is changed in accordance with the start of the variable display of the third symbol pd3, and the display content is “When a character appears”. In FIG. 88 (4), the third symbol pd3 starts high-speed fluctuation.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 88 (5), the third symbol pd3 disappears, the background image of the castle town so far disappears, and below the character display such as “Opportunity with all members gathering”, The silhouettes of the four characters are displayed in a horizontal row. The state shown in FIG. 88 (5) corresponds to the empty state (the meter is 0 state) in the meter display, that is, the first state or the fourth state, in which no character display is displayed. In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the fifth symbol pd5 is continuously displayed.

  In FIG. 88 (6), Princess Chibi character display cd1 appears at the right end of first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the character display changes to “3 more people”. In FIG. 88 (7), a heel character display cd2 appears at the left end of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the character display changes to “two more”. In FIG. 88 (8), a princess character display cd3 appears on the left side of the Chibi princess character display cd1, and the character display changes to “one more person”. Each of the state shown in FIG. 88 (6), the state shown in FIG. 88 (7), and the state shown in FIG. 88 (8) corresponds to the second state or the fifth state.

  In the example shown in FIG. 88, when three people are gathered, as shown in FIG. 88 (9), the character display of “failure” is displayed, and the whole group cannot be assembled, and the first decorative design shown in FIG. The display device 208L returns to the background image of the castle town, and the display of the variable display of the third symbol pd3 is resumed. Then, in FIG. 88 (11), the variation display of the third symbol pd3 and the fifth symbol pd5 is finished, and the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 5”-“decoration 6”-“decoration 3” is stopped and displayed. ing. In FIG. 88 (12), the final display of the combination of the decorative pattern of the lost pattern in the third pattern pd3 is performed, and the change icon c disappears. Further, the fourth symbol pd4 is also displayed as a gray square and a gray circle, and the loss of the special figure 1 is represented.

  Note that the color of the character's silhouette is usually gray, but when the other person is left, the silhouette of the remaining one character may be displayed in red. In this case, the set of all four persons is confirmed, and the display of the red silhouette corresponds to a notice of success. The state in which all four people are gathered corresponds to the full state in the meter display, that is, the third state or the sixth state. In this example of gathering characters, when all four people are gathered, the expectation level of jackpot is very high, and the level of jackpot may be high, or a level higher than the jackpot density (for example, jackpot confirmation). Moreover, even if all four people do not gather, it does not become “failure”, and a degree of expectation of jackpot may be given to some extent, or even if only three people gather, there may be a big hit due to the change Alternatively, there may be a case where a big hit is caused by a symbol variation display started after the variation.

  FIG. 89 is a diagram showing an example of a case where an error occurs during the meter display.

  FIGS. 89 (1) to (4) are the same as FIGS. 83 (1) to (4). In FIG. 89 (5), a dish full tank error occurs, which is shown in FIG. In the upper center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L (just above the third symbol pd3), an error display ER1 such as “please remove the sphere” is displayed. This error display ER1 hides the right half or more of the empty white meter display MW displayed at the upper left of the third symbol pd3. That is, a part of the error display ER1 is displayed so as to overlap a part of the white meter display MW from the front side. Note that at least a part (for example, all) of the error display ER1 may be displayed overlapping with at least a part (for example, all) of the white meter display MW from the front side. Further, the error display ER1 may be a display having transparency, and may overlap the meter display from the front side or the overlapping part may be seen through.

  Also, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 89 (6), the left symbol of the third symbol pd3 changes from high-speed fluctuation to low-speed fluctuation, and in FIG. However, a part of the error display ER1 is displayed overlapping the part of the left symbol (here, “decoration 7”) that is temporarily stopped, from the front side, while the fluctuation fluctuation is started (first stop). Note that at least a part (for example, all) of the error display ER1 may be displayed so as to overlap at least a part (for example, all) of the decorative symbol from the front side. Thus, the error display ER1 is displayed with priority over the meter display and is displayed with priority over the third symbol pd3.

  In FIG. 89 (7), the red meter rising item UpIr is displayed so as to overlap the left symbol of the third symbol pd3 from the front side. In FIG. 89 (8), the red meter rising item UpIr is displayed. However, it has moved from the front side to the position where it overlaps the white meter display MW. However, a part of the error display ER1 also overlaps with a part of the red meter rising item UpIr from the front side. In FIG. 89 (9), the red meter rising item UpIr disappears and the meter of the white meter display MW should have risen by 4 scales, but the right half or more of the white meter display MW is hidden by the error display ER1. As a result, it is impossible to confirm how far the meter has risen. However, from the speaker 120 shown in FIG. 89 (9), one note is raised by one scale, and here, the sound of four notes is output. Note that the meter storage (rising state) is not limited to the output sound from the speaker 120, but can also be notified by the light emission mode of light emitting means such as lamps and frame lamps around the decorative symbol display device.

  In FIG. 89 (10), the fluctuation of the right symbol of the third symbol pd3 becomes low speed, and in FIG. 89 (11), the right symbol temporarily stops and the fluctuation fluctuation starts (second stop), 2 A white meter rising item UpI, which is the first meter rising item, appears so as to overlap the right symbol from the front side. As shown in FIG. 89 (12), the white meter rising item UpI has also moved from the front side to the position overlapping the white meter display MW. However, a part of the error display ER1 also overlaps with a part of the white meter rising item UpI from the front side. In FIG. 89 (13), the white meter rising item UpI disappears, and the meter of the white meter display MW should have increased by one scale, but the error display ER1 still overlaps, so how far the meter has increased Although it cannot be confirmed whether or not the sound has been made, the sound of one note is output from the speaker 120 shown in FIG. 89 (13).

  In FIG. 89 (14), a white meter rising item UpI has appeared without the mini item appearance notice shown in FIG. 77 (5) and the like, and Tono-sama's character cd carries the meter rising item UpI. In FIG. 89 (15), the Tono-sama character cd throws the white meter rising item UpI, and the white meter rising item UpI hits the white meter display MW and should be displayed on the white meter display MW. However, since the error display ER1 overlaps, it is difficult to confirm the white meter rising item UpI. In FIG. 89 (16), the white meter display MW should have increased by one scale by the white meter increase item UpI. However, since the error display ER1 still overlaps, how far the meter has increased. However, the sound of one note is output from the speaker 120 shown in FIG. 89 (16). Although not shown in the figure, the white meter display MW partially shown in FIG. 89 (16) is in a full state, and a full notification sound is output from the speaker 120 shown in FIG. It is output.

  In FIG. 89 (18), a pseudo-continuous notice item NI, which is a kind of mini item, appears at the right end of the full white meter display MW, and at the middle symbol position of the third symbol pd3 that continues to fluctuate at high speed. Although the character display of “GET” is displayed, the error display ER1 overlaps both the pseudo-continuous notice item NI and the character display of “GET”, and it is difficult to recognize that the pseudo-continuous notice item NI has been acquired. .

  FIG. 90 is a diagram showing step by step a continuation of the example of error display ER1 shown in FIG.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 90 (19) following FIG. 89 (18), the character display “GET” disappears, and the pseudo-continuous notice item NI moves to the second decorative symbol display device 208M. Stocked on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. Also, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 90 (20), the white meter display MW that has been full until then changes to an empty state. The white meter display MW is continuously displayed in an empty state. In FIG. 90 (21), the pseudo continuous notice item NI stocked in the second decorative symbol display device 208M moves to the position of the middle symbol that continues to fluctuate at high speed, and the pseudo continuous notice item NI is digested. An error display ER1 overlaps from the front side on the pseudo-continuous notice item NI that has moved to the position of the symbol, making it difficult to view. In FIG. 90 (22), the fluctuation of the middle symbol that has continued to fluctuate at high speed in the third symbol pd3 becomes low speed, and the middle symbol can be recognized. Here, the middle symbol is a pseudo-continuous symbol (“continuation”), and in FIG. 90 (23), the pseudo-simultaneous symbol fluctuates (temporarily stops), and the entire third symbol pd3 (“decoration 7”-“continuation”). "-" Decoration 1 ") is temporarily stopped, and the pseudo-continuous effect is started. The error display ER1 also overlaps with the pseudo continuous symbol (“continuation”) from the front side, and the error display ER1 is displayed with priority over the pseudo continuous symbol.

  In FIG. 90 (24), the error display ER1 is still displayed, and in this example, the ball removal operation has not been performed to the end. That is, when the ball removal operation is performed, the error display ER1 such as “please remove the ball” is automatically hidden. In other words, if the error is resolved, the error display ER1 automatically disappears.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 89 and 90, the player cannot visually confirm the state of the meter display (for example, the degree of accumulation, etc.), so the player is concerned about the state of the meter display. May display the error display ER1 superimposed on the meter display so that the ball removal operation can be performed quickly. In addition, since the meter display tends to be good for the player when accumulated, the player's line of sight is likely to gather all the time, and the error display ER1 is displayed on the meter display so that the error display ER1 can be easily noticed. There is also an effect.

  Further, in this example, a prize winning error that is more serious than the dish full tank error occurs, and the display size larger than the display size of the previous error display ER1 is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 90 (24). Thus, an error display ER2 for notifying the occurrence of a winning abnormality error is displayed. This error display ER2 overlaps the error display ER1 from the front side in addition to the third symbol pd3, and is displayed with priority over the third symbol pd3 and the error display ER1. It may be possible to tell that a serious error has occurred by overlapping another error display ER2 on the error display ER1. It should be noted that the error displays do not necessarily have to overlap with each other, and at least the display size may be larger for a serious error. As an example of the serious error mentioned here, an error detected by the main control unit 300 or the payout control unit 600, an error that cannot be resolved without calling a store clerk, or an error display is automatically displayed even if the error is resolved Errors that are not hidden (cannot be deleted) can be listed. That is, all of the above-mentioned enumerations may be used as serious errors. On the other hand, some of those listed above may not be applied. The most serious error is a magnetic (magnet) detection error. On the other hand, as an example of a minor error, an error detected by the first sub-control unit 400 or the second sub-control unit 500, an error that can be resolved only by the player, and an error display is displayed when the error is resolved. Errors that automatically disappear (disappear) can be listed. That is, all of the above-mentioned enumerations may be used as minor errors. On the other hand, some of those listed above may not be applied. Further, among minor errors, there may be an error in which the meter display is preferentially displayed or the third symbol pd3 is preferentially displayed.

  Also, the error display in FIGS. 89 and 90 is the same for various error displays and warning displays.

  In the present specification, the description of “a certain display overlaps with another display from the front” is replaced with the description “at least a part of the display overlaps at least a part of the other display from the front”. All of one display may overlap all of the other displays from the front side, all of one display may overlap a part of the other display from the front side, The part may overlap all other displays from the front side, or a part of one display may overlap a part of the other display from the front side. Further, in the present specification, the description of “a certain display overlaps with another display from the front side” can be read in reverse, that is, “the other display overlaps with a certain display from the front side”.

  In the above description, the meter display is an increase type in which a display indicating a certain amount or number only increases. However, even if the display indicating a certain amount or number increases or decreases, Of course, it may be of a decreasing type in which the display representing a certain quantity or number only decreases.

  The meter display includes a white meter display MW, a red meter display MR, a rainbow meter display MN, a white numerical meter display DW and a red numerical meter display DR shown in FIGS. Although the display using the number of appearances of the character shown in 88 has been described, the display is not limited to these, and the display may indicate a certain amount or number of hands, or display using the number of figures and symbols. Also good.

  Furthermore, although the red meter display MR changes from the white meter display MW, the display of the red meter display MR itself may be started independently, instead of the change from the white meter display MW. Alternatively, the red meter display MR may be a meter display that is not displayed unless changed from the white meter display MW.

  Further, the red meter display MR may change when the white meter display MW is stored halfway, and the display of the white meter display MW may be taken over and the display may be started with the halfway stored. Alternatively, the display of the red meter display MR itself that has been stored halfway may be started alone. In these cases, it may be easier to finally display the big hit symbol when the display is started halfway than when the display is started in an empty state.

  Furthermore, it may be easier to finally display the big hit symbol when the red meter display MR is stored halfway than when the white meter display MW is stored halfway.

  In addition, in the above description, it is easy to “definitely display the big hit symbol finally”. The statement to that effect is “easy to win a jackpot that is more advantageous than an unfavorable jackpot”. It can be replaced with a statement to that effect.

  As mentioned above, although it was an example about a pachinko machine (bullet ball game machine) so far, the game stand of the present invention is not limited to this, for example, an enclosed pachinko machine shown in FIG. Or a slot machine shown in FIG.

In the above description,
“A game machine having display means [for example, only the first decorative symbol display device 208L or a plurality of combinations (including all) of the first to third decorative symbol display devices 208L to N],
The display means includes a plurality of types of meter displays [for example, a white meter display MW shown in FIG. 70, a red meter display MR, a rainbow meter display MN, a white numerical meter display DW shown in FIGS. Numerical type meter display DR, display using the number of characters shown in FIG. 88, etc.]
One meter display among the plurality of types of meter displays is a first meter display [for example, a white meter display MW shown in FIG. 70 and the like, and a left meter display shown in FIGS. 82 (4) to (17)]. 83 (4) to FIG. 18 (18), or a white numerical meter display DW shown in FIGS. 86 and 87].
One meter display among the plurality of types of meter displays is a fourth meter display [for example, a red meter display MR shown in FIG. 70 or the like, and a right meter display shown in FIGS. 82 (5) to (17)]. 83 (5) to FIG. 15 (15), the meter display on the right side, the red numeric meter DR shown in FIGS. 86 and 87, or the display using the number of characters shown in FIG. 88]. ,
The first meter display is a display that may change from a first state [for example, an empty state (a state where the meter is 0)] to a third state (for example, a full state),
The fourth meter display is a display that may change from a fourth state [for example, an empty state (a state where the meter is 0)] to a sixth state (for example, a full state),
When the first meter display changes from the first state to the third state, rather than when the first meter display remains in the first state and does not change to the third state. [For example, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 76 or the example shown in FIG. 82]
When the fourth meter display changes from the fourth state to the sixth state, rather than when the fourth meter display remains in the fourth state and does not change to the sixth state. [For example, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 67 and FIG. 68 or the example shown in FIG. 83]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  Here, the first meter display may be an analog meter display or a digital meter display. The fourth meter display may be an analog meter display or a digital meter display. The first meter display and the fourth meter display may be meter displays having different display modes. Furthermore, there may be a period in which the first meter display and the fourth meter display are displayed simultaneously. That is, the first meter display and the fourth meter display may be a display that is always displayed simultaneously, or may be a display that may be displayed simultaneously. Alternatively, the first meter display and the fourth meter display may be displayed separately without the period.

  The display means may be means for surely displaying a plurality of types of meter displays. The first meter display may be a display that always changes from the first state to the third state. Further, the fourth meter display may be a display that always changes from the fourth state to the sixth state.

Also,
'The fourth meter display displayed in the fourth state is more than the sixth meter display than the probability that the first meter display displayed in the first state changes to the third state. The probability of changing to the state of is configured to be higher,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the amount of one state change in the fourth meter display may be larger than the amount of one state change in the first meter display.

  Further, when the fourth meter display is changed from the fourth state to the sixth state, the first meter display is changed from the first state to the third state. Finally, the big hit symbol may be easily displayed.

Also,
“The first meter display is a display in which the display is started in the first state [for example, the case of FIG. 67 (4)],
The fourth meter display is a display [for example, a red meter display MR shown in FIG. 67 (9)] in which the first meter display in the first state is changed.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  That is, the fourth meter display is a display that may be displayed in the fourth state, and the fourth meter display from the first meter display in the first state to the fourth state in the fourth state. The meter display may change, or the first meter display in the first state may change to the fourth meter display in the fifth state.

  In addition, the first meter display in the third state is not changed to the fourth meter display, but the first meter display in the second state is changed to the fourth meter display. You may be there.

  The first meter display may be a display that always starts in the first state. Further, the fourth meter display may be a display that always starts display in the fourth state. When the first meter display changes to the fourth meter display, the first meter display in the first state always changes to the fourth meter display in the fourth state. Alternatively, the first meter display in the first state may always change to the fourth meter display in the fifth state.

Also,
“The fourth effect may be started in a state where the first meter display of the first state is displayed,
The fourth effect is an effect of changing the first meter display to the fourth meter display [for example, a meter using the change ball icon cI shown in FIGS. 67 (6) to (8). Change production],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the fourth effect may be a so-called rank-up effect. More specifically, it may be an operation means effect (button effect), and the first meter display may change to the fourth meter display in response to the operation means being operated.

  Note that the fourth effect may always be started in a state where the first meter display of the first state is displayed.

  Here, the first meter display is a display in which the display is ended by the fourth effect, and the fourth meter display is a display in which the display is started by the fourth effect. Also good. That is, the first meter display disappears, and the display of the fourth meter display is started. For example, the first effect is started in a state where the first meter display in the first state is displayed, and when the first effect ends, the first meter display disappears and the first effect is displayed. You may be comprised so that the display of the four meter display may be started.

Also,
The fourth production is a production using a fourth character.
In the case where the fourth character is displayed across a plurality of continuous decorative symbol variation displays by the display means [for example, FIG. 67 (1) and FIG. ] Is a character [for example, Tono-sama character cd],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the “decorative display of the decorative pattern” means that the decorative display of the variable display is being displayed, and includes the display of the variable display when the variable display is started again with the stop display interposed therebetween. Moreover, it can also be regarded as 1 fluctuation | variation from the start of a fluctuation | variation display to a fixed display. Furthermore, “stretching” means that a decorative symbol stop display period (fluctuation stop period) is sandwiched between them. Further, the fourth character may be a character that is continuously displayed during the display of the variation display of the decorative design, or may be a character that disappears in the middle. Further, the character may be displayed continuously during the display of the stop display of the decorative symbol, or may be a character that disappears in the middle of the display, or it may continue to disappear during the display of the stop display. May be a character.

  Note that the fourth character may be a character that is displayed without fail over a continuous variation display of the decorative design.

Also,
“The first meter display may be displayed during the display of the decorative symbol stop display by the display means [for example, FIG. 71 (1) and FIG. 71 (8) to FIG. ) White meter display MW]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the display of the first meter may be a display that may be started during the display of the stop display of the decorative symbol, or the display is started during the display of the variable display of the decorative symbol. The display may be a display that is continued until the stop display is being displayed.

  The first meter display may be a display that is always displayed during the display of the decorative symbol stop display.

  Here, the first meter display is a display that may change state during display of the decorative symbol variation display by the display means, and the fourth meter display is a display of the decorative symbol by the display means. It may be a display in which the state may change during the display of the variable display. The first meter display may be a display that always changes state during the display of the variation display of the decorative symbol, and the fourth meter display is always displayed during the display of the variation display of the decoration symbol. The display may change in state.

  Further, the fourth meter display is a display that may be displayed during display of the decorative symbol variation display by the display means, and the fourth meter display is a display of the decorative symbols by the display means. When the display is started during the display of the variable display, when the variable display of the decorative symbol is finished, the big hit symbol may be more easily stopped and displayed than the lost symbol. That is, the display of the fourth meter display is started during the display of the variation display of the decorative symbol in which the big hit symbol is stopped, rather than during the display of the variation display of the decorative symbol in which the loss symbol is stopped. Cheap. When the display is started, the fourth meter display may be a display that is always started during the display of the decorative symbol variation display.

Also,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a variation display of a plurality of decorative symbols,
The variation display of one of the plurality of decorative symbol variation displays is the first variation variation display [for example, the variation display stopped and displayed in FIG. 71 (1)].
The decorative display of one of the plurality of decorative displays of the decorative pattern is a variable display of the second decorative pattern [for example, the variable display of FIGS. 71 (3) to (9)],
The decorative display of one of the multiple decorative pattern displays is a fourth decorative display [for example, the display of FIGS. 71 (10) to 72 (21)].
The decorative display of one of the plurality of decorative displays of the decorative pattern is a fifth decorative display of the decorative display [for example, the variable display of FIGS. 72 (22) to 73 (42)],
The variation display of the first decoration design and the variation display of the second decoration design are continuous display variations of the decoration design,
When the first meter display is in a different state between the first decorative symbol variation display and the second decorative symbol variation display [e.g., it is empty at the timing of FIG. 71 (1). If the meter rises at the timing of FIG. 71 (7)],
The variation display of the fourth decoration symbol and the variation display of the fifth decoration symbol are continuous variation display of the decoration symbol,
The fourth meter display is a display in which the state may be different between the variation display of the fourth decoration symbol and the variation display of the fifth decoration symbol [for example, empty at the timing of FIG. 72 (19). The meter is rising at the timing of FIG. 72 (29) in contrast to the state of]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, after the variable display of the first decorative symbol is finished, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is started, and after the variable display of the second decorative symbol is finished, the fourth decorative symbol is displayed. After the fourth decorative symbol is displayed, the fifth decorative symbol is displayed. After the fifth decorative symbol is displayed, the sixth decorative symbol is displayed. The decorative display of the decorative pattern may be started. In this case, when the variation display of the fifth decorative symbol is finished, the big hit symbol may be stopped. Alternatively, when the variation display of the sixth decorative symbol is finished, the big bonus symbol is stopped. It may be displayed.

  The first meter display may be a display in which the state is necessarily different between the first decorative symbol variation display and the second decorative symbol variation display, and the fourth meter display is The display may always be different between the fourth decorative symbol variation display and the fifth decorative symbol variation display.

Also,
“The fourth meter display is a display in which the display is started in the fourth state [for example, the red meter display MR shown in FIG. 67 (9) etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  As described above, the fourth state may be an empty state.

  By doing so, it is possible to have a sense of expectation for the change to the sixth state (for example, the meter is full) from the time the meter appears or changes.

  The fourth meter display may be a display that may start display in the fourth state, or may be a display that always starts display in the fourth state. .

Also,
“The fourth meter display is the fourth state [for example, the empty state shown in FIG. 67 (9)] to the fifth state [for example, the state accumulated from the third scale shown in FIG. 67 (14)]. The display may change to
The fourth meter display is a display that may change from the fifth state to the sixth state [for example, the full tank state shown in FIG. 67 (18)],
The fourth meter display is a display [for example, a red meter display MR shown in FIG. 67 (9), etc.] that may be displayed in the fourth state.
The fourth meter display is a display that may be displayed in the fifth state,
When the display of the fourth meter display is started in the fifth state than when the display is started in the fourth state, the jackpot symbol is likely to be finally displayed.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the display of the fourth meter is more likely to change to the sixth state when the display is started in the fifth state than when the display is started in the fourth state. An aspect may be sufficient.

  The fourth meter display may be a display that does not start in the fifth state, or a display that may start in the fifth state. Also good.

  Further, the fifth state may be a state representing a fifth quantity or number, and the fifth quantity or number is the fourth quantity or number and the sixth quantity or number. It may be an amount or number between.

  The fourth meter display may be a display that always starts in the fourth state, or a display that always changes from the fourth state to the fifth state, Furthermore, the display may always change from the fifth state to the sixth state. Alternatively, the fourth meter display may be a display that always starts in the fifth state, or a display that always changes from the fifth state to the sixth state. .

Also,
[The first meter display is the first state [for example, the empty state shown in FIG. 76 (4)] to the second state [for example, the state accumulated from one scale shown in FIG. 76 (9)] The display may change to
The first meter display is a display that may change from the second state to the third state [for example, the full state shown in FIG. 76 (12)],
The first meter display is a display [for example, white meter display MW shown in FIG. 76 (4), etc.] that may be displayed in the first state.
The first meter display is a display [for example, white meter display MW shown in FIG. 85 (4)] that may be displayed in the second state.
The first meter display, when the display is started in the second state than when the display is started in the first state, the jackpot symbol is easier to be finally displayed.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, it is easier for the first meter display to change to the third state when the display is started in the second state than when the display is started in the first state. An aspect may be sufficient.

  The first meter display may be a display that does not start in the third state or a display that may start in the third state. Also good.

  Further, the second state may be a state representing a second amount or number, and the second amount or number is the difference between the first amount or number and the third amount or number. It may be an amount or number between.

  The first meter display may be a display that always starts in the first state, or a display that always changes from the first state to the second state, Furthermore, the display may always change from the second state to the third state. Alternatively, the first meter display may be a display that always starts in the second state, or a display that always changes from the second state to the third state. .

Also,
[The first meter display is the first state [for example, the empty state shown in FIG. 76 (4)] to the second state [for example, the state accumulated from one scale shown in FIG. 76 (9)] The display may change to
The first meter display is a display that may change from the second state to the third state [for example, the full state shown in FIG. 76 (12)],
The fourth meter display changes from the fourth state [e.g., the empty state shown in FIG. 67 (9)] to the fifth state [e.g., the state accumulated from the third scale shown in FIG. 67 (14)]. Is a display that may change,
The fourth meter display is a display that may change from the fifth state to the sixth state [for example, the full tank state shown in FIG. 67 (18)],
The case where the fourth meter display is in the fifth state is more likely to be confirmed and displayed as a big hit symbol in the end than in the case where the first meter display is in the second state,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the display of the first meter may be a display that may be started in the first state, and the display of the first meter is started in the second state. The fourth meter display may be a display that may be displayed in the fourth state, or the fourth meter display may be The display may start in the fifth state.

  In addition, when the display of the fourth meter is started in the fifth state, it is finally a big hit than when the display of the first meter is started in the second state. The symbol may be easily displayed.

  Here, the display start patterns of the first meter display are summarized. The first meter display is a display that may be displayed in the first state and may change to the second state, the display is started in the first state, and the second state. The display may change to the third state via the display, the display starts in the first state, the display may change to the third state, and the display is in the second state. Is started and the display may change to the third state, the display is started in the first state, the fourth state is followed by the fifth state, and the sixth state. The display is started in the fourth state, the display may be changed to the fifth state, the display is started in the fourth state, and the sixth state is displayed. The display may change to the state of, the display is started in the fourth state, and the display is started through the fifth state. A display case is to change the state, the display state of said fifth is started, a display that may change the state of said six. The same applies to the display start pattern of the fourth meter display.

  Note that the display is started in the fourth state and does not have to change to the first state. Further, the display may be started in the second state and may not be changed to the first state.

Also,
'The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of icons,
One icon of the plurality of types of icons is a first icon,
The first meter display is performed by displaying the first icon [for example, the icon of the blue meter rising item UpIb shown in FIG. 70 (c)] for the first number of times (for example, three times). A display that changes from the first state to the third state;
In the fourth meter display, the first icon [for example, the icon of the blue meter rising item UpIb shown in FIG. 70 (i)] is displayed for the fourth number of times [for example, once]. A display that changes from the fourth state to the sixth state,
The fourth number of times is less than the first number of times,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  That is, if the state changes in a small number of times, the amount of change in one time is large.

Also,
“The first meter display is a display that may be displayed by a first effect [for example, an effect by a mini game shown in FIG. 75].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the first effect may be an acquisition effect of the first meter display.

  The first meter display may be a display that is always started by the first effect.

Also,
“The display means can display a holding icon [for example, the first holding icon h1, the second holding icon h2 etc.] corresponding to the number of holding balls in the holding display area [for example, the holding frame UI ′ shown in FIG. 77]. Means,
The first meter display is a display partly or entirely overlapping the holding display area,
The fourth meter display is a display partly or entirely overlapping the holding display area.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the hold display area may be an icon display area. Further, for example, the first meter display is a display that is displayed integrally with the hold display area, and the fourth meter display is a display that is displayed integrally with the hold display area. There may be.

  The display unit may be a unit that always displays a hold icon corresponding to the number of held balls in the hold display area. The display means may be means for always displaying the hold icon in the hold display area when the hold icon is displayed.

Also,
“One meter display of the plurality of types of meter displays is a seventh meter display [for example, a rainbow meter display MN shown in FIGS. 70 (m) and (n)],
When the seventh meter display is displayed, the jackpot symbol may be finally displayed.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  That is, when the seventh meter display is displayed, the big hit may be rich. In addition, if the seventh meter display changes from the seventh state [for example, empty state] to the ninth state (for example, full state), even if the big hit symbol is surely displayed finally. Good. Further, the seventh meter display may be a display that always changes from the seventh state to the ninth state.

  Further, when the first meter display is changed to the third state, the decorative symbol change display displayed on the display means when the first meter display is changed to the third state. When the big hit symbol is surely displayed and the fourth meter display changes to the sixth state, the display means is displayed when the fourth meter display changes to the sixth state. In the variation display of the decorative symbol being displayed, the big hit symbol may be surely finally displayed.

  When the seventh meter display is displayed, the big hit symbol may be surely finally displayed.

Also,
'The display means is a means capable of displaying a notice display,
The notice display is a display [for example, pseudo continuous effect shown in FIG. 77] that may be displayed when the first meter display changes to the third state.
The notice display is a display [for example, super reach production shown in FIG. 68] that may be displayed when the fourth meter display changes to the sixth state.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, as the notice display, the pseudo-continuous effect display, the operation means related display, the notice display about the big hit (normal notice display or pre-read notice display), the notice display about the effect (for example, the super reach effect), and the like are listed. Can do. That is, as the notice display, all of the above-mentioned enumerations may be used. On the other hand, some of those listed above may not be applied.

  The display means is a means capable of displaying a pseudo-continuous effect display, and the pseudo-continuous effect display may start when the first meter display changes to the third state. The pseudo-continuous effect display may be a display that may start when the fourth meter display changes to the sixth state. Here, the pseudo continuous effect display may be a display that always starts when the first meter display changes to the third state, and the pseudo continuous effect display is the fourth meter display. The display may always be started when the display changes to the sixth state.

  The notice display may be a display that is always started when the first meter display changes to the third state, and the notice display is the fourth meter display is the sixth display. The display may always be started when the state changes to.

  Here, operation means provided at a position where the player can operate is provided, and the display means is a means capable of displaying an operation means related display, and the operation means related display is a display related to the operation means. The operation means related display is a display that may be displayed when the first meter display changes to the third state, and the operation means related display is the fourth meter display. The display may start when the state changes to the sixth state. The display related to the operation means may be a display imitating the operation means, a display prompting to operate the operation means (operation promotion display), or an operation of the operation means. It may be a display relating to the effective period (more specifically, a display of the remaining period of the operation effective period (remaining period display)), a display reminiscent of the operation means, or these displays. It may be a combination of the above or a display including at least one of these displays. Further, the operation means related display may be a display that is always started when the first meter display changes to the third state, and the operation means related display is the fourth meter display. The display may be started whenever the state changes to the sixth state.

  The display means is a means capable of displaying a normal notice display, and the normal notice display is a variable display of a decorative symbol displayed on the display means when the display of the normal notice display is started. Is a notice display for the jackpot in the display, the normal notice display is a display that may start when the first meter display changes to the third state, the normal notice display is The display may be started when the four meter display changes to the sixth state. Here, the normal notice display may be a super reach effect display, for example. In addition, the normal notice display may be a display that is always started when the first meter display changes to the third state, and the normal notice display is the fourth meter display that is The display may always be started when the state changes to the sixth state.

Also,
The first state in the first meter display is a state representing a first quantity or number [for example, an empty state or vice versa)
The third state in the first meter display is a state representing a third quantity or number [eg, a full state or vice versa)
The fourth state in the fourth meter display is a state representing a fourth quantity or number [eg, an empty state or vice versa]
The sixth state in the fourth meter display is a state representing a sixth quantity or number [for example, a full state or vice versa)
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the first amount or number and the third amount or number are different amounts or numbers, and the fourth amount or number and the sixth amount or number are different amounts or numbers. May be.

  Further, the third amount or number is an amount or number smaller than the first amount or number, and the sixth amount or number is an amount smaller than the fourth amount or number or It may be a number. That is, the case where the first meter display changes from the first state to the third state is a case where the first meter display decreases, and the fourth meter display is The case of changing from the fourth state to the sixth state is a case where the fourth meter display decreases.

  The third amount or number is an amount or number greater than the first amount or number, and the sixth amount or number is an amount greater than the fourth amount or number. It may be a number. That is, the case where the first meter display changes from the first state to the third state is a case where the first meter display increases, and the fourth meter display is The case of changing from the fourth state to the sixth state is a case where the fourth meter display increases.

  Further, the first state is a full state, the third state is an empty state, the fourth state is a full state, and the sixth state is an empty state. On the contrary, the first state is an empty state, the third state is a full state, the fourth state is an empty state, and the sixth state is The state may be a full tank state.

  Further, the first meter display may change from the fourth state [for example, the meter frame is red and empty] to the sixth state [for example, the meter frame is red and full]. Yes, the fourth meter display may change from the first state [for example, the meter frame is white and empty] to the third state [for example, the meter frame is white and full]. is there.

Also,
“The first meter display and the fourth meter display may be partially different (for example, only the meter frame mf) or different in color (for example, white and red, etc.),
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  That is, the first meter display and the fourth meter display can be distinguished by different colors. Note that the colors may continue to be different. Alternatively, the colors may be different only for a certain period. That is, the color may change, and the color may be different between the first state and the fourth state, or may be different between the third state and the sixth state. Furthermore, what is necessary is just to differ in the 2nd state mentioned later and a 5th state. Further, it is only necessary that the colors when the display is started are different from each other. Alternatively, the colors when the display ends (disappears) may be different from each other.

  The first meter display includes a frame display and an increase / decrease display that increases / decreases in the frame display, and the fourth meter display increases / decreases in the frame display and the frame display. The first meter display and the fourth meter display may be different only in the color of the frame display, or may be different only in the color of the increase / decrease display. The colors of both the frame display and the increase / decrease display may be different. The frame display may be circular or rectangular, and the shape is not limited.

  The first meter display and the fourth meter display may be different in only part of the colors.

Also,
'The first meter display and the fourth meter display are different in size.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  That is, the first meter display and the fourth meter display can be distinguished by different sizes (display sizes). The size may be continuously different. Alternatively, the size may be different only for a certain period. That is, the size may vary, and it may be different between the first state and the fourth state, or only different between the third state and the sixth state. Furthermore, what is necessary is just to differ in the 2nd state mentioned later and a 5th state. Moreover, the magnitude | size when a display is mutually started should just differ. Alternatively, the sizes when the display ends (disappears) may be different from each other.

Also,
'The display position of the first meter display and the fourth meter display are different.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
That is, the first meter display and the fourth meter display can be distinguished by different display positions. The display position may be continuously different. Or a display position may differ only for a fixed period. That is, the display position may change, and may be different between the first state and the fourth state, or may be different between the third state and the sixth state. Furthermore, what is necessary is just to differ in the 2nd state mentioned later and a 5th state. Moreover, the display position when a display is mutually started should just differ. Alternatively, the display positions when the display ends (disappears) may be different from each other.

  “Meter display” in the above description may be replaced with “display indicating a certain amount or number”, “first meter display” is “first display”, and “fourth meter display” is “ It may be replaced with “fourth display”.

In the above description,
“A game machine having display means [for example, only the first decorative symbol display device 208L or a plurality of combinations (including all) of the first to third decorative symbol display devices 208L to N],
The display means includes a plurality of types of meter displays [for example, a white meter display MW shown in FIG. 70, a red meter display MR, a rainbow meter display MN, a white numerical meter display DW shown in FIGS. Numerical type meter display DR, display using the number of characters shown in FIG. 88, etc.]
One meter display among the plurality of types of meter displays is a first meter display [for example, white meter display MW shown in FIGS. 67, 70, etc., left side shown in FIGS. 82 (4) to (17)]. Meter display, left meter display shown in FIGS. 83 (4) to (18), or white numerical meter display DW shown in FIGS. 86 and 87].
One meter display among the plurality of types of meter displays is a fourth meter display [for example, a red meter display MR shown in FIG. 70 or the like, and a right meter display shown in FIGS. 82 (5) to (17)]. 83 (5) to FIG. 15 (15), the meter display on the right side, the red numeric meter DR shown in FIGS. 86 and 87, or the display using the number of characters shown in FIG. 88]. ,
When the first meter display changes from an empty state to a full tank state rather than when the first meter display does not change from an empty state to a full tank state [for example, as shown in FIG. In the case of the example and the example shown in FIG. 82], the jackpot symbol is finally easier to be confirmed and displayed.
When the fourth meter display changes from an empty state to a full tank state rather than when the fourth meter display does not change from an empty state to a full tank state [for example, FIG. 67 and FIG. 68 and the example shown in FIG. 83] are configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed in a definite manner.
The fourth meter display that is displayed in an empty state is configured to be more easily changed to a full state than the first meter display that is displayed in an empty state.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

Also,
The fourth meter display is a display in which the first meter display in an empty state is changed [for example, a red meter display MR shown in FIG. 67 (9)]
The first meter display and the fourth meter display have the same size and display position [for example, the white meter display MW shown in FIG. 67 (4) and the red meter display MR shown in FIG. ],
The first meter display and the fourth meter display are partly or entirely different in color.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“The display means is means capable of displaying the first meter display on a certain background screen [for example, the background of a castle town] [for example, FIG. 67 (4)]
The display means is means capable of displaying the fourth meter display on the certain background screen [for example, FIG. 67 (9)],
The certain background screen is a background screen in a certain stage stage [for example, a castle town stage]
If the first meter display is not displayed on the certain stage, the fourth meter display may be displayed [for example, the case shown in FIGS. 67 (9) to (25)]. If the fourth meter display is not displayed, the first meter display may be displayed [for example, the case shown in FIGS. 67 (4) to (8)]. ,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“The first meter display in the empty state is changed, and the fourth meter display in the empty state may be displayed [for example, FIG. 67 (6) to FIG. (9)],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
'The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of icons,
One icon of the plurality of types of icons is a first icon [e.g., white meter rising item UpI icon]
When the first icon is displayed, the meter of the first meter display is configured to increase at a first increase rate [for example, an increase rate for one scale],
When the first icon is displayed, the meter of the fourth meter display is configured to increase at a fourth increase rate [for example, an increase rate of 3 scales],
The fourth increase rate is an increase rate higher than the first increase rate.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“When the game ball wins a winning opening [for example, the first special figure starting opening 230, the second special figure starting opening 232, the general drawing starting opening, the general winning opening 226], the first icon may be displayed. Configured to be,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“One of the plurality of types of icons is a second icon [for example, a blue meter rising item UpIb icon]
When the second icon is displayed, the meter of the first meter display is configured to increase at a second increase rate [for example, an increase rate of two scales]
When the second icon is displayed, the meter of the fourth meter display is configured to increase at a fifth increase rate [for example, an increase rate of 6 scales],
The fifth increase rate is an increase rate higher than the second increase rate,
The second increase rate [e.g., an increase rate for two scales] is an increase rate higher than the first increase rate [e.g., an increase rate for one scale],
The fifth increase rate [for example, an increase rate for 6 scales] is higher than the fourth increase rate [for example, an increase rate for 3 scales],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
`` The fourth effect may start with the first meter display being displayed,
The fourth effect is an effect in which the fourth character [e.g. Tono-sama character cd] changes the first meter display to the fourth meter display [e.g., FIG. 67 (6) to FIG. 9) Meter change effect using the change ball icon cI shown in FIG.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“The fourth character is a character that may be displayed across a plurality of continuous decorative symbol variation displays [for example, FIG. 67 (1) and FIG. ]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“The first icon is an icon that may appear at the display position of the fourth character [for example, the white meter rising item UpI shown in FIG. 77 (6)],
The fourth character may use the first icon that appears at the display position of the fourth character to raise the meter on the first meter display [for example, FIG. 77 (8)]
The fourth character may use the first icon that appears at the display position of the fourth character to raise the meter of the fourth meter display,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“The display means is a means capable of displaying a hold icon relating to the symbol variation display,
The second performance may start with the hold icon displayed,
The second effect is an effect [for example, an example shown in FIG. 69] in which the fourth character changes the display mode of the hold icon.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“The display means can display a holding icon [for example, the first holding icon h1, the second holding icon h2 etc.] corresponding to the number of holding balls in the holding display area [for example, the holding frame UI ′ shown in FIG. 77]. Means,
The first meter display is a display partly or entirely overlapping the holding display area,
The fourth meter display is a display partly or entirely overlapping the holding display area.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“One meter display of the plurality of types of meter displays is a seventh meter display [for example, a rainbow meter display MN shown in FIGS. 70 (m) and (n)],
The seventh meter display is a display in which the first meter display in an empty state is changed,
When the seventh meter display is displayed, the big hit symbol is finally displayed.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of error displays [for example, display of various errors and display of warnings]
An error display [e.g., dish full error display] of the plurality of types of error displays is a display that may partially or entirely overlap with a part or all of the first meter display.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
'The certain error display is a display that may overlap a portion representing the accumulation state of the first meter display.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
`` Equipped with a storage tray that can store game balls,
The certain error display is a dish full error display,
The dish full tank error display is a display [for example, a character display such as “please remove the ball”] that prompts the player to discharge the game ball from the storage dish.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“The first meter display may be displayed during the display of the decorative symbol stop display by the display means [for example, FIG. 71 (1) and FIG. 71 (8) to FIG. ) White meter display MW]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a variation display of a plurality of decorative symbols,
The decorative display of one of the multiple decorative pattern displays is the first decorative display [for example, the variable display stopped in FIG. 71 (1)].
The decorative display of one of the multiple decorative pattern displays is a variable display of the second decorative pattern [for example, the variable display of FIGS. 71 (3) to (9)],
The decorative display of one of the multiple decorative pattern displays is a fourth decorative display [for example, the display of FIGS. 71 (10) to 72 (21)].
The decorative display of one of the multiple decorative pattern displays is a fifth decorative display [for example, the display of FIGS. 72 (22) to 73 (42)].
The variation display of the first decoration design and the variation display of the second decoration design are continuous display variations of the decoration design,
When the first meter display is in a different state between the first decorative symbol variation display and the second decorative symbol variation display [e.g., it is empty at the timing of FIG. 71 (1). If the meter rises at the timing of FIG. 71 (7)],
The variation display of the fourth decoration symbol and the variation display of the fifth decoration symbol are continuous variation display of the decoration symbol,
The fourth meter display is a display in which the state may be different between the variation display of the fourth decoration symbol and the variation display of the fifth decoration symbol [for example, empty at the timing of FIG. 72 (19). The meter is rising at the timing of FIG. 72 (29) in contrast to the state of]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“The first meter display is a display that may be displayed by a first effect [for example, an effect by a mini game shown in FIG. 75].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
'The display means is a means capable of displaying a notice display,
The notice display is a display [for example, a pseudo-continuous effect shown in FIG. 77] that may be displayed when the first meter display changes to a full state.
The notice display is a display [for example, a super reach production shown in FIG. 68] that may be displayed when the fourth meter display changes to a full tank state.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  In the following, including what has been described so far.

(Appendix 2-1)
A gaming machine equipped with a display means,
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of meter displays,
One meter display of the plurality of types of meter display is a first meter display,
One meter display of the plurality of types of meter display is a fourth meter display,
The first meter display is a display having a plurality of types of states,
One state of the plurality of types of states in the first meter display is a first state,
One of the plurality of states in the first meter display is a third state,
The first meter display is a display that may change from the first state to the third state,
The fourth meter display is a display having a plurality of types of states,
One state of the plurality of types of states in the fourth meter display is a fourth state,
One of the plurality of states in the fourth meter display is a sixth state,
The fourth meter display is a display that may change from the fourth state to the sixth state,
When the first meter display changes from the first state to the third state, than when the first meter display does not change from the first state to the third state. The expectation of jackpot is high,
When the fourth meter display changes from the fourth state to the sixth state, than when the fourth meter display does not change from the fourth state to the sixth state. High expectations for jackpots,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 2-2)
In the game machine described in appendix 2-1,
The degree of expectation that the fourth meter display changes from the fourth state to the sixth state is higher than the degree of expectation that the first meter display changes from the first state to the third state. high,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 2-3)
A gaming machine according to appendix 2-1 or 2-2,
The display means is means capable of displaying a decorative design,
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the first meter display is a display that may be displayed while the decoration symbol is stopped.

(Appendix 2-4)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 2-1 to 2-3,
The fourth meter display is a display that starts to be displayed in the fourth state.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 2-5)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 2-1 to 2-4,
One state of the plurality of states in the first meter display is a second state,
The first meter display is a display that may change from the first state to the second state,
The first meter display is a display that may change from the second state to the third state,
The first meter display is a display that may be displayed in the first state,
The first meter display is a display that may be displayed in the second state,
When the first meter display is started in the second state, the expectation of jackpot is higher than when the display is started in the second state,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 2-6)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 2-1 to 2-5,
Of the plurality of types of display, one display is a first icon,
The first meter display is a display that changes from the first state to the third state when the first icon is displayed a first time,
The fourth meter display is a display that changes from the fourth state to the sixth state when the first icon is displayed a second time.
The second number of times is less than the first number of times,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 2-7)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 2-1 to 2-6,
One display of the plurality of displays is a jackpot display,
The third state in the first meter display is a display state indicating that the jackpot display is displayed in the variation of the decorative symbol in which the third state is displayed,
The sixth state in the fourth meter display is a display state indicating that the jackpot display is displayed in the variation of the decorative design in which the sixth state is displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 2-8)
A gaming machine according to appendix 2-7,
The second state of the first meter display is a display state indicating that the jackpot display may be displayed in the variation of the decorative symbol in which the second state is displayed,
The fifth state of the fourth meter display is a display state indicating that the jackpot display may be displayed in the variation of the decorative symbol on which the fifth state is displayed,
If the fifth state is displayed than the second state, the jackpot display is more likely to be displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 2-9)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 2-1 to 2-8,
One effect of the plurality of effects is a pseudo-continuous effect,
The pseudo continuous notice is a display that may be displayed when the first meter display changes to the third state,
The pseudo continuous notice is a display that may be displayed when the fourth meter display changes to the sixth state.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 2-10)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 2-1 to 2-9,
One display of the plurality of types of display is an operation promotion display of the operation means,
The operation promotion display is a display that may be displayed when the first meter display changes to the third state,
The operation promotion display is a display that may be displayed when the fourth meter display changes to the sixth state.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 2-11)
A gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes 2-1 to 2-10,
The display means can display a plurality of types of effects,
One of the multiple types of effects is a certain effect,
The certain effect is an effect in which the jackpot display is easily displayed in the variation of the decorative design in which the certain effect is displayed,
The certain effect is an effect that may be displayed when the first meter display changes to the third state,
The certain effect is an effect that may be displayed when the fourth meter display changes to the sixth state.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix A2-1)
A gaming machine equipped with a display means,
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of meter displays,
One meter display of the plurality of types of meter display is a first meter display,
One meter display of the plurality of types of meter display is a fourth meter display,
When the first meter display changes from an empty state to a full tank state, it is finally a big hit rather than when the first meter display does not change from an empty state to a full tank state. The design is easy to confirm and display,
When the fourth meter display changes from an empty state to a full tank, it is finally a big hit rather than when the fourth meter display does not change from an empty state to a full tank. The design is easy to confirm and display,
The fourth meter display that is displayed in an empty state is configured to be more easily changed to a full state than the first meter display that is displayed in an empty state.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix A2-2)
A gaming machine as set forth in Appendix A2-1,
The fourth meter display is a display in which the first meter display in an empty state is changed,
The first meter display and the fourth meter display have the same size and display position,
The first meter display and the fourth meter display are partly or entirely different in color.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix A2-3)
The game stand according to appendix A2-1 or A2-2,
The display means is means capable of displaying the first meter display on a certain background screen,
The display means is means capable of displaying the fourth meter display on the certain background screen,
The certain background screen is a background screen in a certain stage.
If the first meter display is not displayed at the certain stage, the fourth meter display may be displayed. If the fourth meter display is not displayed, the first meter display may be displayed. The display is configured to be displayed,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix A2-4)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices A2-1 to A2-3,
The first meter display in the empty state is changed, and the fourth meter display in the empty state may be displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix A2-5)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices A2-1 to A2-4,
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of icons,
One icon of the plurality of types of icons is a first icon,
When the first icon is displayed, the meter of the first meter display is configured to rise at a first rate of increase,
When the first icon is displayed, the meter of the fourth meter display is configured to rise at a fourth rate of increase,
The fourth increase rate is an increase rate higher than the first increase rate.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix A2-6)
A gaming machine according to appendix A2-5,
The first icon may be displayed when a game ball wins a winning opening.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix A2-7)
A gaming machine according to appendix A2-5 or A2-6,
One icon of the plurality of types of icons is a second icon,
When the second icon is displayed, the meter of the first meter display is configured to rise at a second rate of increase,
When the second icon is displayed, the meter of the fourth meter display is configured to rise at a fifth rate of increase,
The fifth increase rate is an increase rate higher than the second increase rate,
The second increase rate is an increase rate higher than the first increase rate,
The fifth rate of increase is a rate of increase higher than the fourth rate of increase.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix A2-8)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices A2-5 to A2-7,
The fourth effect may be started in a state where the first meter display is displayed,
The fourth effect is an effect in which the fourth character changes the first meter display to the fourth meter display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix A2-9)
A gaming machine according to appendix A2-8,
The fourth character is a character that may be displayed across a plurality of continuous decorative pattern variation display,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix A2-10)
The game stand according to appendix A2-8 or A2-9,
The first icon is an icon that may appear at the display position of the fourth character,
The fourth character may use the first icon that appears at the display position of the fourth character to raise the meter of the first meter display,
The fourth character may use the first icon that appears at the display position of the fourth character to raise the meter of the fourth meter display,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix A2-11)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices A2-8 to A2-10,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a hold icon related to the symbol variation display,
The second performance may start with the hold icon displayed,
The second effect is an effect in which the fourth character changes the display mode of the hold icon.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix A2-12)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices A2-1 to A2-10,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a hold icon corresponding to the number of held balls in a hold display area,
The first meter display is a display partly or entirely overlapping the holding display area,
The fourth meter display is a display partly or entirely overlapping the holding display area.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix A2-13)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices A2-1 to A2-12,
One meter display of the plurality of types of meter display is a seventh meter display,
The seventh meter display is a display in which the first meter display in an empty state is changed,
When the seventh meter display is displayed, the big hit symbol is finally displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix A2-14)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices A2-1 to A2-13,
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of error indications,
A certain error display of the plurality of types of error displays is a display in which part or all of the error display may overlap part or all of the first meter display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix A2-15)
A gaming machine according to appendix A2-14,
The certain error display is a display that may overlap a portion representing the accumulation state of the first meter display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix A2-16)
A gaming table according to appendix A2-14 or A2-15,
It has a storage tray that can store game balls,
The certain error display is a dish full error display,
The dish full tank error display is a display that prompts the player to discharge the game ball from the storage dish.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix A2-17)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices A2-1 to A2-16,
The first meter display is a display that may be displayed during display of a stop display of decorative symbols by the display means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix A2-18)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices A2-1 to A2-17,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a variation display of a plurality of decorative symbols,
The decorative display of one of the multiple decorative pattern displays is the first decorative display of the decorative pattern,
The decorative display of the decorative pattern of one of the multiple displays of the decorative pattern is a variable display of the second decorative pattern,
The decorative display of the decorative pattern of one of the multiple displays of the decorative pattern is a variable display of the fourth decorative pattern.
The decorative display of one of the multiple decorative pattern displays is a fifth decorative display of the decorative pattern.
The variation display of the first decoration design and the variation display of the second decoration design are continuous display variations of the decoration design,
The first meter display is a display in which the state may be different between the variation display of the first decoration symbol and the variation display of the second decoration symbol,
The variation display of the fourth decoration symbol and the variation display of the fifth decoration symbol are continuous variation display of the decoration symbol,
The fourth meter display is a display in which the state may be different between the variation display of the fourth decoration symbol and the variation display of the fifth decoration symbol.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix A2-19)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices A2-1 to A2-18,
The first meter display is a display that may be displayed by the first effect,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix A2-20)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices A2-1 to A2-19,
The display means is means capable of displaying a notice display,
The notice display is a display that may be displayed when the first meter display changes to a full state,
The notice display is a display that may be displayed when the fourth meter display changes to a full state.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix AA2-1)
A gaming machine equipped with a display means,
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of meter displays,
One meter display of the plurality of types of meter display is a first meter display,
One meter display of the plurality of types of meter display is a fourth meter display,
When the first meter display changes from an empty state to a full tank state, it is finally a big hit rather than when the first meter display does not change from an empty state to a full tank state. The design is easy to confirm and display,
When the fourth meter display changes from an empty state to a full tank, it is finally a big hit rather than when the fourth meter display does not change from an empty state to a full tank. The design is easy to confirm and display,
The fourth meter display that is displayed in an empty state is more easily changed to a full state than the first meter display that is displayed in an empty state,
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of icons,
One icon of the plurality of types of icons is a first icon,
When the first icon is displayed, the meter of the first meter display is configured to rise by a first amount,
When the first icon is displayed, the meter of the fourth meter display is configured to rise by a fourth amount,
The fourth amount is greater than the first amount;
The fourth effect may be started in a state where the first meter display is displayed,
The fourth effect is an effect in which a fourth display (for example, character display, icon display, character display, symbol display, etc.) changes the first meter display to the fourth meter display. ,
A game stand characterized by that.

  It should be noted that the above description of the decorative pattern change display may be a change display of the design (more specifically, a special figure), and the display of the decorative design stop display may be a symbol (more Specifically, it may be a special display) stop display.

  In addition, in the above description, “may be” may be replaced with “always to be”, “always to be”, “always become”, or the like. It may be replaced with “always XX”.

  In addition, even if the configuration requirements are included only in the description of the embodiment, examples, modifications, various examples, supplementary notes, etc. described above, the configuration requirements are not limited to other embodiments, examples, You may apply to a modification, various examples, an appendix, etc. That is, unless there is a factor that prevents the application, the configuration requirements included only in the description of the embodiments, examples, modifications, various examples, supplementary notes, and the like are not included in the other embodiments, examples, and modifications. Even if it is applied to examples, various examples, supplementary notes, etc., it is realized as a single technical idea.

  Next, an effect in which the operation means display is displayed will be described.

  FIG. 91 is a diagram showing step by step an example in which the operation means display is displayed across the continuous symbol variation display.

  FIG. 91 (a) shows the first decorative symbol display device 208L in the center, the second decorative symbol display device 208M on the left side, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N on the right side.

  In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 91, the family crest character that has been arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L so far is slightly larger in size than the upper portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Is arranged in. That is, in the family crest character 224E ′ shown in FIG. 91, the lower half overlaps the upper part of the first decorative symbol display device 208L from the front side (player side), and this position corresponds to the initial position. The family crest character 224E 'shown in FIG. 91 can be dropped from the initial position. When the dropping operation is performed, the whole family crest character 224E' overlaps the first decorative symbol display device 208L from the front side. The family crest character 224E ′ and the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N have a front-rear relationship (positional relationship in the depth direction). Is the rearmost side, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are arranged between the family crest character 224E ′ and the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

  91, which is not shown in FIG. 91, is executed on a variable display symbol (special drawing) executed on the first special figure display device 212 (see FIG. 1 and the like) and a second special figure display device 214 (see FIG. 1 and the like). The variable display symbol (special symbol) corresponds to the first symbol. Also, a variable display symbol (ordinary symbol) executed in the ordinary symbol display device 210 (see FIG. 1 and the like) (not shown) corresponds to the second symbol. Then, the decorative symbol of variable display executed in the first decorative symbol display device 208L corresponds to the third symbol pd3. In other words, the decorative symbol shown in FIG. 5B displayed in a variable manner in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c in the first decorative symbol display device 208L corresponds to the third symbol pd3. The third symbol pd3 is an effect symbol representing the first symbol (not shown) with an enhanced decoration. The display of the first symbol is controlled by the main control unit 300, and the display of the third symbol pd3 is controlled on the sub-control units 400 and 500 side. As described above, on the side of the sub-control units 400 and 500, the timer interrupt process is executed every predetermined period. For this reason, in the first symbol and the third symbol pd3, at least a time lag is generated for a predetermined period of the timer interrupt process on the sub-control unit 400, 500 side. When the symbol pd3 also starts to be changed and the first symbol is stopped, the third symbol pd3 is also stopped. The following description will be made using the third symbol pd3 or based on the third symbol pd3. However, the same thing can be said even if the third symbol pd3 is replaced with the first symbol.

  The fourth symbol pd4 is displayed at the upper left corner of the second decorative symbol display device 208M on the left side. Here, the fourth symbol pd4 indicates that the display mode of the combination of the white square and the black circle is a variable display of the third symbol pd3 (decorative symbol), and the display mode of the combination of the black square and the white circle is the third symbol pd3. Indicates that the stop is being displayed. In addition, you may distinguish and display during change display and stop display by lighting of the LED lamp etc. of a board surface. Further, on the upper right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a mini decorative symbol obtained by reducing and displaying the third symbol pd3 is shown, and this mini decorative symbol corresponds to the fifth symbol pd5. The display pattern of the fifth symbol pd5 may be different from that of the third symbol pd3, as long as it is smaller than the size of the third symbol pd3, the display position is different, or the display position is different. Good. The 5th symbol pd5 also performs a variable display and a stop display, and, like the 4th symbol pd4, plays a role of clearly indicating the variation display and the stop display of the 3rd symbol pd3. Accordingly, the fourth symbol pd4 and the fifth symbol pd5 are synchronized with each other. A plurality of the third symbol pd3, the fourth symbol pd4, and the fifth symbol pd5 may be displayed.

  In the state shown in FIG. 91 (1), the third symbol pd3 is displayed in a variable display, the fourth symbol pd4 is a combination of a white square and a black circle, and the fifth symbol pd5 is also in a variable display. It is being displayed.

  In addition, two hold icons h1 and h2 are displayed in the effect display area 208d of the first special figure display device 212 shown in FIG. 91 (1), and it is notified that the number of hold of the current special figure is two. Has been. That is, the hold icon is displayed for the number of the hold balls of the special figure. The first hold icon (first hold icon) h1 with the old winning timing is displayed in the white display mode which is the default display mode, but the second hold icon (second hold icon) with the new winning timing is displayed. ) H2 is displayed in a red display mode which is a display mode of the pre-reading notice. In addition to this, the hold icon may be displayed in a character or pattern display mode, and represents the big hit expectation in the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold for each display mode. However, even in a display mode in which the degree of expectation of a big hit is high, the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold is not necessarily a big hit, and there may be a loss. That is, the higher the degree of expectation for jackpot, the easier it is to finally display the jackpot symbol form in the first symbol. In addition, the timing at which the hold icon starts to be displayed in the pre-reading notice mode or changes to the pre-reading notice mode includes the start of change, during change, at the time of stoppage, and at the time of winning the pre-read target hold. In the example shown in FIG. 91, only four areas hs for displaying the hold icon are prepared, but only the number (for example, eight) of the number of reserved balls in FIG. 1 and the number of reserved balls in FIG. It may be prepared. In addition, an area cs for displaying a variation icon is prepared on the left side of the effect display area 208d, and this area cs is a stage higher than the area hs for displaying the hold icon. The variation icon c is an icon displayed as an icon corresponding to the symbol variation after the symbol variation corresponding to the hold icon is started. The variation icon c shown in FIG. 91 (1) is displayed in a white display mode which is a default display mode. The variation icon c may also be displayed in a display mode having a different color or a character or pattern display mode, and represents the expectation degree of jackpot in the symbol variation display being executed for each display mode. However, even in a display mode in which the degree of expectation of the big hit is high, it is not always a big hit in the symbol variation display being executed, and there may be a case where the big hit is lost.

  A mini character display (hereinafter referred to as “mini character”) is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M on the left side shown in FIG. 91 (1). This mini character is a display that is displayed regardless of whether the 3rd symbol (decorative symbol) is changing or stopped. In the example shown in FIG. 91, the display Cd of the character of Tono-sama as the main character, It consists of a combination of a character display Lv representing a name and level (here Lv3) and a gauge display Gm. Of these displays, the character display Lv and the gauge display Gm are displayed to the Internet cooperative service user. In other words, it is a service for members registered on the Web, and the gauge increases according to the number of symbol variation display and the number of jackpots, and the level is increased when the gauge is full. A notice effect using a mini character may be performed. For example, the big hit expectation degree (here, the big hit expectation degree in the currently displayed symbol variation display) may be indicated by the action or dialogue of Tono-sama character. Further, the change in how the gauge is increased in the gauge display Gm and the color of the gauge may indicate the expected degree of jackpot in the hold (that is, equivalent to a pre-reading notice). Further, the display mode of the hold icon may be changed or the display mode of the operation means display to be described later may be changed by an animation using the Tono-sama character.

  Further, in the third decorative symbol display device 208N on the right side shown in FIG. 91 (1), the wipe display Wd is performed. In the example shown in FIG. 91, the name of the background stage is displayed on the wipe display Wd. Here, it is a castle town stage, and “wisdom town” is displayed on the wipe display Wd, and the streets of the castle town are displayed in common in the background of the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N. Note that the effect display mode may be displayed on the wipe display Wd, the current control state (for example, during probability change) may be displayed, a pre-reading notice may be displayed, and the current symbol variation is being performed. A notice (normal notice) for display may be displayed.

  In addition, an operation means display is displayed below the wipe display Wd in the third decorative symbol display device 208N on the right side shown in FIG. 91 (1). In the example shown in FIG. 91, the display imitating the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 1 is displayed regardless of whether the third symbol (decorative symbol) is being displayed or stopped. There are four types of display in the operation means display, which are hereinafter referred to as a first operation means display, a second operation means display, a third operation means display, and a fourth operation means display. In FIG. 91 (1), the first operation means display Od1 is displayed. The first operation means display Od1 is a display in which PUSH characters are added to a display that imitates the chance button 136 that emits white light. For example, a display that imitates the chance button 136 that is turned off. It may be a display in which the PUSH characters are omitted. The first operation unit display Od1 may be a default operation unit display among a plurality of types of operation unit displays. Further, the operation means display only needs to be an operation means that can be operated by the player, and is not limited to the chance button 136. The transparent portion 191 shown in FIG. Each key in 181 or a second chance button may be used. The operation means display may be a display related to the operation means. For example, an operation such as a display indicating the operation means, a display associated with the operation means, for example, a PUSH character display or an arrow indicating the operation direction. Display for prompting operation of the means (hereinafter referred to as “operation promotion display”), for example, display of the remaining period of the operation effective period of the operation means such as meter display, numerical display, and number display (hereinafter referred to as “remaining period display”). Can be enumerated. That is, as the operation means display, all of the above-mentioned enumerations may be used, or a combination thereof may be appropriately made. On the other hand, some of those listed above may not be applied. In the example shown in FIG. 91, the operation means display is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N, but may be displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, or the second decorative symbol display device 208M. May be displayed on a plurality of decorative symbol display devices, or may be displayed across a plurality of decorative symbol display devices. Further, the display number of the operation means display is not limited to one, and may be plural.

  It should be noted that the button image 136a shown in FIG. 14 and the like, and the button meter-136m shown in FIG. Whether the button image 136a or the button meter 136m in each figure is classified into the first operation means display to the fourth operation means display is described below. Depending on the feature of the operation means display, it is classified appropriately.

  In addition, the display position, size, and display number of various displays described here are not limited to those described here, and can be changed as appropriate. Further, the fourth symbol pd4 and the fifth symbol pd5 may be displayed with priority over other displays. For example, when the movable means such as the family crest member 224E ′ overlaps the fourth symbol pd4 or the fifth symbol pd5 from the front side, a plurality of the fourth symbol pd4 or the fifth symbol pd5 is displayed from the beginning. Alternatively, the display position may be changed according to the movement of the movable means.

  In FIG. 91 (2), the first operation means display Od1 displayed in FIG. 91 (1) is changed to the second operation means display Od2. The second operation means display Od2 may be a display developed from the first operation means display Od1, or may be a display switched from the first operation means display Od1. The second operation means display Od2 is a display different from the first operation means display Od1. The different display referred to here may be a display in which the display mode is changed. That is, the display may have the same shape and at least one of color, size, pattern, etc., or the shape, color, size, pattern, etc. may be the same, The display may be different in operation modes such as vibration and rotation. In these cases, the operation means itself is not changed, and the first operation means display Od1 and the second operation means display Od2 are displays for the common operation means (here, the chance button 136). Moreover, the display from which a shape differs may be sufficient. When the shape is different, the operating means is the same, but when the operating means itself is deformed (for example, advanced display, reverse display, open display, closed display, display deformed by operation, etc.) It may be a case where the display changes from the display imitating the operation means to the character display “PUSH” as the operation promotion display, or the meter display indicating the remaining period as the remaining period display. It may be a case where it has changed. Furthermore, the operation means itself may be replaced (for example, when the display imitating the chance button 136 is replaced with the display imitating the second chance button). The matter described in this paragraph is the same in the following description.

  However, the second operation means display Od2 may have the same display mode as the first operation means display Od1. In this case, the difference between the second operation means display Od2 and the first operation means display Od1 is that the second operation means display Od2 is displayed in the second operation means display Od2, as will be described later. When the corresponding operation means is operated in the state, the display mode changes, whereas the first operation means display Od1 is the state in which the first operation means display Od1 is displayed and the corresponding operation means. Even if is operated, the display mode does not change. In addition, the second operation means display Od2 enables the operation of the corresponding operation means in the display state, whereas the first operation means display Od1 disables the operation of the corresponding operation means in the display state. There may be a difference.

  The second operation means display Od2 shown in FIG. 91 (2) is a display in which PUSH characters as an operation promotion display are added to the display imitating the chance button 136 that emits red light.

  The timing at which the first operation means display Od1 changes to the second operation means display Od2 is during the display of the variable display of the third symbol pd3. This change timing is that the display of the first operation means display Od1 is determined from the stage determined by the effect lottery or the like, and the third symbol at which the display of the first operation means display Od1 is started. There may be a case where the change display of the third symbol pd3 is started next and the change display of the third symbol pd3 is started next. In this case, the first operation means display Od1 continues to be displayed during the stop display of the third symbol pd3 (during the actual stop), and the second operation means simultaneously with the start of the variable display of the next third symbol pd3. The first operation means display Od1 continues to be displayed even when the display changes to the display Od2 or when the next variation display of the third symbol pd3 starts, and the second variation after the variation display of the next third symbol pd3 is started. You may change to operation means display Od2. That is, the first operation means display Od1 may be displayed across a plurality of variable displays of the third symbol pd3. The timing at which the first operation means display Od1 changes to the second operation means display Od2 may be during the stop display of the third symbol pd3 (during the actual stop).

  FIG. 91 (2) shows the speaker 120, and a sound effect is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the display mode of the second operation means display Od2 has changed. Further, the actual chance button 136 itself changes from the white light emission state to the red light emission state. Note that the output of the sound effect, the change to the second operation means display Od2, and the change of the chance button 136 itself may be simultaneous, any one may be started first, or any one One may start later. Besides the output of the sound effect, the change to the second operation means display Od2 may be notified by lighting or blinking of the LED lamp on the board, the frame lamp 122 shown in FIG.

  In FIG. 91 (3), the third symbol pd3 is swayed (temporarily stopped) with a combination of the decorative symbol loss (“decoration 7”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 1”). On the other hand, the changing state is displayed in the fifth symbol pd5, and the fourth symbol pd4 remains the display mode of the combination of the white square and the black circle indicating that the variable symbol is being displayed.

  In FIG. 91 (4), the third symbol pd3 is stopped and displayed (mainly stopped) by a combination of the decorative symbols lost. Similarly to the third symbol pd3, the fifth symbol pd5 also displays the combination of the decorative symbols lost (main stop), and the fourth symbol pd4 is a display form of a combination of a black square and a white circle indicating that the symbol is stopped. It has switched to. The period shown in FIGS. 91 (4) to (6) is a fixed display period for the first symbol (special symbol) (not shown), and the same display is continued for the third symbol pd3 to the fifth symbol pd5. It is displayed. The second operation means display Od2 is also continuously displayed. That is, the display is continued without returning to the first operation means display Od1 before the change. In FIG. 91 (5), the number of symbol variation display has increased due to the end of symbol variation display (the third symbol pd3 has been completely stopped), and the gauge display Gm has increased. (Refer to the arrow pointing to the right shown in FIG. 91 (5)). However, the gauge may increase due to the temporary stop of the third symbol pd3. In FIG. 91 (6), the variation icon c disappears from the region cs where the variation icon is displayed.

  In FIG. 91 (7), the variation display of the third symbol pd3 is started, and the variation symbol of the decorative symbol is displayed in the fifth symbol pd5 as well as the third symbol pd3, and the variation symbol of the fourth symbol pd4 is displayed. The display mode is switched to a combination of a white square and a black circle representing the inside. However, the shift movement of the hold icon is not started, and the change icon is not displayed in the region cs where the change icon is displayed. Further, even when the variable display of the third symbol pd3 is started, the second operation means display Od2 is continuously displayed, and the second operation means display Od2 extends over the continuous variable display of the third symbol pd3. Is displayed. Further, in FIG. 91 (8), the shift movement of the hold icon has started, and the hold icon h1 that has been displayed in the area hs that displays the first hold icon until now changes to the area cs that displays the variable icon. The hold icon h2 displayed in the area hs displaying the second hold icon is starting to move toward the area hs displaying the first hold icon. The order of the start of shift movement of the hold icon, the start of the variation display of the third symbol pd3, the switching of the display mode of the fourth symbol pd4, the start of the variation display of the fifth symbol pd5 at the start of the variation of the first symbol, It may be simultaneous, or one of them may be first. However, the timing of switching the display mode of the fourth symbol pd4 coincides with the timing of starting the variable display of the fifth symbol pd5.

  In FIG. 91 (9), the shift movement of the hold icon is completed, and the change icon c in the white display mode, which is the default display mode, is displayed in the area cs that displays the change icon. A hold icon h1 having a red display mode, which is a display mode of a prefetch notice, is displayed in the display area hs.

  Also in FIG. 91 (10), the variation display of the third symbol pd3 continues, and the display of the second operation means display Od2 is also continued. Here, the display mode of the second operation means display Od2 changes, and a meter display Tm representing the remaining period which is the remaining period display is added. In other words, the second operation means display Od2 is a combination of the display in which PUSH characters are added to the display imitating the chance button 136 that emits red light and the meter display Tm. In addition, a sound effect is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the display mode of the second operation means display Od2 has changed. Either the change of the display mode or the output of the sound effect may be first or may be simultaneous. The meter display Tm is a display different from the second operation means display Od2, and the display mode of the second operation means display Od2 does not change, and it can be said that the meter display Tm is added. Further, instead of adding the meter display Tm, or together with the addition of the meter display Tm, the display mode of the second operation means display Od2 may be changed. For example, the display may be blinked, the color may be changed, or the display may be enlarged.

  Also in FIG. 91 (11), the variation display of the third symbol pd3 continues, the meter of the meter display Tm is slightly reduced, and in FIG. 91 (12), the operation means corresponds to the second operation means display Od2. The chance button 136 is operated. When the chance button 136 is operated while the second operation means display Od2 is displayed, the display mode of the second operation means display Od2 changes. In this example, as shown in FIG. 91 (13), the display returns to the first operation means display Od1. That is, the display mode in which the PUSH character is added to the display imitating the chance button 136 that emits red light is changed to the display mode in which the PUSH character is added to the display that imitates the white chance button 136. Yes. Further, when the chance button 136 is operated in a state where the second operation means display Od2 is displayed, a pre-reading notice (corresponding to the first notice effect) may be started. That is, the wipe display Wd, which has previously displayed “castle town” as the name of the background stage, displays “heat” as a pre-reading notice, and the wipe is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. An effect image Ed is added to the display Wd. The effect image Ed is an effect for conspicuously indicating that the pre-reading notice has been started. Here, the pre-reading notice is also started by the output of the sound effect from the speaker 120, the emission of various lamps, and other displays. You may notify that. Note that the output of sound effects, the light emission of various lamps, and other displays can be regarded as one of the pre-reading notices (corresponding to the first notice effect). In the state of FIG. 91 (13), since there is only one special figure hold, the target of the pre-reading notice with the characters “heat” displayed on the wipe display Wd is the hold icon h1 shown in FIG. 91 (13). The symbol change display corresponding to the first hold indicated by. Since the hold icon h1 is displayed in the display mode of the pre-reading notice, two types of pre-reading notices such as the pre-reading notice by the wipe display Wd and the pre-reading notice by the display mode of the hold icon are executed. Become. Further, the change in the display mode of the second operation means display Od2, the switching to the pre-reading notice display in the wipe display Wd, and the addition of the effect image Ed shown in FIG. 91 (13) may be performed simultaneously. Any one may be started first, and any one may be started later. The effect image Ed may be light emission of the effect image pattern by the light guide plate.

  Here, another possible example will be described in detail. First, even if the chance button 136 which is the operation means corresponding to the first operation means display Od1 is operated in the state where the first operation means display Od1 shown in FIG. 91 (1) is displayed, nothing changes. Does not happen. That is, the display mode of the first operation means display Od1 does not change, the first operation means display Od1 is displayed as it is, and an effect in response to the operation of the chance button 136 (for example, a notice effect) is started. Not. Therefore, it can be said that the operation of the chance button 136 at this timing is invalidated, and the first operation means display Od1 is a display indicating that the operation of the chance button 136 is invalid. it can. In the following description, it is assumed that the operation of the operation unit is invalid, including that the operation of the operation unit is not accepted and that the operation is invalidated as accepted.

  Next, during the period of variation display of the third symbol pd3 being executed when the first operation means display Od1 is changed to the second operation means display Od2 (FIG. 91 (2) to FIG. 91 (3)). Even when the chance button 136 which is the operation means corresponding to the second operation means display Od2 is operated, the “heat” which is the pre-reading notice on the wipe display Wd as described with reference to FIG. And the effect image Ed are added, and the pre-reading notice is started. Further, the second operation means display Od2 returns to the first operation means display Od1. In this case, the second operation means display Od2 in a display mode in which PUSH characters are added to the display imitating the chance button 136 that emits red light is a display indicating that the operation of the chance button 136 is effective. It can be said.

  On the other hand, the prefetch notice may not be started. That is, until the meter display Tm with the display added in FIG. 91 (10) is displayed, even if the chance button 136 is operated, as in the state where the first operation means display Od1 is displayed. No change may occur. In this case, it can be said that the second operation means display Od2 including the meter display Tm is a display indicating that the operation of the chance button 136 is effective, and FIGS. 91 (2) to (9). It can be said that the second operation means display Od2 having no meter display Tm is a display indicating that the operation of the chance button 136 is invalid. It can also be said that the meter display Tm itself is a display indicating that the operation of the chance button 136 is effective. Further, the pre-reading notice may not be started even if the chance button 136 is operated unless the stop display of the third symbol pd3 is performed after the change to the second operation means display Od2. That is, it can be said that the second operation means display Od2 shown in FIGS. 91 (2) to (6) is a display indicating that the operation of the chance button 136 is invalid. Further, the pre-reading notice may be started when the chance button 136 is operated only during the variation display of the third symbol pd3 being executed when the second operation means display Od2 is changed. . That is, it can be said that the second operation means display Od2 shown in FIGS. 91 (2) to (3) is a display indicating that the operation of the chance button 136 is valid, and the chance button 136 is operated. If not, the second operation means display Od2 may return to the first operation means display Od1 at the timing of FIG. 91 (4). Alternatively, it may be an aspect in which the pre-reading notice is not started unless the chance button 136 is operated before the shaking display (temporary stop) of the third symbol pd3 after the second operation means display Od2 is displayed. If the chance button 136 is not operated, the second operation means display Od2 returns to the first operation means display Od1 at the timing of the shaking display (temporary stop) shown in FIG. 91 (3). Also good. Further, even when the third symbol pd3 is being stopped (mainly stopped), if the chance button 136 is operated while the second operation means display Od2 is displayed, the pre-reading notice is started. There may be.

  Further, the meter with the meter display Tm shown in FIG. 91 (10) becomes 0 at the timing of FIG. 91 (14), for example, when the chance button 136 is not operated. That is, it becomes 0 before the symbol variation display subject to the prefetch notice is started. Even if the chance button 136 is not operated within the operation valid period, it is assumed that the operation has been performed. After the meter on the meter display Tm becomes 0, the word “heat” which is a pre-reading notice on the wipe display Wd is displayed. Is displayed and an effect image Ed is added, and a pre-reading notice is started. When there is no operation, the aspect of the pre-reading notice effect may be changed. For example, when the effect image Ed is not displayed or there is an operation, sound output such as a sound effect is executed, but when there is no operation, the sound output may not be executed.

  Although various aspects have been described above, the second operation means display Od2 returns to the first operation means display Od1 when the prefetching notice is started. However, it may not return. Further, when the chance button 136 is operated, the second operation means display Od2 may return to the first operation means display Od1 even if the pre-reading notice is not started. However, as long as the pre-reading notice is not started, the operation of the chance button 136 may be accepted thereafter, and the pre-reading notice may be started. In this case, the second operation is performed until the pre-reading notice is started. The means display Od2 may continue to be displayed as the second operation means display Od2 without returning to the first operation means display Od1.

  The fact that the pre-reading notice may be executed after the second operation means display Od2 is displayed means that the second operation means display Od2 itself corresponds to the display of the pre-reading notice (third notice effect). I can say that.

  In FIG. 91 (14), the third symbol pd3 is swayed (temporarily stopped) due to the combination of the decorative symbols being lost, but as in FIG. The fourth symbol pd4 remains in the display mode indicating that the variable display is being performed. Further, although the effect image Ed has disappeared, the pre-reading notice display (character display of “heat”) on the wipe display Wd continues.

  In FIG. 91 (15), the third symbol pd3 stops and displays the combination of decorative symbols, and the fifth symbol pd5 also displays the combination of decorative symbols and stops (mainly stops). The 4 symbol pd4 is switched to the display mode indicating that the stop display is being performed, and the fixed display period (FIG. 91 (15) to FIG. 17 (17)) of the first symbol (not shown) is started. Even during this fixed display period (during the actual stop of the third symbol pd3), the first operation means display Od1 is continuously displayed. In FIG. 91 (16), the number of symbol variation display has increased due to the termination of symbol variation display, and the gauge in the gauge display Gm has increased (see the arrow pointing to the right in FIG. 91 (16)). ). In FIG. 91 (17), the variation icon c disappears from the region cs where the variation icon is displayed.

  In FIG. 91 (18), the variation display of the third symbol pd3 is started again, and also in the fifth symbol pd5, the variation symbol of the decorative symbol is displayed as in the case of the third symbol pd3. The display mode is switched to the display mode. However, the shift movement of the hold icon has not started. Further, even when the variation display of the third symbol pd3 is started, the first operation means display Od1 is continuously displayed, and the first operation means display Od1 is also displayed a plurality of variations of the third symbol pd3. Are displayed.

  FIG. 92 is a diagram showing, in a stepwise manner, examples in which the operation means display is displayed following FIG.

  In FIG. 92 (19) following FIG. 91 (18), the shift movement of the hold icon is started, and the hold icon h1 of the pre-reading notice display mode starts moving toward the area cs displaying the variation icon, In FIG. 92 (20), the shift movement of the hold icon is completed and the hold icon is no longer displayed, but the change icon c in the red display mode is displayed in the area cs where the change icon is displayed. The symbol variation display started in FIG. 91 (18) is a symbol variation display that is a target of the above-described two types of prefetching advance notices (prefetching advance notices by the wipe display Wd and prefetching advance notices by the display mode of the hold icon h1). Even if the symbol variation display that was the subject of the pre-reading notice is started, the “heat” character is displayed on the wipe display Wd, but the symbol variation display that was the subject of the pre-fetching notice has been started. Therefore, the character “heat” in the wipe display Wd becomes a so-called normal notice (the change notice) for the currently displayed symbol change display. Further, the change icon c in the red display mode is also displayed in the display mode of the normal notice (the change notice). That is, the pre-reading notice is switched to the normal notice at the start of the symbol variation display subject to the pre-reading notice. By switching from the pre-reading notice to the normal notice and continuing the normal notice, many players may be able to notice that the started symbol change display is hot.

  In FIG. 92 (21), the reach effect of “decoration 7” is started in the variation display of the third symbol pd3. In FIG. In addition to the sound, it may be notified that the reach effect has been started by light emission or display of various lamps. In this state, the reach effect is a normal reach effect, but the reach effect of “decoration 7” may be a reach effect with a higher degree of expectation of a big hit than a reach effect with other numbers. In FIG. 92 (23), a balloon display is added to the character design display Cd displayed on the second decorative design display device 208M. The display of the balloon is a character display of “development” that suggests or notifies the advancement to super reach, and is displayed across the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In addition, the display of this balloon overlaps the variable display of the third symbol pd3 in the reach state displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the third symbol pd3 is difficult to visually recognize. In addition, the visual recognition difficulty here means the relative thing that it is difficult to visually recognize compared with the state before that (the same hereafter).

  The display of the area cs for displaying the variation icon, the display of the variation icon c, the display of the area hs for displaying the hold icon in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the display Cd of the character in the second decorative symbol display device 208M. , Character display Lv, gauge display Gm, wipe display Wd “heat” character display, and first operation means display Od1 in the third decorative symbol display device 208N are all displayed up to FIG. 92 (23). However, in FIG. 92 (24) in which the display of the balloon “development” disappeared, the character design display Cd, the character display Lv, and the gauge display Gm in the second decorative design display device 208M are displayed together with the display of the balloon. All disappear, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the display of the area hs for displaying the hold icon is all gone. However, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the display of the region cs for displaying the variation icon and the display of the variation icon c are continuously displayed because they represent the degree of expectation of the symbol variation display currently being performed. ing. In addition, in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the “heat” character display of the wipe display Wd and the first operation means display Od1 are still being displayed, and the third symbol pd3 is also being visibly displayed. The 4 symbol pd4 and the 5th symbol pd5 are also being displayed. If the hold icon is displayed in FIG. 92 (23), the display of the hold icon also disappears. The display of the balloon hiding, the character picture display Cd, the character display Lv, the gauge display Gm, and the display of the holding icon hs may all be erased at the same time, or the timing of disappearance is different. May be. Alternatively, a part of the display (for example, balloon display, character picture display Cd, character display Lv, gauge display Gm) disappears at the same time, and the remaining display (display of the area hs displaying the hold icon, display of the hold icon) ) May disappear at different times.

  In FIG. 92 (25), the display of the area cs for displaying the variation icon and the display of the variation icon c displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L move toward the second decorative symbol display device 208M. In FIG. 92 (26), the animation ends, and the display of the area cs for displaying the change icon and the display of the change icon c are displayed by the mini character until then on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. It is displayed at the position where it was done. By doing so, it is possible to perform an effect (here, a super reach effect) with a high degree of expectation of a big hit using the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L widely. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 92 (26), the dark display is displayed except for the display area of the fifth symbol pd5, and the third symbol pd3 and the background display of the castle town are not visible. However, the fifth symbol pd5 is always displayed so that it can be seen that the variable display is being performed. Note that the fifth symbol pd5 may be displayed surrounded by a frame. Further, in the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 92 (26), the wipe display Wd is changed from the characters “Heat” to the characters “Swordsman” representing the production name of super reach production (swordsman reach). ing. Therefore, it can be said that the normal notice by the wipe display Wd is ended here. On the other hand, the variation icon c moved to the second decorative symbol display device 208M continues to be displayed in a red display mode which is a display mode of a normal notice (the change notice). In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a reduced display pd3 'of the third symbol pd3 is displayed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 92 (27), the swordsman reach production of the super reach production is started and the main character is displayed in full screen, but the fifth design pd5 can be seen without being hidden. It is. In FIG. 92 (28), the display switches to the background display of the wilderness, and the main character and the enemy swordsman have started a confrontation, and the scene after slashing from FIG. . In addition, as shown in FIGS. 92 (30) to (32), the first operation means display Od1 that has been continuously displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N so far is displayed as the third decorative symbol display. An animation popping out from the device 208N and moving to the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed. In FIG. 92 (32), the first operation means display Od1 is displayed at the center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Next, in FIG. 92 (33) where the swordsman reach production continues, the first operation means display Od1 changes to the fourth operation means display Od4. That is, the display changes to the fourth operation means display Od4 during the variation display of the third symbol pd3. The fourth operation means display Od4 may be a display obtained by developing the first operation means display Od1, or may be a display switched from the first operation means display Od1. The fourth operation means display Od4 is a display different from the first operation means display Od1. The fourth operation means display Od4 shown in FIG. 92 (33) is a display in which an enlarged display, a change in display mode, and a meter display indicating the remaining period which is the remaining period display are added. That is, a display in which PUSH characters are added to the display imitating the chance button 136 that emits red light is enlarged, and a large meter display Tm ′ is additionally displayed below the display. As described above, the fourth operation means display Od4 changes in size and size as the display mode of the first operation means display Od1 changes, and the display position also changes. The large meter display Tm ′ can also be viewed as a display different from the fourth operation means display Od4. Further, in the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 92 (33), the wipe display Wd is changed from the character “swordsman” to the character “push” which is an operation promotion display.

  In FIG. 92 (34), the swordsman reach production continues, the meter on the meter display Tm ′ decreases slightly, in FIG. 35 (35), the meter further decreases, and in FIG. Decrease to 1/4 remaining. This meter display Tm ′ hides a chance-up display (character display of “chance”), and the display gradually appears as the meter decreases. Here, “up chance” means that the degree of expectation to be a big hit in the currently displayed symbol variation display is increased.

  FIG. 93 is a diagram showing, in stages, an example in which the operation means display is displayed following FIG.

  In FIG. 93 (37) following FIG. 92 (36), the chance button 136 which is an operation means corresponding to the fourth operation means display Od4 is operated. When the chance button 136 is operated in a state where the fourth operation means display Od4 is displayed, a normal notice (corresponding to the second notice effect) for notifying a big hit in the current symbol variation display is started. The Further, the fourth operation means display Od4 returns to the first operation means display Od1. In FIG. 93 (38), the crest character 224E ′ that has been in the initial position so far performs a drop operation, and the entire crest character 224E ′ overlaps the first decorative symbol display device 208L from the front side, and further the first decoration. The effect image Ed1 is displayed large on the symbol display device 208L. The effect image Ed1 is displayed so as to almost hide the scene after the swordsman and the swordsman in the wilderness background image, making it difficult for both the swordsman and the swordsman to see. The tip portion of the effect image Ed1 is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and the effect image Ed1 is displayed across the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N. Has been. In addition, in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the first operation means display Od1 returned from the fourth operation means display Od4 is displayed again, and above that, the wipe display Wd is a character “press”. Changes to “Victory” and the tip of the effect image Ed1 overlaps the wipe display Wd. However, the character “Victory” is visible, and the tip portion of the effect image Ed1 makes the character “Victory” in the wipe display Wd conspicuous. It should be noted that the effect image Ed1 does not overlap with the fifth symbol pd5 that continuously represents the variable display, and the fact that the variable symbol display continues is clearly shown in the fifth symbol pd5 together with the fourth symbol pd4. It is displayed. As described above, in this example, the crest character 224E 'performs the drop operation and the effect image Ed1 is displayed as the effect of the normal notice, and the wipe display Wd is changed to the characters "win". The effect of the normal notice here is an effect with high expectation level of the jackpot, and when the expectation level of the jackpot is low, the family crest member 224E ′ does not fall or the effect image Ed1 is not displayed even if it falls. Or the wipe display Wd changes to “defeat” or changes to a question mark. Further, simultaneously with the fall of the family crest member 224E ′, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M shown in FIG. 93 (38), the reduced display pd3 ′ of the third symbol pd3 is a combination of the big symbol of the decorative symbol (“decoration 7”). -"Decoration 7"-"Decoration 7") starts shaking display (temporary stop).

  In FIG. 93 (39), the crest character 224E 'that has been in the fall position has risen to the initial position, but the effect image Ed1 is still displayed across the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N.

  In FIG. 93 (40), the effect image Ed1 disappears, and the result of the swordsman reach effect which is a super reach effect is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Here, the scene where the protagonist wins is displayed. Therefore, the super reach production is the production from FIG. 92 (26) to FIG. 93 (40). 93 (40), the scene where the main character wins is viewed as a part of the normal notice started when the chance button 136 is operated while the fourth operation means display Od4 is displayed. You can also.

  In FIG. 93 (41), the reduced display pd3 ′ of the third symbol pd3 displayed on the second ornamental symbol display device 208M returns to the first ornamental symbol display device 208L, and is displayed on the first ornamental symbol display device 208L. “Decoration 7” is displayed in any of the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Here, any “decoration 7” is displayed in a shaking manner (temporarily stopped), but the 5th symbol pd5 continues to be displayed in a variable manner, and the 4th symbol pd4 remains in a display mode indicating that the variable display is being displayed. . Further, the normal notice display (character display of “win”) in the wipe display Wd is continued.

  In FIG. 93 (42), the third symbol pd3 is stopped and displayed (mainly stopped) with a combination of big symbols of decorative symbols (“decoration 7”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 7”), and the fifth symbol pd5 is also displayed. The combination of the big symbols of the decorative symbols is stopped (mainly stopped), and the fourth symbol pd4 is switched to the display mode indicating that the stop symbol is being displayed, and the fixed display of the first symbol (special symbol) not shown is started. During this fixed display period (during the actual stop of the third symbol pd3), the first operation means display Od1 and the normal notice display (“win” character display) on the wipe display Wd are continuously displayed. Yes.

  Here, another possible example will be described in detail. First, in FIG. 91 (13) to FIG. 92 (32) after returning to the first operation means display Od1, even if the chance button 136 which is the operation means corresponding to the first operation means display Od1 is operated, No change occurs as in the state of FIG. 91 (1). That is, the display mode of the first operation means display Od1 does not change, the first operation means display Od1 is displayed as it is, and an effect in response to the operation of the chance button 136 (for example, a notice effect) is started. Not.

  On the other hand, when the first operation means display Od1 is changed to the fourth operation means display Od4, as described above, the operation of the chance button 136 is accepted and the normal notice is started. Here, the series of effects of FIGS. 92 (33) to 93 (40) including the display of the fourth operation means display Od4 is the last to determine whether or not the big hit is made in the currently displayed symbol variation display. It can be said that this is equivalent to the so-called production (the so-called final judge production). The fact that the normal notice may be executed after the fourth operation means display Od4 is displayed means that the fourth operation means display Od4 itself corresponds to the display of the normal notice (second notice effect). I can say that.

  Further, in this example, the first operation means display Od1 is changed and the fourth operation means display Od4 is displayed. However, the fourth operation means display Od1 is not displayed. The display Od4 may start to be displayed alone, or even if the first operation means display Od1 is displayed, the first operation means display Od1 does not change, but the fourth operation means display Od4 alone. It may begin to be displayed. However, when the first operation means display Od1 is changed and the fourth operation means display Od4 is displayed, the big hit expectation is higher than when the fourth operation means display Od4 starts to be displayed alone. .

  Further, when the chance button 136 is operated, in FIG. 93 (38), the fourth operation means display Od4 returns to the first operation means display Od1, but the fourth operation means display Od4 disappears, Nothing is displayed on the operation means display, and the first operation means display Od1 may be displayed again after the big hit game is ended or when the next variable display of the third symbol pd3 is disclosed. . Alternatively, the first operation means display Od1 may not be displayed even when the big hit game ends, or the first operation means display Od1 is not displayed even if the next variable display of the third symbol pd3 is disclosed. You may make it not display.

  Further, even if the chance button 136 is not operated before the meter displayed on the meter display Tm ′ shown in FIG. 92 (33) becomes 0, the meter displayed on the meter display Tm ′ is assumed to have been operated. After reaching 0, the normal notice effect of FIGS. 93 (38) to (40) may be executed.

  In the example described with reference to FIG. 91, when the chance button 136 is operated while the second operation means display Od2 is displayed, the pre-reading notice is started, but the chance button 136 is operated. The normal notice for the symbol variation display performed at the time may be started instead of the prefetch notice.

  FIG. 94 is a diagram showing step by step an example in which the first operation means display Od1 is changed to the second operation means display Od2 in a pachinko machine having a game board having a configuration different from the configuration of the game board shown in FIG. It is.

  The description here will focus on differences from the examples shown in FIGS. 91 to 93, and the same points as in the examples shown in FIGS. 91 to 93 may be omitted.

  In the example shown in FIG. 94, instead of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, which are arranged on the left and right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a lower part of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The fourth decorative symbol display device 208O is disposed in the screen. The fourth decorative symbol display device 208O is also movable means, like the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and the size of the display screen is smaller than that of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In the fourth decorative symbol display device 208O shown in FIG. 94 (a), the upper portion overlaps the center portion of the effect display area 208d in the first decorative symbol display device 208L from the front side (player side), and this position is the initial position. Correspondingly, the fourth decorative symbol display device 208O is a display device capable of moving up and down. In the example shown in FIG. 94, the background image of the fourth decorative symbol display device 208O is also the streets of the castle town, and four areas hs for displaying the hold icon are displayed. In FIG. 94 (a), all the areas hs are displayed. The hold icons h1 to h4 in the white display mode, which is the default display mode, are displayed.

  A region cs for displaying a variation icon is prepared at the left end of the effect display region 208d in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and this region cs is the same low stage as the region hs for displaying the hold icon. In FIG. 94 (a), the change icon c of the white display mode, which is the default display mode, is displayed in the area cs, and the variable display is performed in each of the third symbol pd3 and the fifth symbol pd5. . In this example, the fourth symbol pd4 is displayed on the upper left of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In FIG. 94A, the fourth symbol pd4 is a display mode indicating that the variable display is being performed.

  Furthermore, a first operation means display Od1 is displayed at the right end of the effect display area 208d in the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

  In FIG. 94 (b), the display Cd1 of the hero's character pattern appears on the variation icon c. In FIG. 94 (c), the character's character descends behind the variation icon c and changes. It is displayed in an upright position on the area cs displaying the icon. Then, an animation is displayed in which the character of the protagonist carries the variation icon c (FIG. 94 (d)) and throws away the variation icon c carried (FIG. 94 (e)). That is, the animation here is a moving animation of the fluctuation icon c. The thrown variation icon c traverses the third symbol pd3 being displayed (FIG. 94 (f)) and hits the first operation means display Od1 (FIG. 94 (g)). Then, as shown in FIG. 94 (h), the effect image Ed2 appears so as to hide a part of the change icon c and the first operation means display Od1, and in FIG. 94 (i), the change icon c disappears. A change occurs in the first operation means display Od1, and in FIG. 94 (j), the effect image Ed2 disappears, and the second operation means display Od2 is displayed at the position where the first operation means display Od1 was displayed. ing. The second operation means display Od2 here is a display mode in which PUSH characters are added to the display imitating the chance button 136 that emits blue light. The actual chance button 136 itself also changes from the white light emission state to the blue light emission state. As the light emission mode of the chance button 136 itself or the display mode of the second operation means display Od2, the red mode and the blue mode have a higher expectation level for the big hit than the white mode. As shown in FIGS. 91 (1) to (2), the first operation means display Od1 is changed to the second operation means display Od2 alone, and the character is involved as in this example. In the case where the one operation means display Od1 is changed to the second operation means display Od2, the expectation degree of jackpot is higher. Note that the character of Tono-sama after throwing away the variation icon c continues the same pose until FIG. 94 (j). In FIG. 94 (k), the character is displayed in an upright position on the region cs displaying the variation icon. Yes.

  In FIG. 94 (k), a balloon display of “chance is” is added to the character pattern display Cd1. This balloon display of “chance is” can be said to be a kind of operation promotion display or a kind of pre-reading notice. Also in this example, it can be said that the second operation means display Od2 itself corresponds to the display of the pre-reading notice (third notice effect).

  In FIG. 94 (l), the chance button 136, which is an operation means corresponding to the second operation means display Od2, is operated. If the chance button 136 is operated while the second operation means display Od2 is displayed, the display mode of the second operation means display Od2 also changes in this example, as shown in FIG. Return to the first operation means display Od1. In addition, a pre-reading notice (corresponding to the first notice effect) is started. In FIG. 94 (m), a change animation is started in which the display mode of the hold icon displayed on the fourth decorative symbol display device 208O changes to the display mode of the pre-reading notice, and part or all of the second hold icon h2 is displayed. The effect image Ed3 appears so as to be hidden, and in the subsequent FIG. 94 (n), the second hold icon h2 that has been changed to the display form of the fan picture is displayed in front of the effect image Ed3. In FIG. 94 (o), the effect image Ed3 disappears, and the second hold icon h2 of the display pattern of the fan pattern, which is the display mode of the pre-reading notice, is displayed. Will continue to be displayed until the second hold is consumed.

  Other possible examples will be described in detail. First, in this example, the chance button 136 is operated quickly after the second operation means display Od2 is displayed. However, even if the operation timing is delayed, if the operation timing is within the effective period, FIG. m) to the effect of the pre-reading notice in FIG. In addition, the chance button 136 is displayed until the variation display of the third symbol pd3, which is being executed when the display of the second operation means display Od2, is started, and the next variation display of the third symbol pd3 is started. If not operated, the second operation means display Od2 is continuously displayed. That is, when the display of the second operation means display Od2 is started, the variation display of the third symbol pd3, which is being executed when the display is started, is continued and the second operation means display Od2 is continuously displayed during the stop display. Even if the next variation display of the three symbols pd3 is started, the second operation means display Od2 is continuously displayed, and the second manipulation means display Od2 is displayed across the variation variation of the continuous third symbol pd3. The Furthermore, if the chance button 136 is not operated, the second operation means display Od2 may continue to be displayed until the symbol variation display corresponding to the second hold icon h2 shown in FIG. 94 ends.

  The display imitating the chance button 136 that emits blue light may correspond to an example of a third operation means display. The third operation means display here is an operation means display in a mode different from the first operation means display Od1, and the third operation means display is in a state where the third operation means display is displayed. This means an operation means display in which the display mode does not change even when the operation means corresponding to the display (here, the chance button 136) is operated. When the operation means corresponding to the third operation means display is operated in a state where the third operation means display is displayed, the notice effect may be started or may not be started. . Hereinafter, the display imitating the chance button 136 that emits blue light will be referred to as blue third operation means display, and the description will be continued. For example, until the meter display Tm shown in FIG. 91 (10) is added to the blue third operation means display, or until the PUSH character is added, the operation of the chance button 136 is disabled and the meter display is made. If there is an operation of the chance button 136 after Tm is added or PUSH is added, the pre-reading notice effect of FIGS. 94 (m) to (o) may be executed. May be. In other words, there may be a case where the period for disabling the operation of the chance button 136 is switched to the period for enabling it. In this case, when the meter display Tm is added to the blue third operation means display or the chance button 136 is operated after the PUSH character is added, the first display as shown in FIG. When the meter display Tm is added to the blue third operation means display or the PUSH character is added to the third operation means display Od1, the third operation means display is changed to the second operation means display Od1. It can be said that it has changed to means display. Moreover, there may be a case where the blue third operation means display changes to the first operation means display Od1, and in this case, the operation of the chance button 136 is always invalidated. If the pre-reading notice is not started even if the player operates the chance button 136 while the blue third operation means display is displayed, the player can determine when the operation of the chance button 136 is effectively switched, Or it waits, expecting switching effectively, whether it returns to 1st operation means display Od1 without switching. The degree of expectation that is effectively switched may be expressed by the light emission mode of the chance button 136 itself or the display mode of the third operation means display. For example, the expectation may be higher in the blue mode than in the red mode, and in the 7-color change mode (rainbow mode) than in the blue mode. When the operation of the chance button 136 is switched effectively, the prefetching notice is executed, and the expectation of the big hit becomes higher than the case where the operation returns to the first operation means display Od1 without switching. Further, during the period in which the operation of the chance button 136 is invalid, the display mode of the third operation means display may be changed to increase the level of expectation for effective switching, or to decrease it.

  In this example, the remaining period display of the chance button 136 is not displayed. However, even if the chance button 136 is not operated within the operation effective period of the chance button 136, it is assumed that the operation has been performed. After the expiration of the valid period, the pre-reading notice effect shown in FIGS. 94 (m) to (o) may be executed.

  Further, in FIG. 94 (j), the display changes to the second operation means display Od2, but may change to the fourth operation means display Od4. In this case, the chance button 136 is disabled until the symbol variation display corresponding to the second hold icon h2 to be notified starts, and the symbol variation display corresponding to the second hold icon h2 is started. If there is an operation of the button 136, the normal notice may be started.

  95 is a diagram showing stepwise modifications of the example shown in FIG.

  The description here will focus on differences from the example shown in FIG. 94, and the same points as in the example shown in FIG. 94 may be omitted.

  Also in the example shown in FIG. 95, the fourth decorative symbol display device 208O is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In the fourth decorative symbol display device 208O shown in FIG. 95 (a), four hold icons h1 to h4 are displayed, and each of the hold icons h1 to h4 has a white display mode which is a default display mode. is there. In addition, a white display mode variation icon c, which is the default display mode, is displayed at the left end of the effect display area 208d in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. The first operation means display Od1 is displayed.

  In FIG. 95 (b), on the first operation means display Od1, a display Cd1 of the hero's character picture appears on the first operation means display Od1, and in FIG. It descends behind Od1 and is displayed in an upright position. Then, an animation is displayed in which the character of the main character takes on the first operation means display Od1 (FIG. 95 (d)) and throws off the carried first operation means display Od1 (FIG. 95 (e)). That is, the animation here is a moving animation of the first operation means display Od. The first operation means display Od1 thrown away passes through the front of the third symbol pd3 during the variable display, and in FIG. 95 (f), the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the fourth decorative symbol display device 208O. Just displayed on the border. That is, the upper half of the first operating means display Od1 is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the lower half of the first operating means display Od1 is displayed on the fourth decorative symbol display device 208O. The first operation means display Od1 falls into the fourth decorative symbol display device 208O as it is (see the arrow extending downward from the first operation means display Od1 shown in FIG. 95 (f)), FIG. In g), four icons are displayed on the hold icons h1 to h4 displayed side by side. Next, as shown in FIG. 95 (h), the first operation means display Od1 changes to the second operation means display Od2 at that location. In other words, the display changes to a display mode in which PUSH characters are added to the display imitating the chance button 136 that emits blue light. Further, the actual chance button 136 itself also changes to a blue light emitting state.

  In FIG. 95 (i), the character Cd1 is displayed at the position where the first operation means display Od1 was displayed. A balloon display is added. The display of the balloon “Don't press a button” can be said to be a kind of operation promotion display or a kind of pre-reading notice. Also in this example, it can be said that the second operation means display Od2 itself corresponds to the display of the pre-reading notice (third notice effect).

  The subsequent steps are the same as those in FIG.

  In the example shown in FIG. 95, the arrival point of the thrown first operation means display Od1 is in the fourth decorative symbol display device 208O, but may be in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. . In the example shown in FIG. 95, the operation means display is moved (thrown away) while the operation of the chance button 136 is invalid, but the operation means display is displayed while the operation of the chance button 136 is valid. You may move. That is, the display itself may be moved after changing to the second operation means display Od2 which is also a pre-reading notice display (third notice effect). However, even if the chance button 136 is operated during the movement, the prefetch notice is not started. Further, as for other conceivable examples, various examples described as other conceivable examples in FIG. 94 can be applied.

  FIG. 96 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner an example of changing from the first operation means display Od1 to the third operation means display Od3 and further changing from the third operation means display Od3 to the second operation means display Od2. is there.

  The example in FIG. 96 and after is an example in the pachinko machine 100 provided with the game board 200 shown in FIG. 3. In the explanation after FIG. The description of the same points as in the examples shown in FIGS.

  The state of FIG. 96 (a) is the same as the state of FIG. 91 (a), and the variable display is performed in each of the third symbol pd3 and the fifth symbol pd5. Further, the fourth symbol pd4 displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M is a display mode representing that the variable display is being performed. Further, a first operation means display Od1 is displayed below the wipe display Wd displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

  In FIG. 96 (b), the first operation means display Od1 changes to the third operation means display Od3. The third operation means display Od3 may be a display obtained by developing the first operation means display Od1, or may be a display switched from the first operation means display Od1. The third operation means display Od3 is a display different from the first operation means display Od1. The third operation means display Od3 shown in FIG. 96 (b) is a display mode in which PUSH characters are added to the display imitating a state in which the chance button 136 emitting white light vibrates. In addition to changing to a display of a different color, the display may change to a display having a different operation mode such as vibration. Note that the actual chance button 136 itself vibrates while emitting white light. Furthermore, the characters “Preparing” are displayed on the wipe display Wd where “castle town” as the name of the background stage has been displayed. The character under preparation here is a character indicating that it is a period of waiting until the operation of the chance button 136 becomes effective. That is, it becomes a character indicating that the operation of the chance button 136 is invalid (hereinafter the same). Therefore, even if the chance button 136 is operated while the third operation means display Od3 is displayed, no change occurs. That is, the display mode of the third operation means display Od3 does not change, the third operation means display Od3 is displayed as it is, and an effect (for example, a notice effect, etc.) in response to the operation of the chance button 136 is started. Not. When the characters “in preparation” are displayed, the third operation means display Od3 is displayed (hereinafter the same). By displaying the characters “in preparation” on the wipe display Wd, it may be possible to focus attention on the change in the third operation means display Od3 and future development.

  In FIG. 96 (c), the third symbol pd3 is swayed (temporarily stopped) with the combination of the decorative symbols lost ("decoration 7"-"decoration 7"-"decoration 1"). ), The third symbol pd3 is stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative symbols lost (main stop), and this main stop continues until FIG. In FIG. 96 (g), the variable display of the third symbol pd3 is started. The third operation means display Od3 is displayed continuously from FIG. 96 (b), is displayed during the stop display of the third symbol pd3, and is displayed across the continuous variation display of the third symbol pd3. Yes.

  In FIG. 96 (h), the shift movement of the hold icon is started, and in FIG. 96 (i), the shift movement is completed. As a result, the first hold icon h1 is a hold icon with a red display mode, which is a display mode of the pre-reading notice. The third operation means display Od3 continues to be displayed from the start to the completion of the shift of the hold icon. Note that, from FIG. 96 (b) to FIG. 96 (i), the characters “in preparation” continue to be displayed on the wipe display Wd.

  In FIG. 96 (j), the variation display of the third symbol pd3 continues. Here, the third operation means display Od3 changes to the second operation means display Od2. The second operation means display Od2 shown in FIG. 96 (j) is a combination of the display in which the PUSH character is added to the display imitating the chance button 136 that emits red light and the meter display Tm. Also, in the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 96 (j), the wipe display Wd is changed from the character “Preparing” to the character “Press” that is the operation promotion display.

  Also in FIG. 96 (k), the variation display of the third symbol pd3 continues, the meter of the meter display Tm slightly decreases, and in FIG. 96 (l), the operation means corresponds to the second operation means display Od2. The chance button 136 is operated. When the chance button 136 is operated while the second operation means display Od2 is displayed, the display mode of the second operation means display Od2 changes. In this example, as shown in FIG. 96 (m), the first operation means display Od1 is changed. Further, when the chance button 136 is operated in a state where the second operation means display Od2 is displayed, as shown in FIG. 96 (m), a change in which the display mode of the hold icon changes to the display mode of the prefetch notice. The animation is started and the effect image Ed4 appears so as to hide the entire first hold icon h1 that has been displayed in red until now. In FIG. 96 (n), the effect image Ed4 disappears and the first hold icon h1 is changed to a holding icon in a seven-color change mode (rainbow mode). In the display mode of the hold icon, the expectation degree of jackpot is higher in the rainbow mode than in the red display mode. Therefore, by operating the chance button 136 in a state where the second operation means display Od2 is displayed, the prefetching notice that has been performed so far is changed to a prefetching notice that has a high expectation of the big hit.

  In the example of FIG. 96 described above, since the third operation means display Od3 is changed to the second operation means display Od2, and the chance button 136 is operated, the pre-reading notice is started. The means display Od2 itself is also a pre-read notice display (third notice effect), and the pre-read notice may be executed after the third operation means display Od3 is displayed. It can be said that the means display Od3 itself corresponds to the display of the pre-reading notice (third notice effect).

  It should be noted that even if the chance button 136 is not operated before the meter displayed on the meter display Tm shown in FIG. 96J becomes 0, the meter displayed on the meter display Tm is set to 0. After that, the pre-reading notice effect shown in FIGS. 96 (m) to (n) may be executed.

  FIG. 97 is a diagram showing step by step an example in which there are periods during which two types of operation means display are displayed simultaneously.

  The first operation means display Od1 shown in FIG. 97 (b) is changed to the second operation means display Od2 in FIG. 9 (c), and sound effects are output from the speaker 120. In FIG. 97 (d), the reach effect of “decoration 4” is started in the third symbol pd3 that was being displayed in a variable manner. In the first ornament symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 97 (e), the third symbol pd3 is displayed. The reach character image is displayed so as to hide. However, the fourth symbol pd4 and the fifth symbol pd5 are not hidden, and it is well understood that the variable display is still continued.

  Next, in FIG. 97 (f), the button effect is started, and in the center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a display in which PUSH characters are added to the display imitating the chance button 136 that emits red light is displayed large. Below that, a meter display Tm ′ representing the remaining period, which is a remaining period display, is also displayed. These displays are part of the button effect display, and correspond to the fourth operation means display Od4. On the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second operation means display Od2 displayed from FIG. 97 (c) is continuously displayed. At the timing of FIG. 97 (f), the fourth operation means is displayed. The display Od4 and the second operation means display Od2 are displayed at the same time. Note that “displayed simultaneously” does not need to be simultaneous until the display start time, in other words, means that they are displayed overlapping in time (in parallel in time) (in the following, The same).

  In FIG. 97 (g), the fourth operation means display Od4 and the second operation means display Od2 are simultaneously displayed. In FIG. 97 (g), as in FIG. 92 (35), the meter display Tm ′ is reduced to some extent, but in FIG. 97 (g), unlike FIG. I can't see it.

  In FIG. 97 (h), the chance button 136 is operated. The chance button 136 is an operation unit corresponding to both the second operation unit display Od2 and the fourth operation unit display Od4. Here, the fourth operation unit display Od4 has priority, and FIG. As shown in (i), the fourth operation means display Od4 disappears, a decorative symbol “continue” that is a pseudo-continuous symbol appears in the middle symbol display area 208b, and the third symbol pd3 is the first time in the pseudo-continuous effect. Is temporarily stopped. The pseudo-continuous effect is a notice effect (ordinary notice effect) for the currently displayed symbol variation display and corresponds to a second notice effect. On the other hand, there is no change in the second operation means display Od2, and it continues to be displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

  The chance button 136 is operated again almost immediately after the operation of the chance button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 97 (h) (FIG. 97 (j)). As shown in FIG. 97 (k), the operation of the chance button 136 here is changed from the second operation means display Od2 to the first operation means display Od1 as in FIG. 91 (13). In the wipe display Wd displayed on the one operation means display Od1, the word “heat” is displayed as a pre-reading notice display (first notice effect), and further, in the third decorative symbol display device 208N. An effect image Ed is added to the wipe display Wd. Note that in the third symbol pd3 shown in FIG. 97 (k), the first temporary stop in the pseudo-continuous effect is continued.

  In FIG. 97 (l), re-variation of the third symbol pd3 in the pseudo-continuous effect is started, and in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the effect image Ed disappears but the pre-reading notice display in the wipe display Wd. (Character display of “heat”) continues.

  In the example described above, the normal notice effect has priority over the normal notice effect and the prefetch notice effect. The normal notice is associated with the fourth operation means display Od4 on which the meter display Tm ′ indicating the remaining period of the operation effective period is displayed, and the operation effective period is the period of the currently displayed symbol variation display. Limited to within. On the other hand, the pre-reading notice is associated with the second operation means display Od2 that can be displayed across the continuous variation display of the third symbol pd3, and there is a time margin. Therefore, the normal notice associated with the fourth operation means display Od4 is preferentially started. As shown in this example, by providing a start order (priority order) of the notice effects, a plurality of notice effects are not performed at a time, and it is possible to clearly inform the player what happened. There are advantages.

  When the chance button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 97 (d), the effect of the pre-reading notice as shown in FIG. 97 (k) is immediately started, and the second operation means display Od2 is displayed on the first display. Changes to the operation means display Od1. Therefore, in this case, in FIG. 97 (f), the fourth operation means display Od4 and the first operation means display Od1 are displayed simultaneously. In the example shown in FIG. 97, the display changes to the second operation means display Od2 in FIG. 97C, but changes to the third operation means display Od3 shown in FIG. The timing may change from the third operation means display Od3 to the second operation means display Od2 at the timing (g) or the timing (i) in FIG. In this case, in FIG. 97 (f), the fourth operation means display Od4 and the third operation means display Od3 are displayed simultaneously.

  In addition, even if the chance button 136 is not operated before the meter displayed on the meter display Tm ′ shown in FIG. 97 (f) becomes 0, the meter displayed on the meter display Tm is 0. After that, the pseudo-continuous effect may be started. Further, the remaining operation period display is not displayed in the second operation means display Od2 displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N, but the chance button 136 is not operated within the operation effective period of the chance button 136. Even in this case, it may be assumed that the operation has been performed, and the pre-reading notice effect of FIG. 97 (k) may be executed after the operation effective period has elapsed.

  Even if the operation of the chance button 136 in FIG. 97 (h) is a so-called long press operation instead of a single operation such as a single press or a short press, a normal notice effect by a pseudo-continuous effect. However, the operation of the chance button 136 is temporarily stopped and the operation is performed again, whereby the pre-reading notice effect by the character display of “heat” and the effect image Ed in the wipe display Wd is started.

  Furthermore, for one operation of the chance button 136, there is only one effect of the normal notice effect by the pseudo-continuous effect and the character display of “heat” in the wipe display Wd and the pre-read notice effect by the effect image Ed. Instead of being started, both effects may be started or may be started without fail.

  FIG. 98 is a modification of the example shown in FIG. 96, and is a diagram showing step by step an example in which there are periods during which the display imitating the operating means is displayed simultaneously.

  As in the example shown in FIG. 96, the first operation means display Od1 shown in FIG. 98A changes to the third operation means display Od3 in FIG. In the wipe display Wd, the characters “Preparing” are displayed.

  In FIG. 98 (i), the third operation means display Od3 is also displayed, and at the timing of the next figure (j), there is a single ball winning at the first special figure starting port 230. In FIG. Two hold icons that were only displayed are now displayed. In FIG. 98 (k), the second hold icon h2 is increased. The second hold icon h2 is a so-called button hold icon in which a mini-item MI in which PUSH characters are added to a display imitating the chance button 136 that emits red light is added to the hold icon hd in the white display mode. is there. The button hold icon here refers to a hold icon whose display mode changes when the corresponding operation unit is operated, and does not necessarily have to be a display imitating the operation unit, and may be only an operation promotion display mode. Further, only the remaining period display mode or a combination of these modes may be used. Corresponding operating means may be displayed as a picture on the icon, and here is a chance button 136. The button hold icon h2 shown in FIG. 98 (k) is different from the first operation means display Od1, the second operation means display Od2, the third operation means display Od3, and the fourth operation means display Od4. That is, although the display is different from the operation means display, the mini item MI is a reduced display of the operation means display (here, the second operation means display Od2 displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N). ing. In other words, the display mode of the second hold icon (button hold icon) h2 shown in FIG. 98 (k) is a display mode in which the second operation means display Od2 is reduced. Note that the size of the mini item MI may change according to the degree of expectation of the jackpot, or depending on the size of the displayed operation means display, the display mode of the button hold icon may be the operation means display (for example, A display mode in which the second operation means display Od2) is enlarged may be used. Further, the button hold icon is displayed only during the operation valid period of the chance button 136. That is, while the button hold icon is displayed, the operation of the chance button 136 is treated as valid. However, when the button hold icon is displayed at the same time as the operation means display, even if the chance button 136 is operated, an effect relating to the operation means display is performed first, and when the chance button 136 is operated again, the button There may be an effect related to the hold icon. Also in the following examples, the description here can be applied to the button hold icon, and the description here can also be applied to the button change icon. In addition, as a display mode that changes, a display mode of a pre-reading notice that varies depending on the level of expectation of jackpot, and a display mode that has a low level of expectation of jackpot includes a default display mode. The display mode of a symbol is also included. The button hold icon itself can be regarded as a pre-read notice display. The button hold icon is a display different from the operation means display. The third decorative symbol display device 208N of FIG. 98 (k) displays the third operation means display Od3, and the chance button 136 that emits white light in the third operation means display Od3 vibrates. A display imitating a state of being present and a display imitating a chance button 136 that emits red light in the second hold icon h2 (button hold icon) are simultaneously displayed. Note that a mode in which the hold icon in the white display mode is omitted and only the mini item MI is set as the hold icon may be used. Alternatively, the second hold icon h2 is only a hold icon in a white display mode, and can be seen as a mode in which the mini item MI is added to the second hold icon h2, but in any case, it emits white light The display imitating the state that the chance button 136 is vibrating and the display imitating the chance button 136 emitting red light are displayed at the same time.

  In FIG. 98 (l), as in FIG. 96 (j), the third operation means display Od3 changes to the second operation means display Od2. The second operation means display Od2 shown in FIG. 97 (j) is also a combination of the display in which PUSH characters are added to the display imitating the chance button 136 that emits red light and the meter display Tm. In addition, the wipe display Wd also changes from “preparing” to “pressing” as an operation promotion display. In FIGS. 98 (l) to (n), two displays imitating the chance button 136 that emits red light are displayed simultaneously. Here, the hold of the symbol variation display that is the target of the pre-reading notice of the second operation means display Od2 is the hold indicated by the first hold icon h1.

  In FIG. 98 (o), the chance button 136 is operated in a state where two displays simulating the chance button 136 that emits red light are displayed at the same time. The chance button 136 is an operation means corresponding to both the second operation means display Od2 and the second hold icon h2 which is a button hold icon, and here, pre-reading notice for both is started. That is, as shown in FIG. 98 (p), the effect image Ed4 appears so as to hide all of the second hold icon h2 that is the button hold icon, and the symbol that is the target of the pre-reading notice of the second operation means display Od2. The effect image Ed5 also appears so as to hide the entire first hold icon h1 representing the hold of the variable display. In FIG. 98 (q), the effect images Ed4 and Ed5 disappear, and the first hold icon h1 is 7 It changes to the hold icon of the color change mode (rainbow mode). In addition, the second hold icon h2 is changed from a button hold icon to a hold icon in a display mode representing the face of the character of Tonosama. Therefore, the mini item MI in which the characters PUSH are added to the display imitating the chance button 136 that emits red light disappears. On the other hand, at the stage of FIG. 98 (p), the second operation means display Od2 is changed to the first operation means display Od1. In the display mode of the hold icon, the expectation degree of jackpot is higher in the display mode representing the face of the Tono-sama character than in the rainbow mode.

  In the example shown in FIG. 98, the operation effective period of the chance button 136 related to the button hold icon and the operation effective period of the chance button 136 related to the second operation means display Od2 overlap (FIG. 98 (l) to FIG. 98 (n) In this overlapping period, it is possible to see the change of the hold icon at a time by one operation of the chance button 136, which may surprise the player. In this example, two notice effects are performed simultaneously, but three or more notice effects may be performed simultaneously. For example, when a plurality of button hold icons appear due to winning of a plurality of balls, or when a plurality of second operation means display Od2 is displayed (for example, one changes from the first operation means display Od1 and another For example, there may be a case where the third operation means display Od3 changes. The greater the number of announcements performed at the same time, the higher the degree of expectation of the big hit. If the pre-announcement effect to be performed at the same time is an effect of the pre-reading notice, the target of the pre-reading notice may be different or the same. Alternatively, the fourth operation means display Od4 is also displayed at the same time, and unlike the example shown in FIG. 97, the normal notice may be performed simultaneously with the prefetch notice. Further, a plurality of fourth operation means displays Od4 may be displayed, and a plurality of normal notices may be simultaneously performed by a single operation. In this case, the greater the number of normal announcements being made at the same time, the higher the probability of a big hit in the currently displayed symbol variation display.

  In this example, the appearance timing of the button hold icon is FIG. 98 (k), which is earlier than the change timing to the second operation means display Od2. Therefore, when the chance button 136 is operated at the timing of FIG. 98 (k) before the change from the third operation means display Od3 to the second operation means display Od2, the button that is the second hold icon h2 is first displayed. If only the hold icon changes, and then the chance button 136 is operated again after the second operation means display Od2 is displayed, only the first hold icon h1 is changed this time. In contrast to this example, the change timing to the second operation means display Od2 may be earlier than the appearance timing of the button hold icon. In this case, when the chance button 136 is operated at the timing when the second operation means display Od2 is displayed, only the first hold icon h1 changes first, and then the chance that the button hold icon appears and then the chance. If the button 136 is operated again, only the button hold icon changes this time. Therefore, the player can choose whether to change two hold icons at a time or one at a time waiting for the appearance of the button hold icon, and to entertain the player There is.

  Even when the second operation means display Od2 and the button hold icon are displayed at the same time, only the button hold icon that is the second hold icon h2 is changed by the first operation of the chance button 136, Only the first hold icon h1 may change in the second operation, or conversely, only the first hold icon h1 changes in the first operation, and the second hold icon h2 in the second operation. Only certain button hold icons may change.

  Further, in this example, the hold of the symbol variation display that is the target of the pre-reading notice of the second operation means display Od2 is the hold indicated by the first hold icon h1, but is indicated by the second hold icon h2. It may be put on hold. In this case, it overlaps with the pre-reading notice by the button hold icon. However, when the chance button 136 is operated once, the second hold icon h2 is hidden by the effect image and then changed to a rainbow-type hold icon. When the chance button 136 is operated once more, the second hold icon h2 is hidden by the effect image again, and then changed to a hold icon having a display mode representing the face of the Tono-sama character. It may be a change. The twice operation here may be a continuous hitting operation in addition to the normal operation being performed twice at intervals, or may be limited to an operation in which the normal operation is performed twice at intervals, or limited to a continuous hitting operation. May be. Alternatively, the above two-stage change may be performed by operating the chance button 136 once. The single operation here may be a normal operation, may be a long press operation, may be limited to a normal operation, or may be limited to a long press operation.

  Further, even if the chance button 136 is not operated before the meter displayed on the meter display Tm shown in FIG. 98 (l) becomes 0, the meter displayed on the meter display Tm is set to 0 because it has been operated. After that, the pre-reading notice effects shown in FIGS. 98 (p) to (q) may be executed.

  FIG. 99 is a diagram showing step by step an example in which operation means display is displayed on each of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

  The example shown in FIG. 99 is a modification of the example shown in FIG. 96, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M shown in FIG. 99 (a) displays the Tono-like character displayed in FIG. 96 (a). The mini character composed of the combination of the pattern display Cd, the character display Lv, and the gauge display Gm is not displayed, and the first operation means display Od1 is displayed instead. Further, the first operation means display Od1 is also displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 99 (a).

  In FIG. 99 (b), the first operation means display Od1 displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N is changed to the third operation means display Od3, and the wipe display on the third operation means display Od3 is displayed. In Wd, a character “in preparation” is displayed. On the other hand, on the second decorative symbol display device 208M shown in FIG. 99 (b), the first operation means display Od1 is displayed, and the first operation means display Od1 and the third operation means display Od3 are displayed simultaneously. Will be. Both the first operation means display Od1 and the third operation means display Od3 continue to be displayed until the next variation display of the third symbol pd3, and are displayed across the continuous variation display of the third symbol pd3.

  In FIG. 99 (i), the first operation means display Od1 displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M is changed to the second operation means display Od2. On the other hand, on the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 99 (i), the third operation means display Od3 is still displayed, and the second operation means display Od2 and the third operation means display Od3 are simultaneously displayed. It will be displayed.

  In FIG. 99 (j), the third operation means display Od3 displayed on the third decoration symbol display device 208N is changed to the second operation means display Od2, and the second decoration symbol display device 208M also has the third operation means display Od3. The second operation means display Od2 is also displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208N. Note that the second operation means display Od2 displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M is only a display in which PUSH characters are added to the display imitating the chance button 136 that emits red light. The second operation means display Od2 displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N is a display in which a meter display Tm is added to the same display as the display on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. The embodiment is different. However, the display mode may be the same.

  In FIG. 99 (k), the chance button 136 is operated. The chance button 136 is an operation means corresponding to any second operation means display Od2. In FIG. 99 (l), the second operation means display Od2 displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M is The display mode is changed so that the fan pattern Fd overlaps the display imitating the chance button 136 that emits white light. The fan picture Fd is a display of a pre-reading notice, and is a picture with a high expectation degree of jackpot. Here, since only one hold remains, it can be seen that the target of the pre-reading notice is the symbol change display of the first hold. However, when two or more holds are left, the pre-read by the fan design Fd is performed. In the notice, the symbol change display subject to notice is unknown. In addition, instead of the pre-reading notice by the fan picture Fd, a normal notice by the fan picture Fd may be used. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 99 (l), the second operation means display Od2 displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N is changed to the first operation means display Od1, and all the first hold icons h1 are displayed. An effect image Ed4 appears to hide. The appearance timing of the fan picture Fd on the second decorative symbol display device 208M after operating the chance button 136 may coincide with the appearance timing of the effect image Ed4 on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It may be shifted. For example, in this example, both are pre-reading notices and the notice target is also common, so the appearance timing is the same, and when the pre-reading notice object is different, the one with the higher expectation of jackpot appears first. Or it may appear later. Also, when one is a pre-reading notice and the other is a normal notice, the normal notice may appear first in the same way as in the example shown in FIG. May appear. Furthermore, the priority order may be determined by a decorative symbol display device on which an operation means display is displayed. For example, the operation means display displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M may be started prior to the operation means display displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Or vice versa.

  In FIG. 99 (m), the fan picture Fd appearing on the second decorative design display device 208M rises (see the upward arrow shown in FIG. 99 (m)), and the first operation means display Od1 is visible. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the effect image Ed4 disappears, and the first hold icon h1 is changed to a display mode representing the face of the Tono-sama character.

  In FIG. 99 (n), the effect image Ed is applied to the fan picture Fd on the first operation means display Od1, and then the fan picture Fd disappears together with the effect image Ed (FIG. 99 (o)). That is, before the symbol variation display subject to the prefetching notice starts, the fan picture Fd disappears, and the prefetching notice with the fan picture Fd ends in a short time. On the other hand, in both FIG. 99 (n) and FIG. 99 (o), the first hold icon h1 continues to be displayed in a display mode representing the face of the Tono-sama character. Note that the fan design Fd may continue to be displayed until the symbol variation display subject to the prefetching notice starts, or may continue to be displayed until the symbol variation display subject to the prefetching notice ends.

  In this example, as in the example of FIG. 98, two types of notices are started by one operation of the chance button 136, but only one notice may be started by one operation of the chance button 136. There may be a case where two types of notice are started by one operation, and the expectation of jackpot may be higher than the case where only one notice is started by one operation. In addition, in the operation means display, the period displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the period displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N may not overlap with each other. The expected degree of jackpot may be determined by the decorative symbol display device on which the operation means display is displayed. For example, when the chance button 136 is operated in a state where the operation means display is displayed only on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the operation means display is displayed only on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The expectation of jackpot may be higher than when the chance button 136 is operated, or vice versa.

  Further, even if the chance button 136 is not operated before the meter displayed on the meter display Tm shown in FIG. 99 (j) becomes 0, the meter displayed on the meter display Tm is set to 0. After that, the notice effect of FIG. 99 (l) to FIG. 99 (o) may be executed.

  FIG. 100 is a diagram showing an example of a case where the effects differ before and after the change of the operation means display.

  In the example shown in FIG. 100, as shown in FIG. 100C, in the state where the first operation means display Od1 is displayed, a chance button 136 which is an operation means corresponding to the first operation means display Od1. Is operated, an operation sound such as “pico” is output from the speaker 120. That is, the operation of the chance button 136 at this timing is not accepted, or even if accepted, the operation is not invalidated, the operation is accepted as valid, and as a result, an operation sound is output. Yes. Although the operation of the chance button 136 is valid, the display mode of the first operation means display Od1 does not change according to the operation of the chance button 136.

  In FIG. 100 (d), the first operation means display Od1 changes to the third operation means display Od3 regardless of the operation of the chance button 136 in FIG. 100 (b). The third operation means display Od3 is a display form in which PUSH characters are added to the display imitating the chance button 136 that emits red light, and is the same as the display form of the second operation means display Od2. Therefore, the player cannot distinguish between the second operation means display Od2 and the third operation means display Od3. However, when the operation means (here, the chance button 136) is operated, the second operation means display Od2 is displayed. If so, the display mode changes, and if it is the third operation means display Od3, the display mode does not change.

  After changing to the third operation means display Od3, as shown in FIG. 100 (e), when the chance button 136 is operated again, a sound such as “pico-pico” is output from the speaker 120 this time. This sound is different from the operation sound output in FIG. 100 (c), but may be an operation sound corresponding to the third operation means display Od3, or a pre-reading notice sound. May be. In this case as well, the display mode of the third operation means display Od3 does not change according to the operation of the chance button 136. The third operation means display Od3 continues to be displayed until the next variation display of the third symbol pd3, and is displayed across the continuous variation display of the third symbol pd3.

  Further, when the chance button 136 is operated in a state where the third operation means display Od3 is displayed, when the pre-reading notice sound is output, the third operation means display Od3 itself is pre-read. It can also be said that it corresponds to a notice display (fourth notice effect).

  In FIG. 100 (n), the third operation means display Od3 changes to the second operation means display Od2. That is, a display in which PUSH characters are added to the display imitating the chance button 136 that emits red light is enlarged, and a large meter display Tm is additionally displayed below the display. However, the display position is not changed, and the second operation means display Od2 is also displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. In addition, a sound effect is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the operation means display has changed.

  In FIG. 100 (o), the meter with the meter display Tm is slightly reduced. In the following FIG. 100 (p), the chance button 136 is operated. The operation of the chance button 136 here is as shown in FIG. 100 (q). The second operation means display Od2 is changed to the first operation means display Od1, and the changed first operation means display Od1 is displayed. In the wipe display Wd displayed on the screen, the word “heat” is displayed as a pre-read notice display (first notice effect), and the effect image Ed is displayed on the wipe display Wd in the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Have been added. The look-ahead notice in FIG. 100 (q) is a notice with a high expectation of jackpot. In this example, the output sound from the speaker 120 in FIG. 100 (f) is different from the output sound from the speaker 120 in FIG. 100 (c). That is, the operation sound is a kind of effect, and the effect is different before the change of the operation means display (FIG. 100 (c)) and after the change (FIG. 100 (f)). When the effect after the change of the operation means display is different from the effect before the change, the expectation of the jackpot in FIG. 100 (q) is obtained after the output of the sound effect in FIG. 100 (n). High notice may be executed. The player does not know the output timing of the sound effect, and the player's attention can be directed to the output of the sound effect and the change in the display of the operation means, and the previous loss (for example, the loss in FIG. 100 (j)). ) May be disappointing.

  Note that even if the presentation differs between before and after the change of the display of the operation means, there may be a case where a warning with a low expectation of jackpot is executed, but a warning with a high expectation of jackpot is more likely to be executed.

  Further, even if the chance button 136 is operated again during the period of FIGS. 100 (g) to (m), the display mode of the third operation means display Od3 does not change, and a sound such as “pico-pico” is output from the speaker 120. Is only output again.

  Further, even if the chance button 136 is not operated before the meter displayed on the meter display Tm shown in FIG. 100 (n) becomes 0, the meter displayed on the meter display Tm is set to 0 because it is operated. After that, the pre-reading notice effect of FIG. 100 (q) may be executed.

  FIG. 101 is a diagram showing an example of the case where the effects are the same before and after the change of the display of the operation means. Hereinafter, the description will focus on differences from the example shown in FIG.

  In the example shown in FIG. 101 as well, in FIG. 101 (c), the chance button 136, which is the operation means corresponding to the first operation means display Od1, is operated while the first operation means display Od1 is displayed. As a result, an operation sound such as “pico” is output from the speaker 120.

  In FIG. 101 (f), when the chance button 136 is operated while the third operation means display Od3 in which the first operation means display Od1 is changed is displayed, “pico” is displayed from the speaker 120. Is output. That is, the same sound is output before and after the change of the operation means display.

  In FIG. 101 (n), the third operation means display Od3 changes to the second operation means display Od2. The second operation means display Od2 here also includes a display in which PUSH characters are added to the display imitating the chance button 136 that emits red light, as in the case of FIG. 100 (n). This display is not an enlarged display but a normal size. Also included is a normal size meter display Tm. Furthermore, a sound effect is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the operation means display has changed.

  In FIG. 101 (o), when the chance button 136 is operated, the operation means display which has been the second operation means display Od2 so far changes to the first operation means display Od1, and the changed first operation means. In the wipe display Wd displayed on the display Od1, characters “slight fever” are displayed as a pre-reading notice display (first notice effect). Here, the effect image Ed as shown in FIG. 100 (q) is not added, and the prefetching notice of “slight heat” in FIG. 101 (p) is changed to the prefetching notice of “heat” shown in FIG. 101 (q). In comparison, the expectation of jackpot is low. In this example, the effect (in this case, the output sound from the speaker 120) is the same before and after the change of the operation means display (FIG. 101 (c)) and after the change (FIG. 101 (f)). In such a case, after that, through the output of the sound effect in FIG. 101 (n), a notice with a low expectation level for jackpot in FIG. 101 (p) may be executed. Even if the production is the same before and after the change of the display of the operation means, a notice with a high expectation of jackpot (notice shown in FIG. 100 (q)), or “a certain thick” or “large board behavior” instead of “slight heat” A notice with a very high expectation level for jackpot may be executed, but a notice with a low expectation level for jackpot is more likely to be executed.

  It should be noted that even if the chance button 136 is operated again during the period of FIGS. 101 (g) to (m), the display mode of the third operation means display Od3 does not change, and a sound such as “pico” is output from the speaker 120. Is only output again.

  FIG. 102 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner an example in which the chance button 136 is operated during the execution of the variable display of the third symbol pd3, which was performed at the timing when the hold increased.

  In FIG. 102A, the third symbol pd3 is variably displayed in a state where there is no hold, and the first operation means display Od1 is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Then, at the timing of the next figure (b), there is a one-ball winning in the first special figure starting port 230, and in the figure (c), the first hold icon h1 is displayed. The first hold icon h1 is a so-called button hold icon in which a mini item MI ′ in which PUSH characters are added to a display imitating the chance button 136 that emits white light is added to the hold icon hd in a white display mode. It is. The display mode of the mini item MI 'here is the same as the display mode of the first operation means display Od1 displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Even if the chance button 136 is operated at the timing of FIG. 102 (c), no change occurs. That is, the display mode of the first operation means display Od1 does not change, the first operation means display Od1 is displayed as it is, and an effect corresponding to the operation of the chance button 136 is not started. This effect in response to the operation of the chance button 136 includes a change animation of the button hold icon, and the display mode of the button hold icon does not change at all.

  In FIG. 102 (d), the first operation means display Od1 displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N is changed to the second operation means display Od2, and the chance button 136 is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 102 (e1). Operated. That is, the chance button 136 is operated before the third symbol pd3, which has been displayed at the timing of FIG. Then, as shown in FIG. 102 (f1), the second operation means display Od2 changes to the first operation means display Od1, and the wipe display Wd displayed on the changed first operation means display Od1. Is displayed as a pre-reading notice display (first notice effect), and the effect image Ed is added to the wipe display Wd in the third decorative symbol display device 208N. On the other hand, the first hold icon h1 is a display mode including the mini item MI 'and does not change at all.

  In FIG. 102 (g1), the third symbol pd3 is stopped (present stop). Even if the chance button 136 is not operated before the main stop, it is assumed that the operation has been performed, and the pre-reading notice shown in FIG. 102 (f1) is executed before or during the main stop. You may make it do.

  In FIG. 102 (h1), the first hold indicated by the first hold icon h1 has been consumed, and the third symbol pd3 has started to be displayed in a variable manner. In the wipe display Wd, the characters “Next” displayed as the pre-read notice display disappear, and “Castle Town” as the name of the background stage is displayed. In addition, the button hold icon which has been the first hold icon h1 until then starts moving toward the area cs displaying the change icon while including the mini item MI ′. In FIG. 102 (i1), the change icon Is displayed as a fluctuation icon c including the mini item MI ′. It should be noted that the icon that has been the first hold icon h1 until then becomes a variable icon when it reaches the area cs where the variable icon is displayed, and at the time when the first symbol (special figure) starts the variable display. It may be considered as a fluctuation icon, or may be regarded as a fluctuation icon at a point away from the area hs where the hold icon is displayed.

  In FIG. 102 (j1), the mini item MI 'included in the change icon c changes to a mini item MI in a display mode in which PUSH characters are added to the display imitating the chance button 136 that emits red light. The display mode of the mini item MI here is the same as the display mode of the second operation means display Od2.

  When the chance button 136 is operated at the timing of FIG. 102 (k1), as shown in FIG. 102 (l1), the effect image Ed6 appears so as to hide all of the variation icons c. In FIG. 102 (m1), The effect image Ed6 disappears, and the change icon c has changed to a display mode representing the face of the Tono-sama character. The display form representing the face of the Tono-sama character corresponds to the display form of the normal notice with a very high expectation degree of jackpot, and the normal notice using the change icon c is started.

  In this example, the remaining display of the chance button 136 is not displayed on the mini item MI. However, even if the chance button 136 is not operated within the operation effective period of the chance button 136, there is no operation. For example, the normal notice using the change icon c may be started after the operation valid period has elapsed.

  103 is a diagram showing an example of the case where the operation of the chance button is delayed in the example shown in FIG. Hereinafter, differences from the example illustrated in FIG. 102 will be described.

  In the example shown in FIG. 103, the chance button 136 is not operated during the execution of the variable display of the third symbol pd3, which has been performed at the timing when the hold increases, and the next variable display of the third symbol pd3 starts. Then, the chance button 136 is operated (FIG. 103 (i2)). That is, a state in which the second operation means display Od2 is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and the mini-item MI having the same display form as the display form of the second operation means display Od2 is included in the variation icon c. Then, the chance button 136 is operated. Then, as shown in FIG. 103 (j2), the second operation means display Od2 changes to the first operation means display Od1, and the wipe display Wd displayed on the changed first operation means display Od1. Is displayed as a normal notice display (second notice effect), and the effect image Ed is added to the wipe display Wd in the third decorative symbol display device 208N. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the character symbol “CHANCE” is displayed in a large size so as to overlap the third symbol pd3 during the variable display from the front side. On the other hand, an effect image Ed6 that hides the entire variation icon c appears in the region cs that displays the variation icon.

  In FIG. 103 (k2), the effect image Ed6 disappears, and the change icon c is changed to a display mode representing the face of the Tono-sama character. Further, the effect image Ed in the wipe display Wd also disappears.

  In FIG. 103 (l2), the variation display of the third symbol pd3 started in FIG. 103 (f2) is continued, and the variation icon c continues to be displayed in a display form representing the face of the character, and the wipe display The display of the normal notice in Wd (character display of “hot”) continues to be displayed. Note that the character symbol “CHANCE” displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L disappears, and the third symbol pd3 being displayed in a variable manner is visible. In addition, the display of the normal notice on the wipe display Wd (character display of “hot”) is also changed to “castle town” as the name of the background stage, and the normal notice corresponding to the second operation means display Od2 is ended early. May be. Thereafter, the variable display of the third symbol pd3 is ended, and the stop display (main stop) is performed with the combination of big hits. In addition, even if a normal advance notice is executed, a stop display (main stop) may be made by a combination of misses.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 102 and 103 described above, the operation of the chance button 136 can be accepted from the time when the second operation means display Od2 is changed. When the operation of the chance button 136 is detected before the display is started, the effect data of the pre-reading notice corresponding to the second operation means display Od2 is used, and FIGS. 102 (f1) to (g1). If the operation of the chance button 136 is detected after the symbol change display to be notified is started (for example, after receiving the symbol change start command from the main control unit 300), On the control unit 400, 500 side, the effect data for changing the display mode of the fluctuation icon c is used while using the effect data for the normal notice corresponding to the second operation means display Od2. Using performs normal notice shown in FIG. 103 (j2) or later. For this reason, the player may be given pleasure to select when to operate the chance button 136.

  FIG. 104 is a diagram showing step by step an example in which the operation means display once disappears after the chance button 136 is operated.

  The first operation means display Od1 shown in FIG. 104A is changed to the second operation means display Od2 in FIG. 104B, and a sound effect is output from the speaker 120. Here, the second operation means display Od2 is a combination of the display in which PUSH characters are added to the display imitating the chance button 136 that emits red light and the meter display Tm.

  When the chance button 136 is operated at the timing of FIG. 104 (d) during the variation display of the third symbol pd3, as shown in FIG. 10 (e), the wipe display Wd displays a pre-reading notice (first display). The “next” character is displayed as the notice effect), and the effect image Ed is added to the wipe display Wd in the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Further, the second operation means display Od2 displayed under the wipe display Wd disappears, and no operation means display is displayed under the wipe display Wd.

  In FIG. 104F, the effect image Ed disappears, but the “next” character continues to be displayed on the wipe display Wd. After the display of the variation of the third symbol pd3 continues for a while, in FIG. 104 (i), the third symbol pd3 sways (temporarily stops) due to the combination of the decorative symbol loss, and in FIG. The 3 symbol pd3 is stopped and displayed by a combination of the decorative symbols lost (main stop). The stop display (main stop) of the third symbol pd3 continues until FIG. 104 (m). During this stop display (main stop), as shown in FIG. 104 (k), the wipe display Wd is changed from “next” as the pre-reading notice display to “castle town” as the name of the background stage. . Until the time of FIG. 104 (k), the operation means display is not displayed.

  While the stop display (main stop) of the third symbol pd3 continues, as shown in FIGS. 104 (l) to (m), in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the first operation means display Od1 is displayed from the bottom. An animation that gradually appears (display start animation) is displayed, and finally the first operation means display Od1 is displayed below the wipe display Wd during the stop display (main stop) of the third symbol pd3. Is done.

  In this way, the second operation means display Od2 does not have to be immediately switched to the first operation means display Od1 when the corresponding operation means (here, the chance button 136) is operated, and once it disappears. The first operation means display Od1 may be displayed.

  The timing at which the first operation means display Od1 is displayed may be during the fluctuation display when the second operation means display Od2 disappears during the fluctuation display of the third symbol pd3. The next variation display start of the third symbol pd3 may be started, or the next variation display may be in progress. The timing may be during the stop display (main stop) when the second operation means display Od2 disappears during the stop display (main stop) of the third symbol pd3. The next variation display start of the symbol pd3 may be started, or the next variation display may be in progress.

  Further, in this example, the first operation means display Od1 is displayed, but it may be the third operation means display Od3, the fourth operation means display Od4, or first. The second operation means display Od2 may be different from the displayed second operation means display Od2.

  Further, the fourth operation means display Od4 does not immediately switch to the first operation means display Od1 as shown in FIG. 93 (38) when the corresponding operation means (here, the chance button 136) is operated. Alternatively, it may be displayed after the first operation means display Od1 after disappearing. Further, when the corresponding operation means is operated while the fourth operation means display Od4 is displayed, an operation means display other than the first operation means display Od1 may be displayed.

  The various operation means displays Od1 to Od4 may be hidden during the big hit game, and may be suddenly displayed without the display start animation when the display is started after the big hit game ends.

  Further, the various operation means displays Od1 to Od4 may disappear once during the display and be displayed again. For example, it may disappear once during the variation display of the third symbol pd3, and may be redisplayed during the variation display, may be redisplayed at the start of the next variation display, or redisplayed during the next variation display. May be. Alternatively, it may disappear once during the stop display (main stop) of the third symbol pd3, and may be displayed again during the stop display (main stop), or may be displayed again at the start of the next variable display, It may be redisplayed during the next variation display.

  FIG. 105 is a diagram showing a modification of how to display the operation means display.

  In FIG. 105 (a), the second decorative symbol display device 208M on the left side displays the reduced display pd3 ′ of the third symbol pd3, the area cs for displaying the variation icon, and the variation icon c. The first operating means display Od1 is displayed on the three decorative symbol display device 208N. Note that a super reach effect is being executed, and the scene after the swordsman and swordsman slash are displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

  In FIG. 105 (b), the second decorative symbol display device 208M starts moving to the right side, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N starts moving to the left side. That is, the movements 208M and 208N start to move toward each other.

  FIG. 105 (c) shows the moment when the right end of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the left end of the third decorative symbol display device 208N are in contact with each other at the central portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. That is, the moment when the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are completely closed is shown. At this stage, there is no change in the display on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the display on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. When the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are completely closed, the lower part of the family crest member 224E ′ is the upper right end portion of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decoration. The symbol display device 208N overlaps with the upper left corner from the front side. Further, both the lord and the swordsman displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L are hidden by the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. However, the fifth symbol pd5 is not hidden by the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N and is visible.

  In FIG. 105 (d), the first operation means display Od1 displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N is displayed in a state where the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are completely closed. It changes to the second operation means display Od2. In other words, as the second operation means display Od2, a display in which PUSH characters are added to a display imitating the chance button 136 that emits red light straddles the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. In addition, a large meter display Tm ′ is also displayed below the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Note that the first operation means display Od1 disappears from the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Further, from the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the region cs for displaying the variation icon and the variation icon c disappear to make the first operation means display Od1 stand out.

  In this example, the second operation means display Od2 is enlarged and displayed so as to straddle two decorative symbol display devices, but may be enlarged and displayed so as to straddle three decorative symbol display devices. Further, the display size is not limited to the enlarged display, and may be the same as the size before the change (here, the first operation means display Od1). Furthermore, the same applies to other operation means displays other than the second operation means display Od2. That is, the operation means display may be displayed across a plurality of decorative symbol display devices.

  As described above, in the example described with reference to FIGS. 91 to 105, the operation means display is displayed even during the stop display (main stop) of the third symbol pd3, so that the variation display of the third symbol pd3 is still displayed. You can make the player feel as if it has not ended.

  In the example described with reference to FIGS. 91 to 105, the operation means display is a display corresponding to the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 1 and the chance button 136 is operated. The means display may be a display corresponding to another operation means such as the second chance button, the transparent portion 191 and the operation key unit 181.

  Further, the operation of the chance button 136 may be a normal operation called single press or short press or a single press, a long press operation, a continuous hit operation, or a normal operation. The operation may be an operation that is performed a plurality of times at intervals.

  In addition, the above-described advance notice such as the pre-read notice and the normal notice is not always a big hit even if the notice is executed, and may be lost. That is, the higher the expectation level of jackpot, the lower the chance of losing and the higher the chance of hitting.

  In FIGS. 92 (26) to 93 (40), the first operation means display Od1 and the fourth operation means display Od4 are displayed during the execution of the super reach effect. In some cases, at least one of the first operation means display Od1 to the fourth operation means display Od4 or all of the operation means display may not be displayed. It may be displayed. In addition, when there are a plurality of types of super-reach effects, only one or a plurality of types of super-reach effects may be hidden or may not be displayed. In FIG. 97 (i), the second operation means display Od2 is displayed during the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect, but the first operation means display Od1 to the fourth operation display is also performed during the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect. Of the operation means display Od4, at least one of the operation means display or all of the operation means display may or may not be displayed. Furthermore, not only the super reach effect and the pseudo-continuous effect but during the execution of the specific effect, at least one of the first operation means display Od1 to the fourth operation means display Od4 or all the operation means display is displayed. , It may be hidden or it may be hidden.

  Further, during the execution of the jackpot game that the attacker opens, at least one of the first operation means display Od1 to the fourth operation means display Od4 or all the operation means display is not displayed. There may be, and it may be hidden. On the other hand, during the non-hit game that is not being executed, all the operation means displays Od1 to Od4 can be displayed. However, even during a non-hit game, in the probability variation state (special figure high probability state), at least one of the first operation means display Od1 to the fourth operation means display Od4 or all the operations are displayed. The means display may or may not be displayed. Even during a non-hit game, in the electric support state (ordinary high probability state), at least one operation means display or all of the first operation means display Od1 to the fourth operation means display Od4 are displayed. The operation means display may be hidden or may not be displayed.

  The second operation means display Od2 may be a display having a display form that is different from the display form of the first operation means display Od1 in at least one of color and size. For example, the second operation means display Od2 shown in FIGS. 91 (2) to (9) is different only in color from the display form of the first operation means display Od1, but the color is the same and only the size is different. May be. On the other hand, the second operation means display Od2 shown in FIG. 100 (n) to FIG. 100 (o) has a different color and size from the display form of the first operation means display Od1, and a meter display Tm is added. Yes.

  Further, the third operation means display Od3 may also be a display having a display form that is different from the display form of the first operation means display Od1 in at least one of color and size. For example, the third operation means display Od3 shown in FIG. 100 (d) to FIG. 100 (m) differs only in color from the display mode of the first operation means display Od1, but the color is the same and only the size is different. Alternatively, both the color and size may be different, and the pattern and shape may be different.

  In addition, all of the operation means displays of the first operation means display Od1 to the fourth operation means display Od4 are displays including a display imitating the corresponding operation means (here, the chance button 136). The display imitating the button 136 is not necessarily included, and all the operation means display may not be included, or only a part of the operation means display (for example, the second operation means display Od2) is included. It does not have to be.

  In addition, the effects that are started when the operation means is operated while the operation means display is displayed include the effects related to the current symbol variation, the effects related to prefetching, and the effects in which the change is stopped (for example, variations) It is possible to list the effects in a state where there is no suspension and there is no hold (a demonstration effect may or may not be included). That is, the effects that are started when the operating means is operated may be all of the above-listed effects, or may not be applied among the above-listed effects.

  In FIG. 98 (k), FIG. 98 (l), etc., the button holding icon, which is a display related to the operating means but is different from the operating means display, is displayed together. In addition to the button holding icon, the display other than the operation means displays Od1 to Od4 includes a button display in the judgment effect, a button display in the pseudo-joint effect, a button display in the conversation notice, and the like. These displays may be displayed together with the operation means displays Od1 to Od4. In addition, the display related to the hold icon such as the button hold icon is different, but the button display in the judgment effect, the button display in the pseudo-joint effect, the button display in the conversation notice can be regarded as a kind of operation means display. There is also. For example, the fourth operation means display Od4 shown in FIGS. 92 (33) to 92 (36) can be regarded as a button display in the judgment effect.

  As described above, the example in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko machine (bullet ball game machine) has been described in detail. However, the game table of the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a medal or a game ball (pachinko ball) The present invention can also be applied to a spinning machine (slot machine) to be used. That is, the pachinko machine 100 described so far is a pachinko (1 type + 1 type), but other pachinko (eg, 1 type, 2 types, 3 types, 1 type + 2 types, etc.), slot etc. Parrot, jade ball). More specifically, when a medal (game medium) is inserted and the start lever is operated to rotate the reel, the winning combination is determined internally by internal lottery, and the stop button is operated to stop the reel In addition, if a combination of symbols predetermined according to the internal decision is displayed on the symbol display window, a winning combination is established, and if a winning combination with a medal payout is established, a prescribed number of medals are paid out, etc. It may be a spinning machine (slot machine) that gives a privilege to the player. Alternatively, a predetermined number of game balls are encapsulated as encapsulated balls, the encapsulated spheres are fired into a game area to play a game, and a predetermined game value is given to a player based on the fact that the encapsulated balls win a predetermined entry area. It is also possible to use an enclosed ball game table that can be circulated by launching the enclosed ball that has won the predetermined entry area or the enclosed ball that has not won the prize into the game area.

  As described above, the present invention can be applied to various types of game machines, and will be described more specifically with reference to the drawings.

  FIG. 106 is a front view of a sealed pachinko machine to which the present invention is applicable.

  In a sealed pachinko machine 900 shown in FIG. 106, a predetermined number of game media (for example, game balls) are circulated inside the game table. That is, the game medium launched from the launching means 901 to the game area 902 can be discharged from the game area 902 and supplied to the launching means 901 again. In addition, a display means 903 for displaying information on the number of game media (award balls, rental balls, total number of balls, etc.) and other information is disposed below the game area 902 on the front of the game table. The upper plate 126 and the lower plate 128 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 107 is an external perspective view of a slot machine to which the present invention can be applied as viewed from the front side (player side).

  The slot machine 1000 includes a main body 1001 and a front door 1002 that is attached to the front surface of the main body 1001 and can be opened and closed with respect to the main body 1001. Inside the center of the main body 1001 (not shown in FIG. 107), three reels (left reel 1010, middle reel 1011, right reel 1012) having a plurality of types of symbols arranged on the outer peripheral surface are stored. It is configured to rotate inside. These reels 1010 to 1012 are rotationally driven by driving means such as a stepping motor.

  In the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 107, an appropriate number of symbols are printed on the belt-like member at equal intervals, and the reels 1010 to 1012 are configured by affixing the belt-like member to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame material. . When viewed from the player, the symbols on the reels 1010 to 1012 are generally displayed in the vertical direction from the symbol display window 1013 so that a total of nine symbols can be seen. Then, by rotating each of the reels 1010 to 1012, the combination of symbols that can be seen by the player varies. That is, each of the reels 1010 to 1012 functions as a display unit that displays a combination of a plurality of types of symbols in a variable manner. In addition to the reel, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can also be used as such a display means. In the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 107, three reels are provided in the center of the slot machine 1000, but the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

  A backlight (not shown in FIG. 107) for illuminating individual symbols displayed on the symbol display window 1013 is disposed on the back surface of each reel 1010 to 1012. It is desirable that the backlight is shielded for each symbol so that the individual symbols can be illuminated evenly. In the slot machine 1000, an optical sensor (not shown) including a light projecting unit and a light receiving unit is provided in the vicinity of each reel 1010 to 1012. The light projecting unit and the light receiving unit of this optical sensor are provided. A light shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes between the two. Based on the detection result of this sensor, the position of the symbol on the reel in the rotation direction is determined, and the reels 1010 to 1012 are stopped so that the target symbol is displayed on the winning line.

  The winning line display lamp 1020 is a lamp indicating a winning line 1014 that is valid. The effective pay line is determined in advance by the number of medals bet as a game medium. There are 5 winning lines 1014. For example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal winning line is valid, and when two medals are betted, the upper horizontal winning line and the lower horizontal winning line are added. If three are valid and three medals are bet, five lines including a right-down winning line and an upper-right winning line are valid as winning lines. The number of winning lines 1014 is not limited to five. For example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal winning line, the upper horizontal winning line, the lower horizontal winning line, the right Five lines, the down line and the upper right line, may be valid as the winning lines.

  The notification lamp 1023 is, for example, a lamp that informs the player that a specific winning combination (specifically, a bonus) has been won internally in the internal lottery or that a bonus game is in progress. The game medal insertable lamp 1024 is a lamp for notifying that the player can insert a game medal. The replay lamp 1022 informs the player that the current game is replayable (the medal need not be inserted) when winning a replay that is one of the winning combinations in the previous game. It is a lamp. The reel panel lamp 1028 is an effect lamp.

  The bet buttons 1030 to 1032 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) stored electronically in the slot machine 1000. In the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 107, every time the bet button 1030 is pressed, a maximum of three cards are inserted one by one. When the bet button 1031 is pressed, two cards are inserted and when the bet button 1032 is pressed. Three cards are inserted. Hereinafter, the bet button 1032 is also referred to as a MAX bet button. The game medal insertion lamp 1029 turns on the lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when a prescribed number of medals are inserted, the game start is informed that a game start operation is possible. The lamp 1021 is turned on.

  The medal slot 1034 is an slot for the player to insert a medal when starting a game. That is, the insertion of medals can be made electronically by using the bet buttons 1030 to 1032, or an actual medal can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal insertion slot 1034. is there. The stored number display 1025 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000. The game information display 1026 is a display for displaying various types of internal information (for example, the number of medals paid out during a bonus game) as numerical values. The payout number display unit 1027 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning a winning combination.

  The start lever 1035 is a lever type switch for starting the rotation of the reels 1010 to 1012. That is, when a desired medal number is inserted into the medal insertion slot 1034 or when the bet buttons 1030 to 1032 are operated and the start lever 1035 is operated, the reels 1010 to 1012 start to rotate. The operation on the start lever 1035 is referred to as a game start operation. In this slot machine 1000, based on the operation of the start lever 1035, an internal lottery process for performing a lottery to determine which of the plurality of roles is won is executed. It is determined whether the player is in a relatively advantageous state or a relatively unfavorable state.

  The stop button unit 1036 is provided with stop buttons 1037 to 1039. Stop buttons 1037 to 10310 are button-type switches for individually stopping the reels 1010 to 1012 that have started rotating by operating the start lever 1035, and are associated with the reels 1010 to 1012. Hereinafter, the operation on the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 is referred to as a stop operation, the first stop operation is referred to as a first stop operation, the next stop operation is referred to as a second stop operation, and the last stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation. Note that a light emitter may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 1037 to 1039. When the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 can be operated, the light emitter can be turned on to notify the player.

  The medal return button 1033 is a button that is pressed to remove a medal when the inserted medal is clogged. The settlement button 1043 is a button for adjusting the medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000 and the bet medals and discharging them from the medal payout exit 1055. Door key hole 1040 is a hole into which a key for unlocking front door 1002 of slot machine 1000 is inserted. The medal payout exit 1055 is a payout exit for paying out medals.

  107 is provided with the same operation key unit 1090 as the operation key unit 181 provided in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 between the MAX bet button 1032 and the medal slot 1034. ing. This operation key unit 1090 also has a cross key, an OK button, and a cancel button. Further, next to the operation key unit 1090, the same effect button 1091 as the chance button 136 provided in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 is provided.

  The sound hole 1060 is a hole for outputting the sound of a speaker provided inside the slot machine 1000 to the outside. Side lamps 1044 provided on the left and right portions of the front door 1002 are decorative lamps for exciting games. A rendering device 1080 is disposed above the front door 1002. This rendering device 1080 includes a door (shutter) member 1063 including two right doors 1063a and 1063b that can be opened and closed in a horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 1057 (illustrated) disposed on the back side of the door member 1063. When the two right doors 1063a and 1063b are opened in the horizontal direction in front of the liquid crystal display device 1057, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1057 (not shown) is displayed in front of the slot machine 1000 (player). Side). In addition, even if it is not a liquid crystal display device, it should just be comprised so that various effect images and various game information can be displayed, for example, it consists of a dot matrix display, an organic EL display, a plasma display, or a projector and a screen. A display device or the like may be used. Further, the display screen has a rectangular shape and is configured so that the player can visually recognize the entire display screen. In the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 107, the display screen is a rectangular flat surface, but may be a square flat surface. In addition, a decorative object (not shown) may be provided on the periphery of the display screen, and a part of the peripheral edge of the display screen may be hidden by the decorative object, so that the display screen looks irregular. Furthermore, the display screen may have a curved surface.

  In the slot machine 1000 described above, as operation means, in addition to the bet buttons 1030 to 1032, the start lever 1035, the stop buttons 1037 to 1039, etc., the operation key unit 1090 (an example of the first operation means and the third operation means). ) And effect buttons 1091 (an example of second operation means). Further, in the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 107, a display panel 1070 displaying a device title and the like can protrude toward the front side. Further, a light emitting diode (LED) is built in the display panel 1070. The display panel 1070 shown in FIG. 107 is in the initial position. When the display panel 1070 protrudes toward the front side, the display panel 1070 can perform a push-in operation, and functions as an operation unit (button) in the same manner as the transmission unit 191. This corresponds to an example of one operating means, and also corresponds to an example of a movable means. Further, each button of the operation key unit 1090, the effect button 1091, and the display panel 1070 can vibrate. However, the buttons of the operation key unit 1090 may not vibrate.

In the above description,
“Display means [for example, any one of the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the fourth decorative symbol display device 208O, etc. One or more],
Operation means provided at a position where the player can operate [for example, any one or more of a chance button 136, a second chance button, a transparent portion 191, an operation key unit 181 and the like];
A game machine equipped with
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of operation means display,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a decorative symbol [for example, a decorative symbol (third symbol pd3), a fourth symbol pd4, or a fifth symbol pd5 shown in FIG. 5B),
The display means is a means capable of displaying a hold display [for example, hold icons h1 to h4, button hold icons MI, hd] according to the number of held balls,
One of the plurality of types of operation means displays is a first operation means display [for example, first operation means display Od1],
One of the plurality of types of operation means displays is a second operation means display [for example, second operation means display Od2],
The second operation means display is a display different from the first operation means display [for example, a display, shape, color, size, etc. having the same shape and different colors, sizes, patterns, etc. Display with the same pattern, etc., with different operation modes such as vibration, rotation, etc., and display with different shapes (from the display that simulates the operation means, the operation promotion display, the remaining period display, etc. A different type of display, a display with a different operating means, etc.]
The first operation means display is a display different from the hold display,
The second operation means display is a display different from the hold display,
The first operation means display is a display [for example, FIG. 91 (13) to FIG. 92 (29)] that may be displayed across a plurality of continuous display variations of the decorative symbol.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  Here, the “decorative display of the decorative pattern” means that the decorative display of the variable display is being displayed, and includes the display of the variable display when the variable display is started with the stop display interposed therebetween. Moreover, it can also be regarded as 1 fluctuation | variation from the start of a fluctuation | variation display to a fixed display. Furthermore, “stretching” means that a decorative symbol stop display period (fluctuation stop period) is sandwiched between them.

  The second operation means display may be a display developed from the first operation means display, or may be a display switched from the first operation means display.

  Further, the operation means display is a display related to the operation means, for example, a display prompting to operate the operation means (hereinafter referred to as “operation promotion display”), or an operation effective period of the operation means. Display of the remaining period (hereinafter referred to as “remaining period display”) or a display reminiscent of the operation means.

  The first operation means display may be a display that is always displayed over a plurality of variations of the decorative symbol display. In addition, the second operation means display may be a display that is always displayed over a plurality of variations of the decorative symbol display.

  The first operation means display may be a display that is continuously displayed during the display of the decorative symbol variation display, or may be a display that once disappears in the middle. Further, during the display of the stop display of the decorative design, it may be a display that is continuously displayed, may be a display that disappears in the middle, or may continue to disappear during the display of the stop display. May be displayed. In addition, the first operation means display may end during the display of the stop display, but may be a display that may not end.

  The second operation means display may be a display that is continuously displayed during the display of the decorative symbol variation display, or may be a display that once disappears in the middle. Further, during the display of the stop display of the decorative design, it may be a display that is continuously displayed, may be a display that disappears in the middle, or may continue to disappear during the display of the stop display. May be displayed. Further, the second operation means display may end during the display of the stop display, but may be a display that may not end.

  Further, the second operation means display may be the same display mode as the first operation means display or may be a different display mode.

  Note that the operation means may be means that must be operated by a player. In addition, the display means may be means for always displaying a plurality of types of operation means display, may be means for always displaying decorative symbols, or always displays a hold display according to the number of balls on hold. It may be a means to do.

Also,
“The first operation means display is a display that does not change even when the operation means is operated [for example, FIG. 100 (b)] [for example, as shown in FIG. 100 (c), the first operation means display. Od1 has not changed],
When the operation means is operated in the state where the first operation means display is displayed, a response action corresponding to the operation means being operated [for example, as shown in FIG. Output of operation sound such as “pico” may occur,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this aspect, although the operation means display (first operation means display) does not change even if the operation means is operated, the response operation is performed, giving the player a sense of incongruity and interest. There are cases where it is possible.

  Here, the first operation means display may be a default operation means display among the plurality of types of operation means displays.

In addition to the output from the speaker, the response operation may be any display, light emission of the light emitting means, operation of the movable means, etc., or a combination thereof (hereinafter the same) .)
When the operation means is operated in the state where the first operation means display is displayed, a response operation according to the operation of the operation means may be performed without fail.

Also,
“One of the plural types of operation means displays is a third operation means display [for example, third operation means display Od3],
The third operation means display is different from the first operation means display [for example, a display mode including a display imitating the chance button 136 that emits white light] [for example, the chance button 136 that emits red light is displayed. Display mode including simulated display],
The third operation means display is a display different from the hold display,
The third operation means display is a display that does not change even when the operation means is operated [for example, the third operation means display Od3 does not change as shown in FIG. 100 (f)],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this aspect, since the third operation means display different from the first operation means display is displayed, when the player operates the operation means, there is some change in the third operation means display. There is a case where it is possible to give a player a sense of incongruity and interest because there is no change.

  The third operation means display may be a display that is continuously displayed during the display of the decorative symbol variation display, or may be a display that once disappears in the middle. Further, during the display of the stop display of the decorative design, it may be a display that is continuously displayed, may be a display that disappears in the middle, or may continue to disappear during the display of the stop display. May be displayed. The third operation means display may end during the display of the stop display, but may also be a display that may not end.

  The third operation means display may be a display developed from the first operation means display, a display switched from the first operation means display, or the first operation means display. The operation means display may be changed.

  In addition, the third operation means display is a display in which the first operation means display is changed, and the first operation means display is the third operation means during display of the decorative symbol variation display. The display may change.

  The third operation means display may be the same display form as the second operation means display, or may be a different display form.

Also,
“When the operation means is operated while the third operation means display is displayed, a response action corresponding to the operation means being operated [for example, as shown in FIG. [Operation sound output such as “pico-pico”] may be performed,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  When the operation means is operated in a state where the third operation means display is displayed, a response operation corresponding to the operation of the operation means may be performed without fail.

Also,
The third operation means display is a display in which the first operation means display is changed.
There is a case where the first operation means display changes to the third operation means display during the display of the decorative symbol variation display [for example, the case shown in FIG. 100 (d)].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  In addition, during the display of the variation display of the decorative symbol, the first operation means display may be changed to the third operation means display.

Also,
“The third operation means display is a display [for example, FIG. 100 (d) to FIG. 100 (m)] that may be displayed across a plurality of variations of the decorative symbol.
The third operation means display is a display in which there is a case [for example, the case shown in FIG. 100 (h) to FIG.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  The third operation means display may be a display that is always displayed over a plurality of times the decorative symbol variation display. The third operation means display may be a display that is always displayed even during the display of the stop display of the decorative symbol.

Also,
“When the operation means is operated while the third operation means display is displayed [for example, FIG. 100 (e)], when the first notice effect is started [for example, FIG. ), When the output of the pre-notification effect sound such as “pico-pico” is started]
The first notice effect is a notice effect of a pre-read notice,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Note that when the operation means is operated in a state where the third operation means display is displayed, the first notice effect may be surely started.

  Here, the third operation means display itself may be a display of a pre-reading notice (fourth notice effect).

Also,
The display means includes first display means [for example, first decorative symbol display device 208L] and one or more second display means [for example, second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device. 208N, any one or more of the fourth decorative symbol display device 208O].
The second display means is a means having a display screen smaller than the first display means,
The first operation means display is a display that may be displayed on the second display means [for example, FIG. 91 (1)],
The second operation means display is a display that may be displayed on the second display means [for example, FIG. 91 (2) to FIG. 11 (11)],
The third operation means display is a display that may be displayed on the second display means [for example, FIG. 96 (b) to FIG. 96 (i)],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the fourth operation means display may be a display that may be displayed on the first display means, or a display that may be displayed on the second display means. Also good.

  The first operation means display may be a display that is always displayed on the second display means, and the second operation means display is a display that is always displayed on the second display means. The third operation means display may be a display that is always displayed on the second display means.

  The display means may be a means including only the first display means and one or a plurality of second display means, or may be a means including a third display means.

Also,
“It is configured to be able to execute a jackpot game that an attacker [for example, variable prize opening 234, 235] opens,
The first operation means display is a display that may be displayed in a non-hit game [for example, a normal game state in which a variation display of decorative symbols can be executed]
The second operation means display is a display that may be displayed in the non-hit game,
The third operation means display is a display that may be displayed in the non-hit game.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the fourth operation means display may be a display that may be displayed in the non-hit game.

  Note that the jackpot game that is opened by the attacker may be executed without fail.

Also,
The first operation means display may be hidden during execution of a certain effect [for example, super reach effect or pseudo-continuous effect, etc.] even when the decorative symbol variation display is being displayed. Display,
The second operation means display is a display that may be hidden during execution of the certain effect, even if the decorative symbol variation display is being displayed.
The third operation means display is a display that may be hidden during execution of the certain effect even when the decorative symbol variation display is being displayed.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the certain effect may be a super reach effect or a pseudo-continuous effect. That is, the certain effect may be both a super reach effect and a pseudo-ream effect, or only one of them. Here, the super reach production refers to various reach productions other than the normal reach production (including special reach such as special multi-line reach, full rotation reach, special full rotation reach, etc.). Further, the pseudo-continuous effect is an effect in which a temporary stop display of the decorative symbol, which is different from the stop display of the decorative symbol, is displayed. If the operation means is operated while the fourth operation means display is displayed, the fourth operation means display may disappear and the second notice effect may be started. The second notice effect may be a pseudo-continuous effect, and the pseudo-continuous effect may be an effect in which a temporary stop display of the decorative symbol is displayed, which is different from the stop display of the decorative symbol.

  The first operation means display may be a display that may be hidden during the big hit game, and the second operation means display may be hidden during the big hit game. The third operation means display may be a display that may be hidden during the big hit game.

  The first operation means display may be a display that may be hidden in the probability change state, and the second operation means display may be a display that may be hidden in the probability change state. Alternatively, the third operation means display may be a display that may not be displayed in the probability variation state.

  Further, the first operation means display may be a display that may be hidden in the electric support state, and the second operation means display may be a display that may be hidden in the electric support state. The third operation means display may be a display that may be hidden in the electric support state.

  The first operation means display may be a display that is always hidden during the super reach, even during the display of the decorative symbol variation display, and the second operation means display may be Even during display of the decorative symbol variation display, it may be a display that is always hidden during the super reach, and the third operation means display is during the decoration symbol variation display display. Even in such a case, the display may be always hidden during the super reach.

  The first operation means display may be a display that is always hidden during a big hit game, and the second operation means display may be a display that is always hidden during a big hit game. The third operation means display may be a display that is always hidden during the big hit game.

  The first operation means display may be a display that is always hidden in the probability change state, and the second operation means display may be a display that is always hidden in the probability change state. The third operation means display may be a display that is always hidden in the probability variation state.

  The first operation means display may be a display that is always hidden in the electric support state, and the second operation means display may be a display that is always hidden in the electric support state. The third operation means display may be a display that is always hidden in the electric support state.

Also,
“The second operation means display is a display of a display form that is different from the display form of the first operation means display in at least one of color and size [for example, FIG. 91 (2) to FIG. ), The second operation means display Od2 shown in FIG. 100 (n) to the second operation means display Od2 shown in FIG.
The third operation means display is a display having a display form different from the display form of the first operation means display in at least one of color and size [for example, FIG. 100 (d) to FIG. The third operation means display Od3] shown in FIG.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the display of the second operation means may be a display having the same display form as the display of the third operation means. The display of the display mode from which at least any one of these differs may be sufficient.

  Further, the fourth operation means display may be a display form in which at least one of color or size is different from the display form of the first operation means display.

  Further, the fourth operation means display may be the same display form as the display form of the second operation means display, and the display form, color or size of the second operation means display. The display of the display mode from which at least any one of differs may be sufficient.

  Further, the fourth operation means display may be the same display form as the third operation means display, or the display form, color or size of the third operation means display. The display of the display mode from which at least any one of differs may be sufficient.

  The second operation means display may be a display form different from the display form of the first operation means display, both in color and size, or only in color, or only in size. The third operation means display may be a display form different from the display form of the first operation means display, both in color and size, or only in color, or only in size.

  The second operation means display may be a display form different from the display form of the third operation means display in both color and size, or only the color or only the size. The fourth operation means display may be a display form that is different from the display form of the first operation means display, both in color and size, only in color, or only in size.

  The fourth operation means display may be a display form different from the display form of the second operation means display, both in color and size, or only in color, or only in size. The display mode of the third operation means display and the display mode may be different in both color and size, or only in color or only in size.

Also,
“One of the plurality of types of operation means display is a fourth operation means display [for example, a fourth operation means display Od4],
The fourth operation means display is a display different from the hold display,
The fourth operation means display is a display [for example, FIG. 92 (33) to FIG. 36 (36)] that may be displayed during the display of the variation display of the decorative symbol.
The fourth operation means display is a display that is not displayed during the display of the stop display of the decorative design,
The fourth operation means display is a display that is not displayed across a plurality of variations of the decorative symbol display,
When the operation means is operated in the state where the fourth operation means display is displayed [for example, FIG. 93 (37)], a second notice effect may be started.
The second notice effect is a notice effect related to a big hit by a variation display of the decorative symbols displayed at the time of start [for example, a family crest object shown in FIGS. 93 (38) to (40) 224E 'operation etc. of normal notice]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the fourth operation means display may be a display developed from the first operation means display, a display switched from the first operation means display, or the first operation means display. One operation means display may be changed.

  Further, the fourth operation means display is a display in which the first operation means display is changed, and the first operation means display is the fourth operation means during display of the decorative symbol variation display. The display may change.

  In addition, the fourth operation means display may be a display in which display is started regardless of other types of operation means display (for example, the first operation means display).

  The fourth operation means display may be a display mode different from the first operation means display. The fourth operation means display may be a display displayed at a display position different from the display position of the first operation means display, or larger than the size of the first operation means display. It may be a display that is displayed, or may be a display that is displayed smaller than the size of the first operation means display.

  The fourth operation means display may be the same display form as the second operation means display, or may be a different display form. The fourth operation means display may be a display displayed at a display position different from the display position of the second operation means display, or larger than the size of the second operation means display. The display may be displayed, or the display may be smaller than the size of the second operation means display.

  The fourth operation means display may be the same display form as the third operation means display, or may be a different display form. The fourth operation means display may be a display displayed at a display position different from the display position of the third operation means display, or larger than the size of the third operation means display. It may be a display that is displayed, or may be a display that is displayed smaller than the size of the third operation means display.

  Note that when the operation means is operated in a state where the fourth operation means display is displayed, the second notice effect may be surely started.

Also,
“The fourth operation means display is a display that may be displayed simultaneously with the second operation means display [for example, the case shown in 40 (f) to FIG.
When the operation means is operated while the fourth operation means display and the second operation means display are displayed at the same time, the second operation means display does not change [for example, FIG. ) As shown in the second operation means display Od2],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the display timing of the fourth operation means display and the second operation means display may be different.

  The fourth operation means display may be a display that may be displayed in parallel with the second operation means display.

  Further, when the operation means is operated in a state where the fourth operation means display and the second operation means display are simultaneously displayed [for example, FIG. 97 (h)], the fourth operation means Of the second notice effect corresponding to the display and the first notice effect corresponding to the second operation means display, the second notice effect [for example, by the pseudo-continuous effect shown in FIG. 97 (i) Only the normal notice effect] may be started, or only the second notice effect may always be started.

  When the operation means is operated again after the second notice effect is started, the first notice effect corresponding to the second operation means display [for example, as shown in FIG. 97 (k)]. In the wipe display Wd, there may be a case where the character display of “heat” and the pre-reading notice effect by the effect image Ed] may be started, or the first notice effect may always be started. The second operation means display may be changed [for example, changed to the first operation means display Od1 as shown in FIG. 97 (k)].

  Here, when the operation means is operated in a state where the fourth operation means display and the second operation means display are simultaneously displayed, the second operation means display corresponding to the fourth operation means display. Both the notice effect and the first notice effect corresponding to the second operation means display may or may not be started. In this case, the second operation means display changes.

Also,
“One of the plurality of types of operation means display is a fourth operation means display [for example, a fourth operation means display Od4],
The fourth operation means display is a display different from the hold display,
The fourth operation means display is a display [for example, FIG. 92 (33) to FIG. 36 (36)] that may be displayed during the display of the variation display of the decorative symbol.
The fourth operation means display is a display that is not displayed during the display of the stop display of the decorative design,
The fourth operation means display is a display that is not displayed across a plurality of variations of the decorative symbol display,
When the operation means is operated in the state where the fourth operation means display is displayed [for example, FIG. 93 (37)], a second notice effect may be started.
The second notice effect is a notice effect related to a big hit by a variation display of the decorative symbols displayed at the time of start [for example, a family crest object shown in FIGS. 93 (38) to (40) 224E ', etc.
When the fourth operation means display is displayed simultaneously with the first operation means display [for example, the chance button 136 is operated at the timing of FIG. 97 (d) and the second operation means display Od2 is the first 97 (f) to FIG. 97 (g) after the change to the operation means display Od1 in FIG.
The fourth operation means display is a display that may be displayed simultaneously with the second operation means display [for example, the case shown in FIG. 97 (f) to FIG. 97 (g)],
When the fourth operation means display is displayed simultaneously with the third operation means display [For example, in FIG. 97 (f) to FIG. 97 (g), the second operation means display Od2 is the third operation means display. If the operation means display is Od3], there is a display.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the display timing of the fourth operation means display and the first operation means display may be different, and the fourth operation means display and the second operation means display are displayed. The start timing may be different, and the display timing of the fourth operation means display and the third operation means display may be different.

  The fourth operation means display may be displayed in parallel with the first operation means display, and the fourth operation means display is in parallel with the second operation means display. The fourth operation means display may be a display that may be displayed in parallel with the third operation means display.

  Note that when the operation means is operated in a state where the fourth operation means display is displayed, the second notice effect may be surely started.

Also,
“Even if the operation means is operated in the state where the first operation means display is displayed, the first notice effect is not started [for example, an operation sound is output as shown in FIG. Will not start the announcement]
The first notice effect is a notice effect of a pre-read notice,
When the operation means is operated while the second operation means display is displayed [for example, FIG. 91 (12)], when the first notice effect is started [for example, FIG. 91 ( 13), the display of the character “heat” in the wipe display Wd, the display of the effect image Ed, and the output of the sound effect may be started].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the second operation means display itself may be a prefetch notice display (third notice effect).

  When the operation means is operated while the second operation means display is displayed, the first notice effect may be surely started.

Also,
The second operation means display is a display in which the first operation means display is changed,
There may be a case [for example, a case shown in FIG. 91 (2)] in which the first operation means display changes to the second operation means display during the display of the decorative symbol variation display.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  The first operation means display may be changed to the second operation means display during the display of the decorative symbol variation display.

Also,
“When the operation means is operated while the second operation means display is displayed [for example, FIG. 91 (12)], the second operation means display may change [for example, As shown in FIG. 91 (13), there may be a change to the first operation means display Od1]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Note that when the operation means is operated in a state where the second operation means display is displayed, the second operation means display may be changed.

Also,
“The case where the second operation means display changes” described above is “the case where the second operation means display changes to the first operation means display”
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Note that the second operation means display may always change to the first operation means display.

Also,
“When the display mode of the second operation means display changes” described above, “the second operation means display has once disappeared [for example, FIG. 104 (e) to FIG. Then, when the first operation means display is displayed [for example, in the case of FIG. 104 (l) to FIG. 104 (m)].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  The first operation means display may always be displayed after the second operation means display once disappears.

Also,
“The second operation means display is a display [for example, FIG. 91 (2) to FIG. 91 (11)] that may be displayed across a plurality of variations of the decorative symbol display,
The first operation means display is a display that may continue to be displayed even during display of the stop display of the decorative symbol [for example, the case shown in FIGS. 91 (15) to (17)],
The second operation means display is a display in which there is a case [for example, a case shown in FIG. 91 (4) to FIG.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

The first operation means display may be a display that is always displayed even during the display of the stop display of the decorative symbol,
The second operation means display may be a display that is always displayed even during the display of the stop display of the decorative symbol.

Also,
The first operation means display is a display that may be displayed even when the hold display is not displayed [for example, the first operation means display Od1 shown in FIG. 103 (a)]. A game table that features ]
Also explained.

Also,
“At least one of the plural types of operation means displays is a display imitating the operation means [for example, the first operation means display Od1 and the second operation means display Od2 shown in FIG. 91, FIG. 92, a fourth operation means display Od4 shown in 92, and a third operation means display Od3 shown in FIG.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  In addition, all the displays of the plurality of types of operation means display may include a display imitating the operation means, or only a part of the plurality of types of operation means displays. However, the display may include a display imitating the operation means.

Also,
“The display means displays the hold display [for example, the second hold icon h2 shown in FIG. 98 (k)] and the operation means display mode [for example, the white display mode, the chance button 136 that emits red light. It is a means that can be displayed in a display mode in which a mini item MI in which PUSH characters are added to the imitated display is added,
The operation means display mode is a display mode in which the second operation means display [for example, the second operation means display Od2 displayed on the third operation means display Od3 shown in FIG. 98 (l)] is enlarged or reduced. Is,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the operation unit display mode may be a display mode in which the second operation unit display is enlarged or reduced only during the operation effective period of the operation unit.

  Further, the operation means display mode is not limited to the second operation means display, but other operation means display (for example, the first operation means display, the third operation means display, the fourth operation means display). It may be a display mode in which (display) is enlarged or reduced. Alternatively, the operation unit display mode may be a display mode in which part or all of the operation unit display is enlarged or reduced. The operation means display mode may be different in color and pattern from the operation means display. Further, depending on the case, the operation means display mode may be the same size as the operation means display, or the shape may be different from the operation means display. As long as the display mode is related to the same operation means, it may be different from the display mode of the operation means display.

  In addition, the hold display of the operation means display mode may be displayed at a time different from the operation effective period of the operation means, and the operation operation effective period of the operation means is always displayed during the display. It may be.

  Further, when the operation unit is operated in a state where the hold display is displayed in the operation unit display mode, the hold display displayed in the operation unit display mode may change, It may change. For example, the display mode may change to a display mode (including a default display mode in which the expected level is 0) that represents the degree of expectation of jackpot.

  Furthermore, various limitations described below are recognized.

  The fourth operation means display may be a display displayed closer to the hold display (hold icon) than the first operation means display, or the hold may be displayed more than the second operation means display. It may be a display displayed near the display (hold icon), or may be a display displayed near the hold display (hold icon) rather than the third operation means display.

  The display means is display means capable of displaying the hold display as a variation icon corresponding to the variation display of the decoration symbol after the variation display of the decoration symbol is started, and the fourth operation unit display includes: The display may be displayed closer to the variation icon than the first operation means display, or may be display closer to the variation icon than the second operation means display. However, the display may be displayed closer to the variation icon than the third operation means display.

  The first operation means display may be a display closer to the specific display than the fourth operation means display, and the second operation means display may be the fourth operation means display. May be a display that is displayed closer to the specific display, and the third operation means display may be a display that is displayed closer to the specific display than the fourth operation means display. . As an example of the specific display here, the display of the presentation mode, the display of the stage name, the display of the pre-reading notice (display of the first notice notice effect), the display of the notice of the change (display of the second notice notice effect) ), Display of special effects such as super reach, display of operation means (the above-mentioned operation promotion display, operation invalidation display (for example, display during preparation), etc.), control state display (for example, display during probability change), effect, etc. Display and the like can be enumerated. That is, as the specific display, all of the above-described enumerations may be used. On the other hand, some of those listed above may not be applied.

  The first operation means display and the second operation means display may be displayed at the same display position, or may be displayed at different display positions. The first operation means display and the third operation means display may be displayed at the same display position, or may be displayed at different display positions. The second operation means display and the third operation means display may be displayed at the same display position, or may be displayed at different display positions.

  The hold display may be displayed in an operation means display mode related to the operation means, and the first operation means display is displayed simultaneously over the entire display period or a part of the hold display of the operation means display mode. The second operation means display may be displayed simultaneously with the hold display of the operation means display mode for the entire period or a part of the period. The third operation unit display may be displayed simultaneously with the hold display of the operation unit display mode for the entire period or a part of the period.

  The variation icon may be displayed in an operation unit display mode related to the operation unit, and the fourth operation unit display is displayed simultaneously with the variation icon of the operation unit display mode over a whole period or a part of the period. It may be done.

  The display in the operation means display mode referred to here means that the hold display itself is displayed in a display mode imitating the operation means, or an icon (for example, a display form imitating the operation means in the hold display) , A display as a mini item) may be added and displayed, the hold display itself may be displayed in the operation promotion display, or the operation promotion display (for example, as a mini item) may be displayed on the hold display. Display) may be displayed, the hold display itself may be displayed in the remaining period display, or the remaining period display (for example, display as a mini item) may be displayed in the hold display. It may be added and displayed, or may be a combination of two or all of the display imitating the operation means, the operation promotion display, and the remaining period display.

  The first operation means display, the second operation means display, the third operation means display, the fourth operation means display, and the hold display or the display of the fluctuation icon are displayed as imitations of the operation means. When displayed, the remaining period display may be displayed at intervals from each display (display imitating the operation means) (for example, displayed at intervals below), or each display (the operation means). And the remaining period display may be displayed together.

  While the decoration symbol stop display is being displayed, the first operation means display, the second operation means display, and the third operation means display may be displayed. During the display, there may be a case where a notification that allows setting change or a specific effect is executed. Further, when the decorative design is stopped and the number of reserved balls is 0, operating the operating means may cause some animation display, some sound output, or some light emission. The animation display, sound output, and light emission are performed during the display of the decorative symbol stop display. More specifically, the display may be performed during the display of the so-called demonstration display. It may be performed after the decoration symbol is stopped and displayed until the demonstration display is started.

  The operation means may be capable of changing the aspect. As an example of the change in the mode, a change in the color, a change in the light emission mode, a change in the movement of the operation surface (for example, a change in the protrusion amount), a rotation of a frame surrounding the operation surface, and the like can be listed. That is, the above-described changes in the mode of the operation means may be all of those listed above. On the other hand, some of those listed above may not be applied. The operation means may be a button type or a lever type. If it is a button type, the operation surface may be movable in the vertical direction or the front-back direction. Moreover, as long as it is a lever type, it may be able to be tilted in one or a plurality of directions.

  When the first operation means display changes to the fourth operation means display, the first operation means display displayed on the second display means is displayed on the first display means. The movement may be started and displayed as the fourth operation means display on the first display means. The movement here may be started during the display of the decorative symbol variation display.

  When the first operation means display changes to the second operation means display, the first operation means display displayed on the second display means is displayed on the first display means. May be displayed as the second operation means display on the first display means, or the first operation means display displayed on the first display means may be The movement toward the second display unit may be started and displayed as the second operation unit display on the second display unit.

  Further, when the first operation means display changes to the third operation means display, the first operation means display displayed on the second display means is changed to the first display. The movement toward the means may be started and displayed as the third operation means display on the first display means, or the first operation means display displayed on the first display means may be displayed. The movement toward the second display means may be started and displayed as the third operation means display on the second display means.

  When the notice target (for example, a certain symbol variation display) is the same, or when the corresponding notice effect mode is the same, the first operation means display and the second operation means display are simultaneously performed. The first operation means display and the third operation means display are not displayed at the same time, and the second operation means display and the third operation means display are also displayed at the same time. You may not make it. On the other hand, when the notice target (for example, a certain symbol variation display) is different, or when the corresponding notice effect mode is different, the first operation means display and the second operation means display are In some cases, it may be displayed simultaneously over the entire period or a part of the period, or the first operation means display and the third operation means display may be displayed over the entire period or a part of the period, The second operation means display and the third operation means display may be displayed simultaneously over the entire period or a part of the period.

  In addition, the first operation means display and the fourth operation means display may be displayed simultaneously over the whole period or a part of the period, and the second operation means display and the fourth operation means display are also included. In some cases, the third operation unit display and the fourth operation unit display may be displayed simultaneously over the entire period or a part of the period.

  In the following, including what has been described so far.

(Appendix 3-1)
Display means;
Operation means provided at a position where the player can operate;
A game machine equipped with
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of operation means display,
The display means is means capable of displaying a decorative design,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a hold display according to the number of held balls,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of notice effects,
One display of the plurality of types of operation means display is a first operation unit display,
One display of the plurality of types of operation means display is a second operation unit display,
The second operation unit display is a display different from the first operation unit display,
The first operation unit display and the second operation unit display are different from the hold display,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a display for changing the first operation means display to the second operation means display (hereinafter referred to as “first change display”),
The first operation means display is a display that may be displayed while the decoration symbol variation is stopped (hereinafter referred to as “first state”),
The first operation means display is a display that may be displayed while the decorative design is changing (hereinafter referred to as “second state”),
The second operation means display is a display that may be displayed in the first state,
The second operation means display is a display that may be displayed in the second state,
The first change display is a display that may be displayed in the second state,
The first operation means display is a display indicating that the operation of the operation means is invalid,
The second operation means display is a display indicating that the operation of the operation means is effective.
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine described in appendix 3-1, there is a case where it is possible to make it seem that the fluctuation has not stopped yet by performing the effect by displaying the display means even while the fluctuation is stopped.

(Appendix 3-2)
A gaming machine according to appendix 3-1,
The first operation means display is a display in which the display may not be ended even if it is shifted from one of the first state and the second state to the other,
The second operation means display is a display in which the display may not be ended even when shifting from one of the first state and the second state to the other.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 3-3)
A gaming machine according to appendix 3-1 or 3-2,
The first operation means display is a display that may be displayed even in a state where the hold display is not performed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 3-4)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 3-1 to 3-3,
An effect can be displayed by operating the operation means of the player.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 3-5)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 3-1 to 3-4,
One notice effect of the plurality of kinds of notice effects is a first notice effect,
The display means is means capable of starting display of the first notice effect by an operation of the operation means of a player.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 3-6)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 3-1 to 3-5,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a prefetch notice effect,
One display of the plurality of types of operation means display is a third operation means display,
The third operation means display is a display different from the hold display,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a display for changing the first operation means display to the third operation means display (hereinafter referred to as “second change display”),
The third operation means display is a display that may be displayed as the prefetch notice,
The third operating means display is a display that may not end the display even when the state is shifted from one of the first state and the second state.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 3-7)
A gaming machine according to appendix 3-6,
The third operation means display is a display indicating that the operation of the operation means is invalid,
The third operation means display is a display different from the first operation means display.
A game stand characterized by that.

  The third operation means display is a display in which the operation means is invalid as in the case of the first operation means display. However, the third operation means display may have the same mode as the second operation means display. Further, the third operation means display may be different from the second operation means display.

(Appendix 3-8)
The game stand according to appendix 3-6 or 3-7,
The first operation means display is a display that may not be displayed in parallel with the second operation means display,
The first operation means display is a display that may not be displayed in parallel with the third operation means display,
The second operation means display is a display that may not be displayed in parallel with the third operation means display.
A game stand characterized by that.

  In one display means, two operation means displays (first, second and third) may not be displayed at the same time. Further, the operation means display related to the operation of another operation means may be displayed at the same time.

  Further, if the operation means is operated while the second operation means display is displayed, the second operation means display may return to the first operation means display or until just before the fluctuation stop. It may disappear completely.

(Appendix 3-9)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 3-6 to 3-8,
One operation means display of the plurality of types of operation means display is a fourth operation means display,
The fourth operation means display is a display indicating that the operation of the operation means is valid,
If the player operates the operation means while the fourth operation means display is displayed, the first notice display may be displayed.
The fourth operation means display is a display that can be displayed in the second state,
The fourth operation means display is a display that may be displayed in parallel with the first operation means display,
The fourth operation means display is a display that may be displayed in parallel with the second operation means display,
The fourth operation means display is a display that may be displayed in parallel with the third operation means display.
A game stand characterized by that.

  Note that the operation means display may be displayed at the same time as normal button effects other than the operation means display (including judgment effects, pseudo-linking, button hold, conversation notice button display).

  Further, the effect performed by the operation during display of the fourth operation means may be the first notice effect.

(Appendix 3-10)
A game machine according to appendix 3-9,
In the case where the fourth operation means display and the second operation means display are displayed in parallel, when the player operates the operation means once, only the first notice effect is provided. Is displayed,
A game stand characterized by that.

  The first notice effect may be a display related to an operation performed during the display of the fourth operation means.

  Further, the effect (notice) displayed by operating the operation means when the second operation means display is displayed may be the second notice effect.

(Appendix 3-11)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 3-1 to 3-10,
The operation means display may be displayed on the sub liquid crystal display means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix A3-1)
Display means;
Operation means provided at a position where the player can operate;
A game machine equipped with
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of operation means display,
The display means is means capable of displaying a decorative design,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a hold display according to the number of held balls,
One of the plurality of types of operation means display is a first operation means display,
One display of the plurality of types of operation means display is a second operation means display,
The second operation means display is a display different from the first operation means display,
The first operation means display is a display different from the hold display,
The second operation means display is a display different from the hold display,
The first operation means display is a display that may be displayed across a plurality of continuous variation display of the decorative symbol,
The second operation means display is a display in which the first operation means display has changed,
During the display of the decorative symbol variation display, the first operation means display may change to the second operation means display,
The first operation means display may be displayed in a certain period,
The certain period is a period in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, and the number of reserved balls is zero.
When the operation means is operated while the first operation means display is displayed during the certain period, a response display may be performed in response to the operation means being operated. Has been
A notice effect other than reach may be started when the operation means is operated in a state where the second operation means display is being displayed while the decorative symbol variation display is being displayed. A game stand.

(Appendix A3-2)
A game machine as set forth in Appendix A3-1,
When the operation means is operated in a state where the first operation means display is displayed, the first operation means display is configured not to change,
When the operation means is operated in a state where the second operation means display is displayed, the second operation means display may be changed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix A3-3)
A game machine as set forth in Appendix A3-2,
“When the second operation means display changes” as described in appendix A3-2 is “when the second operation means display changes to the first operation means display”.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix A3-4)
A game machine as set forth in Appendix A3-2,
“When the second operation means display changes” described in Appendix A3-2 is “when the first operation means display is displayed after the second operation means display once disappears” Is,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix A3-5)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices A3-1 to A3-4,
The second operation means display is a display that may be displayed across a plurality of continuous display variations of the decorative symbol.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix A3-6)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices A3-1 to A3-5,
The response display is an effect display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix A3-7)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices A3-1 to A3-6,
One display of the plurality of types of operation means display is a third operation means display,
The third operation means display is a display different from the first operation means display,
The third operation means display is a display different from the hold display,
The third operation means display is a display that does not change even when the operation means is operated.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix A3-8)
A gaming machine according to appendix A3-7,
When the operation means is operated in a state where the third operation means display is displayed, a response action may be performed in response to the operation means being operated.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix A3-9)
A gaming table according to appendix A3-7 or A3-8,
The third operation means display is a display in which the first operation means display has changed,
The first operation means display may be changed to the third operation means display during the display of the decorative symbol variation display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix A3-10)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices A3-7 to A3-9,
The third operation means display is a display that may be displayed across a plurality of variations of the decorative symbol display,
The third operation means display is a display that may continue to be displayed even during the display of the stop display of the decorative symbol.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix A3-11)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices A3-7 to A3-10,
The second operation means display is a display of a display form that is different from the display form of the first operation means display in at least one of color or size,
The third operation means display is a display in a display form in which at least one of color or size is different from the display form of the first operation means display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix A3-12)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices A3-1 to A3-11,
One display of the plurality of types of operation means display is a fourth operation means display,
The fourth operation means display is a display different from the hold display,
The fourth operation means display is a display that may be displayed during the display of the variation display of the decorative design,
The fourth operation means display is a display that is not displayed during the display of the stop display of the decorative design,
The fourth operation means display is a display that is not displayed across a plurality of variations of the decorative symbol display,
When the operation means is operated in a state where the fourth operation means display is being displayed, a normal notice effect may be started.
The effect of the normal notice is an effect related to a big hit with a variation display of the decorative symbol displayed when it is started.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix A3-13)
A gaming machine according to appendix A3-12,
The fourth operation means display is a display that may be displayed simultaneously with the second operation means display,
When the operation means is operated while the fourth operation means display and the second operation means display are displayed at the same time, the second operation means display does not change.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix A3-14)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices A3-1 to A3-13,
The second operation means display is a display including a display indicating an operation effective period of the operation means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix A3-15)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices A3-1 to A3-14,
At least one display of the plurality of types of operation means displays is a display including a display imitating the operation means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix A3-16)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices A3-1 to A-15,
The display means is means capable of displaying the hold display in a mode including operation means display,
The operation means display is an enlarged or reduced display of the second operation means display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix A3-17)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices A3-1 to A3-16,
The certain period is a period from when the decorative design is stopped and displayed until the demonstration display is started.
A game stand characterized by that.

  Note that the operation means display may be displayed only during normal games.

  Further, the operation means display may not be displayed during a specific effect (for example, during super reach).

  Further, the second operation means display may be a color change with respect to the first operation means display, or may be an enlarged display of the first operation means display.

  In addition, the third operation means display may be a color change with respect to the first operation means display, or may be an enlarged display of the first operation means display.

  It should be noted that the above description of the decorative pattern change display may be a change display of the design (more specifically, a special figure), and the display of the decorative design stop display may be a symbol (more Specifically, it may be a special display) stop display.

  In addition, in the above description, “may be” may be replaced with “always to be”, “always to be”, “always become”, or the like. It may be replaced with “always XX”.

  In addition, even if the configuration requirements are included only in the description of the embodiment, examples, modifications, various examples, supplementary notes, etc. described above, the configuration requirements are not limited to other embodiments, examples, You may apply to a modification, various examples, an appendix, etc.

100 Pachinko machine 120 Speaker 136 Chance button 208L First decorative symbol display device 208M Second decorative symbol display device 208N Third decorative symbol display device 224Fa Yatsushiro character 224Fb General character character 224E Family crest character 226 General winning opening 228 230 Special Figure 1 Start Port 232 Special Figure 2 Start Port 232a Blade Member 234 Variable Prize Port 234a Door Member 300 Main Control Unit 400 First Sub Control Unit 500 Second Sub Control Unit UI Reservation Frame UIb Base Icon e Variable Icon Display Area e1 Fluctuation icon f Special figure 1 hold icon display area f1-f4 1st hold icon-4th hold icon

Claims (8)

A gaming machine equipped with a display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of hold icons,
It is configured to notify the number of holds by the number of hold icons displayed
The hold icon is an icon that can be displayed in multiple ways,
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of effects,
One of the plurality of effects is a first effect,
One of the plurality of effects is a second effect,
The first effect is an effect that may change the mode of the hold icon,
The second effect is an effect that may change the mode of the hold icon,
Wherein one of the effect of the first effect and the second effect is Ri effect der that may other one of the display start during the display of presentation,
Depending on the one effect that is started during the display of the other effect, the other effect that changes the status of the hold icon may change even if the mode of the hold icon does not change,
The other effect is an effect that makes it easier to change the mode of the hold icon to a mode with a high expectation of jackpot after the change than before the change.
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to claim 1,
The one effect is an effect using a character,
The one effect is an effect that starts when the display of the character starts.
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to claim 1,
The one effect is an effect using a character,
The one effect is an effect that starts when the character starts to move.
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to claim 2 or 3,
The one effect is an effect that ends when the display of the character ends.
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to claim 1,
The one effect is an effect in which the first effect image is displayed,
The one effect is an effect that starts when display of the first effect image is started,
The one effect is an effect that ends when the display of the first effect image ends.
A game stand characterized by that. A gaming table according to any one of claims 1 to 5,
The other effect is an effect in which an icon is displayed,
The other effect is an effect that starts when the icon starts to be displayed.
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to claim 6,
The other effect is an effect that ends when the display of the icon ends.
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claims 1 thru | or 6,
The other effect is an effect in which a second effect image is displayed,
The other effect is an effect that ends when the display of the second effect image ends.
A game stand characterized by that.